Handleiding Icom IC7850 (pagina 263 van 282) (Engels)

670150

263

Verklein

Vergroot

Pagina terug

1/282

Pagina verder

THE TRANSCEIVERS

i7850

i7851

Instruction Manual

A7205H-1EX-2

Printed in Japan

PREFACE

Thank you for choosing the IC-7850/IC-7851. The IC-7850/IC-7851 has many

built-in high technology circuitry and unique functions, such as the Dualwatch

on the Main and Sub bands, a high speed spectrum scope scan, a high-reso-

lution waterfall screen, and many other outstanding features.

The internal frequency signals in a radio utilizing a PLL are not always suf-

ficiently pure. This results in a considerable number of unwanted spurious

components, called phase noise, in its frequency spectrum. We focused inten-

sively in drastically reducing the phase noise of LO (Local Oscillator) because

the phase noise degrades the interference rejection and noise characteristics

of the receiver. As a result, we succeeded in developing an LO with high pu-

rity outputs so that results in an RMDR (Reciprocal Mixing Dynamic Range)

of 110 dB with newly developed 1.2 kHz Optimum Roofing Filter. Currently no

competitors have been able to achieve this extremely high result performance.

We believe we would not have been able to exceed the standard specifica-

tions without our full focus on LO purity.

In addition, Icom that has chosen to base the IC-7850/IC-7851 on an up-

conversion, double super-heterodyne receiver design, which has many advan-

tages over traditional receiver designs.

We are proud to have developed the IC-7850/IC-7851 for your amateur radio

activities, and hope it brings you years of enjoyable operation.

Please read this instruction manual thoroughly before using the IC-7850/IC-

7851.

DISPOSAL

The crossed-out wheeled-bin symbol on your product, literature, or packaging reminds you that in

the European Union, all electrical and electronic products, batteries, and accumulators

(rechargeable batteries) must be taken to designated collection locations at the end of their work-

ing life. Do not dispose of these products as unsorted municipal waste.

Dispose of them according to the laws in your area.

ABOUT CE AND DOC

Hereby, Icom Inc. declares that the versions of IC-7851 which have the “CE” symbol on the product,

comply with the essential requirements of the Radio Equipment Directive, 2014/53/EU, and the re-

striction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment Directive,

2011/65/EU. The full text of the EU declaration of conformity is available at the following internet ad-

dress:

http://www.icom.co.jp/world/support

IMPORTANT

READ THIS INSTRUCTION MANUAL CAREFULLY before at-

tempting to operate the transceiver.

SAVE THIS INSTRUCTION MANUAL. This manual contains important

safety and operating instructions for the transceiver.

EXPLICIT DEFINITIONS

WORD DEFINITION

R DANGER!

Personal death, serious injury or an explosion may occur.

R WARNING!

Personal injury, fire hazard or electric shock may occur.

CAUTION

Equipment damage may occur.

NOTE

Recommended for optimum use. No risk of personal injury,

fire or electric shock.

TRADEMARKS

com, Icom Inc. and Icom logo are registered trademarks of Icom Incorporated

(Japan) in Japan, the United States, United Kingdom, Germany, France, Spain,

Russia, Australia, New Zealand, and/or other countries

This product includes “zlib” open source software, and is licensed according to the open source software li-

cense.

This product includes “libpng” open source software, and is licensed according to the open source software li-

cense.

Refer to the Text ﬁles in the License folder of included CD for information on the open source software being used

by this product.

iii

PRECAUTIONS

R DANGER HIGH RF VOLTAGE! NEVER

attach an antenna or internal antenna connector

during transmission. This may result in an electrical

shock or burn.

R WARNING! NEVER operate the transceiver

with a headset or other audio accessories at high

volume levels. The continuous high volume operation

may cause a ringing in your ears. If you experience

the ringing, reduce the volume level or discontinue

use.

R WARNING! NEVER operate or touch the

transceiver with wet hands. This may result in an elec-

tric shock or damage to the transceiver.

R WARNING! NEVER let metal, wire or other ob-

jects protrude into the transceiver or into connectors

on the rear panel.

This may result in an electric shock.

R WARNING! Immediately turn the transceiver

power OFF and remove the power cable if it emits an

abnormal odor, sound or smoke. Contact your Icom

dealer or distributor for advice.

CAUTION: NEVER put the transceiver in any un-

stable place (such as on a slanted surface or vibrated

place). This may cause injury and/or damage to the

transceiver.

CAUTION: NEVER put the transceiver’s rear

panel side down after lifting up the transceiver by

holding rack mounting handle. This may scratch the

surface of the place or damage the connectors on the

transceiver’s rear panel.

CAUTION: NEVER change the internal settings

of the transceiver. This may reduce transceiver per-

formance and/or damage to the transceiver.

In particular, incorrect settings for transmitter circuits,

such as output power, idling current, etc., might dam-

age the expensive final devices.

The transceiver warranty does not cover any prob-

lems caused by unauthorized internal adjustment.

CAUTION: NEVER block any cooling vents on the

top, rear or bottom of the transceiver.

CAUTION: NEVER expose the transceiver to rain,

snow or any liquids.

CAUTION: NEVER install the transceiver in a

place without adequate ventilation. Heat dissipation

may be reduced, and the transceiver may be dam-

aged.

CAUTION: The transceiver weighs approximately

23.5 kg (52 lb). Always have two people available to

carry, lift or turn over the transceiver.

CAUTION: The line-voltage receptacle must be

near the transceiver and must be easily accessible.

DO NOT use extension cords.

DO NOT

use harsh solvents such as benzine or al-

cohol when cleaning, as they can damage the trans-

ceiver’s surfaces.

DO NOT push the PTT switch when you don’t actu-

ally desire to transmit.

DO NOT use or store the transceiver in areas with

temperatures below ±0°C (+32°F) or above +50°C

(+122°F).

DO NOT place the transceiver in excessively dusty

environments or in direct sunlight.

DO NOT place the transceiver against walls or

putting anything on top of the transceiver. This may

overheat the transceiver.

Always place unit in a secure place to avoid inadvert-

ent use by children.

BE CAREFUL! If you use a linear amplifier, set the

transceiver’s RF output power to less than the linear

amplifier’s maximum input level, otherwise, the linear

amplifier will be damaged.

BE CAREFUL!

NEVER touch the transceiver top

cover when transmitting continuously for long periods

of time. The top cover may be hot.

Use Icom microphones only (supplied or optional).

Other manufacturers’ microphones have different pin

assignments, and connection to the transceiver may

damage the transceiver or microphone.

The LCD display may have cosmetic imperfections

that appear as small dark or light spots. This is not a

malfunction or defect, but a normal characteristic of

LCD displays.

During maritime mobile operation, keep the trans-

ceiver and microphone as far away as possible from

the magnetic navigation compass to prevent errone-

ous indications.

Turn [I/O] switch (on the rear panel) OFF and/or dis-

connect the AC power cable from the AC outlet when

you will not use the transceiver for long period of time.

This equipment has been tested and found to comply

with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to

part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to

provide reasonable protection against harmful interfer-

ence in a residential installation. This equipment gen-

erates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy

and, if not installed and used in accordance with the

instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio

communications. However, there is no guarantee that

interference will not occur in a particular installation.

If this equipment does cause harmful interference to

radio or television reception, which can be determined

by turning the equipment off and on, the user is en-

couraged to try to correct the interference by one or

more of the following measures:

• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

• Increase the separation between the equipment

and receiver.

• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit dif-

ferent from that to which the receiver is connected.

• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV

technician for help.

CAUTION: Changes or modiﬁcations to this device,

not expressly approved by Icom Inc., could void your

authority to operate this device under FCC regula-

tions.

FCC INFORMATION

ABOUT THE SUPPLIED CD

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)

this device may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause undesired op-

eration.

WARNING: MODIFICATION OF THIS DEVICE TO

RECEIVE CELLULAR RADIOTELEPHONE SERVICE

SIGNALS IS PROHIBITED UNDER FCC RULES AND

FEDERAL LAW.

The following instructions and installers are included

on the CD.

• Instruction manual

Instructions for the full operations, the same as this

manual

• Schematic diagram

Includes the schematic and block diagrams

• Adobe

Reader

Installer

Installer for Adobe

Reader

A PC with the following Operating System is required.

• Microsoft

Windows

10,

Microsoft

Windows

8.1,

Microsoft

Windows

Starting the CD

q Insert the CD into the CD drive.

• Double click “Menu.exe” on the CD.

• Depending on the PC setting, the Menu screen shown

below is automatically displayed.

w Click the desired button to open the ﬁle.

• To close the Menu screen, click [Quit].

To read the Instruction manual or Schematic diagram,

Adobe

Reader

is required. If you have not installed it,

please install the Adobe

Reader

on the CD or down-

loaded it from Adobe Systems Incorporated’s web

site.

Quits the Menu screen

Installs the Adobe

Reader

Opens the

Instruction manual

(this manual)

Opens the

Schematic diagram

FUNCTIONS AND FEATURES of Adobe

Reader

The following functions and features can be used with Adobe

Reader

• Keyword search

Click “Find (Ctrl+F)” or “Advanced

Search (Shift+Ctrl+F)” in the Edit

menu to open the search screen.

This is convenient when search-

ing for a particular word or phrase

in this manual.

* The Menu screen may differ, de-

pending on the Adobe

Reader

version.

• Find screen

• Advanced search screen

Click to open the Find or Search

screen or Advanced search screen.

• Printing out the desired pages.

Click “Print...(Ctrl+P)” in File menu, and then select

the paper size and page numbers you want to print.

* The printing setup may differ, depending on the

printer. Refer to your printer’s instruction manual

for details.

* Select “A4” size to print out the page in the equal-

ized size.

• Read Out Loud feature.

The Read Out Loud feature reads aloud the text in

this Instruction Manual.

Refer to the Adobe

Reader

Help for the details.

( This feature may not be usable, depending on your

PC environment including the operating system.)

* The screen may differ, depending on the Adobe

Reader

version.

DESCRIPTION INFORMATION

This instruction manual is described based on the following manner.

“ ” (Quotation marks): Used to indicate icons, setting items, and screen titles displayed on the screen.

[ ] (brackets): Used to indicate keys, dials, and knobs.

Routes to the Set mode and setting screen descriptions

Routes to the Set mode, setting screen and the setting items are described in the following manner.

About the transceiver’s illustrations

To indicate the keys and knobs in the operating steps, the transceiver is illustrated as illustrated below.

About the LCD monitor display

Due to the printing matter, the Display type differs from the IC-7850 default settings.



Band edge warning beep

This function allows you to hear a beep tone when

you tune in or out of an amateur band’s frequency

range. A regular beep sounds when you tune into a

range, and a lower tone error beep will sound when

you tune out of a range.

 The Multi-function screens are OFF:

q Select the “Beep (Band Edge)” item in the Others

set screen.

SET [F-7]  OTHERS [F-5]  Beep (Band Edge)

w Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the option.

• Band Edge Beep options:

OFF: Band edge beep is OFF.

ON (Default): When you tune into or out of the de-

fault amateur band’s frequency range,

a beep sounds. (default)

SET [F-7]



OTHERS [F-5]



Beep (Band Edge)

The Set mode menu screen.

The Multi-function screens are OFF.

The Others set screen.

(



) Multi-function keys Band key

(F) Function keys Mode keys

Also, the keys and knobs are described in the following

manner.

() Multi-function keys

Example:

Push the Multi-function [METER]() key.

(F) Function key

Example: Push [SCOPE](F).

Mode key

Example: P

ush the Mode key [SSB].

vii

q AC power cable

†

.................................................. 1

w Rack mounting handles ................................ 1 pair

e Screws for rack mounting handles ................... 1 set

r SD card ................................................................. 1

t Feet .............................................................. 1 pair

y Spare fuse (2 A) .................................................. 1

u RCA plugs ........................................................... 2

i DC plug ............................................................... 1

o 2-conductor

⁄8″ plugs .......................................... 3

!0 3-conductor

⁄8″ plugs .......................................... 2

!1 3-conductor

⁄4″ plugs .......................................... 3

!2 ACC plugs (7-pin) ................................................ 2

!3 ACC plugs (8-pin) ................................................ 2

!4 Hexagonal wrench

‡

.............................................. 1

!5 Main dial

‡

............................................................. 1

!6 CD ....................................................................... 1

†

May differ from that shown depending on the version.

‡

See page 3-3 for the Main dial attachment details.

SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES

!0 !1 !2 !3

!4 !6!5

yu io

er t

viii

TABLE OF CONTENTS

PANEL DESCRIPTION Section 1

 Front panel ……………………………………………………………… 1-2

 Rear panel ……………………………………………………………… 1-12

 Display …………………………………………………………………… 1-14

 Screen menu arrangement …………………………………………… 1-16

SET MODE ITEMS Section 2

 About the Setting screen conﬁguration ……………………………… 2-2

 SCOPE SET …………………………………………………………… 2-3

 VOICE SET ……………………………………………………………… 2-4

 KEYER 001 ……………………………………………………………… 2-4

 KEYER CW-KEY ……………………………………………………… 2-5

 RTTY LOG SET ………………………………………………………… 2-5

 RTTY DECODE SET …………………………………………………… 2-5

 PSK LOG SET ………………………………………………………… 2-6

 PSK DECODE SET …………………………………………………… 2-6

 SCAN SET ……………………………………………………………… 2-6

 AUDIO SCOPE SET …………………………………………………… 2-6

 LEVEL SET ……………………………………………………………… 2-7

 ACC SET ………………………………………………………………… 2-8

 DISPLAY SET …………………………………………………………… 2-10

 TIME SET ……………………………………………………………… 2-11

 OTHERS SET ……………………………………………………………2-11

 LOAD SET ……………………………………………………………… 2-16

 SAVE SET ……………………………………………………………… 2-16

 ANT TYPE ……………………………………………………………… 2-16

 VOX ……………………………………………………………………… 2-17

 NB ………………………………………………………………………… 2-17

 FILTER SHAPE SET ……………………………………………………2-17

INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS Section 3

 Unpacking ……………………………………………………………… 3-2

 Selecting a location …………………………………………………… 3-2

 Grounding ……………………………………………………………… 3-2

 Attaching the rack mounting handle ………………………………… 3-2

 Connecting antenna …………………………………………………… 3-3

 Required connections ………………………………………………… 3-4

D Front panel (Electronic keyer and microphone) ………………… 3-4

D Rear panel (Basic connection) …………………………………… 3-4

 Advanced connections ………………………………………………… 3-5

D Front panel (Microphone, headphones and SD card) …………… 3-5

D Rear panel (Optional products and external equipment) ……… 3-5

D Rear panel (Optional products and external equipment) ……… 3-6

D Rear panel (External keypad and meter) ………………………… 3-6

 Linear ampliﬁer connections ………………………………………… 3-7

D Connecting the IC-PW1/EURO …………………………………… 3-7

D Connecting a non-Icom linear amplifier …………………………… 3-7

 Transverter jack information …………………………………………… 3-8

 FSK and AFSK (SSTV) connections ………………………………… 3-8

TABLE OF CONTENTS

 Microphones (optional products) ……………………………………… 3-9

D SM-50 ………………………………………………………………… 3-9

D SM-30 ………………………………………………………………… 3-9

D HM-36 ………………………………………………………………… 3-10

 Connecting the RC-28 (Optional product) …………………………… 3-10

BASIC OPERATION Section 4

 When ﬁrst applying power …………………………………………… 4-2

 Power ON ……………………………………………………………… 4-3

D Resetting the CPU (initial setup) …………………………………… 4-3

 Adjusting the Volume level …………………………………………… 4-4

 Adjusting the Squelch level …………………………………………… 4-4

 Adjusting the RF gain ………………………………………………… 4-4

 Selecting Main and Sub bands ……………………………………… 4-5

 Selecting the VFO or memory mode ………………………………… 4-5

 Selecting an operating band…………………………………………… 4-6

D Using the band stacking registers ………………………………… 4-6

 Setting the frequency ………………………………………………… 4-7

D Tuning with [DIAL] …………………………………………………… 4-7

D About the Quick tuning step ………………………………………… 4-7

D Selecting the Fine tuning function ………………………………… 4-8

D About the Auto tuning step function ……………………………… 4-8

D About the 1⁄4 tuning step function ………………………………… 4-9

D Entering the frequency with the keypad …………………………… 4-9

 Operating mode selection ……………………………………………… 4-10

 Selecting the Meter readout …………………………………………… 4-11

D Digital multi-function meter ………………………………………… 4-11

D Selecting the meter type …………………………………………… 4-12

 Dial lock function ……………………………………………………… 4-12

 Basic transmit operation ……………………………………………… 4-13

D Transmitting …………………………………………………………4-13

D Adjusting the microphone gain …………………………………… 4-13

D Drive gain adjustment ………………………………………………4-14

D Transmit power limit ………………………………………………… 4-14

 Band edge warning beep ……………………………………………… 4-15

D Entering the user band edge ……………………………………… 4-16

 About the 5 MHz frequency band operation (USA version only) … 4-18

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT Section 5

 Convenient functions for Receive …………………………………… 5-2

 Convenient functions for Transmit …………………………………… 5-3

 Operating SSB ………………………………………………………… 5-4

 Operating CW …………………………………………………………… 5-5

D About the CW pitch control ………………………………………… 5-6

D APF (Audio Peak Filter) operation ………………………………… 5-6

D Adjusting the Key speed …………………………………………… 5-7

D About the CW reverse mode ……………………………………… 5-7

D CW side tone function ……………………………………………… 5-7

D About 137 kHz band operation (Europe version only) ………… 5-8

TABLE OF CONTENTS

 Electronic keyer functions ……………………………………………… 5-9

D Memory keyer screen ……………………………………………… 5-10

D Editing a Keyer memory ……………………………………………5-11

D Contest number set mode ………………………………………… 5-12

D Keyer set mode ………………………………………………………5-13

 Operating RTTY (FSK) …………………………………………………5-14

D About the RTTY reverse mode ……………………………………5-15

D Twin peak ﬁlter ………………………………………………………5-15

D Functions for the RTTY decoder display …………………………5-16

D Setting the decoder threshold level ………………………………… 5-17

D RTTY memory transmission ……………………………………… 5-17

D Automatic transmission/reception setting …………………………5-18

D Editing the RTTY memory ………………………………………… 5-19

D Turning ON the RTTY log …………………………………………… 5-20

D Conﬁrm the RTTY log contents ……………………………………5-21

D RTTY decode set mode ……………………………………………5-22

 Operating PSK ………………………………………………………… 5-24

D Vector indicator and Waterfall display ……………………………… 5-25

D Functions for the PSK decoder display …………………………… 5-26

D About the BPSK and QPSK modes ……………………………… 5-27

D About the BPSK31 and BPSK63 modes ………………………… 5-27

D Setting the decoder threshold level ………………………………… 5-28

D About the PSK reverse mode ……………………………………… 5-28

D AFC/NET function …………………………………………………… 5-28

D PSK memory transmission ………………………………………… 5-29

D Automatic transmission/reception setting …………………………5-30

D Editing the PSK memory …………………………………………… 5-31

D Turning ON the PSK log …………………………………………… 5-32

D Conﬁrm the PSK log contents ……………………………………… 5-33

D PSK decode set mode ……………………………………………… 5-34

 Operating AM or FM …………………………………………………… 5-36

 Repeater operation …………………………………………………… 5-37

D Checking the repeater input signal …………………………………5-37

D Repeater tone frequency setting …………………………………… 5-38

 Tone squelch operation …………………………………………………5-39

 Data mode (AFSK) operation ………………………………………… 5-40

SCOPE OPERATION Section 6

 Spectrum scope screen ……………………………………………… 6-2

D Operating the Spectrum scope …………………………………… 6-3

D Center mode ………………………………………………………… 6-4

D Fixed mode …………………………………………………………… 6-5

D Dual scope screen …………………………………………………… 6-6

D Mini scope screen …………………………………………………… 6-6

D Scope attenuator …………………………………………………… 6-7

D Adjusting the Reference level ……………………………………… 6-8

D Sweep speed ………………………………………………………… 6-9

D Scope set screen …………………………………………………… 6-10

D USB mouse operation ……………………………………………… 6-14

 Audio scope screen ……………………………………………………6-15

D Audio scope set mode ………………………………………………6-16

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Functions for Receive Section 7

 Preampliﬁer ……………………………………………………………… 7-2

 Attenuator ……………………………………………………………… 7-2

 RIT function ……………………………………………………………… 7-3

ï RIT monitor function ………………………………………………… 7-3

 AGC function control …………………………………………………… 7-4

ï Selecting the preset value ………………………………………… 7-4

ï Adjusting the AGC time constant ………………………………… 7-4

ï Setting the AGC time constant preset value ……………………… 7-4

 Twin PBT operation …………………………………………………… 7-5

 IF ﬁlter selection ………………………………………………………… 7-6

ï IF filter selection ……………………………………………………… 7-6

ï DSP filter shape ……………………………………………………… 7-7

ï Roofing filter selection ……………………………………………… 7-7

ï 1.2 kHz Filter calibration …………………………………………… 7-8

ï Filter shape set mode ……………………………………………… 7-9

 Dualwatch operation ……………………………………………………7-10

 Noise blanker ……………………………………………………………7-11

ï NB Set mode ………………………………………………………… 7-11

 Noise reduction ………………………………………………………… 7-12

 Digital selector ………………………………………………………… 7-12

 Notch function …………………………………………………………… 7-13

ï Auto notch function ………………………………………………… 7-13

ï Manual notch function ……………………………………………… 7-13

 Auto tuning function ……………………………………………………7-14

 Main/Sub band Tracking function ……………………………………… 7-14

ï Turning ON the Tracking function ………………………………… 7-14

FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT Section 8

 About the VOX function ………………………………………………… 8-2

D Turning ON the VOX function ……………………………………… 8-2

D Adjusting the VOX function ………………………………………… 8-2

D VOX set mode ……………………………………………………… 8-3

 About the Break-in function …………………………………………… 8-4

D Semi break-in operation …………………………………………… 8-4

D Full break-in operation ……………………………………………… 8-4

 About the ∂TX function ………………………………………………… 8-5

D ∂TX monitor function ……………………………………………… 8-5

 About the Monitor function …………………………………………… 8-5

 Setting the Speech compressor (SSB only) ………………………… 8-6

 Setting the Transmit ﬁlter width (SSB only) ………………………… 8-6

 Operating the Split frequency ………………………………………… 8-7

 About the Quick split function ………………………………………… 8-8

D Split lock function …………………………………………………… 8-8

VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS Section 9

 Recording function ……………………………………………………… 9-2

 Recording a QSO ……………………………………………………… 9-3

D Quick recording ……………………………………………………… 9-3

D Basic recording ……………………………………………………… 9-3

xii

TABLE OF CONTENTS

 Playing back the recorded audio (QSO) ……………………………… 9-4

 Operating while playing back ………………………………………… 9-5

 Deleting a recorded audio ﬁle ………………………………………… 9-6

 Deleting a recorded audio folder ……………………………………… 9-6

 Instant replay function ………………………………………………… 9-7

 Recording the communication audio ………………………………… 9-8

 Playing back the recorded audio ……………………………………… 9-8

 Recording or playing back a TX message …………………………… 9-9

D Recording …………………………………………………………… 9-9

D Playing back ………………………………………………………… 9-9

D Programming a TX message name ………………………………9-10

 Transmitting a recorded message ……………………………………9-11

D Single TX ……………………………………………………………… 9-11

D Repeat TX …………………………………………………………… 9-11

D Setting the transmit level …………………………………………… 9-12

 Voice Set mode …………………………………………………………9-13

 Saving a voice memory onto an SD card or USB ﬂash drive ………9-14

USING AN SD CARD OR USB MEMORY Section 10

 About the SD card ……………………………………………………… 10-2

D Inserting the SD card ……………………………………………… 10-2

D Removing the SD card ……………………………………………… 10-2

 SD/USB-Memory menu screen ……………………………………… 10-3

D Save set screen ……………………………………………………… 10-4

D Load set screen ……………………………………………………… 10-4

 Saving the setting data onto an SD card or USB ﬂash drive ………10-5

 Loading the saved data ﬁles onto an SD card or USB ﬂash drive …10-6

 Saving with a different ﬁle name ……………………………………… 10-7

 Deleting a data ﬁle ……………………………………………………… 10-8

 Formatting an SD card or USB ﬂash drive ……………………………10-8

 Unmounting an SD card or USB ﬂash drive …………………………10-9

 Screen Capture function …………………………………………… 10-10

D Capturing the screen ……………………………………………… 10-10

D Viewing the captured screen …………………………………… 10-10

MEMORY OPERATION Section 11

 Memory channels ……………………………………………………… 11-2

 Memory channel selection …………………………………………… 11-2

D Using the M-CH [p] or [q] keys …………………………………… 11-2

D Using the keypad ……………………………………………………11-2

 Memory list screen ……………………………………………………… 11-3

D Selecting a memory channel using the Memory list screen ……11-3

D Conﬁrming programmed memory channels ……………………… 11-3

 Entering Memory channel contents ………………………………… 11-4

D Entering in the VFO mode ………………………………………… 11-4

D Entering in the Memory mode ……………………………………… 11-4

 Copying Memory contents …………………………………………… 11-5

D Copying in the VFO mode …………………………………………11-5

D Copying in the Memory mode ……………………………………… 11-5

 Memory names ………………………………………………………… 11-6

xiii

TABLE OF CONTENTS

D Editing (programming) memory names …………………………… 11-6

 Memory clearing………………………………………………………… 11-6

 Memo pads ……………………………………………………………… 11-7

D Entering frequencies and operating modes into Memo pads …… 11-7

D Calling up a frequency and operating mode from Memo pads …11-8

D Using the Memo pad list screen …………………………………… 11-8

SCANS Section 12

 Scan types ……………………………………………………………… 12-2

 Preparation ……………………………………………………………… 12-3

 Scan set mode ………………………………………………………… 12-4

 Programmed scan ……………………………………………………… 12-5

 Fine programmed scan ………………………………………………… 12-6

 Memory scan operation ……………………………………………… 12-7

 Select memory scan operation ……………………………………… 12-7

 Setting select memory channels ……………………………………… 12-8

D Setting in the Scan screen ………………………………………… 12-8

D Setting in the Memory list screen ………………………………… 12-8

D Erasing the select scan setting …………………………………… 12-8

 ∂F scan operation ……………………………………………………… 12-9

 Fine ∂F scan …………………………………………………………… 12-9

 Tone scan …………………………………………………………… 12-10

 Voice squelch control function ……………………………………… 12-10

ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION Section 13

 Antenna connection and selection …………………………………… 13-2

 Receive Antenna-I/O selection ………………………………………13-2

 Antenna memory settings ……………………………………………… 13-3

D Antenna type selection ……………………………………………… 13-4

D Antenna selection mode …………………………………………… 13-5

D Temporary memory ………………………………………………… 13-5

D Receive antenna I/O setting …………………………………………13-6

 About the Antenna tuner ……………………………………………… 13-7

 Using the Antenna tuner operation …………………………………… 13-7

D If the tuner cannot tune the antenna ……………………………… 13-8

CLOCK AND TIMERS Section 14

 Time set mode ………………………………………………………… 14-2

D Setting the Date ……………………………………………………… 14-2

D Setting the Current time …………………………………………… 14-2

D Setting the UTC Offset ……………………………………………… 14-2

D Selecting the CLOCK2 Function …………………………………… 14-3

D Setting the CLOCK2 UTC Offset …………………………………… 14-3

D Entering the CLOCK2 Name ……………………………………… 14-3

D Setting the NTP Function …………………………………………… 14-4

D Setting the NTP Server address ……………………………………14-4

 Setting the Daily timer ………………………………………………… 14-5

 Setting the Sleep timer ………………………………………………… 14-6

 Timer operation ………………………………………………………… 14-6

xiv

SET MODE Section 15

 Set mode description …………………………………………………… 15-2

D Set mode operation ………………………………………………… 15-2

D Screen arrangement ………………………………………………… 15-3

 Level set screen ………………………………………………………… 15-4

 ACC set screen …………………………………………………………15-6

 Display set screen …………………………………………………… 15-10

 Time set screen ……………………………………………………… 15-12

 Others set screen …………………………………………………… 15-13

MAINTENANCE Section 16

 Adjusting the Main dial brake …………………………………………16-2

 Using the Voice synthesizer operation ……………………………… 16-2

 SWR reading …………………………………………………………… 16-3

 Calibration the Frequency (approximate) …………………………… 16-4

 Setting My call sign …………………………………………………… 16-5

 Cleaning ………………………………………………………………… 16-7

 Resetting the CPU ……………………………………………………… 16-7

 About protection indications …………………………………………… 16-8

 Opening the transceiver’s case ……………………………………… 16-8

 Fuse replacement ……………………………………………………… 16-9

 Clock backup battery replacement …………………………………… 16-9

 Troubleshooting ……………………………………………………… 16-10

D Transceiver power ………………………………………………… 16-10

D Transmit and receive ……………………………………………… 16-10

D Scanning …………………………………………………………… 16-11

D Display ……………………………………………………………… 16-11

UPDATING THE FIRMWARE Section 17

 General ………………………………………………………………… 17-2

D Checking the firmware version ……………………………………17-2

 Preparation ……………………………………………………………… 17-3

D File downloading …………………………………………………… 17-3

 Firmware update— using an SD card/USB ﬂash drive ……………17-4

CONTROL COMMAND Section 18

 Remote control (CI-V) information …………………………………… 18-2

D CI-V connection …………………………………………………… 18-2

D Preparing …………………………………………………………… 18-2

D Data format …………………………………………………………… 18-2

D Data content description ………………………………………… 18-11

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SPECIFICATIONS AND OPTIONS Section 19

 Speciﬁcations …………………………………………………………… 19-2

D General ……………………………………………………………… 19-2

D Transmitter …………………………………………………………… 19-2

D Receiver ……………………………………………………………… 19-3

D Antenna tuner ………………………………………………………… 19-3

 Options ………………………………………………………………… 19-4

CONNECTOR INFORMATION Section 20

 ACC socket ……………………………………………………………… 20-2

 Microphone connector ………………………………………………… 20-3

 [ELEC-KEY] jack ……………………………………………………… 20-3

 [KEY] jack ……………………………………………………………… 20-3

 [EXT KEYPAD] jack …………………………………………………… 20-4

 [REF I/O] connector …………………………………………………… 20-4

 [X-VERTER] connector ………………………………………………… 20-4

 [RELAY] jack ……………………………………………………………20-4

 [METER] jack …………………………………………………………… 20-5

 [REMOTE] jack ………………………………………………………… 20-5

 [DC OUT] jack …………………………………………………………… 20-5

 [EXT-SP] jack ……………………………………………………………20-5

 [S/P DIF] jack …………………………………………………………… 20-5

 [RX-I/O] connector ……………………………………………………… 20-5

INDEX

1-1

PANEL DESCRIPTION Section 1

 Front panel ……………………………………………………………… 1-2

 Rear panel ……………………………………………………………… 1-12

 Display …………………………………………………………………… 1-14

 Screen menu arrangement …………………………………………… 1-16

1-2

PANEL DESCRIPTION

q POWER KEY [POWER] (pp. 4-3, 14-6)

First, turn ON the internal power supply. The internal

power supply switch is located on the rear panel.

(p. 1-12)

 Push to turn ON the transceiver power.

• The [POWER] indicator above this key lights blue.

 Hold down for 1 second to turn OFF the power.

• The [POWER] indicator lights orange when the trans-

ceiver is OFF, but the internal power supply is turned

ON.

w TRANSMIT KEY [TRANSMIT] (p. 4-13)

Push to transmit, release to receive.

• The [TX] indicator lights red while transmitting and the

[RX] indicator lights green when the squelch is open.

e ANTENNA TUNER KEY [TUNER] (p.13-7)

 Momentarily push to turn the tuner ON or OFF

(bypass.)

• The [TUNER] indicator above this key lights white

when the tuner is turned ON, and goes off when the

tuner is turned OFF (bypassed).

 Hold down for 1 second to manually start the

tuner.

•

The [TUNER] indicator blinks red during manual tuning.

• When the tuner cannot tune the antenna, the tuning

circuit is automatically bypassed after 20 seconds.

r TIMER KEY [TIMER] (p. 14-5)

 Push to turn ON or OFF the sleep or daily timer

function.

• The [TIMER] indicator above this key lights white

when the timer is in use.

 Hold down for 1 second to enter the Timer set

screen.

t HEADPHONE JACK [PHONES]

(p. 3-5)

Connect standard stereo headphones.

• Output power: 50 mW with an 8 Ω load.

• When headphones are connected, the internal speaker

and any connected external speaker do not function.

ELECTRONIC KEYER JACK [ELEC-KEY] (p. 20-3)

Connect a paddle to activate the internal electronic

keyer for CW operation.

• Select the internal electronic keyer, bug-key or straight

key operation in the Keyer set screen. (p. 5-13)

• A straight key jack is located on the rear panel. See

[KEY] on page 1-13.

• Set the keyer polarity (dot and dash) in the Keyer set

screen. (p. 5-13)

• Eight keyer memory channels can be used. (p. 5-11)

dash

dot

com



Front panel

i o !0 !1 !2 !3 !4 !5 !6

1-3

PANEL DESCRIPTION

u MICROPHONE CONNECTOR [MIC]

Connect an optional microphone.

• See page 3-4 for appropriate microphones.

• See page 20-3 for microphone connector information.

i SD CARD SLOT [SD CARD] (pp. 3-5, 10-2)

Insert the supplied SD card for both reading and stor-

ing a wide variety of the transceiver’s information and

data.

• The indicator beside the slot lights, or blinks when read-

ing from or writing to the card.

• Push the card once to remove it.

o USB INDICATOR [USB]

(p. 10-4)

Lights while accessing a USB ﬂash drive inserted to

the [USB A] port.

MONITOR GAIN CONTROL [MONI GAIN] (p. 8-5)

Rotate to adjust the transmit IF signal monitor level.

!1 COMPRESSION LEVEL CONTROL [COMP]

(p. 8-6)

Rotate to adjust the speech compression level in

SSB.

!2 DRIVE GAIN CONTROL [DRIVE] (p. 4-14)

Rotate to adjust the transmitter level at the driver

stage. Activates in all modes

(except SSB with [COMP]

OFF)

!3 VOX GAIN CONTROL [VOX GAIN] (p. 8-2)

Rotate to adjust the transmit/receive switching

threshold level for VOX operation.

!4 ANTI VOX CONTROL [ANTI VOX] (p. 8-2)

Adjusts the VOX deactivate level to prevent un-

wanted VOX activation from the speaker or other

sounds.

!5 DISPLAY CONTRAST CONTROL [CONTRAST]

Adjusts the display contrast.

!6 DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS CONTROL [BRIGHT]

Adjusts the display brightness.

!7 MONITOR KEY [MONI] (p. 8-5)

Push to monitor your transmitted signal.

• The CW sidetone functions regardless of the [MONI] key

setting in the CW mode.

• The [MONI] indicator above this key lights white while

the function is activated.

!8 BREAK-IN DELAY CONTROL [DELAY] (p. 8-4)

Rotate to adjust the transmit-to-receive switching

delay time in the CW semi-break-in mode.

!9 ELECTRONIC CW KEYER SPEED CONTROL

[KEY SPEED] (p. 5-7)

Rotate to adjust the internal electronic CW keyer’s

speed to between 6 wpm (minimum) and 48 wpm

(maximum).

• The keyer’s speed is displayed.

@0 VOX/BREAK-IN KEY [VOX/BK-IN]

 Push to turn the VOX function ON or OFF in the

SSB, AM, or FM mode. (p. 8-2)

 Push to turn the break-in function ON (Semi break-

in, Full break-in)

or OFF in the CW mode. (p. 8-4)

 Hold down for 1 second to enter the VOX set

screen. (p. 8-3)

 What is the VOX function?

The VOX function (voice operated transmission) starts

transmission without pushing the transmit key or PTT

switch when you speak into the microphone, then auto-

matically returns to receive when you stop speaking.

 What is the break-in function?

The break-in function toggles between transmit and

receive with CW keying. Full break-in (QSK) can moni-

tor the receive signal during keying.

@1 RF POWER CONTROL [RF PWR] (p. 4-13)

Rotate to continuously vary the RF output power

from less than 5 watts (minimum) to 200* watts

(maximum).

*AM mode: less than 5 W to 50 W

• The output power setting is displayed.

@2 MIC GAIN CONTROL [MIC]

Rotate to adjust microphone gain.

• The transmit audio tone in the SSB, AM, or FM mode

can be independently adjusted in the Level set screen.

(p. 4-13)

 How to set the microphone gain.

Adjust the [MIC] control so that the ALC meter swings

within the ALC range during normal voice level trans-

mission in the SSB or AM mode. (The ALC meter must

be selected.)

1-4

PANEL DESCRIPTION

@3 AGC CONTROL [AGC] (p. 7-4)

Rotate to adjust the continuously-variable AGC cir-

cuit time constant.

• To use the [AGC] control, push the appropriate band’s

[AGC VR] (The [AGC VR] indicator lights white).

@4 AGC VOLUME KEY [AGC VR] (p. 7-4)

 Push to toggle the [AGC] control ON or OFF.

• Use the [AGC] control to set the AGC time constant

when switched ON.

• The [AGC VR] indicator above this key lights white

when the control is ON.

 Hold down for 1 second to turn OFF the AGC

function.

@5 AF CONTROL [AF] (p. 4-4)

Rotate to adjust the audio output level of the speak-

er or headphones.

@6 RF GAIN CONTROL [RF] (p. 4-4)

Rotate to adjust the RF gain level.

While rotating the RF gain control, you may hear

noise. This comes from the DSP unit and does

not indicate a malfunction.

@7 FUNCTION KEYS [F-1]–[F-7]

Push to select the function indicated in the display

above these keys.

• Functions vary, depending on the operating mode.

@8 MODE KEYS

Selects the desired mode. (p. 4-10)

•

The Voice synthesizer announces the selected mode.

(p. 16-2)

 Push to alternately

select the USB or

LSB mode.

 Push to alternately select the CW or

CW-R (CW reverse) mode.

 Push to toggle between the RTTY and

PSK modes.

 Hold down for 1 second to toggle be-

tween the RTTY and RTTY-R (RTTY re-

verse)

modes.

 Hold down for 1 second to toggle be-

tween the PSK and PSK-R (PSK reverse)

modes.

 Push to alternately

select the

AM or FM

mode.

 Push to toggle between

the

SSB, AM, or

FM data (USB-D, LSB-D, AM-D, FM-D) and

voice modes.

 Hold down for 1 second to toggle be-

tween D1, D2, and D3.

@9 TRANSMIT INDICATOR [TX]

Lights red while transmitting.

• The SUB band’s [TX] indicator lights only when in split

operation.

 Front panel (Continued)

@9#0

1-5

PANEL DESCRIPTION

#0 MULTI-FUNCTION KEYS

Push to select the functions indicated in the display

to the right of these keys.

• Functions vary, depending on the operating mode.

 Push to select the ANT1, ANT2, ANT3 or

ANT4 antenna connector. (p. 13-2)

 Hold down for 1 second to display the

antenna selection memory. (p.13-5)

• When the receive antenna is activated, the

antenna that is connected to [ANT4] is used

only for receive.

When a transverter is used, this [ANT]

does not function and “TRV” appears.

 Push to select the RF power (Po), SWR,

ALC, COMP, Vd or Id metering while

transmitting. (p. 4-11)



Hold down for 1 second to turn the Digital

multi-function meter ON or OFF. (p. 4-11)

 Push to select one of two receive RF

preamps, or bypass them. (p. 7-2)

• “P.AMP1” activates a 10 dB preamp.

• “P.AMP2” activates a 16 dB high-gain pre-

amp.

 What is a preamp?

A preamp ampliﬁes received signals in the front end

circuit to improve S/N ratio and sensitivity. Select

“P.AMP1” or “P.AMP2” when receiving weak signals.

 Push to select the 6 dB, 12 dB or 18 dB

attenuator. (p. 7-2)

 Hold down for 1 second to select the 3

dB, 6 dB, 9 dB, 12 dB, 18 dB, or 21 dB

attenuator. (p. 7-2)

 What is an attenuator?

An attenuator prevents a desired signal from distorting

when very strong signals are near the desired frequen-

cy, or when very strong electric ﬁelds, such as from a

broadcasting station, are near your location.

 Push to activate and then select the

“FAST,” “MID,” or “SLOW” AGC time con-

stant. (p. 7-4)

• In the FM mode, only “FAST” is selectable.

 Hold down for 1 second to enter the

AGC set mode. (p. 7-4)

The AGC time constant can be set be-

tween 0.1 to 8.0 second (depending on

the mode)

, or turned OFF. When AGC is

“OFF,” the S-meter does not function.

 What is AGC?

The AGC controls receiver gain to produce a constant

audio output level, even when the received signal

strength varies dramatically. Select “FAST” for tuning

and then select “MID” or “SLOW” depending on the re-

ceiving condition.

 Turns the speech compressor ON or

OFF in the SSB mode. (p. 8-6)

 Selects the narrow, middle or wide com-

pression when held down for 1 second.

 What is a speech compressor?

A speech compressor compresses the transmitter au-

dio input to increase the average audio output level,

and therefore increase the talk power. This function

is effective for long-distance communication, or when

propagation conditions are poor.

 Push to turn the

⁄4-speed tuning func-

tion ON or OFF in the SSB data, CW,

RTTY and PSK modes. (p. 4-9)

•

⁄4 function sets the dial rotation to

⁄4 of the

normal speed for ﬁne tuning.

 In the FM mode, push to toggle between

the tone encoder, tone squelch function

and no-tone operation. (p. 5-39)

 In the FM mode, hold down for 1 second

to enter the Tone set mode. (pp. 5-38,

5-39)

 Push to turn the Voice squelch control

function ON or OFF. This is useful for

scanning. (p. 12-10)

1-6

PANEL DESCRIPTION

#1 SQUELCH CONTROL [SQL] (p. 4-4)

Rotate to adjust the squelch threshold level. The

squelch removes noise output from the speaker

(closed condition) when no signal is received.

• The squelch is particularly effective for FM. It is also

available for other modes.

• 11 to 12 o’clock position is recommended for any setting

of the [SQL] control.

S-meter

squelch

Noise squelch

Squelch

is open.

Squelch

threshold

#2 NOISE BLANKER KEY [NB] (p. 7-11)

 Push to turn the noise blanker ON or OFF.

The noise blanker reduces pulse-type noise such

as that generated by automobile ignition systems.

This function cannot be used in the FM mode, or

for non-pulse-type noise.

• The [NB] indicator above this key lights white while

the function is activated.

 Hold down for 1 second to enter the Noise blank-

er set mode.

NOISE REDUCTION KEY [NR]

(p. 7-12)

Push to turn the DSP noise reduction ON or OFF.

• The [NR] indicator above this key lights white when the

function is activated.

#4 NOISE REDUCTION LEVEL CONTROL [NR]

(p. 7-12)

Adjusts the DSP noise reduction level when the noise

reduction is in use. Set for maximum readability.

• To use this control, push the appropriate Main or Sub

band’s [NR].

#5 NOISE BLANKER CONTROL [NB] (p. 7-11)

Adjust the noise blanker threshold level.

• To use this control, push appropriate band’s [NB] key.

#6 LOCK INDICATOR [LOCK] (p. 4-12)

Lights when the dial lock function is activated.

#7 FUNCTION DISPLAY (p. 1-14)

Shows the operating frequency, function key menus,

Spectrum scope screen, Memory channel screen,

Set mode settings, and so on.

 Front panel (Continued)

$8 $6 $3$9%0

#6 #7

#8 $1#9 $0 $2

$5 $4

1-7

PANEL DESCRIPTION

MINI SPECTRUM SCOPE KEY [M.SCOPE] (p. 6-2)

 Push to t

urn the Mini spectrum scope screen ON

or OFF.

• You can simultaneously display the Mini spectrum

scope screen with other screens, such as the Memo-

ry or Set mode screens.

 Hold down for 1 second to t

urn ON the regular

spectrum scope screen.

#9 VOICE MEMORY RECORD KEY [REC]

 Push to store the previous received signal for the

preset time period. This function is called Instant

replay. (p. 9-7)

• The preset time period can be set in the Voice set

screen. (p. 9-13)



Hold down for 1 second to record a QSO (Com-

munication) audio onto a memory device. (p. 9-3)

• Hold down again for 1 second to stop recording.

• The recorded memory device can be selected in the

Voice set screen. (p. 9-13)

$0 VOICE MEMORY PLAY BACK KEY [PLAY]

(pp. 9-2, 9-8)



Push to playback the last 5 seconds of the Instant

replay memory.

• The playback time can be changed in the Voice set

screen.

 Hold down for 1 second to playback all of the in-

stant replay memory.

• The recording time can be changed in the Voice set

screen.

$1 EXIT/SET KEY [EXIT/SET]

 Push to exit, or return to the previous screen in-

dication during Spectrum scope, Memory, Scan

or Set screen display.

 Hold down for 1 second to display the Set mode

menu screen. (p. 15-3)

$2 MAIN DIAL

Changes the displayed frequency (Main band), se-

lects set mode option, and so on.

MAIN/SUB CHANGE KEY [CHANGE] (pp. 7-10, 8-7)

Push to toggle the frequency and selected memory

channel between the Main and Sub band readouts.

• When the split frequency function is ON, push to toggle

between the transmit frequency and the receive fre-

quency.

$4 SUB BAND ACCESS KEY [SUB]

Push to select the Sub band readout.

• The Sub band readout frequency is clearly displayed.

$5 MAIN BAND ACCESS KEY [MAIN]

Push to select the Main band readout.

• The Main band readout frequency is clearly displayed.

The Sub band readout functions only during split opera-

tion or Dualwatch.

$6 MAIN/SUB EQUALIZING KEY [M=S] (p. 8-7)

Hold down for 1 second to equalize the Sub band

readout frequency to the Main band readout fre-

quency.

$7 MEMORY CHANNEL UP/DOWN KEYS [p]/[q]

(p. 11-2)

Push to select the desired memory channel.

• Memory channels can be selected both in the VFO and

the memory modes.

$8 TRANSMIT FREQUENCY CHECK KEY [XFC]

(p. 6-5)

Hold down to monitor the transmit frequency (includ-

ing ∂TX frequency offset)

during split frequency op-

eration.

• While holding down, the transmit frequency can be

changed with [MAIN DIAL], keypad, memo pad or [Y]/

[Z] keys.

• When the split lock function is turned ON, push [XFC] to

cancel the Dial lock function. (pp. 8-7, 8-8)

$9 RECEIVE INDICATOR [RX]

Lights green while receiving a signal and when the

squelch is open.

%0 SPLIT OPERATION INDICATOR [SPLIT] (p. 8-7)

Lights white during split frequency operation.

1-8

PANEL DESCRIPTION

%1 AUTOMATIC TUNING KEY [AUTO TUNE]

Push to turn ON the Automatic tuning function in the

CW or AM mode.

IMPORTANT!

When receiving a weak signal, or receiving a signal

with interference, the automatic tuning function may

tune the receiver to an undesired signal.

%2 SUB DIAL

Changes the displayed frequency in the Sub band.

%3 SPEECH KEY [SPEECH] (p. 16-2)

 Push to announce the S-meter level and the se-

lected operating frequency.

• You can change the speech language, speech speed,

and speech contents in the Others set screen.

(p. 15-14)

 Hold down for 1 second to announce the select-

ed operating mode.

%4 SPLIT KEY [SPLIT] (pp. 8-7, 8-8)

 Push to turn the split function ON or OFF.

 Hold down for 1 second to turn the split func-

tion ON and equalize the Sub band frequency to

the Main band in non-FM modes, and then sets

the Sub band readout for frequency input mode.

(Quick split function)

• In the FM mode, the Sub band frequency is shifted

by the preset frequency offset from the Main band

readout frequency. (p. 15-14)

• The quick split function can be turned OFF in the Oth-

ers set screen. (p. 15-13)

 After entering a frequency offset, push to turn

ON the split function. The Sub band frequency

is shifted the offset amount from the Main band

frequency.

%5 DUALWATCH KEY [DUALWATCH] (p. 7-10)

 Push to turn the Dualwatch function ON or OFF.

 Hold down for 1 second to turn the Dualwatch

function ON, and equalize the Main/Sub band

frequency to the Sub/Main band. (Quick dual-

watch function)

• The Quick Dualwatch function can be turned OFF in

the Others set screen. (p. 15-13)

 Front panel (Continued)

^3 ^2

%1 %2

1-9

PANEL DESCRIPTION

%6 NOTCH KEY [NOTCH]

(p. 7-13)

 Push to select the Notch function between auto,

manual, or OFF in the SSB or AM mode.

 Push to turn the Manual notch function ON or

OFF in the CW, RTTY, or PSK mode.

 Push to turn the Auto notch function ON or OFF

in the FM mode.

• “

” is displayed when the Manual notch ﬁlter is in

use.

• “

” is displayed when the Auto notch ﬁlter is in

use.

 Hold down for 1 second to select the Manual

notch width from wide, mid, or narrow.

 What is the Notch function?

The notch function eliminates unwanted CW or AM

carrier tones while preserving the desired voice signal.

The DSP circuit automatically adjusts the ﬁltering fre-

quency to effectively eliminate unwanted tones.

%7 AUDIO PEAK FILTER/TWIN PEAK FILTER KEY

[APF/TPF]

During CW mode operation (p. 5-6)

 Push to turn the Audio peak ﬁlter ON or OFF.

• “

APF

” appears when audio peak ﬁlter is in use.

 Hold down for 1 second to select the APF pass-

band width from WIDE, MID, or NAR or from 320,

160, or 80 Hz, depending on the APF type set-

ting.

During RTTY mode operation (p. 5-15)

 Push to turn the Twin peak ﬁlter ON or OFF.

• “

TPF

” appears when twin peak ﬁlter is in use.

%8 PBT CLEAR KEY [PBT CLEAR] (p. 7-5)

Hold down for 1 second to clear the PBT settings.

• The [PBT CLEAR] indicator above this key lights when

the PBT function is in use.

FILTER KEY [FILTER] (p. 7-6)

 Push to select one of three IF ﬁlter settings.

 Hold down for 1 second to enter the Filter

screen.

^0 MEMORY WRITE KEY [MW] (p. 11-4)

Hold down for 1 second to store the selected fre-

quency and operating mode into the displayed

memory channel.

• This function is usable in both the VFO and memory

modes.

^1 KEYPAD

 Push to select the operating band.

• Push [GENE] to select the general coverage band.

 Push the same key 2 or 3 times to call up other

stacked frequencies in the band. (p. 4-6)

• Icom’s triple band stacking register memorizes 3 fre-

quencies in each band.

 After pushing [F-INP], push to enter a frequency

or memory channel. Pushing [ENT] or [p]/[q] to

save and exit. (pp. 4-9, 11-2)

• Example: To enter 14.195 MHz, push [F-INP] [1] [4]

[•] [1] [9] [5] [ENT].

^2 VFO/MEMORY KEY [V/M]

 Push to toggle the selected operating mode be-

tween the VFO and memory. (pp. 4-5, 11-2)

 Hold down for 1 second to copy the memory con-

tents to the VFO. (p. 11-5)

^3 MEMO PAD-WRITE KEY [MP-W] (p. 11-7)

Enters the selected frequency and operating mode

into a memo pad.

• The ﬁve most recent entries remain in the memo pads.

• The number of memo pads can be expanded from 5 to

10 in the Others set screen. (p. 15-15)

^4 MEMO PAD-READ KEY [MP-R] (p. 11-8)

 Push to call up a frequency and operating mode

in a memo pad.

The 5 (or 10) most recently entered frequencies

and operating modes can be recalled, starting

from the most recent.

• The number of memo pads can be expanded from 5

to 10 in Others set screen. (p. 15-15)

 Hold down for 1 second to enter the Memo pad

list screen.

1-10

PANEL DESCRIPTION

^5 LOCK KEY [LOCK] (p. 4-12)

Push to turn the Dial lock function ON or OFF.

^6 QUICK TUNING KEY [TS]



Push to turn the Quick Tuning step function ON or

OFF. (p. 4-7)

• While the Quick Tuning icon, “Z,” is displayed above

the frequency readout, the frequency can be changed

in selected kHz steps.

• 0.1, 1, 5, 9, 10, 12.5, 20 and 25 kHz steps can be

independently set for each operating mode.

 When the Quick tuning step is OFF, hold down

for 1 second to turn the 1 Hz tuning step ON or

OFF. (p. 4-8)



When the Quick Tuning step is ON, hold down

for 1 second to enter the Quick Tuning step set

screen. (p. 4-7)

^7 CLEAR KEY [CLEAR] (pp. 7-3, 8-5)

You can clear the RIT/∂TX shift frequency by hold-

ing down for 1 second or pushing, depending on the

quick RIT/∂TX clear function setting (p. ?12-18).

^8 ∂TX KEY [∂TX] (p. 8-5)

 Push to turn the ∂TX function ON or OFF.

• Rotate the [RIT/∂TX] control to vary the ∂TX fre-

quency.

 Hold down for 1 second to add the ∂TX shift fre-

quency to the operating frequency.

 What is the ∂TX function?

∂TX shifts the transmit frequency without shifting the

receive frequency. This is useful for simple split fre-

quency operation in CW, and so on.

^9 RIT KEY [RIT] (p. 7-3)

 Push to turn the RIT function ON or OFF.

• Rotate the [RIT/∂TX] control to vary the RIT frequen-

cy.

 Hold down for 1 second to add the RIT shift fre-

quency to the operating frequency.

 What is the RIT function?

Receiver incremental tuning (RIT) shifts the receive

frequency without shifting the transmit frequency.

This is useful for ﬁne tuning stations calling you on

off-frequency or when you prefer to listen to slightly

different-sounding voice characteristics, and so on.

&0 CW PITCH CONTROL [CW PITCH] (p. 5-6)

Shifts the received CW audio pitch and the CW side

tone pitch without changing the operating frequency.

&1 MANUAL NOTCH FILTER CONTROL [NOTCH]

(p. 7-13)

Varies the “valley” frequency of the manual notch

ﬁlter to reject an interfering signal while the manual

notch function is ON.

• Notch ﬁlter center frequency:

SSB : –1060 Hz ~ 4040 Hz

CW : CW pitch frequency + 2540 Hz ~ CW pitch

frequency –2540 Hz

AM : –5100 Hz ~ 5100 Hz

&2 DIGITAL RF SELECTOR CONTROL [DIGI-SEL]

(p. 7-12)

Adjusts the digital RF selector center frequency.

• The control can be reassigned as the Audio peak ﬁlter

adjustment (p. 15-15)

 Front panel (Continued)

&5 &4

1-11

PANEL DESCRIPTION

&3 DIGITAL RF SELECTOR KEY [DIGI-SEL]

(p. 7-12)

Push to turn the digital RF preselector ON or OFF.

• The [DIGI-SEL] indicator lights white when the preselec-

tor is in use.

&4 PASSBAND TUNING CONTROLS [TWIN PBT]

(p. 7-5)

Adjusts the receiver’s IF ﬁlter ‘passband width’ using

the DSP.

• The passband width and shift frequency are displayed in

the Multi-function display.

•

Hold down [PBT CLEAR] for 1 second to clear the PBT

settings.

• The adjustment range is half of the selected ﬁlter pass-

band width, and the value is adjustable in 25 Hz steps

for the SSB/CW/RTTY/PSK modes, and 100 Hz steps

for the AM mode.

PBT2

PBT1

Low cutHigh cut Center

–+

 What is the PBT control?

The PBT function electronically modiﬁes the IF passband

width to reject interference. This transceiver uses the DSP

circuit for the PBT function.

&5 RIT/∂TX CONTROL [RIT/∂TX] (pp. 7-3, 8-5)

Shifts the receive and/or transmit frequency without

changing the transmit and/or receive frequency.

• Rotate the control clockwise to increase the frequency,

or rotate the control counterclockwise to decrease the

frequency. The RIT or ∂TX functions must be ON.

• The shift frequency range is ±9.999 kHz in 1 Hz steps (or

±9.99 kHz in 10 Hz steps).

1-12

PANEL DESCRIPTION

q ANTENNA CONNECTOR [ANT 1–4] (p. 3-4)

Connects to a 50 Ω antenna with a PL-259 plug

connector.

w GROUND TERMINAL [GND] (p. 3-2)

Connect this terminal to ground to prevent electrical

shocks, TVI, BCI and other problems.

e CIRCUIT BREAKER

Cuts off the AC input if excessive current flows.

r EXTERNAL DISPLAY TERMINAL [EXT-DISPLAY]

(p. 3-6)

Connects to an external display monitor.

• At least 800×600 pixel display is necessary.

t USB (Universal Serial Bus) PORT [USB A]

 Connect an optional RC-28 remote encoder.

 Insert a USB ﬂash drive* for both reading and

storing a wide variety of the transceiver’s infor-

mation and data.

• The indicator lights or blinks when the transceiver

reads or writes to the memory data.

• An unmount operation should be performed before

removing the USB ﬂash drive*.

 Connects to a PC keyboard for RTTY and PSK

operations.

• USB keyboards* are supported.

*: A USB ﬂash drive or USB keyboard is not supplied

by Icom.

About the [USB A] connector:

• Supports only an RC-28, USB ﬂash drive, key-

board, mouse, or hub.

• Turn the transceiver power OFF when connecting

or disconnecting an RC-28, USB keyboard, mouse,

or hub.

• DO NOT connect the following devices:

- Two or more of the same kind of USB devices.

(Example: Two USB hubs or two USB mice)

- A Multimedia adapter

- A USB HDD

- A USB ﬂash drive larger than 32 GB

- A Bluetooth

keyboard or mouse.

y S/P DIF INPUT TERMINAL [S/P DIF– IN]

u S/P DIF OUTPUT TERMINAL [S/P DIF– OUT]

Connects to external equipment that supports S/P

DIF input/output.

i ETHERNET CONNECTOR [LAN] (p. 3-6)

Connects to a PC network through a LAN (Local

Area Network).

o MAIN POWER KEY [I/O] (p. 4-3)

Turns the internal power supply ON or OFF.

!0 AC POWER SOCKET [AC] (p. 3-4)

Connects the supplied AC power cable to an AC re-

ceptacle.

EXTERNAL SPEAKER JACK MAIN [EXT-SP A]

(p. 3-5)

EXTERNAL SPEAKER JACK SUB [EXT-SP B]

(p. 3-5)

Connects to an external speaker (4–8 Ω), if de-

sired.

!1!2!4 !3!5!6!7!8!9@0@1@2@3@4@5@6@7@8

r t y u i

w e



Rear panel

1-13

PANEL DESCRIPTION

USB PORT [USB B]

USB B type port connects to a PC.

• A USB A-USB B cable is required.

!4 ACCESSORY SOCKET [A ACC1]

ACCESSORY SOCKET [A ACC2]

ACCESSORY SOCKET [B ACC1]

ACCESSORY SOCKET [B ACC2]

Connects to external equipment such as a linear

ampliﬁer, an automatic antenna selector/tuner, a

TNC for data communications, and so on.

• See page 20-2 for detailed socket information.

!5 DC OUTPUT JACK [DC OUT] (p. 20-5)

Outputs regulated 14 V DC (approximately) for ex-

ternal equipment. Connected in parallel with 13.8 V

outputs of [ACC 1] and [ACC 2]. (maximum 1 A in

total)

!6 T/R CONTROL JACK [RELAY] (pp. 3-5, 20-4)

Goes to ground when transmitting to control an ex-

ternal unit, such as a non-Icom linear ampliﬁer.

NOTE: T/R control voltage and current must be

lower than 16 V DC/0.5 A (or 250 V AC,

200 mA with MOS-FET switching).

!7 ALC INPUT JACK [ALC] (p. 3-5)

Connects to the ALC output jack of a non-Icom lin-

ear ampliﬁer.

!8 ALC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT POT [ALC ADJ]

Rotate to adjust the ALC levels.

No adjustment is required when the ALC output lev-

el of the connected non-Icom linear ampliﬁer is 0 to

–4 V DC.

!9 STRAIGHT KEY JACK [KEY] (p. 20-3)

Connects to a straight key or external electronic

keyer with

⁄4 inch standard plug.

• [ELEC-KEY] on the front panel can be used for a straight

key or external electronic keyer. Deactivate the internal

electronic keyer in the Keyer set screen. (p. 5-13)

@0 EXTERNAL KEYPAD JACK [EXT KEYPAD]

(p. 20-4)

Connects to an external keypad for direct voice

memory (p. 9-11), memory keyer (p. 5-10), RTTY

memory (p. 5-17) or PSK memory (p. 5-29) trans-

mission.

A transceiver mute control line (both transmit and

receive) is also supported.

@1 METER JACK [METER] (p. 20-5)

Outputs the received signal strength, transmit out-

put power, VSWR, ALC, speech compression, V

d or

Id levels for an external meter.

@2 CI-V REMOTE CONTROL JACK [REMOTE]

(p. 20-5)

 Connects to a PC through the optional CT-17

ci-v

level converter for external control of the trans-

ceiver.

 Used for transceive operation with another Icom

CI-V transceiver or receiver.

@3 RECEIVE ANTENNA A OUT [RX ANT A– OUT]

@4 RECEIVE ANTENNA A IN [RX ANT A– IN]

Located between the transmit/receive switching cir-

cuit and the receiver’s RF stage in the Sub band

(Main band in the split frequency mode).

Connects to an external unit, such as preampliﬁer

or RF ﬁlter, using BNC connectors, if desired.

When no external unit is connected, [RX ANT A–

IN] and [RX ANT A– OUT] must be deactivated

and internally shorted by the switching relay. This

setting is available in the ANT screen. (p. 13-6)

@5 TRANSVERTER CONNECTOR [X-VERTER]

(p. 20-4)

Connects to an external transverter for input/out-

put.

Activated by a voltage applied to [ACC 2] pin 6, or

when the transverter function is in use. (pp. 20-2,

15-14)

@6 RECEIVE ANTENNA B OUT [RX ANT B– OUT]

@7 RECEIVE ANTENNA B IN [RX ANT B– IN]

Located between the transmit/receive switching cir-

cuit and receiver’s RF stage in the Main band (Sub

band during split operation).

Connects an external unit, such as preampliﬁer or

RF ﬁlter, using BNC connectors, if desired.

When no external unit is connected, [RX ANT B–

IN] and [RX ANT B– OUT] must be deactivated

and internally shorted by the switching relay. This

setting is available in the ANT screen. (p. 13-6)

@8 REFERENCE SIGNAL INPUT/OUTPUT

TERMINAL [REF I/O]

Input or output for a 10 MHz reference signal.

1-14

PANEL DESCRIPTION

q BAND WIDTH INDICATOR (p. 7-5)

Displays the passband width of the IF ﬁlter.

w MODE INDICATOR

Displays the selected mode.

e SHIFT FREQUENCY INDICATOR (p. 7-5)

Displays the shift frequency of the IF ﬁlter.

r PASSBAND WIDTH INDICATOR (p. 7-5)

Graphically displays the passband width for twin

PBT operation and the center frequency for IF shift

operation.

t QUICK TUNING INDICATOR (p. 4-7)

Appears when the Quick Tuning step function is ON.

y BANDPASS FILTER INDICATOR

Appears when the narrow ﬁlter (500 Hz or less) is

selected in the CW, RTTY, or PSK mode.

u RTTY TUNING INDICATOR

Displays the tuning level in the RTTY mode.

i CLOCK READOUT

Displays the current time.

o FREQUENCY READOUTS

Displays the operating frequency.

• Gray characters are used for a non-active frequency.

!0 IF FILTER INDICATOR

Displays the selected IF ﬁlter number.

!1 VFO/MEMORY CHANNEL INDICATOR (p. 4-5)

Indicates the VFO mode or selected memory chan-

nel number.

!2 TX ICON

 “

” appears while transmitting.

 Indicates the frequency used for transmit.

• Displays on the Sub readout when the split function

is turned ON.

• A TX icon with doted rectangle, “

” is displayed,

instead of the regular “

” TX icon, when a fre-

quency outside of an amateur band frequency range

is selected. This function can be turned OFF in the

Others set screen, if desired. (p. 4-5)

!3 S/RF METER (p. 4-11)

Displays the signal strength while receiving. Dis-

plays the relative output power, SWR, ALC or com-

pression levels while transmitting.



Display

qw wt

e er ry yu uiq

1-15

PANEL DESCRIPTION

 Display (Continued)

!4 LAN INDICATOR

Displays when the Remote station accesses the

transceiver through the LAN connector. (An optional

RS-BA1 is required.)

!5 MULTI-FUNCTION SCREEN

Display screen for the Digital multi-function me-

ter, Spectrum scope, Audio scope, Voice recorder,

Memory channel, Scan, Memory keyer, RTTY de-

coder, PSK decoder, IF ﬁlter selection, and Set

modes.

!6 DISPLAY FUNCTION KEY GUIDE

Indicates the current function of the Display Func-

tion keys ([F-1] – [F-7]).

MEMORY CHANNEL READOUTS

 Displays the selected memory channel contents

in the VFO mode.

 Displays the VFO contents in memory mode.

SELECT MEMORY CHANNEL INDICATOR

(p. 12-7)

Indicates the displayed memory channel that is as-

signed as a Select memory channel.

The desired memory channels can be assigned to 3

select groups, for fast, convenient scanning.

!9 MULTI-FUNCTION KEY GUIDE

Displays the function of the Multi-function keys.

!8!7 !7

1-16

PANEL DESCRIPTION

F-1

F-2

F-3 F-4 F-5 F-6 F-7

F-3

F-4

F-5

F-2 F-5

F-3

F-6

F-3 F-7



Screen menu arrangement

The following screens can be selected from the Start

up screen. Choose the desired screen using the fol-

lowing guide.

Pushing [EXIT/SET] several times returns to the Start

up screen. See page 15-3 for set mode arrangement.

• Start up screen

• Spectrum scope screen (p. 6-2)

• Scan screen (VFO mode: p. 12-5)

• PSK decode screen (p. 5-26)

• Memory keyer screen (CW mode: p. 5-10)

• Audio scope screen (p. 6-15)

• Voice recorder screen (p. 9-3)

• Scan screen (Memory mode: p. 12-7)

• Memory channel screen (p. 11-3)

• RTTY decode screen (p. 5-16) • Set mode menu screen (p. 15-3)

2-1

SET MODE ITEMS Section 2

 About the Setting screen conﬁguration ……………………………… 2-2

 SCOPE SET …………………………………………………………… 2-3

 VOICE SET ……………………………………………………………… 2-4

 KEYER 001 ……………………………………………………………… 2-4

 KEYER CW-KEY ……………………………………………………… 2-5

 RTTY LOG SET ………………………………………………………… 2-5

 RTTY DECODE SET …………………………………………………… 2-5

 PSK LOG SET ………………………………………………………… 2-6

 PSK DECODE SET …………………………………………………… 2-6

 SCAN SET ……………………………………………………………… 2-6

 AUDIO SCOPE SET …………………………………………………… 2-6

 LEVEL SET ……………………………………………………………… 2-7

 ACC SET ………………………………………………………………… 2-8

 DISPLAY SET …………………………………………………………… 2-10

 TIME SET ……………………………………………………………… 2-11

 OTHERS SET ……………………………………………………………2-11

 LOAD SET ……………………………………………………………… 2-16

 SAVE SET ……………………………………………………………… 2-16

 ANT TYPE ……………………………………………………………… 2-16

 VOX ……………………………………………………………………… 2-17

 NB ………………………………………………………………………… 2-17

 FILTER SHAPE SET ……………………………………………………2-17

2-2

SET MODE ITEMS



About the Setting screen conﬁguration

The transceiver Setting consists of the following items.

SETTING SCREEN REF.

SPECTRUM SCOPE SCOPE SET pp. 2-3, 6-10

VOICE MEMORY VOICE SET pp. 2-4, 9-13

MEMORY KEYER KEYER 001 pp. 2-4, 5-12

KEYER CW-KEY pp. 2-5, 5-13

RTTY DECODE RTTY LOG SET pp. 2-5, 5-20

RTTY DECODE SET pp. 2-5, 5-22

PSK DECODE PSK LOG SET pp. 2-6, 5-32

PSK DECODE SET pp. 2-6, 5-34

SCAN SCAN SET pp. 2-6, 12-3

AUDIO SCOPE AUDIO SCOPE SET pp. 2-6, 6-16

SET MODE LEVEL SET pp. 2-7, 15-4

ACC SET pp. 2-8, 15-6

DISPLAY SET pp. 2-10, 15-10

TIME SET pp. 2-11, 15-12

OTHERS SET pp. 2-11, 15-13

SD/USB-MEMORY SET SETTING LOAD LOAD SET pp. 2-16, 10-9

SETTING SAVE SAVE SET pp. 2-16, 10-10

CAPTURE LIST —

FIRMWARE UPDATE p. 17-4

FORMAT p. 10-6

UNMOUNT p. 10-7

ANT ANT TYPE pp. 2-16, 13-4

VOX pp. 2-17, 8-3

NB pp. 2-17, 7-11

FILTER FILTER SHAPE SET pp. 2-17, 7-9

2-3

SET MODE ITEMS

ITEMS DESCRIPTIONS RANGE OR VALUE REF.

Scope during Tx (CENTER Type) Transmit signal spectrum indication setting. OFF, ON p. 6-10

Max Hold Peak level holding function setting. OFF, 10s Hold, ON

CENTER Type Display Center frequency setting when using the

Center type scope.

Filter Center,

Carrier Point Center,

Carrier Point Center

(Abs. Freq.)

Marker Position (FIX Type) Marker position setting when using the

Fixed type scope.

Filter Center, Carrier Point

VBW Video band width setting. Narrow, Wide

Averaging Averaging function setting for the spectrum

scope.

OFF, 2, 3, 4

Waveform Type Spectrum display type setting. Fill, Fill+Line p. 6-11

Waveform Color (Current) Spectrum ﬁll color setting. 0~255 (in 1 digit steps)

Waveform Color (Line) Spectrum outline color setting. 0~255 (in 1 digit steps)

Waveform Color (Max Hold) Spectrum color setting for peak hold. 0~255 (in 1 digit steps)

Waterfall Display

Waterfall setting for spectrum scope.

OFF, ON

Waterfall Speed Waterfall speed setting. SLOW, MID, FAST

Waterfall Size (Expand Scope) Waterfall height setting while using the ex-

panded scope screen is displayed.

Small, Mid, Large

Waterfall Peak Color Level Waterfall color level setting. Grid 1 ~ Grid 10

Waterfall Marker Auto-hide The marker in the Waterfall zone is hid-

den 2 seconds after you have stopped it in

place.

OFF, ON

Dual Scope Type Main and Sub scope screen arrangement

during dual scope.

Over/Under, Side by Side

Dual Scope Auto Select Main/Sub scope screen access setting

linked to the [MAIN]/[SUB] key operation.

OFF, ON p. 6-12

Fixed Edges (0.03 – 1.60) Scope edge frequencies settings when us-

ing the Fixed type scope.

Up to 3 types can be set to each band.

0.030 MHz ~ 1.600 MHz

Fixed Edges (1.60 – 2.00) 1.600 MHz ~ 2.000 MHz

Fixed Edges (2.00 – 6.00) 2.000 MHz ~ 6.000 MHz

Fixed Edges (6.00 – 8.00) 6.000 MHz ~ 8.000 MHz

Fixed Edges (8.00 – 11.00) 8.000 MHz ~ 11.000 MHz

Fixed Edges (11.00 – 15.00) 11.000 MHz ~ 15.000 MHz

Fixed Edges (15.00 – 20.00) 15.000 MHz ~ 20.000 MHz

Fixed Edges (20.00 – 22.00) 20.000 MHz ~ 22.000 MHz p. 6-13

Fixed Edges (22.00 – 26.00) 22.000 MHz ~ 26.000 MHz

Fixed Edges (26.00 – 30.00) 26.000 MHz ~ 30.000 MHz

Fixed Edges (30.00 – 45.00) 30.000 MHz ~ 45.000 MHz

Fixed Edges (45.00 – 60.00) 45.000 MHz ~ 60.000 MHz



SCOPE SET

SCOPE [F-1]



EXPD/SET [F-7]

2-4

SET MODE ITEMS

ITEMS DESCRIPTIONS RANGE OR VALUE REF.

VOICE 1st Menu Root screen selection that displays ﬁrst after

[VOICE](F) is pushed.

VOICE-Root, VOICE-TX p. 9-13

VOICE TX Auto Monitor Automatic monitor function setting when

transmitting a voice memory recording.

OFF, ON

VOICE TX Repeat Time Interval setting for the voice repeat transmis-

sion.

1 ~ 15 seconds

(in 1 second steps)

QSO REC Storage Media Storage media selection for the QSO re-

corder.

SD CARD, USB-Memory

QSO REC REC Mode Recording mode selection for the QSO re-

corder.

TX&RX, RX Only

QSO REC TX REC Audio Recording TX audio selection for the QSO

recorder.

Direct, Monitor

QSO REC RX REC Condition The squelch relation setting to record RX au-

dio for the QSO recorder.

Always, Squelch Auto

QSO REC File Split The ﬁle split function setting. OFF, ON

QSO REC PTT Auto REC The PTT Automatic Recording function set-

ting.

OFF, ON p. 9-14

QSO REC PRE-REC for PTT Auto

REC

RX audio recording status setting for the PTT

Automatic Recording function.

OFF, 5, 10, 15 seconds

QSO PLAY Skip Time Skip time setting for both forwarding and re-

winding during QSO player operation.

3, 5, 10, 30 seconds

INSTANT REPLAY REC Time Instant record time setting when [REC] is

pushed.

5 ~ 30 seconds

(in 1 second steps)

INSTANT REPLAY Play Time Instant playback time setting when [PLAY] is

pushed.

3 ~ 10 seconds

(in 1 second steps)



VOICE SET

VOICE [F-2]



SET [F-7]

ITEMS DESCRIPTIONS RANGE OR VALUE REF.

Number Style Contest (serial) numbering system setting.

Normal, 190ANO, 190ANT,

90NO, 90NT

p. 5-12

Count Up Trigger Count up trigger channel selection. M1, M2, M3, M4, M5, M6, M7,

Present Number Present Number setting. 001 ~ 9999 (in 1 steps)



KEYER 001

KEYER [F-3]



[EXIT/SET]



001 [F-3]

2-5

SET MODE ITEMS

ITEMS DESCRIPTIONS RANGE OR VALUE REF.

Keyer Repeat Time Interval setting for the memory keyer trans-

mission repeat.

1 ~ 60 seconds

(in 1 second steps)

p. 5-13

Dot/Dash Ratio Dot/Dash ratio setting for ELE-KEY. 1:1:2.8 ~ 1:1:4.5

(in 0.1 steps)

Rise Time Rise time of the transmitting CW envelope

setting.

2, 4, 6, 8 milliseconds

Paddle Type Paddle polarity setting. Normal, Reverse

Keyer Type

Keyer type setting for the keyer which is con-

nected to [ELEC-KEY] on the front panel.

Straight, BUG-KEY,

ELEC-KEY

MIC Up/Down Keyer Microphone [UP]/[DN] keys to be used as a

paddle setting.

OFF, ON



KEYER CW-KEY

KEYER [F-3]



[EXIT/SET]



CW KEY [F-4]

ITEMS DESCRIPTIONS RANGE OR VALUE REF.

RTTY Log RTTY log use. OFF, ON p. 5-20

RTTY Log File Type RTTY log ﬁle saving format selection. Text, HTML

RTTY Log Storage Media Storage media selection for saving an RTTY

log ﬁle.

SD CARD, USB-Memory



RTTY LOG SET

DECODE [F-3]



<MENU1> [F-1]



LOG [F-4]

ITEMS DESCRIPTIONS RANGE OR VALUE REF.

RTTY FFT Scope Averaging

RTTY FFT scope averaging function setting.

OFF, 2, 3, 4 p. 5-22

RTTY FFT Scope Waveform Col

or RTTY FFT scope waveform color setting. 0~255 (in 1 digit steps)

RTTY Decode USOS RTTY decode USOS (UnShift On Space)

function setting.

OFF, ON

RTTY Decode New Line Code RTTY internal decoder new line code set-

ting.

CR, LF, CR+LF, CR+LF

RTTY Diddle RTTY diddle setting. OFF, BLANK, LTRS

RTTY TX USOS RTTY TX USOS setting. OFF, ON

RTTY Auto CR+LF by TX RTTY automatic new line code (CR+LF)

transmission setting.

OFF, ON p. 5-23

RTTY Time Stamp RTTY decode screen Time stamp setting. OFF, ON

RTTY Time Stamp (Time) Clock selection for the RTTY time stamp. Local, UTC

RTTY Time Stamp (Frequency) Frequency information stamp setting for the

RTTY time stamp.

OFF, ON

RTTY Font Color (Receive)

Text color setting for the received characters.

0~255 (in 1 digit steps)

RTTY Font Color (Transmit) Text color setting for the transmitted char-

acters.

0~255 (in 1 digit steps)

RTTY Font Color (Time Stamp) Text color setting for the time stamp. 0~255 (in 1 digit steps)

RTTY Font Color (TX Buffer) Text color setting in the TX buffer screen. 0~255 (in 1 digit steps)



RTTY DECODE SET

DECODE [F-3]



<MENU1> [F-1]



SET [F-6]

2-6

SET MODE ITEMS

ITEMS DESCRIPTIONS RANGE OR VALUE REF.

PSK FFT Scope Averaging PSK FFT scope averaging function setting. OFF, 2, 3, 4 p. 5-34

PSK FFT Scope Waveform Color PSK FFT scope waveform color setting. 0~255 (in 1 digit steps)

PSK AFC Range PSK AFC (Automatic Frequency Control)

function's functioning range setting.

±15Hz, ±8Hz

PSK Time Stamp Time stamp setting on the PSK decode

screen.

OFF, ON

PSK Time Stamp (Time) Clock selection for the PSK time stamp. Local, UTC

PSK Time Stamp (Frequency) Frequency information stamp setting for

PSK time stamp.

OFF, ON

PSK Font Color (Receive) Text color setting for the received charac-

ters.

0~255 (in 1 digit steps) p. 5-35

PSK Font Color (Transmit) Text color setting for the transmitted char-

acters.

0~255 (in 1 digit steps)

PSK Font Color (Time Stamp) Text color setting for the time stamp. 0~255 (in 1 digit steps)

PSK Font Color (TX Buffer) Text color setting in the TX buffer screen. 0~255 (in 1 digit steps)

ITEMS DESCRIPTIONS RANGE OR VALUE REF.

SCAN Speed Scan speed setting. LOW, HIGH p. 12-3

SCAN Resume Scan resume function setting. OFF, ON

ITEMS DESCRIPTIONS RANGE OR VALUE REF.

FFT Scope Waveform Type Waveform type setting for the FFT audio

scope.

Fill, Line p. 6-16

FFT Scope Waveform Color Waveform color setting for the FFT audio

scope.

0~255 (in 1 digit steps)

FFT Scope Waterfall Display Waterfall setting for the FFT audio scope. OFF, ON

Oscilloscope Waveform Color

Waveform color setting for the Oscilloscope.

0~255 (in 1 digit steps)



PSK DECODE SET



SCAN SET



AUDIO SCOPE SET

DECODE [F-3]



<MENU1> [F-1]



SET [F-6]

SCAN [F-5]



SET [F-7]

AUDIO [F-6]



SET [F-7]

ITEMS DESCRIPTIONS RANGE OR VALUE REF.

PSK Log PSK log use. OFF, ON p. 5-32

PSK Log File Type PSK log ﬁle saving format selection. Text, HTML

PSK Log Storage Media Storage media selection for saving a PSK

log ﬁle.

SD CARD, USB-Memory



PSK LOG SET

DECODE [F-3]



<MENU1> [F-1]



LOG [F-4]

2-7

SET MODE ITEMS

ITEMS DESCRIPTIONS RANGE OR VALUE REF.

SSB RX HPF/LPF HPF (High-Pass Filter)/LPF (Low-Pass Fil-

ter) cut-off frequency setting for the received

audio in SSB mode.

HPF 100Hz ~ 2000Hz

LPF 500Hz ~ 2400Hz

p. 15-4

SSB RX Tone (Bass) RX Tone level setting

for SSB.

Bass –5~+5 (in 1 digit steps)

SSB RX Tone (Treble) Treble

AM RX HPF/LPF HPF (High-Pass Filter)/LPF (Low-Pass Fil-

ter) cut-off frequency setting for the received

audio in AM mode.

HPF 100Hz ~ 2000Hz

LPF 500Hz ~ 2400Hz

AM RX Tone (Bass) RX Tone level setting

for AM.

Bass –5~+5 (in 1 digit steps)

AM RX Tone (Treble) Treble

FM RX HPF/LPF HPF (High-Pass Filter)/LPF (Low-Pass Fil-

ter) cut-off frequency setting for the received

audio in FM mode.

HPF 100Hz ~ 2000Hz

LPF 500Hz ~ 2400Hz

FM RX Tone (Bass) RX Tone level setting

for FM.

Bass –5~+5 (in 1 digit steps)

FM RX Tone (Treble) Treble

CW RX HPF/LPF HPF (High-Pass Filter)/LPF (Low-Pass Fil-

ter) cut-off frequency setting for the recep-

tion.

HPF 100Hz ~ 2000Hz

LPF 500Hz ~ 2400Hz

RTTY RX HPF/LPF

PSK RX HPF/LPF

SSB TX Tone (Bass) TX Tone level set-

ting.

Bass –5~+5 (in 1 digit steps)

SSB TX Tone (Treble) Treble

AM TX Tone (Bass) Bass

AM TX Tone (Treble) Treble

FM TX Tone (Bass) Bass p. 15-5

FM TX Tone (Treble) Treble

SSB TBW (WIDE) Transmission passband width setting for the

"WIDE" selection.

Lower freq. :

100, 200, 300 and 500 Hz

Higher freq. :

2500, 2700, 2800

and 2900 Hz

SSB TBW (MID) Transmission passband width setting for the

"MID" selection.

SSB TBW (NAR) Transmission passband width setting for the

"NAR" selection.

Speech Level Voice synthesizer audio output level set-

ting.

0~100% (in 1% steps)

Side Tone Level CW side tone output level setting. 0~100% (in 1% steps)

Side Tone Level Limit CW side tone output level limit function set-

ting.

OFF, ON

APF AF Level Audio output level setting while APF is

used.

0~+6 dB (in 1dB steps)

Beep Level Beep audio output level setting. 0~100% (in 1% steps)

Beep Level Limit Sets the limit of the beep output level. OFF, ON

Phones Level Ratio setting for audio output level from the

headphone toward to the internal speaker.

–15~+15 (in 1 digit steps)

Phone L/R Mix Main/Sub bands audio mix output setting to

the headphone.

OFF, ON



LEVEL SET

SET [F-7]



LEVEL [F-1]

2-8

SET MODE ITEMS

ITEMS DESCRIPTIONS RANGE OR VALUE REF.

ACC-A AF/SQL Output Select [A ACC1] Band selection for the

AF/SQL signal output.

MAIN, SUB p. 15-6

ACC-B AF/SQL Output Select [B ACC1]

ACC-A Output Select [A ACC1] Output signal setting. AF, IF

ACC-A AF/IF XFC Output (SPLIT

ON)

Band selection for the

AF/IF signal output while

holding down [XFC] dur-

ing the split operation.

MAIN, SUB

ACC-A AF Output Level AF Output Level setting. 0~100% (in 1% steps)

ACC-A AF SQL Squelch relation setting

when AF signal output

is set.

OFF(OPEN), ON

ACC-A AF Beep/Speech... Out-

put

Beep and voice synthe-

sizer audio output setting

when the AF signal out-

put is set.

OFF, ON

ACC-A IF Output Level IF Output Level setting. 0~100% (in 1% steps)

ACC-B Output Select [B ACC1] Output signal setting. AF, IF

ACC-B AF/IF XFC Output (SPLIT

ON)

Band selection for the

AF/IF signal output while

holding down [XFC] dur-

ing split operation.

MAIN, SUB

ACC-B AF Output Level AF Output Level setting 0~100% (in 1% steps)

ACC-B AF SQL Squelch relation setting

when the AF signal out-

put is set.

OFF(OPEN), ON

ACC-B AF Beep/Speech... Out-

put

Beep and voice synthe-

sizer audio output setting

when the AF signal out-

put is set.

OFF, ON p. 15-7

ACC-B IF Output Level IF Output Level setting. 0~100% (in 1% steps)

S/PDIF Output Select [S/P DIF] Output signal setting. AF, IF

S/PDIF AF/IF XFC Output (SPLIT

ON)

Band selection for the

AF/IF signal output while

holding down [XFC] dur-

ing split operation.

MAIN, SUB

S/PDIF AF Output Level AF Output Level setting. 0~100% (in 1% steps)

S/PDIF AF SQL Squelch relation setting

when the AF signal out-

put is set.

OFF(OPEN), ON

S/PDIF AF Beep/Speech... Out-

put

Beep and voice synthe-

sizer audio output setting

when the AF signal out-

put is set.

OFF, ON

S/PDIF IF Output Level IF Output Level setting. 0~100% (in 1% steps)



ACC SET

SET [F-7]



ACC [F-2]

2-9

SET MODE ITEMS

ITEMS DESCRIPTIONS RANGE OR VALUE REF.

USB Output Select [USB B] Output signal setting. AF, IF p. 15-7

USB AF/IF XFC Output (SPLIT

ON)

Band selection for the

AF/IF signal output while

holding down [XFC] dur-

ing split operation.

MAIN, SUB

USB AF Output Level AF Output Level setting. 0~100% (in 1% steps)

USB AF SQL Squelch relation setting

when the AF signal out-

put is set.

OFF(OPEN), ON

USB AF Beep/Speech... Output Beep and voice synthe-

sizer audio output setting

when the AF signal out-

put is set.

OFF, ON

USB IF Output Level IF Output Level setting. 0~100% (in 1% steps) p. 15-8

LAN Output Select [LAN] Output signal setting. AF, IF

LAN AF SQL Squelch relation setting

when the AF signal out-

put is set.

OFF(OPEN), ON

ACC-A MOD Level [A ACC1] Modulation signal input

level.

0~100% (in 1% steps)

ACC-B MOD Level [B ACC1]

S/PDIF MOD Level [S/P DIF]

USB MOD Level [USB B]

LAN MOD Level [LAN]

DATA OFF MOD Modulation input

connector selec-

tion.

When data mode is not

in use.

MIC,

ACC-A,

ACC-B,

MIC,ACC-A,

MIC,ACC-B,

ACC-A,ACC-B,

MIC,ACC-A,ACC-B,

S/PDIF,

USB,

LAN,

MIC,USB

DATA1 MOD When data 1 mode (D1)

is in use.

DATA2 MOD When data 2 mode (D2)

is in use.

DATA3 MOD When data 3 mode (D3)

is in use.

p. 15-9

ACC-A BAND Voltage Output [A ACC2] Band selection for the

band control signal.

MAIN, SUB, TX

ACC-B BAND Voltage Output [B ACC2]

SEND Relay Type SEND relay type setting. Reed, MOS-FET

External Meter Output (M) Output signal set-

ting from [METER].

MAIN Auto, S(MAIN), Po, SWR,

ALC, COMP, VD, ID

External Meter Output (S) SUB Auto, S(SUB), Po, SWR, ALC,

COMP, VD, ID

External Meter Level (M) MAIN 0~100% (in 1% steps) p. 15-10

External Meter Level (S) SUB

REF IN/OUT [REF I/O] Transceiver's reference

signal status setting.

IN, OFF, OUT

REF Adjust Internal reference signal

frequency adjustment.

0~100% (in 1% steps)

 ACC SET(Continued)

SET [F-7]



ACC [F-2]

2-10

SET MODE ITEMS

ITEMS DESCRIPTIONS RANGE OR VALUE REF.

LCD Unit Bright LCD unit brightness setting. 0 (dark) to 100% (bright) range

(in 1% steps)

p. 15-10

Backlight (Switches) Switch illumination brightness setting.

Display Type Screen image type setting. A, B,

50th Anniversary (Only IC-7850)

Display Font Frequency readout font setting.

Basic (1), Basic (2), Basic (3),

Italic (1), Italic (2), Italic (3),

Round (1), Round (2), Round (3)

Meter Response Standard and Edgewise meter needle re-

sponse speed setting.

SLOW, MID, FAST

Meter Type (Normal Screen) Meter type setting during normal screen. Standard, Edgewise, Bar

Meter Type (Expand Screen) Meter type setting during expanded screen

or mini scope is displayed.

Edgewise, Bar

Meter Peak Hold (Bar) The meter peak hold function setting. OFF, ON

Memory Name Memory name indication setting. OFF, ON

APF-Width Popup (APF OFF

ON)

Pop-up indication setting for the APF ﬁlter

width selection.

OFF, ON

MN-Q Popup (MN OFFON)

Pop-up indication setting for the manual

notch ﬁlter width selection.

OFF, ON

Screen Saver Function Screen saver function setting. OFF, 15, 30, 60 minutes p. 15-11

Screen Saver Type Screen saver type setting.

Bounce, Rotation, Twist, Sleep

External Display External monitor use. OFF, ON

External Display Resolution Screen resolution setting for the external

monitor.

800×480, 800×600

External Display Frame Rate

Shift

Frame rate shift setting for the external

monitor.

OFF, ON

External Display Sync Pulse Synchronous pulse level setting for the ex-

ternal monitor.

L, H

Opening Message

Opening message display setting.

OFF, ON

My Call Introductory text setting for the Opening

screen.



DISPLAY SET

SET [F-7]



DISP [F-3]

2-11

SET MODE ITEMS

ITEMS DESCRIPTIONS RANGE OR VALUE REF.

Date Date setting. Year 2000~2099,

Month/Day 1- 1~12-31

p. 15-12

Time (Now) Clock setting. 0:00~23:59

NTP Function NTP server client function setting. OFF, ON

NTP Server Address NTP server address setting.

UTC Offset Offset time setting from the UTC. –14:00~+14:00

(in 5 minute steps)

CLOCK2 Function Clock 2 indication setting. OFF, ON

CLOCK2 UTC Offset Clock 2 Offset time setting. –14:00~±0:00~+14:00

CLOCK2 Name Clock 2 name setting. Up to 3 characters



TIME SET

SET [F-7]



TIME [F-4]

ITEMS DESCRIPTIONS RANGE OR VALUE REF.

Calibration Marker Calibration marker setting. OFF, ON p. 15-13

Beep (Conﬁrmation) Conﬁrmation beep setting. OFF, ON

Beep (Band Edge) Band edge beep setting. OFF, ON (Default), ON (User),

ON (User) & TX Limit

Beep Sound (MAIN) MAIN Conﬁrmation beep audio

frequency setting.

500 ~2000 Hz (in 10Hz steps)

Beep Sound (SUB) SUB

TX Power Limit Transmit output power limit function setting. OFF, ON

TX Delay (HF) HF bands TX delay time setting for

the liner ampliﬁer opera-

tion.

OFF, 10, 15, 20, 25,

30 milliseconds

TX Delay (50M) 50 MHz band

Time-Out Timer (CI-V) Time-Out Timer function setting for the re-

mote or the [TRANSMIT] key operation.

OFF, 3, 5, 10, 20, 30 minutes

Quick Dualwatch Quick Dualwatch function setting. OFF, ON

Quick SPLIT Quick SPLIT function setting. OFF, ON

FM SPLIT Offset (HF) HF bands Offset frequency setting

for the Quick SPLIT func-

tion.

–9.999 ~ +9.999 MHz

(in 1 kHz steps)

p. 15-14

FM SPLIT Offset (50MHz) 50 MHz band

SPLIT LOCK Split Lock function setting. OFF, ON

Tuner (Auto Start) Automatic tuning start function setting for

the HF bands.

OFF, ON

Tuner (PTT Start) Automatic tuning start function with PTT

setting.

OFF, ON

Tuner Preset Memory Clear Antenna selection for the tuner preset mem-

ory clearing.

ANT1, ANT2, ANT3, ANT4,

ALL



OTHERS SET

SET [F-7]



OTHERS [F-5]

2-12

SET MODE ITEMS

ITEMS DESCRIPTIONS RANGE OR VALUE REF.

Transverter Function Transverter function setting. ON, Auto p. 15-14

Transverter Offset Offset frequency setting for the transverter

operation.

0.000 to 99.999 MHz

(in 1 kHz steps)

RTTY Mark Frequency RTTY mark frequency setting. 1275, 1615, 2125 (Hz)

RTTY Shift Width RTTY shift width setting. 170, 200, 425 (Hz)

RTTY Keying Polarity RTTY keying polarity setting. Normal, Reverse

PSK Tone Frequency PSK tone frequency setting. 1000, 1500, 2000 (Hz)

SPEECH Language Speech language setting for the voice syn-

thesizer.

English, Japanese

SPEECH Speed Speech speed setting for the voice synthe-

sizer.

LOW, HIGH

SPEECH S-Level S-Level announcement setting for the voice

synthesizer.

OFF, ON

SPEECH [MODE] Switch Operating mode speech setting when a

mode switch is pushed.

OFF, ON p. 15-15

Memo Pad Quantity Number of memo pad channel setting. 5, 10

MAIN DIAL Operation [MAIN DIAL] accessible band setting. MAIN, MAIN/SUB

MAIN DIAL Auto TS Automatic tuning step function setting for

[MAIN DIAL].

OFF, LOW, HIGH

SUB DIAL Auto TS Automatic tuning step function setting for

[SUB DIAL].

MAIN/SUB Tracking [MAIN] SW Assigns the Main/Sub band tracking func-

tion to the [MAIN] key.

OFF, ON

MIC Up/Down Speed Rate setting for frequency change when the

microphone's [UP]/[DN] switches are held

down.

LOW, HIGH

Quick RIT/∂TX Clear RIT/∂TX frequency quick clearing function

setting.

OFF, ON

[NOTCH] Switch (SSB) for SSB mode Selectable notch

type setting.

Auto, Manual, Auto/Manual

[NOTCH] Switch (AM) for AM mode

DIGI-SEL VR Operation Controllable function setting for the [DIGI-

SEL] control.

DIGI-SEL, APF

FILTER Screen MAIN/SUB Se-

lect

FILTER Screen MAIN/SUB band select set-

ting.

Fix, Auto (by FILTER,PBT Op-

eration)

p. 15-16

SSB/CW Synchronous Tuning Displayed frequency shift setting when op-

erating mode is toggled between SSB and

CW.

OFF, ON

 OTHERS SET(Continued)

SET [F-7]



OTHERS [F-5]

2-13

SET MODE ITEMS

ITEMS DESCRIPTIONS RANGE OR VALUE REF.

CW Normal Side Carrier point setting for the CW mode op-

eration.

LSB, USB p. 15-16

APF Type Audio ﬁlter shape setting for APF. SOFT, SHARP

MIC AF Out Band selection for audio output from [MIC]

(pin 8).

MAIN+SUB, SUB

MIC Input DC Bias Bias voltage setting for modulation input line

([MIC] pin 1).

OFF, ON

External Keypad (VOICE)

[EXT KEYPAD] (rear

panel), or [MIC] (front

panel)

Voice memory trans-

mission setting for

an external keypad.

OFF, ON

External Keypad (KEYER) Memory keyer trans-

mission setting for

an external keypad.

External Keypad (RTTY) RTTY memory trans-

mission setting for

an external keypad.

External Keypad (PSK) PSK memory trans-

mission setting for

an external keypad.

Keyboard [F1]–[F8] (VOICE) [USB A] (rear panel) Voice memory trans-

mission for the con-

nected keyboard

([F1]~[F8] keys).

OFF, ON p. 15-17

Keyboard [F1]–[F8] (KEYER) Memory keyer trans-

mission for the con-

nected keyboard

([F1]~[F8] keys).

Screen Capture [POWER] SW Assigns the Screen capture function to the

[POWER] key.

OFF, ON

Screen Capture Keyboard [Print

Screen]

Assigns the Screen capture function to

[Print Screen] key on the USB keyboard.

Screen Capture Storage Media Storage media setting for the captured

screen image ﬁle to save.

SD CARD, USB-Memory

Screen Capture Data Format Saving ﬁle format setting for the captured

screen image ﬁle.

PNG, BMP

Shutdown Function Shutdown option selection for the remote

power control.

Shutdown,

Standby/Shutdown

CI-V Baud Rate CI-V data transfer speed setting. 4800, 9600, 19200 (bps), Auto

CI-V Address Transceiver's address setting for the CI-V

remote control.

02h~8Eh~DFh p. 15-18

CI-V Transceive Transceive function setting for the CI-V re-

mote control.

OFF, ON

CI-V USB/LANREMOTE Trans-

ceive Address

CI-V address setting for the 2nd transceiv-

er or receiver controlled by the transceive

function.

00h~DFh

 OTHERS SET(Continued)

SET [F-7]



OTHERS [F-5]

2-14

SET MODE ITEMS

ITEMS DESCRIPTIONS RANGE OR VALUE REF.

CI-V Output (for ANT) Antenna controller Status data output set-

ting.

OFF, ON p. 15-18

CI-V USB Port Link setting for CI-V signal line between

[USB B] and [REMOTE].

Link to [REMOTE], Unlink from

[REMOTE]

CI-V USB Baud Rate CI-V data transfer speed setting for the re-

mote control through [USB B].

4800, 9600, 19200, 38400,

57600, 115200 (bps), Auto

CI-V USB Echo Back Echo back setting for the remote control

through [USB B].

OFF, ON

Decode Baud Rate Decode data transfer speed setting for

RTTY and PSK operation.

4800, 9600, 19200, 38400

(bps)

USB SEND Data line setting for the SEND control

through [USB B].

OFF, USB1 DTR, USB1 RTS,

USB2 DTR, USB2 RTS

USB Keying (CW) Data line setting for the CW keying control

through [USB B].

p. 15-19

USB Keying (RTTY) Data line setting for the RTTY (FSK) keying

control through [USB B].

Keyboard Type Language setting for the keyboard. English, Japanese,

United Kingdom, French,

French (Canadian), German,

Portuguese,

Portuguese (Brazilian),

Spanish,

Spanish (Latin American),

Italian

Keyboard Repeat Delay Keyboard repeat delay time setting. 100 ~ 1000 milliseconds

(in 50 milliseconds steps)

Keyboard Repeat Rate Keyboard repeat rate setting. 2.0 ~ 30.0 cps

Mouse Pointer Speed Mouse pointer speed setting. SLOW, MID, FAST

Mouse Pointer Acceleration Mouse Pointer Acceleration setting. OFF, ON

DHCP (Valid after Reboot) DHCP server client setting. OFF, ON

USB DIAL Select Selects the Sub band or Main and Sub band

to operate on the RC-28’s main dial.

SUB Only, MAIN/SUB

USB DIAL Auto TS Automatic tuning step function setting on

the RC-28’s main dial.

OFF, LOW, HIGH

USB DIAL [TRANSMIT] Switch Selects the key action for the [TRANSMIT]

key on the RC-28.

Push to toggle, Hold down to

transmit

IP Address (Valid after Reboot) Transceiver's IP address setting for IP re-

mote control.

Subnet Mask (Valid after Reboot) Subnet mask setting for the IP remote con-

trol.

p. 15-20

Default Gateway (Valid after Re-

boot)

Default gateway setting for the IP remote

control.

Primary DNS Server (Valid after

Reboot)

Primary DNS (Domain Name System) serv-

er address setting for the IP remote control.

 OTHERS SET(Continued)

SET [F-7]



OTHERS [F-5]

2-15

SET MODE ITEMS

ITEMS DESCRIPTIONS RANGE OR VALUE REF.

2nd DNS Server (Valid after Re-

boot)

Secondary DNS (Domain Name System)

server address setting for the IP remote

control.

p. 15-20

Network Name Network name setting for the optional RS-

BA1 operation.

Up to 15 characters

Network Control (Valid after Re-

boot)

Remote control setting for the optional RS-

BA1 operation.

OFF, ON

Control Port (UDP) (Valid after

Reboot)

Control port number setting for the optional

RS-BA1 operation.

Serial Port (UDP) (Valid after Re-

boot)

Serial port number setting for the optional

RS-BA1 operation.

Audio Port (UDP) (Valid after Re-

boot)

Audio port number setting for the optional

RS-BA1 operation.

p. 15-21

Internet Access Line (Valid after

Reboot)

Internet access line setting for the IP remote

control.

FTTH, ADSL/CATV

Network User1/2/3 ID User ID setting for the IP remote control op-

eration.

Up to 16 characters

Network User1/2/3 Password Password setting for the IP remote control

operation.

At least 8 characters, up to 16

characters

Network User1/2/3 Administrator Administrative privileges setting for the IP

remote control operation.

NO, YES

Network Radio Name Radio name setting for the optional RS-BA1

operation.

Up to 16 characters

 OTHERS SET(Continued)

SET [F-7]



OTHERS [F-5]

2-16

SET MODE ITEMS

ITEMS DESCRIPTIONS RANGE OR VALUE REF.

Load Contents Loading contents setting. All, Select p. 10-4

ANT Memory Antenna memory load setting. YES, NO

REF IN/OUT, REF Adjust, Filter

CAL

Reference frequency signal, Reference fre-

quency adjustment value, and 1.2 kHz ﬁlter

calibration value load setting.

YES, NO

CI-V Address CI-V address load setting. YES, NO

Other Memory & Settings Other memory and set items status load set-

ting.

YES

Voice TX Memory TX voice memory load setting. YES, NO

Voice RX Memory RX voice memory load setting. YES, NO

ITEMS DESCRIPTIONS RANGE OR VALUE REF.

SAVE Contents Saving contents setting. All, Select p. 10-4

Memory & Settings Memory and set items status save setting. YES

Voice TX Memory TX voice memory save setting. YES, NO

Voice RX Memory RX voice memory save setting. YES, NO

SAVE Form Selects the ﬁle saving format. Now Ver, Old Ver (xxx – xxx)



LOAD SET



SAVE SET

SET [F-7]



SD/USB [F-7]



LOAD [F-1]

SET [F-7]



SD/USB [F-7]



SAVE [F-2]

ITEMS DESCRIPTIONS RANGE OR VALUE REF.

ANT2 Type [ANT2] Antenna usage setting. OFF, TX/RX p. 13-4

ANT3 Type [ANT3]

ANT4 Type [ANT4] OFF, TX/RX, RX



ANT TYPE

Multi function key [ANT](≈)



ANT TYPE [F-7]

2-17

SET MODE ITEMS

ITEMS DESCRIPTIONS RANGE OR VALUE REF.

HF SSB (600Hz – ) HF bands SSB mode Filter shape setting when

600 Hz or narrower width

is set.

SHARP, SOFT p. 7-9

HF SSB-D (600Hz – ) SSB-D mode

HF CW ( – 500Hz) CW mode Filter shape setting when

500 Hz or narrower width

is set.

HF CW (600Hz – ) Filter shape setting when

600 Hz or wider width is

set.

50M SSB (600Hz – ) 50 MHz

band

SSB mode Filter shape setting when

600 Hz or wider width is

set.

50M SSB-D (600Hz – ) SSB-D mode

50M CW ( – 500Hz) CW mode Filter shape setting when

500 Hz or narrower width

is set.

50M CW (600Hz – ) Filter shape setting when

600 Hz or wider width is

set.



FILTER SHAPE SET

[FILTER]



SHAPE [F-7]

ITEMS DESCRIPTIONS RANGE OR VALUE REF.

VOX Delay VOX delay time setting. 0.0 ~ 2.0 sec.

(in 0.1 sec. steps)

p. 8-3

VOX Voice Delay VOX voice delay setting for VOX operation. OFF, Short, Mid, Long

ITEMS DESCRIPTIONS RANGE OR VALUE REF.

NB Depth Noise blanker depth level setting 1~10 (in 1 digit steps) p. 7-11

NB Width Noise blanker pulse width setting. 1~100 (in 1 digit steps)



VOX



[VOX/BK-IN]

[NB]

3-1

INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS Section 3

CAUTION: The transceiver weights approximately 23.5 kg

(52 lb). Always have two people available to carry, lift or turn

over the transceiver.

 Unpacking ……………………………………………………………… 3-2

 Selecting a location …………………………………………………… 3-2

 Grounding ……………………………………………………………… 3-2

 Attaching the rack mounting handle ………………………………… 3-2

 Connecting antenna …………………………………………………… 3-3

 Required connections ………………………………………………… 3-4

D Front panel (Electronic keyer and microphone) ………………… 3-4

D Rear panel (Basic connection) …………………………………… 3-4

 Advanced connections ………………………………………………… 3-5

D Front panel (Microphone, headphones and SD card) …………… 3-5

D Rear panel (Optional products and external equipment) ……… 3-5

D Rear panel (Optional products and external equipment) ……… 3-6

D Rear panel (External keypad and meter) ………………………… 3-6

 Linear amplifier connections ………………………………………… 3-7

D Connecting the IC-PW1/EURO …………………………………… 3-7

D Connecting a non-Icom linear amplifier …………………………… 3-7

 FSK and AFSK (SSTV) connections ………………………………… 3-8

 Microphones (optional products) ……………………………………… 3-9

D SM-50 ………………………………………………………………… 3-9

D SM-30 ………………………………………………………………… 3-9

D HM-36 ………………………………………………………………… 3-10

 Connecting the RC-28 (optional product) …………………………… 3-10

3-2

INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS

 Unpacking

After unpacking, immediately report any damage to

the delivering carrier or dealer. Keep the shipping car-

tons.

For a description and a diagram of accessory equip-

ment included with the transceiver, see ‘Supplied ac-

cessories’ on page vii of this manual.

 Selecting a location

Select a location for the transceiver that allows ade-

quate air circulation, free from extreme heat, cold, or

vibrations, and away from TV sets, TV antenna ele-

ments, radios and other electromagnetic sources.

The base of the transceiver has optional angled front

feet for desktop use. If desired, place the optional feet

over the standard feet. Be sure the angle of the bottom

of the feet are such that the front of the transceiver is

angled up, and is stable.

 Grounding

To prevent electrical shock, television interference

(TVI), broadcast interference (BCI) and other prob-

lems, ground the transceiver through the GROUND

terminal on the rear panel.

For best results, connect a heavy gauge wire or strap

to a long earth-sunk copper rod. Make the distance

between the [GND] terminal and ground as short as

possible.

R WARNING! NEVER connect the [GND] ter-

minal to a gas or electric pipe, since the connection

could cause an explosion or electric shock.

 Attaching the rack mounting handle

Remove the two screws from each side of the front

panel and the one screw from each side of the side

panel. Attach the rack mounting handles to the sides

of the transceiver using only the supplied accessory

screws.

CAUTION: NEVER put the transceiver’s rearpanel

side down after lifting up the transceiver by holding

rack mounting handle. This may scratch the surface

of the place or damage the connectors on the trans-

ceiver’s rear panel.

M4×9

M4×15

3-3

INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS

 Connecting antenna

For radio communications, the antenna is of critical

importance, along with the output power and receiver

sensitivity. Select antennas, such as a well-matched

50 Ω antenna, and feedline.

If you use only one antenna, connect it to the [ANT1]

connector.

CAUTION: Protect your transceiver from light-

ning by using a lightning arrestor.

 Main dial attachment

The Main dial is shipped unattached to the transceiver

to prevent possible damage to the dial shaft or rotary

encoder during shipping. Please attach the dial as de-

scribed below.

q Slide the dial brake adjustment to the right posi-

tion.

• The dial brakes move inward as shown.

w Insert the Main dial set-screw into the screw hole of

the Main dial, then tighten the screw until the screw

extends into the shaft hole out slightly using sup-

plied hexagonal wrench (2 mm).

• Be careful that the screw does not extend out more than

1 mm (0.04 in).

e Attach the Main dial as illustrated.

• Be careful to match the correct orientation of the flat

face of the shaft and the screw hole of the dial knob.

r Tighten the screw using supplied hexagonal wrench

as illustrated.

t Install the rubber cover to the Main dial little by lit-

tle.

• Be careful to match the correct position of the convex

part of the rubber cover and the concave part of the dial

knob.

• Never install the rubber cover on the Main dial by force.

This may cause damage to the dial shaft or rotary en-

coder.

Dial brake adjusting lever

Dial brake

Less than 1mm (0.04 in)

set-screw

Screw hole

Shaft hole

3-4

INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS

 Required connections

D Front panel (Electronic keyer and microphone)

D Rear panel (Basic connection)

Microphones (pp. 3-9, 3-10)

CW key

A straight or bug key can be used when the

internal electronic keyer is turned OFF in

keyer set mode. (p. 5-13)

Optional

HM-36

Optional

SM-50

Optional

SM-30

Straight key

Antenna 1, 2, 3, 4 (p. 13-2)

Ground

(p. 3-2)

Use the heaviest gauge

wire or strap available and

make the connection as

short as possible.

Grounding prevents

electrical shock, TVI and

other problems.

AC outlet

R WARNING!

Use only the supplied

AC power cable.

NOTE: Attach the sup-

plied antenna connec-

tor cap when no anten-

na or external equip-

ment is connected.

[Example]: ANT1 for the 1.8–18 MHz bands, ANT 2 for the 21–28 bands

ANT3 for the 50 MHz band, and ANT 4 for a receive antenna.

3-5

INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS

 Advanced connections

D Front panel (Microphone, headphones and SD card)

D Rear panel (Optional products and external equipment)

Headphones

MIC

External equipment for AFSK opera-

tion (p. 3-8), or an external keypad (p.

20-3) can also be connected to [MIC].

SD card

Impedance: 8 Ω~16 Ω

External speaker (p. 20-5)

ACC sockets

(p. 20-2)

Antenna 1, 2, 3, 4 (p. 13-2)

Connects to a linear amplifier,

antenna selector, and so on.

[X-VERTER]

Connects to a trans-

verter for VHF, UHF or

other bands.

[RELAY], [ALC] (p.3-7)

Used to connect to a

non-Icom linear amplifier.

SP-34 (optional)

Impedance:

4Ω~8Ω

[REMOTE] (p. 20-5)

Used for remote control and trans-

ceive operation.

The optional CT-17 is required when

connecting a PC to [REMOTE].

3-6

INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS

 Advanced connections (Continued)

D Rear panel (Optional products and external equipment)

External Display

Connects to a PC-style

monitor display. (DVI-I)

Connects to a USB device such as keyboard, mouse, hub, memory (USB flash drive),

or optional RC-28.

• Turn OFF the transceiver’s power before connecting or disconnecting a USB device.

• Do not connect two devices of the same type. (example: Connecting two USB mice.)

• The following devices are not supported.

Multimedia adaptor, USB HDD, Bluetooth

mouse, Bluetooth

keyboard,

a USB flash drive of more than 32 GB.

Connects to a PC

for remote control

through a LAN or

the Internet using

the RS-BA1, or

for updating the

CPU firmware.

Ethernet connector (p. 18-2)

USB PORT

External keypad

Connects to an external keypad for voice memory, memory

keyer, PSK memory and RTTY memory content transmission.

(p. 20-4)

✔For your information:

An external keypad can also be connected

to the microphone connector on the front

panel. See page 20-3 for details.

[METER]

Main band

meter

Sub band

meter

D Rear panel (External keypad and meter)

3-7

INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS

 Linear amplifier connections

D Connecting the IC-PW1/EURO

D Connecting a non-Icom linear ampliﬁer

R WARNING!

Set the transceiver output power and linear ampli-

fier ALC output level referring to the linear amplifier

instruction manual.

The ALC input level must be in the range 0 V to

–4 V. The transceiver does not accept positive volt-

age. Non-matched ALC and RF power settings

could cause a fire or damage the linear amplifier.

The maximum control level of [RELAY] jack

is 16 V/0.5 A DC with the initial setting, and

250 V/200 mA with the “MOS-FET” setting (see p.

20-4 for details). Use an external relay unit when

your non-Icom linear amplifier requires a control

voltage and/or current greater than specified.

When using a linear amplifier that has a time delay

between receiving and transmitting, a high SWR

might cause the linear amplifier to malfunction. To

prevent this, slow the TX Delay the “TX Delay (HF),

(50M)” settings in the Others Set mode. (p. 15-13)

SET (F-7) > OTHERS (F-5) > TX Delay (HF), (50M)

To an

antenna

ACC-1

ANT

ANT2

ANT1

ACC 2

INPUT1

INPUT2

REMOTE

EXCITER

1&2

GND

IC-PW1/EURO

AC outlet

(Non-European versions : 100–120/220–240 V

European version: 230 V)

Ground

Transceiver

REMOTE

Remote control cable

(supplied with the IC-PW1/EURO)

ACC cable

(supplied with the IC-PW1/EURO)

Be sure to connect

the cable to the 7-pin

ACC 2 jack.

Coaxial cable*

*Optional

Connect [INPUT2]

if necessary

Coaxial cable

(supplied with the

IC-PW1/EURO)

RF OUTPUT RF INPUT

ALC

SEND

50 Ω

coaxial

cable

Transceiver

ANT1

ALC

RELAY

To an

antenna

Non-Icom linear amplifier

3-8

INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS

 FSK and AFSK (SSTV) connections

The transceiver has a Modem function for RTTY and

PSK. However, if you want to use a PC to operate

these digital modes, it is necessary to prepare the fol-

lowing interface circuit, or use a similar 3rd party de-

vice.

Refer to the instruction manual for the device prior to

connecting it.

[USB B] port

To USB port

USB cable (Purchase separately)

(2) When using the ACC socket or the microphone connector

(1) When using the USB port

８

２

７

６

１

３

５

４

CE B

No connection

Shield cable

2 k˘㸸2 k˘

10 k˘

2 k˘：2 k˘

ACC1

10 k˘

4.7 k˘

RTS

GND

10 k˘

(Trimpot)

10 k˘

(Trimpot)

Connection to

COM port of PC

D-Sub25

D-Sub9

Pin 4

Pin 7

Pin 5

Pin 2

Pin 3

Shield cable

CE B

TXD

The sections shown in squares are required

only when Baudot RTTY is used in FSK (RTTY) mode.

(Other digital mode operations such as SSTV or PSK are not required.)

*1 NPN transistor

(2SC1815)

(Rear panel view)

(Front panel view)

¡When connecting to [ACC1]

¡When connecting to [MIC]

*2 switching diode

(1S1588)

*3 Connect to [C] when using ACC1.

Connect to [F] when using the microphone connector.

Example interface circuit for digital modes

(Not provided by Icom)

Connection to

LINE IN or MIC

IN of PC

Connection to

SP OUT of PC

NOTE:

You cannot operate RTTY

(FSK) operation when you

connect the circuit to the

microphone connector.

Set a USB condition on the "USB keying (RTTY)" set-

ting when operating RTTY. (p. 15-19)

3-9

INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS

 Microphones (optional products)

D SM-50

D SM-30

MIC GAIN

ONOFF

LOW CUT

MIC GAIN

TOP VIEW

BOTTOM VIEW

q PTT SWITCH

Hold down to transmit, release to receive.

w PTT LOCK SWITCH

Push to lock the PTT switch in the transmit mode.

e UP/DOWN SWITCHES [UP]/[DN]

Change the selected readout frequency or memory

channel.

• Holding down continuously changes the frequency or

memory channel.

• While holding down [XFC], the transmit readout frequen-

cy can be controlled while in the split frequency mode.

• The [UP]/[DN] switch can simulate a key paddle. Preset

in the keyer set mode. (p. 5-13)

r LOW CUT SWITCH

Push (SM-50)/Slide (SM-30) to cut out the low fre-

quency components of input voice signals.

t PTT LOCK INDICATOR [LOCK]

(Only for the SM-30)

Lights red when the PTT lock switch (w) is ON.

y MIC GAIN VOLUME [MIC GAIN]

Rotate to adjust the microphone output level.

• Use this control as an addition to the microphone gain

setting of the transceiver.

Rotating the control too far clockwise may result

in an output level that is too high and transmit

signal distortion.

3-10

INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS

 Microphones (optional products) (Continued)

D HM-36

q PTT SWITCH

Hold down to transmit, release to receive.

w UP/DOWN SWITCHES [UP]/[DN]

Change the selected readout frequency or memory

channel.

• Holding down continuously changes the frequency or

memory channel.

• While holding down [XFC], the transmit readout frequen-

cy can be controlled while in the split frequency mode.

• The [UP]/[DN] switch can simulate a key paddle. Preset

in the keyer Set mode. (p. 5-13)

 Connecting the RC-28 (optional product)

[USB A] port

RC-28

USB cable

(supplied with the RC-28)

The optional RC-28 remote encoder can be used as

a remote control dial.

NOTE:

• See the RC-28’s manual to use the RC-28 with the

RS-BA1 ip remote control software.

• Using the RC-28 with other than the USB cable

supplied with the RC-28, or connecting it through a

USB hub, is not guaranteed by Icom.

D Using the RC-28

[TRANSMIT] LED

Lights while transmitting.

[LINK] LED

Lights while the RC-28 is connected to

the transceiver.

Main dial

Changes the Sub band’s operating

frequency (default).

[F-1]/[F-2] LEDs*

[F1] lights when operating the Main band,

and [F-2] lights when operating the Sub

band.

[F-1]/[F-2] buttons*

Selects the Main band or Sub band to

operate with the Main dial.

[TRANSMIT] button

Push to switch between transmit and

receive.

* The [F-1] and [F-2] buttons are disabled when “USB

Dial Select” is set to “SUB Only.”

• Setting the “USB DIAL Select” to “MAIN/SUB” en-

ables you to operate both the Main band and the Sub

band, using the RC-28.

(SET [F-7] > OTHERS [F-5] > USB DIAL Select)

4-1

BASIC OPERATION Section 4

 When ﬁrst applying power …………………………………………… 4-2

 Power ON ……………………………………………………………… 4-3

D Resetting the CPU (initial setup) …………………………………… 4-3

 Adjusting the Audio level ……………………………………………… 4-4

 Adjusting the Squelch level …………………………………………… 4-4

 Adjusting the RF gain ………………………………………………… 4-4

 Selecting the Main and Sub bands …………………………………… 4-5

 Selecting the VFO or Memory mode ………………………………… 4-5

 Selecting an operating band…………………………………………… 4-6

D Using the band stacking registers ………………………………… 4-6

 Setting the frequency ………………………………………………… 4-7

D Tuning with [DIAL] …………………………………………………… 4-7

D About the Quick tuning step ………………………………………… 4-7

D Selecting the Fine tuning function ………………………………… 4-8

D About the Auto tuning step function ……………………………… 4-8

D About the 1⁄4 tuning step function ………………………………… 4-9

D Entering the frequency with the keypad …………………………… 4-9

 Selecting the Operating mode ………………………………………… 4-10

 Selecting the Meter readout …………………………………………… 4-11

D Digital multi-function meter ………………………………………… 4-11

D Selecting the meter type …………………………………………… 4-12

 Dial lock function ……………………………………………………… 4-12

 Basic transmit operation ……………………………………………… 4-13

D Transmitting …………………………………………………………4-13

D Adjusting the microphone gain …………………………………… 4-13

D Adjusting the drive gain ……………………………………………4-14

D Transmit power limit ………………………………………………… 4-14

 Band edge warning beep ……………………………………………… 4-15

D Entering the user band edge ……………………………………… 4-16

 About the 5 MHz frequency band operation (USA version only) …4-18

4-2

BASIC OPERATION

wer

!2 !3 !4 !5 !6 !7

No. Control Position No. Control Position

DELAY control Fully counterclockwise

MONI GAIN control 12 o'clock

KEY SPEED control

Fully counterclockwise

COMP control 12 o'clock

RF PWR control Fully clockwise

DRIVE control 12 o'clock

MIC control 12 o'clock

VOX GAIN control 12 o'clock

AGC control 12 o'clock

ANTI VOX control 12 o'clock

SQL control Fully counterclockwise

CONTRAST control 12 o'clock

NR control Fully counterclockwise

BRIGHT control 12 o'clock

NB control Fully counterclockwise

CW PITCH control 12 o'clock

AF control Fully counterclockwise

NOTCH control 12 o'clock

RF control Fully clockwise

DIGI-SEL control 12 o'clock

All keys of this transceiver are non lock type.

When turned ON, the transceiver starts with all keys' status as they were previously set. However, the [TRANSMIT]

key always in the OFF (receive) condition at power ON.



When ﬁrst applying power

Before ﬁrst applying power, conﬁrm the following con-

nections or settings:

• Antennas are properly connected. (p. 3-4)

• A ground wire is properly connected. (p. 3-2)

• External devices such as a liner ampliﬁer, if used, are

properly connected. (pp. 3-5~3-7).

• All controls are set as shown below.

4-3

BASIC OPERATION



Power ON

q Push [I/O] on the rear panel to turn ON the main

power.

• The transceiver power is still OFF but the [POWER] indi-

cator lights orange.

• When ﬁ rst applying power, refer to the ‘Resetting the

CPU (initial setup).’

w Push [POWER] on the front panel.

• The transceiver’s power is ON, and the power indicator

lights blue.

• After 4 seconds, the transceiver displays the Opening

screen, and then displays the initial screen.

• To turn OFF the power, hold down [POWER] for 1 sec-

ond.

• If you don’t operate the transceiver for a long period of

time, turn OFF the main power.

NOTE:

Before turning OFF the main power, make sure the

transceiver’s power is OFF and the [POWER] indica-

tor lights orange.

D Resetting the CPU (initial setup)

Before ﬁ rst applying power, if a malfunction occurs, or

you want to return the transceiver to the original set-

tings, reset the transceiver using the following proce-

dure.

 While holding down [F-INP] and [MW], push [POW-

ER] to turn ON the power.

• The transceiver’s power is ON, and the power indicator

lights blue.

• After “ALL CLEAR” is displayed, the transceiver displays

the initial screen.

[I/O]

[POWER] indicator

[POWER]

[POWER] indicator

[POWER] [F-INP] [MW]

• Opening screen • Opening screen (with opening message)

4-4

BASIC OPERATION



Adjusting the Audio level

 Rotate the [AF] control to adjust the audio output

level.

• Set a suitable audio level.

Independently adjust the Main and Sub bands.



Adjusting the RF gain

The [RF] control adjusts the receiver sensitivity. This is

usually set for maximum sensitivity (maximum clock-

wise).

When you rotate the [RF] control counterclockwise, the

receive sensitivity decreases. At this time, the S-meter

indicates the relative sensitivity level.

If you do not want to receive signals or noises from

a nearby strong station, rotate the [RF] control to the

point the just a little lower than the S-meter level.

Independently adjust the Main and Sub bands.



Adjusting the Squelch level

Noise squelch:

In the FM mode, rotate the [SQL] control and adjust to

the point where the noise just disappears and the RX

indicator goes OFF.

The noise squelch works only in the FM mode.

S-meter squelch:

The S-meter squelch disables the audio output from

the speaker or headphones when the received signal

is weaker than the speciﬁed level.

Rotate the [SQL] control clockwise from the 12 o’clock

position to adjust the S-meter level (threshold level).

The S-meter squelch works in all modes.

Independently adjust the Main and Sub bands.

[AF] MAIN, SUB

[SQL] MAIN, SUB

S-meter squelch

Noise squelch

Squelch is

open

S-meter squelchSquelch is

open

• In the FM mode

•

In other than the FM mode

(SSB/CW/RTTY/PSK/AM)

[RF] MAIN, SUB

4-5

BASIC OPERATION



Selecting the Main and Sub bands



Selecting the VFO or Memory mode

[MAIN] [SUB]

VFO indicator

Memory channel

number

[V/M]

This transceiver has 2 identical receivers, Main and

Sub. The Main band is displayed on the left hand side,

and the Sub band is displayed on the right hand side

of the LCD. Some functions can only be applied to the

selected band, and transmission occurs on only the

Main band (except during split frequency operation).

 Push [MAIN] to select the Main band.

• The key backlight for [MAIN] lights.

• The Main band’s frequency readout is highlighted.

 Push [SUB] to select the Sub band.

• The key backlight for [SUB] lights.

• The Sub band’s frequency readout is highlighted.

 Push [V/M] to toggle between the VFO and Memory

modes.

• “VFO” appears when in the VFO mode, and the selected

memory channel number appears when in the Memory

mode.

• Hold down [V/M] for 1 second to transfer the contents of

the selected memory channel to the VFO. (p. 11-5)

4-6

BASIC OPERATION



Selecting an operating band

The triple band stacking register provides three mem-

ories for each band to store frequencies and operating

modes.

If a band key is pushed once, the last used frequency

and operating mode are called up. When the key is

pushed again, the next previous stored frequency and

operating mode are called up.

• Push the band key that corresponds to the desired

operating bands [1.8]~[50] to select the amateur

band.

• The frequency and operating mode are memorized

into the band register of the selected frequency.

See the table below for a list of the selectable frequency

bands and their default frequency and mode settings.

D Using the band stacking registers

[Example: Operating in the 21 MHz band]

q Push the [21] key, and then select a frequency and/

or operating mode.

• The selected frequency and operating mode are memo-

rized in the ﬁrst band stacking register for that band.

w Push [21] again, and then select another frequency

and/or operating mode.

• The selected frequency and operating mode are memo-

rized in the second band stacking register.

e Push [21] again, and then select another frequency

and/or operating mode.

• The selected frequency and operating mode are memo-

rized in the third band stacking register.

r Push other band keys, and then push [21] again.

• The last used frequency and operating mode in the 21

MHz band are displayed.

• Each push of [21] selects the next band staking regis-

ter.

Band keys

BAND REGISTER 1 REGISTER 2 REGISTER 3

1.8 MHz 1.900000 MHz CW 1.910000 MHz CW 1.915000 MHz CW

3.5 MHz 3.550000 MHz LSB 3.560000 MHz LSB 3.580000 MHz LSB

7 MHz 7.050000 MHz LSB 7.060000 MHz LSB 7.020000 MHz CW

10 MHz 10.120000 MHz CW 10.130000 MHz CW 10.140000 MHz CW

14 MHz 14.100000 MHz USB 14.200000 MHz USB 14.050000 MHz CW

18 MHz 18.100000 MHz USB 18.130000 MHz USB 18.150000 MHz USB

21 MHz 21.200000 MHz USB 21.300000 MHz USB 21.050000 MHz CW

24 MHz 24.950000 MHz USB 24.980000 MHz USB 24.900000 MHz CW

28 MHz 28.500000 MHz USB 29.500000 MHz USB 28.100000 MHz CW

50 MHz 50.100000 MHz USB 50.200000 MHz USB 51.000000 MHz FM

General* 15.000000 MHz USB 15.100000 MHz USB 15.200000 MHz USB

* The “General” band stores the frequencies that are out of the frequency ranges of the other bands, [1.8]~[50].

4-7

BASIC OPERATION



Setting the frequency

The transceiver has several setting methods for conve-

nient frequency setting.

D Tuning with [DIAL]

q Select the desired band with the band keys.

w Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to set the desired frequency in

the Main band.

Rotate [SUB DIAL] to set the desired frequency in

the Sub band.

 CONVENIENT!

The [SUB DIAL] is always ready to tune the Sub band.

The Sub dial allows you to quickly tune the Sub band

without changing from Main to Sub.

[MAIN DIAL] [SUB DIAL]

Band keys

D About the Quick tuning step

The operating frequency can be changed in kHz steps

for quick tuning. The Quick tuning function can be inde-

pendently set for the Main and Sub bands.

• Tuning

q Push [TS].

• “” is displayed and the Quick tuning function is turned

ON.

w Rotate [MAIN DIAL].

• The frequency changes in kHz steps.

e Push [TS] again.

• “” disappears and the Quick tuning function is turned

OFF.

• Selecting the desired “kHz” step

q Push [TS].

• “” is displayed and the Quick tuning function is turned

ON.

w Hold down [TS] for 1 second.

• The TS screen is displayed.

e Push the desired Mode key.

• The operating mode is selected.

r Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select a tuning step.

• Selectable tuning steps:

0.1, 1, 5, 9, 10, 12.5, 20, or 25 kHz

• Push [DEF](F) for 1 second to return the tuning step to

the default setting.

t Repeat steps e and r to select Quick tuning steps

for other modes, if desired.

y Push [EXIT/SET] to exit the setting display.

The TS screen can be entered from the Main or Sub

band.

The selected tuning step is used for both the Main

and Sub bands.

• TS screen

TS icon

Mode keys

[MAIN DIAL]

[EXIT/SET] [TS] MAIN, SUB

[SUB DIAL]

4-8

BASIC OPERATION

 Setting the frequency (Continued)

D Selecting the Fine tuning function

The minimum tuning step of 1 Hz can be used for ﬁne

tuning.

 With the Quick tuning function OFF.

q Hold down [TS] for 1 second.

• The 1 Hz digit is displayed.

w Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to tune the frequency.

• The frequency changes in 1 Hz steps.

• The RIT or ∂TX frequency also changes in 1Hz steps.

• Pushing the [UP] or [DN] key on the microphone chang-

es the frequency in 50 Hz steps, even if this Fine tuning

function is ON.

• To turn OFF the Fine tuning function, hold down [TS] for

1 second with the Quick tuning function OFF.

NOTE: 1 Hz tuning step functions for both Main and

Sub bands simultaneously. Therefore, either [TS]

can be used to select the 1 Hz tuning steps.

D About the Auto tuning step function

When rapidly rotating [MAIN DIAL] or [SUB DIAL], the

tuning speed automatically accelerates as selected.

q Select the “MAIN DIAL Auto TS” item in the Others

set screen.

SET [F-7]  OTHERS [F-5]  MAIN DIAL Auto TS

• “MAIN DIAL Auto TS” for [MAIN DIAL], “SUB DIAL Auto

TS” for [SUB DIAL] selection.

w Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the option.

• Auto tuning step options

HIGH: Approximately 5 times faster when the tuning step

is set to 1 kHz or smaller steps. Approximately 2

times faster when the tuning step is set to 5 kHz

or larger steps.

LOW: Approximately 2 times faster.

OFF: Auto tuning step is turned OFF.

e Push [EXIT/SET] several times.

• Exits the Set screen.

(F) Function keys [MAIN DIAL][EXIT/SET]

1Hz digit 1Hz digit

Quick tuning OFF

(10Hz)

• Operation of the [TS] keys

Fine tuning

(1Hz)

Quick tuning ON (“” is displayed)

(Default:1 kHz, 10 kHz (only FM mode))

TS screen

(0.1, 1, 5, 9, 10, 12.5, 20, or 25 kHz)

Push

[TS]

Push

[TS]

Hold down

[TS]

Hold down

[TS]

4-9

BASIC OPERATION

[EXAMPLE]

7.00000 MHz

21.24000 MHz

21.24000 MHz  21.36000 MHz

Push

F-INP

ENT

Push

Keypad

Key entries

D Entering the frequency with the keypad

The transceiver has a keypad for direct frequency en-

try, as described below.

q Push [F-INP].

• The “

F-INP

” indicator is displayed.

• The keypad backlight lights and the keys stand by for

key entry.

w Enter the desired frequency from the highest digit.

• The frequency disappears and the entered number is

displayed on the right end digit.

e Enter the next digit.

• The previously entered number shifts one digit left.

r After entering the MHz digit, push [

•

] (decimal

point).

• The previously entered numbers shift to the MHz digit.

t After entering the 100 kHz and lower digits, push

[ENT].

• The “

F-INP

” indicator disappears and the frequency is

set.

• If the 100 kHz or lower digits are all ‘0,’ directly push

[ENT] to automatically enter ‘0s.’

• If you want to change only the 100 kHz or lower digits,

skip steps w and e.

•

To cancel the entry, push any key (except [Y]/[Z]) before

pushing [ENT].

D About the 1⁄4 tuning step function

When operating in the SSB data, CW, RTTY or PSK

modes, the

⁄4 tuning function is selectable. When the

function is ON, the dial speed is reduced to

⁄4 of the

normal speed, for ﬁner tuning control.

 Push the Multi-function [1/4]() key to toggle the

⁄4

tuning function ON or OFF.

• “ ” is displayed when the function is ON.

1/4 tuning step OFF 1/4 tuning step ON

4-10

BASIC OPERATION

The following modes are selectable.

• SSB (USB/LSB) and SSB data (USB data/LSB

data) modes

• CW and CW reverse (CW-R) modes

• RTTY and RTTY reverse (RTTY-R) modes

• PSK and PSK reverse (PSK-R) modes

• AM and AM data modes

• FM and FM data modes

Select the desired operating mode as follows.

To select an operating mode

q Push the desired Mode key.

w Push the key again to toggle between USB and

LSB, CW and CW-R, RTTY/RTTY-R and PSK/PSK-

R, AM and FM, if desired.

e Hold down the key for 1 second to toggle between

RTTY and RTTY-R, PSK and PSK-R.

See the diagram to the right for the order of selection.

When the data mode is selected, the microphone sig-

nals may be muted, depending on the Set mode set-

ting.

• Selecting the SSB mode

 Push [SSB] to select USB or LSB.

• USB is selected ﬁrst when operating above 10 MHz,

LSB is selected ﬁrst when operating below 10 MHz.

USA version:

USB is selected when the 5 MHz band is selected.

• After USB or LSB is selected, push to toggle between

USB and LSB.

• Selecting the CW mode

 Push [CW] to select CW.

• After CW is selected, push to toggle between CW and

CW reverse mode.

• Selecting the RTTY or PSK mode

 Push [RTTY/PSK] to select RTTY or PSK.

• After RTTY or PSK is selected, push to toggle between

RTTY and PSK.

• After RTTY or PSK is selected, hold down for 1 second

to toggle between RTTY and RTTY reverse, or, PSK

and PSK reverse mode, respectively.

• Selecting the AM or FM mode

 Push [AM/FM] to select AM or FM.

• After AM or FM is selected, push to toggle between AM

and FM.

• Selecting the DATA mode

 After USB, LSB, AM or FM is selected, push [DATA]

to select the USB data, LSB data, AM data or FM

data mode, respectively.

• After a data mode is selected, push to toggle between

regular voice and data mode.

• After the data mode is selected, hold down for 1 second

to sequentially select data 1, 2, and 3.

USB

Hold down Mode

key for 1 second.

Push Mode key.

LSB

CW-R

RTTY-R RTTY PSK PSK-R

DATA

OFF

After selecting the desired mode, hold down [DATA] for 1 second

to select D1, D2, and D3 in order.

DATA

USB

LSB

USB

LSB

USB

LSB

USB

LSB

Mode keys

[DATA]



Selecting the Operating mode

4-11

BASIC OPERATION



Selecting the Meter readout

The S/RF meter readout during transmit can be se-

lected from the following items.

 Push the Multi-function [METER]() key several

times to select the desired meter item.

• The selectable meters are:

o  SWR  ALC  COMP  Vd  Id in that order.

D Digital multi-function meter

The digital multi-function meter can simultaneously

display all transmit parameters on the LCD display.

 Hold down the Multi-function [METER]() key for 1

second.

• The digital multi-function meter is displayed.

• Hold down the Multi-function [METER]() key for 1 sec-

ond to turn OFF the meter.

 Push [P-HOLD](F) to turn ON the peak level hold

function.

• “P-HOLD” is displayed in the window title when the func-

tion is ON.

() Multi-function keys

52V

50 100

150

200

250

1.5

SWR

COMP

ALC

60dB

Signal strength level

readout

d readout

Power level readout

SWR readout

Compression level

readout

ALC level readout V

d readout

Pushing [P-HOLD](F) toggles ON and OFF.

Displays the RF output power in watts.

Displays the VSWR on the transmission

line.

Displays the ALC level. The ALC circuit be-

gins to activate when the RF output power

reaches a preset level.

Displays the compression level when the

speech compressor is in use.

Displays the drain current of the ﬁnal ampli-

ﬁer MOS-FETs.

Displays the drain terminal voltage of the

ﬁnal ampliﬁer MOS-FETs.

4-12

BASIC OPERATION

 Selecting the Meter readout (Continued)

D Selecting the meter type

A total of 3 meter types are selectable.

The meter types are Standard, Edgewise and Bar me-

ters. Follow the instructions to select the meter type.

q Select the “Meter Type (Normal Screen)” item in the

Display set screen.

SET [F-7]  DISPLAY [F-3]  Meter Type (Normal

screen)

w Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the option.

e Push [EXIT/SET] several times.

• Exits the Set screen.



Dial lock function

The Dial lock function prevents frequency changes by

accidental movement of the tuning dial. The lock func-

tion electronically locks the dial.

 Push [LOCK].

• Each push toggles the Dial lock function ON or OFF.

• The [LOCK] indicator lights when the function is ON.

• [MAIN DIAL] or [SUB DIAL] is locked when the function

is ON.

• Edgewise meter

• Bar meter

(F) Function keys [MAIN DIAL][EXIT/SET]

[LOCK] indicator MAIN, SUB

[SUB DIAL][MAIN DIAL]

[LOCK] MAIN, SUB

4-13

BASIC OPERATION



Basic transmit operation

D Transmitting

q Push [TRANSMIT] or [PTT] (microphone) to trans-

mit.

• The Main band’s [TX] indicator lights red.

• When split operation is selected, the Sub band’s [TX]

indicator lights.

w Push [TRANSMIT] again or release [PTT] (micro-

phone) to receive.

 Adjusting the transmit output power

 Rotate [RF PWR].

• Adjustable range: Less than 5 W to 200 W

(AM mode: Less than 5 W to 50 W)

D Adjusting the microphone gain

q Push the Multi-function [METER]() key to select

the ALC meter.

w Push [PTT] to transmit.

• Talk into the microphone at your normal voice level.

e While talking, rotate [MIC] so that the ALC meter

reading doesn’t go outside the ALC zone (see to

the right).

r Release [PTT] to receive.

Before transmitting, monitor your selected operating frequency to make sure you don’t cause interfer-

ence to other stations on the same frequency. It’s good amateur practice to listen first, and then, even if

nothing is heard, ask “is the frequency in use” once or twice, before you being operating.

[TRANSMIT]

[RF PWR] TX indicator (MAIN)

“<5W” is displayed when the power is set less than 5 W.

TX power readout (approx.)

[TRANSMIT]

[MIC]

TX indicator (MAIN)

52V

50 100

150

200

250

1.5

SWR

COMP

ALC

60dB

ALC zone

4-14

BASIC OPERATION

 Basic transmit operation (Continued)

D Adjusting the drive gain

The drive gain is active for all modes except SSB with-

out speech compressor. The [DRIVE] control adjusts

the amplifying gain at the driver stage.

q Push the Multi-function [METER]() key to select

the ALC meter.

w Push [PTT] (microphone; SSB with [COMP] ON,

AM or FM), key down (CW) or push [TRANSMIT]

(RTTY or PSK) to transmit.

e While speaking into the microphone, keying down or

transmitting, rotate [DRIVE] so that the ALC meter

reading swings within 30 to 50% of the ALC scale.

(see to the right)

• Speak into the microphone at your normal voice level.

r Release [PTT], stop keying or push [TRANSMIT]

again to receive.

D Transmit power limit

The transceiver can be set to a maximum output power

on each operating band.

You can separately set the maximum output power for

operating in the DATA mode

 The Multi-function screens are OFF:

q Select the “TX Power Limit” item in the Others set

screen.

SET [F-7]  OTHERS [F-5]  TX Power Limit

w Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select “ON.”

• When ON is selected, the TX power limit is active.

e Push [LIMIT](F).

• The TX power limit screen is displayed.

r Push the band key.

• Select the desired band to set the TX power limit.

• In the Phone mode (SSB, AM, or FM mode), push [DATA]

to select the Data mode.

t Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to set the maximum power.

y Push [EXIT/SET] several times.

• Exits the Set screen.

[DRIVE]

When ON is selected

[LIMIT] key is displayed

TX power limit screen

(F) Function keys [MAIN DIAL]

Band key

[EXIT/SET]

52V

50 100

150

200

250

1.5

SWR

COMP

ALC

60dB

Drive gain range

4-15

BASIC OPERATION

See the next page for details of entering a frequency

range on the Band edge screen.



Band edge warning beep

This function allows you to hear a beep tone when you

tune in or out of an amateur band’s frequency range. A

regular beep sounds when you tune into a range, and

a lower tone error beep will sound when you tune out

of a range.

Also, the TX indicator describes if the selected fre-

quency is in or out of an amateur band, when an option

other than “OFF” is set.

• A TX icon with a doted rectangle, “

” is displayed, in-

stead of the regular “

” TX icon, when a frequency out-

side of an amateur band frequency range is selected.

 The Multi-function screens are OFF:

q Select the “Beep (Band Edge)” item in the Others

set screen.

SET [F-7]  OTHERS [F-5]  Beep (Band Edge)

w Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the option.

• Band Edge Beep options:

OFF: Band edge beep is OFF.

ON (Default): When you tune into or out of the default

amateur band’s frequency range, a beep

sounds. (default)

ON (User): When you tune outside of, or back into

a user programmed amateur band’s fre-

quency range, a beep sounds.

ON (User) & TX Limit:

When you tune outside of, or back into a

user programmed amateur band’s frequen-

cy range, a beep sounds. Transmission is

also inhibited outside the programmed

range.

e Push [EXIT/SET] several times.

• Exits the Set screen.

• About setting the User band edge

When the “ON (User)” or “ON (User) & TX Limit” option

is selected, up to 30 band edges can be registered.

 Push [BAND](F).

• The Band edge screen is displayed, and then you can

change, add, or delete the frequency range.

When the transverter function is in use, the band

edge warning beep sounds at the default settings.

• When no beep sounds:

When the “Beep Level” item in the Level set mode is

set to 0%, no beep sounds. (p. 15-5)

(SET [F-7] > LEVEL [F-1] > Beep Level)

The beep output level can be set in the Level set

mode.

ON（Default） is selected

(F) Function keys [MAIN DIAL]

[EXIT/SET]

() Multi-function keys

• Band edge screen

ON（User） is selected

[BAND] key is displayed

While setting the frequency range

4-16

BASIC OPERATION

 Band edge warning beep (Continued)

D Entering the user band edge

Up to 30 frequency ranges can be set.

• In the default setting, all frequency ranges that can

be used, are entered.

When new band edge is entered, change or delete

the band edge that includes the duplicate frequency

range.

• Register the Band edge

 The Multi-function screens are OFF:

q Select the “Beep (Band Edge)” item in the Others

set screen.

SET [F-7]  OTHERS [F-5]  Beep (Band Edge)

w Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select either the “ON (User)”

or “ON (User) & TX Limit” option.

• The [BAND] key is displayed in the Function keys.

• When the “ON (User) & TX Limit” option is selected, the

transmit ranges are also limited in the ranges you can

enter.

e Push [BAND](F).

• The Band edge screen is displayed.

r Push [p](F) or [q](F) to select the band edge that

is changed or deleted.

• Hold down to continuously move the lines.

• Push [t u](F) to toggle between the entry cells of the

upper and lower band edge frequencies.

• Push [INS]() to insert a new blank line.

• Hold down [DEL]() for 1 second to delete the selected

line.

• Hold down [DEF](F) for 1 second to reset all band edge

frequencies.

The Band edge initialize screen appears as shown to the

right, then push [OK](F) to reset all frequencies.

t Enter the Band edge frequencies with the keypad.

q Push [F-INP] to enter the frequency input mode.

w Enter the desired frequency.

e Push [ENT] to save the frequency.

• Push [•] to input decimal point (“.”) between the MHz and

kHz digits.

• Enter each channel from left to right and each frequency

must be higher than the preceding frequency.

• A frequency that is duplicated, or out of an amateur

band, cannot be entered.

y Push [EXIT/SET] several times.

• Exits the Set screen.

Conﬁrmation window

ON (User) & TX Limit is selected

While setting the frequency range

NOTE: The duplicated frequency with the already

registered frequency range, cannot be registered.

Keypad

(F) Function keys

() Multi-function keys

[MAIN DIAL]

[EXIT/SET]

• Band edge screen

4-17

BASIC OPERATION

• The Multi-function keys for entering the frequen-

cy range:

When inserting a blank line, push [p](F) or [q](F) to

select the line below the one where you want to insert

a new line. And then push [INS]().

• If 30 band edges are already entered, a new line cannot

be inserted.

To delete a frequency range, push [p](F) or [q](F) to

select the line that you want to delete. And then hold

down [DEL]() for 1 second.

• Be careful! The deleted frequency range cannot be recalled.

However, hold down [DEF](F) for 1 second to call the con-

ﬁrmation window and to reset all band edges to their default

settings.

Multi-function keys Description

Insert a line above the selected line

Delete the selected frequency range

4-18

BASIC OPERATION



About the 5 MHz frequency band operation (USA version only)

Operation on the 5 MHz frequency band is allowed on

5 discrete frequencies and must adhere to the follow-

ing:

• The USB, USB Data, CW, and PSK modes.

• Maximum of 100 watts ERP (Effective Radiated Power)

• 2.8 kHz bandwidth (maximum)

It is your responsibility to set all controls so that trans-

mission in this frequency band meets the stringent

conditions under which amateur operations may use

these frequencies.

NOTE: We recommend that you store these fre-

quencies, modes and ﬁlter settings into memory

channels, for easy recall.

To assist you in operating within the rules specified

by the FCC, transmission is illegal on any frequen-

cies other than the five shown in the tables below.

• For the USB and USB Data modes

The FCC speciﬁes center frequencies on the 5 MHz

frequency band. However, the transceiver displays

carrier frequency. Therefore, tune the transceiver to

1.5 kHz below the speciﬁed FCC channel center fre-

quency.

Transceiver Displayed

Frequency

FCC Channel

Center Frequency

5.33050 MHz 5.33200 MHz

5.34650 MHz 5.34800 MHz

5.35700 MHz 5.35850 MHz

5.37150 MHz 5.37300 MHz

5.40350 MHz 5.40500 MHz

• For the CW and PSK modes

The transceiver displays the center frequency. There-

fore, tune the transceiver to the speciﬁed FCC channel

frequency when you operate in these modes.

Transceiver Displayed

Frequency

FCC Channel

Center Frequency

5.33200 MHz 5.33200 MHz

5.34800 MHz 5.34800 MHz

5.35850 MHz 5.35850 MHz

5.37300 MHz 5.37300 MHz

5.40500 MHz 5.40500 MHz

5-1

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT Section 5

 Convenient functions for Receive …………………………………… 5-2

 Convenient functions for Transmit …………………………………… 5-3

 Operating SSB ………………………………………………………… 5-4

 Operating CW …………………………………………………………… 5-5

D About the CW pitch control ………………………………………… 5-6

D APF (Audio Peak Filter) operation ………………………………… 5-6

D Adjusting the Key speed …………………………………………… 5-7

D About the CW reverse mode ……………………………………… 5-7

D CW side tone function ……………………………………………… 5-7

D About 137 kHz band operation (Europe version only) ………… 5-8

 Electronic keyer functions ……………………………………………… 5-9

D Memory keyer screen ……………………………………………… 5-10

D Editing a Keyer memory ……………………………………………5-11

D Contest number set mode ………………………………………… 5-12

D Keyer set mode ………………………………………………………5-13

 Operating RTTY (FSK) …………………………………………………5-14

D About the RTTY reverse mode ……………………………………5-15

D Twin peak ﬁlter ………………………………………………………5-15

D Functions for the RTTY decoder display …………………………5-16

D Setting the decoder threshold level ………………………………… 5-17

D RTTY memory transmission ……………………………………… 5-17

D Automatic transmission/reception setting …………………………5-18

D Editing the RTTY memory ………………………………………… 5-19

D Turning ON the RTTY log …………………………………………… 5-20

D Conﬁrm the RTTY log contents ……………………………………5-21

D RTTY decode set mode ……………………………………………5-22

 Operating PSK ………………………………………………………… 5-24

D Vector indicator and Waterfall display ……………………………… 5-25

D Functions for the PSK decoder display …………………………… 5-26

D About the BPSK and QPSK modes ……………………………… 5-27

D About the BPSK31 and BPSK63 modes ………………………… 5-27

D Setting the decoder threshold level ………………………………… 5-28

D About the PSK reverse mode ……………………………………… 5-28

D AFC/NET functions ………………………………………………… 5-28

D PSK memory transmission ………………………………………… 5-29

D Automatic transmission/reception setting …………………………5-30

D Editing the PSK memory …………………………………………… 5-31

D Turning ON the PSK log …………………………………………… 5-32

D Conﬁrm the PSK log contents ……………………………………… 5-33

D PSK decode set mode ……………………………………………… 5-34

 Operating AM or FM …………………………………………………… 5-36

 Repeater operation …………………………………………………… 5-37

D Checking the repeater input signal …………………………………5-37

D Repeater tone frequency setting …………………………………… 5-38

 Tone squelch operation …………………………………………………5-39

 Data mode (AFSK) operation ………………………………………… 5-40

5-2

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

This section, describes particular operations for each

operating mode, such as operating the Memory keyer

in the CW mode, or operating the Encoder or Decoder

in the RTTY or PSK mode.

If you use functions that are described in Section 6:

Scope operation, Section 7: Functions for Receive, or

Section 8: Functions for Transmit, you can operate the

transceiver more conveniently.

 All operating modes

Preampliﬁer (p. 7-2)

The preamp ampliﬁes received signals in the receiver

front end, to improve the S/N ratio and sensitivity. When

receiving weak signals, select to P.AMP 1 or P.AMP 2.

 Push [P.AMP] several times to turn ON preamp 1 or

preamp 2 or, to turn OFF the preamp.

• “P.AMP1” or “P.AMP2” is displayed when preamp 1 or

preamp 2 is ON. (The Main and Sub bands have inde-

pendent preamp controls.)

Attenuator (p. 7-2)

The attenuator prevents a desired signal from becom-

ing distorted when very strong signals are near the

frequency, or when very strong electric ﬁelds, such as

from broadcasting stations, are near your location.

 Push [ATT] several times to set the attenuator in 6

dB steps.

• Hold down [ATT] for 1 second to set the attenuator in 3

dB steps.

• “ATT” and the attenuation level are displayed when the

attenuator is ON.

Notch ﬁlter (p. 7-13)

The Auto notch function uses DSP to automatically at-

tenuates beat tones, tuning signals, and so on, even if

they are moving.

The Manual notch can be set to attenuate a frequency

by rotating the [NOTCH] control.

• When the SSB or AM mode is selected:

Auto notch or Manual notch can be used.

• When the CW, RTTY, or PSK mode is selected:

Only the Manual notch can be used.

• When the FM mode is selected:

Only the Auto notch can be used.

 Push the [NOTCH] key to turn the Auto or Manual

notch function ON or OFF.

• Rotate the [NOTCH] control to set the “valley” frequency

for the Manual notch function.

• The Notch indicator (above the [NOTCH] key) lights

when either the Auto or Manual notch function is ON.

 SSB/CW/RTTY/PSK/AM modes

Noise blanker (p. 7-11)

The noise blanker eliminates pulse-type noise such as

the noise from car ignitions.

 Push the [NB] key to turn the noise blanker ON or

OFF, and then rotate the [NB] control to adjust the

threshold level.

• The Noise blanker indicator (above the [NB] key) lights

when the noise blanker is ON.

• Hold down the [NB] key for 1 second to enter the NB

screen.

Noise reduction (p. 7-12)

The Noise reduction function reduces random noise

components and enhances desired signals that are

buried in noise. The DSP does the random noise re-

duction function.

 Push the [NR] key to turn the Noise reduction ON

or OFF.

• Rotate the [NR] control to adjust the noise reduction

level.

• The Noise reduction indicator (above the [NR] key) lights

when the Noise reduction is ON.

AGC (p. 7-4)

The AGC (Auto Gain Control) controls receiver gain to

produce a constant audio output level even when the

received signal strength greatly varies.

Twin PBT (p. 7-5)

The PBT (Passband Tuning) electronically narrows

the IF passband width by shifting the IF frequency to

slightly outside of the IF ﬁlter passband, to reject inter-

ference. The transceiver uses DSP for the PBT func-

tion. Moving both the [TWIN PBT] controls to the same

position shifts the IF.

 Rotate the [TWIN PBT] controls (inner/outer).

• Hold down [PBT CLEAR] for 1 second to clear the set-

tings.



Convenient functions for Receive

5-3

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

 SSB/AM/FM modes

VOX function (p. 8-2)

The VOX (Voice-Operated Transmission) function

switches between transmit and receive with your voice.

This function provides hands-free operation.

 Push [VOX/BK-IN] to turn the VOX function ON or

OFF.

• “VOX” is displayed when the VOX function is ON.

Transmit monitor (p. 8-5)

The Monitor function allows you to monitor your trans-

mit signals.

Audio tone control (p. 15-4)

You can adjust the transmit voice characteristics (Bass

or Treble).

 SSB mode

Speech compressor (p. 8-6)

The speech compressor increases average RF output

power, improving signal strength and readability.

 Push the Multi-function [COMP]() key to turn the

Speech compressor ON or OFF.

Transmit ﬁlter width (p. 8-6)

 Hold down the Multi-function [COMP]() key for 1

second to select the compression bandwidth be-

tween Wide, Mid, and Narrow.

 CW mode

Break-in function (p. 8-4)

The break-in function is used to automatically toggle

the transceiver between transmit and receive when

keying. The transceiver is capable of full break-in or

semi break-in CW operation.

• Semi-break-in operation:

In the semi break-in mode, the transceiver transmits when

keying, then automatically returns to receive after a preset

time after you stop keying.

• Full break-in operation:

In the full break-in mode, the transceiver automatically

transmits while keying and returns to receive immediately

after you stop keying.

 Push [VOX/BK-IN] several times to select the break-

in OFF, semi break-in or full break-in.

• “BK IN” or “F-BK IN” is displayed when the Semi break-in

or Full break-in function is ON.

 SSB data/CW/RTTY/PSK modes

⁄4 function (p. 4-9)

When operating in the SSB data, CW, RTTY or PSK

mode, the 1⁄4 tuning function is selectable. When the

function is ON, the Dial speed is reduced to 1⁄4 of the

normal speed, for ﬁner tuning control.

 Push the Multi-function [1/4]() key to turn the

⁄4

function ON or OFF.

• “ ” is displayed when the function is ON.

 CW/AM modes

Auto tuning function (p. 7-14)

 Push [AUTO TUNE] to turn ON the Auto tuning func-

tion.

• When the CW mode is selected:

The transceiver automatically tunes the desired signal with-

in a ±500 Hz range.

• When the AM mode is selected:

The transceiver automatically tunes the desired signal with-

in a ±5 kHz range.

IMPORTANT!

When receiving a weak signal, or receiving a signal with in-

terference, the Automatic tuning function may not tune, or

may tune to an undesired signal.



Convenient functions for Transmit

 Convenient functions for Receive (Continued)

5-4

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT



Operating SSB

Before transmitting, monitor your selected operating

frequency to make sure you don’t cause interference

to other stations on the same frequency.

q Push a band key to select desired band.

w Push the Mode key [SSB] to select the SSB mode.

• “USB” or “LSB” is displayed.

• Below 10 MHz LSB is automatically selected, above 10

MHz USB is automatically selected.

• Push [SSB] again to select the LSB or USB mode.

e Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to tune a desired signal.

• The S-meter indicates received signal strength when a

signal is received.

r Rotate [AF] to set the audio to a comfortable listen-

ing level.

t Rotate [RF PWR] to adjust the output power.

• The TX power readout displays the setting level.

y Push the Multi-function [METER]() key to select

the ALC meter.

u Transmit.

• Push [TRANSMIT] or [PTT] (microphone).

• The [TX] indicator lights red.

i Rotate [MIC] to adjust the microphone gain.

• While speaking into the microphone at your normal voice

level, adjust the microphone gain so that the ALC meter

reading swings within 30 to 50% of the ALC scale.

o After your transmission is ﬁnished, returns to re-

ceive.

• Push [TRANSMIT] or release [PTT].

Mode icon

TX power readout

Mode keys

() Multi-function keys

[MIC]

[RF PWR]

[TRANSMIT]

Microphone connector

TX indicator MAIN

Band keys

[MAIN DIAL]

5-5

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT



Operating CW

Before transmitting, monitor your selected operating

frequency to make sure you don’t cause interference

to other stations on the same frequency.

q Push a band key to select the desired band.

w Push the Mode key [CW] to select the CW mode.

• “CW” or “CW-R” is displayed.

• Push [CW] again to select the CW or CW-R mode.

• The carrier point of the CW mode is the LSB side by

default. You can change it to the USB side in the “CW

Normal Side” item of the Others set screen.

(SET [F-7] > OTHERS [F-5] > CW Normal Side)

e Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to tune a desired signal.

• Try to match the speciﬁed signal’s tone to the side tone

frequency.

• The S-meter indicates the received signal strength when

signal is received.

r Rotate [AF] to set the audio to a comfortable listen-

ing level.

t Rotate [RF PWR] to adjust the output power.

• The TX power readout displays the setting level.

y Transmit.

• Push [TRANSMIT].

• The [TX] indicator lights red.

u Use the electric keyer or a paddle to key your CW

signals.

• The power meter indicates transmitted CW output pow-

er.

i Push the Multi-function [METER]() key to select

the ALC meter.

o Rotate [DRIVE] to adjust the Drive gain.

• While keying, adjust the Drive gain so that the ALC me-

ter reading swings within 30 to 50% of the ALC scale.

• If the ALC meter reading goes outside the ALC zone,

the rise time becomes faster than the setting time in the

Keyer set screen (p. 5-13).

!0 After your transmission is ﬁnished, returns to re-

ceive.

• Push [TRANSMIT].

Mode keys [MAIN DIAL]

() Multi-function keys

Connect a paddle (or connect an Electric key or external electric keyer

to the [KEY] jack on the Rear panel).

[DRIVE]

[RF PWR]

[TRANSMIT]

TX indicator MAIN

Band keys

Mode icon

TX power readout

5-6

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

• Filter screen

CW PITCH display (Example: 700 Hz)

[CW PITCH]

 Operating CW (Continued)

About the CW pitch control

The received CW audio pitch and CW side tone can be

adjusted to suit your preference. This does not change

the operating frequency.

q Rotate [CW PITCH] to suit your preference.

• Adjustable between 300 to 900 Hz in 5 Hz steps.

w Hold down [FILTER] for 1 second.

• The Filter screen is displayed.

• The Filter screen graphically displays the CW pitch.

(Shown to the right.)

Digital IF ﬁlter Filter screen

Passband

width

Below 500 Hz

The CW pitch frequency is

changed in 5 Hz steps.

• “

BPF

” is displayed.

Above 600 Hz

The CW pitch frequency is

changed in 25 Hz steps.

• “

BPF

” disappears.

e Push [EXIT/SET].

• Exits the Set screen.

APF (Audio Peak Filter) operation

The APF changes the audio frequency response by

boosting a particular frequency to enhance a desired

CW signal.

q In the CW mode, push [APF/TPF] to turn the audio

peak ﬁlter ON or OFF.

• “ APF” is displayed and the [APF/TPF] indicator

above this key lights white.

w Hold down [APF/TPF] for 1 second.

• Hold down [APF/TPF] for 1 second selects the Audio

ﬁlter width.

APF type* Filter width

SOFT

WIDE, MID, NAR

SHARP

320 Hz, 160 Hz, 80 Hz

* The audio ﬁlter shape is also selectable between

“SOFT” and “SHARP” in the “APF TYPE” item of the

Others set screen. (p. 15-14)

(SET [F-7] > OTHERS [F-5] > APF TYPE)

e Rotate the [DIGI-SEL] control to suit your prefer-

ence.

• The peak frequency can be adjusted with the [DIGI-SEL]

control when “APF” is selected in the “DIGI-SEL VR Op-

eration” item of the Others set screen (p. 15-15).

(SET [F-7] > OTHERS [F-5] > DIGI-SEL VR Operation)

The APF audio level can be adjusted in the Level set

screen (p. 15-5).

(SET [F-7] > LEVEL [F-1] > APF AF LEVEL)

[DIGI-SEL] MAIN, SUB

APF/TPF indicator MAIN, SUB

[APF/TPF] MAIN, SUB

5-7

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

Adjusting the Key speed

When using the internal electric keyer, you can adjust

the Key speed.

 Rotate [KEY SPEED].

• The key speed popup appears. You can conﬁrm the ad-

justed speed by numeral.

• Selectable speed: 6 ~ 48 WPM (Word Per Minutes).

About the CW reverse mode

The CW-R (CW Reverse) mode uses the opposite side

band to receive CW signals.

Use when interfering signals are near a desired signal

and you want to use CW-R to reduce the interference.

 In the CW mode, push [CW] to select the CW and

CW-R mode.

The carrier point of the CW mode is the LSB side by

default. You can change it to the USB side in the “CW

Normal Side” item of the Others set screen.

(SET [F-7] > OTHERS [F-5] > CW Normal Side)

• When this setting is set to “USB,” the CW and CW-R modes

are reversed.

CW side tone function

When the transceiver is in standby (and the break-in

function is OFF— p. 8-4) you can listen to the CW side

tone without actually transmitting.

This allows you to match your transmit frequency ex-

actly to another station’s by matching the audio tone.

You can also use the CW side tone (be sure to turn

OFF break-in!) to practice CW sending. The CW side

tone level can be adjusted in the Level set mode (p.

15-5).

(SET [F-7] > LEVEL [F-1] > Side Tone Level)

Push

BFO

CW-R mode (USB side)

BFO

Desired signal

CW mode (LSB side)

Interference

Desired signalInterference

[KEY SPEED]

Key speed popup

5-8

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

 Operating CW (Continued)

About 137 kHz band operation (Europe version only)

The 137 kHz band, between the 135.7 kHz to 137.8

kHz, operation in the CW mode is optionally available.

The RF signal from [X-VERTER] is used for the 137

kHz band operation, and an external ampliﬁer unit is

necessary.

See the connection diagram below for reference.

BPF

LPF

Power amplifier with T/R switching unit

for 137 kHz

to [X-VERTER]

to [RELAY] (for transmit/receive control)

to [ACC 2] pin 6*

• Connection diagram for 137 kHz band operation

NOTE: Set the transverter offset in the Others

set mode to “0.000 MHz.”

See page 15-14 for details.

* Transverter ON/OFF control signal related to the power

amplifier unit main power, if desired.

• ON: 2 ~ 13.8 V DC input (more than 10 kΩ impedance)

• OFF: Less than 2 V DC

5-9

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT



Electronic keyer functions

This transceiver has a number of convenient functions

for the built-in electronic keyer.

 The Multi-function screens are OFF:

q Push the Mode key [CW].

w Push [KEYER](F).

• The Memory keyer screen is displayed.

e Push [EXIT/SET].

• The Memory keyer menu screen is displayed.

Push one of the Function keys ([F-1] to [F-4]).

• The selected menu screen is displayed. See the diagram

below.

• To return to the Memory keyer menu screen, push [EXIT/

SET].

[EXIT/SET]Mode keys(F) Function keys

• Memory keyer screen (p. 5-10)

• Memory keyer menu screen

• Keyer edit screen (p. 5-11)

• Keyer 001 screen (p. 5-12)

• Keyer CW-Key screen (p. 5-13)

F-1

EXIT/SET

F-1

F-2

F-3

F-4

F-5

F-6

F-7

F-3

F-2

5-10

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

 Electronic keyer functions (Continued)

Memory keyer screen

Preset characters can be sent using the Memory keyer

screen. Contents of the memory keyer are entered in

the Keyer edit screen.

• Transmitting

 The Multi-function screens are OFF:

q Push the Mode key [CW].

w Push [KEYER](F).

• The Memory keyer screen is displayed.

e Push [1–4/5–8] to select the Memory bank.

• M5 ~ M8 are blank by default, edit the contents to use

these memories.

r Push [TRANSMIT], or turn ON the Break-in function

(p. 8-4).

t Push one of the function keys [M1] ~ [M4] or [M5]~

[M8].

• Send the selected Memory keyer content.

• M1 ~ M8 and the contents are highlighted orange.

• Holding down for 1 second to repeatedly send the con-

tents.

• Set the repeat interval in the “Keyer Repeat Time” item

of the Keyer set screen. (p. 5-13)

• To cancel sending the content, push any function key.

Count up trigger

The contest number counter advances each time the

contents are sent. The counter is 4 digits.

• The count up trigger can be assigned in the Keyer 001

screen. (p. 5-12)

• The arrow icon indicates the assigned memory keyer.

In the default setting, Memory keyer M2 is assigned.

• Push [–1](F) to reduce the contest number advances

by one before sending the Memory keyer contents to a

station a second time.

y After your transmission is ﬁnished, returns to re-

ceive.

• Push [TRANSMIT].

u Push [EXIT/SET].

• Exits the Memory keyer screen.

• Memory keyer screen (SEND)

[EXIT/SET]Mode keys(F) Function keys

[TRANSMIT]

• Functions in the Memory keyer screen

Function Action

M1 ~ M8

Push

Sends the Memory keyer con-

tent.

Hold down

Repeatedly sends the Memory

keyer content.

–1

Reduces the contest number counter ad-

vances by one.

• You can change or reset the number in the

Keyer 001 screen.

1–4/5–8

Selects the Memory bank.

• Toggles between M1 ~ M4 and M5 ~ M8.

 For your convenience

When an external keypad or PC keyboard is connect-

ed, the preset contents, M1 ~ M4 or M5 ~ M8, can

be transmitted without selecting the Memory keyer

screen.

See pages 3-6 and 15-16 for details.

5-11

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

Editing a Keyer memory

The contents of the Memory keyer memories can be

set in the Keyer edit screen. The Memory keyer can

memorize and retransmit eight CW key codes for of-

ten-used CW sentences, contest serial numbers, and

so on. The capacity of the Memory keyer is 70 charac-

ters per memory.

• Programming contents

 The Multi-function screens are OFF:

q Push [KEYER](F).

• The Memory keyer screen is displayed.

w Display the Memory keyer menu screen, then push

[EDIT](F).

[EXIT/SET]  EDIT [F-2]

• The Keyer edit screen is displayed.

e Push [M1..M8] several times.

• Push [M1..M8] to select the memory keyer.

(M1 M2 M3     M8 M1)

r Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the character.

Keys Input mode/Action

[ABC]()

Selects the Alphabet input mode.

[123]()

Selects the Number input mode.

• Push to toggle between [123]() and

[Symbol]().

[Symbol]()

Selects the Symbol input mode.

[DEL](F) Deletes a character.

[SPACE](F) Enters a space.

• When a keyboard is connected to the [USB A] port on

the rear panel, you can directly enter the contents using

the keyboard.

• Push keypad to enter 0 ~ 9 or a period (.).

t Push [t](F) or [u](F) to move the cursor.

y Repeat steps r and t to input the desired char-

acters.

u After editing the contents, push [EXIT/SET].

• Exits the Keyer edit screen.

• Selectable characters (with [MAIN DIAL])

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T

U V W X Y Z

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0

/ ? ^ . , @ 

About the Symbols:

“^” is used to transmit a string of characters with no inter-

character space. Put a “^” before a text string such as

^AR, and the string “ar” is sent with no space.

“” is used to insert the CW contest number. The num-

ber automatically advances by 1. This function is avail-

able for only one memory keyer channel at a time. “”

is used in memory keyer channel M2 by default.

• Keyer edit screen

• Example: Entering “QSL TU DE JA3YUA TEST” into the

Memory keyer M3

• Preset contents

CH Contents

M1 CQ TEST CQ TEST DE ICOM ICOM TEST

UR 5NN BK

M3 CFM TU

M4 QRZ?

[EXIT/SET] [MAIN DIAL](F) Function keys

() Multi-function keys

5-12

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

 Electronic keyer functions (Continued)

Contest number set mode

This mode is used to set the Number style, Count up

trigger and Present number.

• Setting contents

 The Multi-function screens are OFF:

q Push [KEYER](F).

• The Memory keyer screen is displayed.

w Display the Memory keyer menu screen, then push

[001](F).

[EXIT/SET]  001 [F-3]

• The Keyer 001 screen is displayed.

e Push [p](F) or [q](F) to select the item.

r Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to set the desired setting.

• Hold down [DEF](F) for 1 second to select the default

setting.

t Push [EXIT/SET].

Exits the Keyer 001 screen.

• Keyer 001 screen

Number Style (Default: Normal)

This item sets the numbering system used for contest

(serial) numbers— normal or short morse numbers.

• Normal: Does not use short morse numbers

• 190ANO: Sets 1 as A, 9 as N and 0 as O.

• 190ANT: Sets 1 as A, 9 as N and 0 as T.

• 90 NO: Sets 9 as N and 0 as O.

• 90 NT: Sets 9 as N and 0 as T.

Count Up Trigger (Default: M2)

This selects which of the four memories will contain

the contest serial number exchange. The count up trig-

ger allows the serial number to be automatically incre-

mented after each complete serial number exchange

is sent.

• Selectable memory: M1 ~ M8.

Present Number (Default: 001)

This item shows the current number for the count-up

trigger channel set above.

• Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to change the number (001 ~

9999), or hold down [001CLR](F) for 1 second to re-

set the current number to 001.

[EXIT/SET](F) Function keys

5-13

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

Keyer set mode

This Set mode is used to set the memory keyer repeat

time, dash weight, paddle specifications, keyer type,

and so on.

• Setting contents

 The Multi-function screens are OFF:

q Push [KEYER](F).

• The Memory keyer screen is displayed.

w Display the Memory keyer menu screen, then push

[CW KEY](F).

[EXIT/SET]  CW KEY [F-4]

• The Keyer CW-Key screen is displayed.

e Push [p](F) or [q](F) to select the item.

r Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to set the desired setting.

• Hold down [DEF](F) for 1 second to select the default

setting.

t Push [EXIT/SET].

• Exits the Keyer CW-Key screen.

• Keyer CW-Key screen

Keyer Repeat Time (Default: 2s)

When sending CW using the repeat timer, set the time

between transmission.

• Selectable time: 1 ~ 60 seconds in 1 second steps.

Dot/Dash Ratio (Default: 1:1:3.0)

Sets the dot/dash ratio.

• Selectable ratio: 1:1:2.8 ~ 1:1:4.5 in 0.1 steps.

Keying weight example: Morse code “K”

DASH

Weight setting:

1:1:3 (default)

Weight setting:

Adjusted

DASH

DOT (fixed*)

Adjustable range SPACE (fixed*)

*SPACE and DOT length can be

adjusted only with [KEY SPEED].

Rise Time (Default: 4ms)

Sets the rise time of the transmitted CW envelope.

• Selectable time: 2, 4, 6 or 8 milliseconds.

Key action

Tx output power

• About rise time

Rise time

Set Tx power level

Time

Paddle Polarity (Default: NORMAL)

Sets the paddle polarity.

• Normal: Right – Dash, Left – Dot.

• Reverse: Right – Dot , Left – Dash.

Keyer Type (Default: ELEC-KEY)

Selects the keyer type for the [ELEC-KEY] connector

on the front panel.

• Selectable key: Straight, BUG-KEY, or ELEC-KEY.

MIC Up/Down Keyer (Default: OFF)

Sets the microphone [UP]/[DN] switches to be used

as a key. (The microphone [UP]/[DN] switches do not

work as a “squeeze key.”)

• ON: The [UP]/[DN] switches can be used as a key

for CW.

• OFF: The [UP]/[DN] switches cannot be used as a

key for CW.

NOTE: When “ON” is selected, the frequency and

the Memory channels cannot be changed using the

[UP]/[DN] switches.

[EXIT/SET](F) Function keys

5-14

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT



Operating RTTY (FSK)

A DSP-based high-quality Baudot RTTY encoder/de-

coder is built-in to the transceiver. When connecting a

PC keyboard, you can operates RTTY without an ex-

ternal RTTY terminal or PC.

If you would rather use your RTTY terminal, consult

the equipment manual.

Before transmitting, monitor your selected operating

frequency to make sure you don’t cause interference

to other stations on the same frequency.

 Connect a keyboard to the [USB A] port on the rear

panel:

 The Multi-function screens are OFF:

q Push a band key to select a desired band.

w Push the Mode key [RTTY/PSK] to select the RTTY

mode.

• After the RTTY mode is selected, hold down [RTTY/PSK] for

1 second to toggle between the RTTY and RTTY-R modes.

• “RTTY” or “RTTY-R” is displayed.

e Push [DECODE](F).

• The RTTY decode screen is displayed.

r Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to tune a desired signal.

• Aim for a symmetrical wave form, and ensure the peak

points align with the mark (2125 Hz) and shift (170 Hz)

frequency lines in the FFT scope.

t Rotate [RF PWR] to adjust the output power.

• The TX power readout displays the setting level.

y Push the Multi-function [METER]() key to select

the Po meter.

Push [F12] on the keyboard to transmit.

• The [TX] indicator lights red.

i Type on the keyboard to enter the contents that you

want to transmit.

• The typewritten contents are displayed in the TX buffer

screen and immediately transmitted.

• The text color will be changed when transmitted.

• Push one of [F1]–[F8] to transmit the TX memory con-

tents.

o Push [F12] on the keyboard to return to receive.

Mode icon

TX power readout

FFT Scope

Waterfall

• Waterfall display

Mode keys [MAIN DIAL]

() Multi-function keys

[RF PWR]

TX indicator MAIN

Band keys

 For your convenience

The desired text can be typed before being transmitted.

q Do steps q to r above.

w Type on the keyboard to enter the message that you

want to transmit.

• The typewritten contents are displayed in the TX buffer

screen.

e Push [F12] on the keyboard to transmit the typewrit-

ten contents.

• The color of displayed text in the TX buffer screen, will

change when transmitted.

• To cancel the transmission, push [F12] twice.

r Push [F12] on the keyboard to return to receive.

 For your convenience

When an external keypad is connected, the preset con-

tents, RT1 ~ RT4 or RT5 ~ RT8, can be transmitted.

See pages 3-6 and 15-16 for details.

5-15

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

About the RTTY reverse mode

Received characters are occasionally garbled when

the received signal has the Mark and Space tones

reversed. This reversal can be caused by incorrect

TNC connections, setting, or commands. To receive

reversed RTTY signals correctly, select the RTTY-R

mode.

 In the RTTY mode, hold down [RTTY/PSK] for 1

second to select the RTTY and RTTY-R modes.

Twin peak ﬁlter

The Twin peak ﬁlter changes the audio frequency re-

sponse by boosting the mark and space frequencies

(2125 and 2295 Hz) for better reception of RTTY sig-

nals.

 In the RTTY mode, push [APF/TPF] to turn the Twin

peak ﬁlter ON or OFF.

• “TPF” is displayed and the [APF/TPF] indicator above

this key lights white while the ﬁlter is in use.

NOTE: When the Twin peak ﬁlter is used, the audio

output may increase. This is a normal, not a mal-

function.

Normal Reverse

Space

Mark

BFO

Space

Mark

BFO

170 Hz 2125 Hz 170 Hz2125 Hz

APF/TPF indicator MAIN, SUB

[APF/TPF] MAIN, SUB

5-16

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

 Operating RTTY (FSK) (Continued)

Functions for the RTTY decoder display

q Push the Mode key [RTTY/PSK] to select the RTTY

mode.

• After the RTTY mode is selected, hold down [RTTY/PSK]

for 1 second to toggle between the RTTY and RTTY-R

modes.

• “RTTY” or “RTTY-R” appears.

w Push [DECODE](F).

• The RTTY decode screen is displayed.

• When tuned to an RTTY signal, the decoded characters

are displayed in the RX contents screen.

Function Action

<MENU1>

<MENU2>

Selects the Function menu.

HOLD/

CLR

Push

Turns ON or OFF the Hold func-

tion.

•

“

” is displayed and the

current screen freezes.

Hold down

Clears the displayed charac-

ters.

• While the Hold function is ON,

clears the characters and re-

leases the function.

TX MEM Enters the RTTY memory screen.

ADJ Enters the threshold level setting mode.

MAIN/

SUB

Toggles between the Main and Sub bands.

LOG

Enters the RTTY log set screen.

• Starts/Stop making a log ﬁle, or sets the

File type or Storage media.

LOG

VIEW

Displays a log ﬁle.

•

ou can view the log contents.

SET Enters the RTTY decode set screen.

EXPAND

Toggles between the Expanded or Normal

screens.

• The Dualwatch function should be ON when the Sub

band is selected (p. 7-10).

e Push [EXIT/SET].

• Exits

the RTTY decode screen.

[EXIT/SET]

Mode keys

(F) Function keys

• Fucntion menu (MENU2)

• RTTY decode screen (MENU1)

5-17

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

• RTTY threshold setting screen

Setting the decoder threshold level

Adjust the RTTY decoder threshold level if some

characters are displayed, even though no signal is re-

ceived.

q Display the RTTY decode screen, then push [ADJ]

(F).

DECODE [F-3]  ADJ [F-5]

• The RTTY threshold setting screen is displayed.

w Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to adjust the RTTY decoder

threshold level.

• Hold down [DEF](F) for 1 second to select the default

setting.

e Push [EXIT/SET].

• Exits the Setting screen.

RTTY memory transmission

Preset characters can be sent using the RTTY memory.

Contents of the memory are entered in the RTTY mem-

ory edit screen.

 The Multi-function screens are OFF:

q Push [DECODE](F).

• The RTTY decode screen is displayed.

w Push [TX MEM](F) to select the RTTY memory

screen.

e Push [1–4/5–8] to select the RTTY memory bank.

r Push the desired function key [RT1](F) ~ [RT4](F) or

[RT5](F) ~ [RT8](F).

• When no keyboard is connected, the selected memory

contents will be immediately transmitted.

• When a keyboard is connected, the memory contents

will be immediately transmitted when the function key

is pushed, or transmitted after [F12] on the keyboard is

pushed, depending on the Auto transmission/reception

setting (see page 5-18).

• The transmission date, time, reception date and/or time

may be displayed in RX contents screen, depending on

the setting.

• RTTY memory screen (RT1-RT4)

• RTTY memory screen (RT5-RT8)

(F) Function keys

TX indicator MAIN

 For your convenience

When an external keypad is connected, the preset con-

tents, RT1 ~ RT4 or RT5 ~ RT8, can be transmitted.

See pages 3-6 and 15-16 for details.

5-18

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

q Display the RTTY decode screen, then push [TX

MEM](F).

DECODE [F-3]  TX MEM [F-4]

• The RTTY memory screen is displayed.

w Push [EDIT](F).

• The RTTY memory edit screen is displayed.

e Push [RT1..RT8](F) several times.

• Push [RT1..RT8] to select the TX memory.

(RT1 RT2 RT3     RT8 RT1)

r Push [AUTO TX](F) several times.

• Push [AUTO TX](F) to select the Auto TX/RX setting.

( AUTO TX/RXAUTO TXAUTO RX (No indication)

 AUTO TX/RX)

Selection Action

AUTO

TX/RX

Automatically transmits the selected

memory and returns to receive.

AUTO

Automatically transmits the selected

memory. To return to receive, push [F12]

on the keyboard.

AUTO

Push [F12] on the keyboard to transmit the

selected memory. Automatically returns to

receive after transmission.

No indica-

tion

Push [F12] on the keyboard to transmit the

selected memory and push [F12] again to

return to receive.

t Push [EXIT/SET].

• Exits the RTTY memory edit screen.

NOTE: When no keyboard is connected, the trans-

ceiver always functions using the “AUTO TX/RX”

setting.

• RTTY memory edit screen

[EXIT/SET](F) Function keys

 Operating RTTY (FSK) (Continued)

Automatic transmission/reception setting

5-19

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

Editing the RTTY memory

The contents of the RTTY memories can be set us-

ing the Memory edit menu. The memory can store and

retransmit 8 RTTY message for often-used RTTY con-

tent. The capacity of the memory is 70 characters per

memory channel.

• Programming contents

q Display the RTTY decode screen, then push [TX

MEM](F).

DECODE [F-3]  TX MEM [F-4]

• The RTTY memory screen is displayed.

w Push [EDIT](F).

• The RTTY memory edit screen is displayed.

e Push [RT1..RT8](F) several times.

• Push [RT1..RT8] selects the TX memory.

(RT1 RT2 RT3     RT8 RT1)

r Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the character.

Keys Input mode/Action

[ABC]()

Selects the Upper case letters alphabet

input mode.

• Push to toggle between [abc]() and

[ABC]().

[abc]()

Selects the Lower case letters alphabet

input mode.

• Selectable for only the Name item.

[123]()

Selects the Number input mode.

• Push to toggle between [123]() and

[Symbol]().

[Symbol]()

Selects the Symbol input mode.

[DEL](F) Deletes a character.

[SPACE](F) Enters a space.

[t u](F)

Toggles between the Name (Title) and

Content items.

• When a keyboard is connected to the [USB A] port on

the rear panel, you can directly enter the Names or con-

tents using the keyboard.

• Push keypad to enter 0 ~ 9 or a period (.).

t Push [t](F) or [u](F) to move the cursor.

y Repeat steps r and t to input the desired charac-

ters or names.

u After editing the contents, push [EXIT/SET].

• Exits the RTTY memory edit screen.

• Selectable characters (with [MAIN DIAL])

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T

U V W X Y Z

Selectable only in the Name item:

a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x

y z

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0

Name:

! # $ % & \ ? ” ’ ` ^ + –  / . , : ; =

< > ( ) [ ] { } | _

Contents: ! $ & ? ” ’ – / . , : ; ( ) ↵

• RTTY memory edit screen

• Preset contents

CH Name Contents

RT1 MYCALLx2

↵DE ICOM ICOM K↵

RT2 MYCALLx3

↵DE ICOM ICOM ICOM K↵

RT3 QSLUR599

↵QSL UR 599–599 BK↵

RT4 DE+UR599

↵QSL DE ICOM ICOM UR 599–599

BK↵

RT5 73 GL SK

↵73 GL SK↵

RT6 CQ CQ CQ

↵CQ CQ CQ DE ICOM ICOM ICOM

K↵

RT7 RIG&ANT

↵MY TRANSCEIVER IS IC–7851 &

ANTENNA IS A 3–ELEMENT

TRIBAND YAGI.↵

RT8 EQUIP.

↵MY RTTY EQUIPMENT IS

INTERNAL FSK UNIT &

DEMODULATOR OF THE IC–7851. ↵

The IC-7850 displays “IC-7850” as the model name.

[EXIT/SET] [MAIN DIAL](F) Function keys

() Multi-function keys

5-20

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

 Operating RTTY (FSK) (Continued)

Turning ON the RTTY log

Turn ON the RTTY log to store your RTTY operating

record, both TX and RX, onto an SD card or USB ﬂash

drive.

Be sure to insert an SD card or USB ﬂash drive, other-

wise this function does not work.

Display the RTTY decode screen, then push

[<MENU1>](F).

DECODE [F-3]  <MENU1> [F-1]  Displays <MENU2>

• The function menu changes to Menu 2.

w Push [LOG](F).

• The RTTY log set screen is displayed.

e Push [p](F) or [q](F) to select the desired item.

• When the “RTTY LOG” item is set to “ON,” the File type

or the Storage media cannot be changed. Before start-

ing the Log function, set these settings.

r Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the desired setting.

• Set the “RTTY Log File Type” and “RTTY Log Storage

Media” items.

• Hold down [DEF](F) for 1 second to select the default

setting.

t Select the “RTTY Log” item, and then select “ON.”

• To cancel the Log function, select “OFF. ”

y Push [EXIT/SET].

• Exits the Set screen.

[EXIT/SET] [MAIN DIAL](F) Function keys

• Fucntion menu (MENU2)

Displays after the RTTY log starts

RTTY Log (Default: OFF)

Starts or Stops making the RTTY log ﬁle.

• OFF: The RTTY log function is OFF.

• ON: The RTTY log is made onto an selected stor-

age media. Make the log ﬁle for each trans-

mission or reception.

RTTY Log File Type (Default: Text)

Selects ﬁle type to make a log ﬁle onto a storage me-

dia in the Text or HTML format.

• Text: The RTTY log is saved in the Text format.

• HTML: The RTTY log is saved in the HTML format.

RTTY Log Storage Media (Default: SD CARD)

Selects the Storage media between an SD card and

USB ﬂash drive.

5-21

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

Conﬁrm the RTTY log contents

You can conﬁrm the RTTY log contents on the trans-

ceiver display.

Display the RTTY decode screen, then push

[<MENU1>](F).

DECODE [F-3]  <MENU1> [F-1]  Displays <MENU2>

• The function menu changes to Menu 2.

w Push [LOG VIEW](F).

• The RTTY log list screen is displayed.

e Push [p](F) or [q](F) to select a desired ﬁle.

• “” is displayed at left of the ﬁle name that indicates the

active log making ﬁle, so the ﬁle cannot be opened.

r Push [VIEW](F) to display the log contents.

t After checking the log ﬁle, push [EXIT/SET] twice.

• Exits the RTTY log list screen.

[EXIT/SET](F) Function keys

• Fucntion menu (MENU2)

• RTTY log list screen

• Example: Text format

• Example: HTML format

• Functions in the RTTY log list screen

Function Action

SD/USB

Toggles between an SD card and USB ﬂash

drive.

Selects a log ﬁle.

VIEW

Displays the log contents.

• You can see the log contents.

DEL

Hold down for 1 second to display the dialog

box for deleting.

EXPAND

Toggles between the Expanded and normal

screens.

5-22

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

 Operating RTTY (FSK) (Continued)

RTTY decode set mode

This Set mode is used to set the decode USOS func-

tion, time stamp setting, and other RTTY settings.

Display the RTTY decode screen, then push

[<MENU1>](F).

DECODE [F-3]  <MENU1> [F-1]  Displays <MENU2>

• The function menu changes to Menu 2.

w Push [SET](F).

• The RTTY decode set screen is displayed.

e Push [p](F) or [q](F) to select the desired item.

r Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the desired setting.

• Hold down [DEF](F) for 1 second to select the default

setting.

• Push [t u](F) to select the set contents for some

items.

t Push [EXIT/SET].

• Exits the Set screen.

RTTY FFT Scope Averaging (Default: OFF)

Sets the FFT scope waveform averaging function from

2 to 4 or OFF.

Recommendation!

Use the default or smaller number FFT scope wave-

form setting for tuning.

RTTY FFT Scope Waveform Color

(Default: (R) 51 (G) 153 (B) 255)

Sets the color of the FFT scope waveform.

• The color is set in the RGB format.

• Push [

t u](F)

to select R (Red), G (Green) and B

(Blue). Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to adjust the ratio from

0 to 255.

• The color is displayed in the box beside the RGB

scale.

RTTY Decode USOS (Default: ON)

Turns the letter code decoding capability ON or OFF

after receiving a “space.”

(USOS: UnShift On Space function)

• ON: Decodes as a letter code.

• OFF: Decodes as a character code.

RTTY Decode New Line Code

(Default: CR,LF,CR+LF)

Selects the internal RTTY decoder new line code.

CR: Carriage Return, LF: Line Feed

• CR,LF,CR+LF: Makes new line with any codes.

• CR+LF: Makes new line with CR+LF code

only.

RTTY Diddle (Default: BLANK)

Selects the diddle status.

• BLANK: Transmits blank code during no code trans-

mission.

• LTRS: Transmits letter code during no code trans-

mission.

• OFF: Turns the diddle function OFF.

RTTY TX USOS (Default: ON)

Explicitly inserts the FIGS character, even though it is

not required by the receiving station.

• ON: Inserts FIGS.

• OFF: Does not insert FIGS.

• RTTY decode set screen

[EXIT/SET] [MAIN DIAL](F) Function keys

• Fucntion menu (MENU2)

5-23

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

RTTY Auto CR+LF by TX (Default: ON)

Selects sending a new line code (CR+LF) once when

transmitting.

• ON: Transmits the CR+LF code once.

• OFF: Does not transmit the CR+LF code.

RTTY Time Stamp (Default: ON)

Turns the time stamp (date, transmission or reception

time) display ON or OFF.

• ON: Displays the time stamp.

• OFF: Does not display the time stamp.

RTTY Time Stamp (Time) (Default: Local)

Selects the Clock display for the time stamp.

• Local: Selects the time that is set in “Time (Now).”

• UTC*: Selects the time that is set in “CLOCK2.”

* The name of the Clock 2 may differ, depending on

the“CLOCK2 Name” setting (p. 14-3). “UTC” is the

default name of CLOCK2.

NOTE: The time won’t be displayed when “OFF” is

selected in “RTTY Time Stamp” as above.

RTTY Time Stamp (Frequency)

(Default: ON)

Selects the operating frequency display for the time

stamp.

• ON: Displays the operating frequency.

• OFF: Does not display the operating frequency.

NOTE: The frequency won’t be displayed when

“OFF” is selected in “RTTY Time Stamp” above.

RTTY Font Color (Recieve)

(Default: (R) 128 (G) 255 (B) 128)

Sets the text color for received characters.

• The color is set in the RGB format.

• Push [

t u](F)

to select R (Red), G (Green) and B

(Blue). Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to adjust the ratio from

0 to 255.

• The color is displayed in the box beside the RGB

scale.

RTTY Font Color (Transmit)

(Default: (R) 255 (G) 106 (B) 106)

Sets the text color for transmitted characters.

• The color is set in the RGB format.

• Push [

t u](F)

to select R (Red), G (Green) and B

(Blue). Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to adjust the ratio from

0 to 255.

• The color is displayed in the box beside the RGB

scale.

RTTY Font Color (Time Stamp)

(Default: (R) 0 (G) 155 (B) 189)

Sets the text color for time stamp display.

• The color is set in the RGB format.

• Push [

t u](F)

to select R (Red), G (Green) and B

(Blue). Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to adjust the ratio from

0 to 255.

• The color is displayed in the box beside the RGB

scale.

RTTY Font Color (TX Buffer)

(Default: (R) 255 (G) 255 (B) 255)

Sets the text color in the TX buffer screen.

• The color is set in the RGB format.

• Push [

t u](F)

to select R (Red), G (Green) and B

(Blue). Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to adjust the ratio from

0 to 255.

• The color is displayed in the box beside the RGB

scale.

5-24

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT



Operating PSK

A high-quality DSP-based PSK encoder/decoder is built

into the transceiver. You can connect a keyboard to the

transceiver and operate PSK without a PC. (p. 3-6)

This transceiver can be used in the PSK31 and PSK63

modes.

If you would rather use your PSK software, consult the

software manual.

Before transmitting, monitor your selected operating

frequency to make sure you don’t cause interference

to other stations on the same frequency.

 Connect a keyboard to the [USB A] port on the rear

panel:

 The Multi-function screens are OFF:

q Push a band key to select a desired band.

w Push the Mode key [RTTY/PSK] to select the PSK-

mode.

• After the PSK mode is selected, hold down [RTTY/

PSK] for 1 second to toggle between PSK and PSK-R

modes.

• “PSK” or “PSK-R” is displayed.

e Push [DECODE](F).

• The PSK decode screen is displayed.

r Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to tune the desired signal.

• The signal is properly tuned when the radiated lines in

the vector tuning indicator narrow, as show in the ex-

ample on page 5-25.

• The radiated lines in the vector tuning indicator may be

sporadically displayed.

• When a PSK signal is received, the waterfall display is

activated.

• The waterfall display shows the signal condition within

the passband and a vertical line appears when a PSK

signal is received.

t Rotate [RF PWR] to adjust the output power.

• The TX power readout displays the setting level.

y Push the Multi-function [METER]() key to select

the ALC meter.

Push [F12] on the keyboard to transmit.

• The [TX] indicator lights red.

i Rotate [DRIVE] to adjust the Drive gain.

• Adjust the Drive gain so that the ALC meter reading

swings within 30 to 50% of the ALC scale.

• If the ALC meter reading goes outside the ALC zone, the

TX distortion occurs and the readability on the receiver

side may be reduced.

o Type on the keyboard to enter the message that you

want to transmit.

• The typewritten message is displayed in the TX buffer

screen and immediately transmitted.

• The text color will change when transmitted.

• Push one of [F1]–[F8] to transmit the TX memory con-

tents.

!0 Push [F12] on the keyboard to return to receive.

Mode icon

TX power readout

Mode keys [MAIN DIAL]

() Multi-function keys

[DRIVE]

[RF PWR]

TX indicator MAIN

Band keys

 For your convenience

A PSK message can be typed before being transmitted.

q Do steps q to r above and to the left.

w Type from the keyboard to enter the message that

you want to transmit.

• The typewritten contents are displayed in the TX buffer

screen.

e Push [F12] on the keyboard to transmit the typewrit-

ten contents.

• The color of displayed text in the TX buffer screen, will

change when transmitted.

• To cancel the transmission, push [F12] twice.

r Push [F12] on the keyboard to return to receive.

 For your convenience

When an external keypad is connected, the preset con-

tents, PT1 ~ PT4 or PT5 ~ PT8, can be transmitted.

See pages 3-6 and 15-16 for details.

5-25

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

• Indication example

Tuned BPSK signal

BPSK/QPSK idle signal Unmodulated signal

Tuned QPSK signal

Vector indicator and Waterfall display

You can ﬁne tune the PSK signal using the Vector tun-

ing indicator and waterfall display.

q Slowly rotate the [MAIN DIAL].

• When a PSK signal is received, the vertical line appears

on the waterfall display.

w Tune the vertical line to the Center of the waterfall

display.

• The signal is properly tuned when the radiated lines in

the vector tuning indicator narrow, as shown below to the

right.

• Vector tuning indicator

The Vector tuning indicator is displayed when tuning

the signal.

• Waterfall display

Displays the band activity as a waterfall.

If the two or more signals are in the band, tune the

displayed signal to the 1500 Hz tone.

• PSK decode screen

Vector tuning indicator Waterfall

Vector tuning indicator

FFT scope

Waterfall

5-26

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

 Operating PSK (Continued)

Functions for the PSK decoder display

q Push the Mode key [RTTY/PSK] to select the PSK

mode.

•

After the PSK mode is selected, hold down [RTTY/PSK] for

1 second to toggle between the PSK and PSK-R modes.

• “PSK” or “PSK-R” appears.

w Push [DECODE](F).

• The PSK decode screen is displayed.

• When tuned to a PSK signal, the decoded characters

are displayed in the RX contents screen.

Function Action

<MENU1>

<MENU2>

Selects the Function menu.

HOLD/

CLR

Push

Turns ON or OFF the Hold func-

tion.

•

“

” is displayed and the

current screen freezes..

Hold down

Clears the displayed charac-

ters.

• While the Hold function is ON,

clears the characters and re-

leases the function.

AFC/NET

 When the AFC function is OFF:

Turns ON the AFC function.

 When the AFC function is ON:

• “ ” is displayed. If a PSK signal is re-

ceived within the AFC tuning range, the

decoder automatically tunes to the signal

and the frequency offset is displa

yed.

Push

Turns ON or OFF the NET func-

tion. ( AFC/NET  OFF)

•

“ ” and “ ”are dis-

played. You can transmit on

the tuned frequency.

Hold down

Adds the offset frequency to the

operating frequency.

TX MEM Enters the PSK memory screen.

ADJ Enters the threshold level setting mode.

MAIN/

SUB

Toggles between the Main and Sub bands.

B/QPSK

Toggles between the BPSK and QPSK

modes.

31/63

Toggles between the BPSK31 and BPSK63

modes.

LOG

Enters the PSK log set screen.

• Starts/Stops making a log ﬁle, or sets the

File type or Storage media.

LOG

VIEW

Displays a log ﬁle.

•

ou can view the log contents.

SET Enters the PSK decode set screen.

EXPAND

Toggles between the Expanded and Normal

screens.

• The Dualwatch function should be ON when the Sub

band is selected (p. 7-10).

e Push [EXIT/SET].

• Exits

the PSK decode screen.

[EXIT/SET]Mode keys(F) Function keys

• Fucntion menu (MENU2)

• PSK decode screen (MENU1)

5-27

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

About the BPSK and QPSK modes

The BPSK and QPSK modes are selectable in the

PSK31 mode.

• The BPSK (Binary Phase Shift Keying) mode is the

most commonly used mode.

• The QPSK (Quadrature Phase Shift Keying) mode

has error correction capability to provide better de-

coding than the BPSK mode in marginal conditions.

However, more accurate tuning is required with

the QPSK mode, due to the tight phase margin of

QPSK.

q Display the PSK decode screen, then push

[<MENU1>](F).

DECODE [F-3]  <MENU1> [F-1]  Displays <MENU2>

• The function menu changes to Menu 2.

w Push [B/QPSK](F).

• Toggles between the BPSK and QPSK modes.

About the BPSK31 and BPSK63 modes

The BPSK31 and BPSK63 modes are selectable for

the BPSK mode.

q Display the PSK decode screen, then push

[<MENU1>](F).

DECODE [F-3]  <MENU1> [F-1]  Displays <MENU2>

• The function menu changes to Menu 2.

w Push [31/63](F).

• Toggles between the BPSK31 and BPSK63 modes.

•

When the QPSK mode is selected, the BPSK63 mode

cannot be selected.

• PSK decode screen (MENU2)

[EXIT/SET](F) Function keys

“ ” or “ ” is displayed

“

” or “ ” is displayed

5-28

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

 Operating PSK (Continued)

Setting the decoder threshold level

Adjust the PSK decoder threshold level if some charac-

ters are displayed even, though no signal is received.

Display the PSK decode screen, then push [ADJ](F).

DECODE [F-3]  ADJ [F-5]

• The threshold setting screen is displayed.

w Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to adjust the PSK decoder

threshold level.

• Hold down [DEF](F) for 1 second to select the default

setting.

e Push [EXIT/SET].

• Exits the Setting screen.

[EXIT/SET] [MAIN DIAL](F) Function keys

About the PSK reverse mode

If the received signal is not properly demodulated, try

selecting the PSK-R mode.

In the QPSK mode, the phase shift direction must be

the same on the transmitter and the receiver sides. To

receive the reverse direction signal, select the PSK-R

mode to match the phase shift direction to the trans-

mitter side.

 In the PSK mode, hold down [RTTY/PSK] for 1 sec-

ond to select the PSK and PSK-R modes.

AFC/NET functions

This transceiver has an AFC (Auto Frequency Control)

function. This is convenient to tune the PSK signal.

This transceiver also has a NET function that transmits

the PSK signal tuned by the AFC function.

 In the PSK decode screen, push [AFC/NET](F).

• Push [AFC/NET](F) selects these functions.

“

” (AFC ON)  “ ” and “ ” (AFC/NET ON)

 (The icons disappear) 

“ ” (AFC ON)    

• When “ ” or “ ”and “ ” are displayed, dis-

plays the frequency offset between the operating fre-

quency and the PSK signal.

• The AFC tuning range is set to ±15 Hz by default. You

can select a ±8 Hz setting in the PSK decode set mode.

(p. 5-34)

 When the frequency offset is displayed, hold down

[AFC/NET](F) for 1 second to add the frequency off-

set to the operating frequency.

Mode keys

AFC, NET icons Frequency offset

NOTE: The AFC function may not tune the signal

properly when a weak PSK signal is received.

5-29

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

PSK memory transmission

Preset characters can be sent using the PSK memory.

Contents of the memory are entered in the PSK memory

edit screen.

 The Multi-function screens are OFF:

q Push [DECODE](F).

• The PSK decode screen is displayed.

w Push [TX MEM](F) to select the PSK memory

screen.

e Push [1–4/5–8] to select the PSK memory bank.

r Push the desired function key [PT1](F) ~ [PT4](F) or

[PT5](F) ~ [PT8](F).

• When no keyboard is connected, the selected memory

contents will be immediately transmitted .

• When a keyboard is connected, the memory contents

will be immediately transmitted when the function key

is pushed, or transmitted after [F12] on the keyboard is

pushed, depending on the Auto transmission/reception

setting (see page 5-30).

• The transmission date, time, reception date and/or time

may be displayed in RX contents screen, depending on

the setting.

• PSK memory screen (PT1-PT4)

• PSK memory screen (PT5-PT8)

(F) Function keys

TX indicator MAIN

 For your convenience

When an external keypad is connected, the preset con-

tents, PT1 ~ PT4 or PT5 ~ PT8, can be transmitted.

See pages 3-6 and 15-16 for details.

5-30

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

q Display the PSK decode screen, then push [TX

MEM](F).

DECODE [F-3]  TX MEM [F-4]

• The PSK memory screen is displayed.

w Push [EDIT](F).

• The PSK memory edit screen is displayed.

e Push [PT1..PT8](F) several times.

• Push [PT1..PT8] to select the TX memory.

(PT1 PT2 PT3     PT8 PT1)

r Push [AUTO TX](F) several times.

• Push [AUTO TX](F) to select the Auto TX/RX setting.

( AUTO TX/RXAUTO TXAUTO RX (No indication)

 AUTO TX/RX)

Selection Action

AUTO

TX/RX

Automatically transmits the selected

memory and returns to receive.

AUTO

Automatically transmits the selected

memory. To return to receive, push [F12]

on the keyboard.

AUTO

Push [F12] on the keyboard to transmit the

selected memory. Automatically returns to

receive after transmission.

No indica-

tion

Push [F12] on the keyboard to transmit the

selected memory and push [F12] again to

return to receive.

t Push [EXIT/SET].

• Exits the PSK memory edit screen.

NOTE: When no keyboard is connected, the trans-

ceiver always functions using the “AUTO TX/RX”

setting.

• PSK memory edit screen

[EXIT/SET](F) Function keys

 Operating PSK (Continued)

Automatic transmission/reception setting

5-31

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

• Preset contents

CH Name Contents

PT1 MYCALLx2

↵DE Icom Icom K↵

PT2 MYCALLx3

↵DE Icom Icom Icom K↵

PT3 QSLUR599

↵QSL UR 599 599 BK↵

PT4 DE+UR599

↵QSL DE Icom Icom UR 599 599

BK↵

PT5 73 GL SK

↵73 GL SK↵

PT6 CQ CQ CQ

↵CQ CQ CQ DE Icom Icom Icom K↵

PT7 RIG&ANT

↵My transceiver is IC–7851 & Antenna

is a 3–element triband yagi.↵

PT8 EQUIP.

↵My PSK equipment is internal modu-

lator & demodulator of the IC–7851.↵

The IC-7850 displays “IC-7850” as the model name.

• PSK memory edit screen

Editing the PSK memory

The contents of the PSK memories can be set using

the Memory edit menu. The memory can store and

retransmit 8 PSK message for often-used PSK con-

tent. Total capacity of the memory is 70 characters per

memory channel.

• Programming contents

q Display the PSK decode screen, then push [TX

MEM](F).

DECODE [F-3]  TX MEM [F-4]

• The PSK memory screen is displayed.

w Push [EDIT](F).

• The PSK memory edit screen is displayed.

e Push [PT1..PT8](F) several times.

• Push [PT1..PT8] selects the TX memory.

(PT1 PT2 PT3     PT8 PT1)

r Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the character.

Keys Input mode/Action

[ABC]()

Selects the Upper case letters alphabet

input mode.

• Push to toggle between [abc]() and

[ABC]().

[abc]()

Selects the Lower case letters alphabet

input mode.

[123]()

Selects the Number input mode.

• Push to toggle between [123]() and

[Symbol]().

[Symbol]()

Selects the Symbol input mode.

[DEL](F) Deletes a character.

[SPACE](F) Enters a space.

[t u](F)

Toggles between the Name (Title) and

Content items.

• When a keyboard is connected to the [USB A] port on

the rear panel, you can directly enter the Name or con-

tents using the keyboard.

• Push keypad to enter 0 ~ 9 or a period (.).

t Push [t](F) or [u](F) to move the cursor.

y Repeat steps r and t to input the desired charac-

ters or names.

u After editing the contents, push [EXIT/SET].

• Exits the PSK memory edit screen.

• Selectable characters (with [MAIN DIAL])

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T

U V W X Y Z

a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x

y z

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0

! # $ % & \ ? ” ’ ` ^ + –  / . , : ; = < > ( ) [ ] {

} | _

@ ↵

“↵” is selectable only in the contents item.

[EXIT/SET] [MAIN DIAL](F) Function keys

() Multi-function keys

5-32

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

 Operating PSK (Continued)

Turning ON the PSK log

Turn ON the PSK log to store your PSK operating re-

cord, both TX and RX, onto an SD card or USB ﬂash

drive.

Be sure to insert an SD card or USB ﬂash drive, other-

wise this function does not work.

Display the PSK decode screen, then push

[<MENU1>](F).

DECODE [F-3]  <MENU1> [F-1]  Displays <MENU2>

• The function menu changes to Menu 2.

w Push [LOG](F).

• The PSK log set screen is displayed.

e Push [p](F) or [q](F) to select the desired item.

• When the “PSK LOG” item is set to “ON,” the File type or

the Storage media cannot be changed. Before starting

the Log function, set these settings.

r Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the desired setting.

• Set the “PSK Log File Type” and “PSK Log Storage Me-

dia” items.

• Hold down [DEF](F) for 1 second to select the default

setting.

t Select the “PSK Log” item, and then select “ON.”

• To cancel the Log function, select “OFF. ”

y Push [EXIT/SET].

• Exits the Set screen.

[EXIT/SET] [MAIN DIAL](F) Function keys

• Fucntion menu (MENU2)

PSK Log (Default: OFF)

Starts or Stops making the PSK log ﬁle.

• OFF: The PSK log function is OFF.

• ON: The PSK log is made onto an selected stor-

age media. Make the log ﬁle for each trans-

mission or reception.

PSK Log File Type (Default: Text)

Selects ﬁle type to make a log ﬁle onto a storage me-

dia in the Text or HTML format.

• Text: The PSK log is saved in the Text format.

• HTML: The PSK log is saved in the HTML format.

PSK Log Storage Media (Default: SD CARD)

Selects the Storage media between an SD card and

USB ﬂash drive.

Displays after the PSK log starts

5-33

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

Conﬁrm the PSK log contents

You can conﬁrm the PSK log contents on the trans-

ceiver display.

Display the PSK decode screen, then push

[<MENU1>](F).

DECODE [F-3]  <MENU1> [F-1]  Displays <MENU2>

• The function menu changes to Menu 2.

w Push [LOG VIEW](F).

• The PSK log list screen is displayed.

e Push [p](F) or [q](F) to select a desired ﬁle.

• “” is displayed at left of the ﬁle name that indicates the

active making log ﬁle, so the ﬁle cannot be opened.

r Push [VIEW](F) to display the log.

t After checking the log ﬁle, push [EXIT/SET] twice.

• Exits the PSK log list screen.

• Fucntion menu (MENU2)

• PSK log list screen

• Example: Text format

• Example: HTML format

• Functions in the PSK log list screen

Function Action

SD/USB

Toggles between an SD card or USB ﬂash

drive.

Select a log ﬁle.

VIEW

Displays the log contents.

• You can see the log contents.

DEL

Hold down for 1 second to display the dialog

box for deleting.

EXPAND

Toggles between the Expanded and normal

screens.

[EXIT/SET](F) Function keys

5-34

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

PSK FFT Scope Averaging (Default: OFF)

Sets the FFT scope waveform averaging function from

2 to 4 or OFF.

Recommendation!

Use the default or smaller number FFT scope wave-

form setting for tuning.

PSK FFT Scope Waveform Color

(Default: (R) 51 (G) 153 (B) 255)

Sets the color of the FFT scope waveform.

• The color is set in the RGB format.

• Push [

t u](F)

to select R (Red), G (Green) and B

(Blue). Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to adjust the ratio from

0 to 255.

• The color is displayed in the box beside the RGB

scale.

PSK AFC Range (Default: ±15 Hz)

Selects the AFC (Automatic Frequency Control) func-

tion operating range between ±15 Hz (default) and ±8

Hz.

NOTE: The AFC function may not tune the signal

properly when a weak PSK signal is received.

PSK Time Stamp (Default: ON)

Turns the time stamp (date, transmission or reception

time) display ON or OFF.

• ON: Displays the time stamp.

• OFF: Does not display the time stamp.

PSK Time Stamp (Time) (Default: Local)

Selects the Clock display for the time stamp.

• Local: Selects the time that is set in “Time (Now).”

• UTC*: Selects the time that is set in “CLOCK2.”

* The name of Clock 2 may differ, depending on

the“CLOCK2 Name” setting (p. 14-3). “UTC” is the

default name of CLOCK2.

NOTE: The time won’t be displayed when “OFF” is

selected in “PSK Time Stamp” above.

PSK Time Stamp (Frequency) (Default: ON)

Selects the operating frequency display for the time

stamp.

• ON: Displays the operating frequency.

• OFF: Does not display the operating frequency.

NOTE: The frequency won’t be displayed when

“OFF” is selected in “PSK Time Stamp” above

• PSK decode set screen

[EXIT/SET] [MAIN DIAL](F) Function keys

 Operating PSK (Continued)

PSK decode set mode

This Set mode is used to set the FFT scope setting,

time stamp setting, and so on.

Display the PSK decode screen, then push

[<MENU1>](F).

DECODE [F-3]  <MENU1> [F-1]  Displays <MENU2>

• The function menu changes to Menu 2.

w Push [SET](F).

• The PSK decoder set screen is displayed.

e Push [p](F) or [q](F) to select the desired item.

r Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the desired setting.

• Hold down [DEF](F) for 1 second to select the default

setting.

• Push [t u](F) to select the set contents for some

items.

t Push [EXIT/SET].

• Exits the Set screen.

5-35

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

PSK Font Color (Recieve)

(Default: (R) 128 (G) 255 (B) 128)

Sets the text color for received characters.

• The color is set in the RGB format.

• Push [

t u](F)

to select R (Red), G (Green) and B

(Blue). Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to adjust the ratio from

0 to 255.

• The color is displayed in the box beside the RGB

scale.

PSK Font Color (Transmit)

(Default: (R) 255 (G) 106 (B) 106)

Sets the text color for transmitted characters.

• The color is set in the RGB format.

• Push [

t u](F)

to select R (Red), G (Green) and B

(Blue). Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to adjust the ratio from

0 to 255.

• The color is displayed in the box beside the RGB

scale.

PSK Font Color (Time Stamp)

(Default: (R) 0 (G) 155 (B) 189)

Sets the text color for time stamp display.

• The color is set in the RGB format.

• Push [

t u](F)

to select R (Red), G (Green) and B

(Blue). Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to adjust the ratio from

0 to 255.

• The color is displayed in the box beside the RGB

scale.

PSK Font Color (TX Buffer)

(Default: (R) 255 (G) 255 (B) 255)

Sets the text color in the TX buffer screen.

• The color is set in the RGB format.

• Push [

t u](F)

to select R (Red), G (Green) and B

(Blue). Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to adjust the ratio from

0 to 255.

• The color is displayed in the box beside the RGB

scale.

5-36

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT



Operating AM or FM

Before transmitting, monitor the operating frequency

to make sure transmitting won’t cause interference to

other stations on the same frequency.

q Push a band key to select the desired band.

w Push the Mode key [AM/FM] to select the AM or FM

mode.

• “AM” or “FM” is displayed.

e Rotate [AF] to set the audio to a comfortable listen-

ing level.

r Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to tune a desired signal.

• The tuning step is set to 1 kHz for AM, and 10 kHz for FM

by default. You can change it in the TS screen. (p. 4-7)

t Rotate [RF PWR] to adjust the output power.

• The TX power readout displays the setting level.

y Push the Multi-function [METER]() key to select

the Po meter.

u Transmit.

• Push [TRANSMIT] or [PTT] (microphone).

• The [TX] indicator lights red.

i Rotate [MIC] to adjust the Microphone gain.

• While speaking into the microphone at your normal voice

level, adjust the microphone gain. Check the audio clar-

ity with another station listening to your voice, or using

the Monitor function (p. 8-5).

o After your transmission is ﬁnished, returns to re-

ceive.

• Push [TRANSMIT] or release [PTT].

Mode icon

TX power readout

Mode icon

TX power readout

For your reference:

FM narrow transmission can be used when “FIL2” or

“FIL3” is selected.

Mode keys

() Multi-function keys

[MIC]

[RF PWR]

[TRANSMIT]

Microphone connector

TX indicator MAIN

Band keys

[MAIN DIAL]

5-37

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT



Repeater operation

A repeater ampliﬁes received signals and retransmits

them on a different frequency. When using a repeater,

the transmit frequency is shifted from the receive fre-

quency by an offset amount. A repeater can be ac-

cessed using split frequency operation with the shift

frequency set to the repeater’s frequency offset.

To access a repeater that requires a repeater tone,

set the repeater tone frequency in the Tone frequen-

cy screen. (p. 5-38)

q Push a band key to select a desired band.

Push the Mode key [AM/FM] to select the FM mode.

• “FM” is displayed.

e Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to tune a desired signal.

r Hold down [SPLIT] for 1 second to start repeater

operation.

• The repeater tone is automatically turned ON.

• “SPLIT” is displayed and the [SPLIT] indicator lights.

• The shifted transmit frequency, “TONE” and “TX” appear

in the Sub band.

• You can independently set the frequency offset for the

HF band and the 50 MHz band (p. 15-14). You can also

set the Repeater tone frequency (p 5-38).

t Operate in the normal way.

While using the Split function, transmission is made

on the Sub band, and the reception is made on the

Main band.

• Repeater operation screen

Mode keys [MAIN DIAL] [SPLIT]

SPLIT indicator Band keys

[MAIN]

Checking the repeater input signal

You can check whether another station’s transmit sig-

nal can be received directly or not, by listening to the

repeater input frequency.

 While receiving, hold down [XFC] to listen on the

repeater input frequency.

• While holding down [XFC]

5-38

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT

Repeater tone frequency setting

Some repeaters require subaudible tones to be ac-

cessed. Subaudible tones are superimposed on your

normal signal, and must be set in advance. The trans-

ceiver has 50 tones from 67.0 Hz to 254.1 Hz.

q Hold down the Multi-function [TONE]() key for 1

second.

• The Tone frequency screen is displayed.

w Push [p](F) or [q](F) to select the “REPEATER

TONE” item.

e Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the desired repeater

tone frequency.

• The selectable tone frequencies are listed below.

• Hold down [DEF](F) for 1 second to select the default

setting.

• Pushing [T-SCAN](F) toggles the Tone Scan function

ON or OFF. (p. 12-10)

r Push the Multi-function [TONE]() key.

• Exits the Tone frequency screen.

67.0

69.3

71.9

74.4

77.0

79.7

82.5

085.4

088.5

091.5

094.8

097.4

100.0

103.5

107.2

110.9

114.8

118.8

123.0

127.3

131.8

136.5

141.3

146.2

151.4

156.7

159.8

162.2

165.5

167.9

171.3

173.8

177.3

179.9

183.5

186.2

189.9

192.8

196.6

199.5

203.5

206.5

210.7

218.1

225.7

229.1

233.6

241.8

250.3

254.1

• Tone frequency screen

[MAIN DIAL](F) Function keys

() Multi-function keys

 Repeater operation (Continued)

• Selectable tone frequencies (unit: Hz)

5-39

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT



Tone squelch operation

The tone squelch opens only when you receive a sig-

nal containing a matching subaudible tone in the FM

mode.

You can silently wait for calls from others using the

same tone.

When you transmit, the tone frequency is superim-

posed on your own signal.

q Push a band key to select a desired band.

w Push the Mode key [AM/FM] to select the FM

mode.

• “FM” is displayed.

e Push the Multi-function [TONE]() key to turn ON

the Tone Squelch function.

• “TSQL” is displayed.

• Pushing the Multi-function [TONE]() key toggles the

tone setting between “TONE,” “TSQL,” and OFF.

r Hold down the Multi-function [TONE]() key for 1

second.

• The Tone frequency screen is displayed.

t Push [p](F) or [q](F) to select the “T-SQL TONE”

item.

y Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the desired tone

squelch frequency.

• The selectable tone frequencies are listed below.

• Hold down [DEF](F) for 1 second to select the default

setting.

• Pushing [T-SCAN](F) toggles the Tone Scan function

ON and OFF. (p. 12-10)

u Push the Multi-function [TONE]() key.

• Exits the Tone frequency screen.

• When the received signal includes a matching tone,

squelch opens and the signal can be heard.

i Operate in the normal way.

• When you transmit, the tone frequency is superimposed

on your signal.

• Tone squelch function ON

• Tone frequency screen

Mode keys [MAIN DIAL](F) Function keys

() Multi-function keys

• Selectable tone frequencies (unit: Hz)

67.0

69.3

71.9

74.4

77.0

79.7

82.5

085.4

088.5

091.5

094.8

097.4

100.0

103.5

107.2

110.9

114.8

118.8

123.0

127.3

131.8

136.5

141.3

146.2

151.4

156.7

159.8

162.2

165.5

167.9

171.3

173.8

177.3

179.9

183.5

186.2

189.9

192.8

196.6

199.5

203.5

206.5

210.7

218.1

225.7

229.1

233.6

241.8

250.3

254.1

5-40

RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT



Data mode (AFSK) operation

When operating AMTOR or PACKET with a PC appli-

cation software, consult the manual that comes with

the software.

Before transmitting, monitor the operating frequency

to make sure transmitting won’t cause interference to

other stations on the same frequency.

 Connect a PC or other device to the transceiver. (p.

3-8)

q Push a band key to select a desired band.

w Push the Mode key [SSB] or [AM/FM] to select the

desired mode.

• Normally, the LSB mode is used in the HF band, and the

FM mode is used in the VHF band.

e Push [DATA] to turn ON the data mode.

• In the data mode, hold down [DATA] for 1 second to

sequentially toggle the data mode between D1, D2, and

D3.

• Push [DATA] again to turn OFF the data mode.

r Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to tune in the desired signal

and decoded correctly.

• Also use the tuning indicator of the PC software.

• In the SSB data mode,

⁄4 tuning function can be used

for critical tuning.

t Push the Multi-function [METER]() key to select

the Po meter.

y Rotate [RF PWR] to adjust the output power.

• The TX power readout displays the setting level.

u Transmit by using the PC (software).

• The [TX] indicator lights red.

• When operating in the SSB data mode, adjust the PC’s

output level so that the ALC meter reading doesn’t go

outside the ALC zone.

i Transmit the AFSK signal by using the keyboard.

• After your transmission is ﬁnished, returns to receive.

 For your information

The carrier frequency is displayed when the SSB data

mode is selected.

See the diagram to the right for a tone-pair example.

170 Hz 2125 Hz

2295 Hz

Mark Space Carrier frequency

(displayed frequency)

Mode keys [MAIN DIAL]

() Multi-function keys

[RF PWR]

[TRANSMIT]

[DATA]

TX indicator MAIN

Band keys

NOTE: When the SSB data mode is selected, the au-

dio input from [ACC 1] is used for modulation input

instead of [MIC].

The following settings are used for SSB data trans-

mission.

• [COMP]: OFF

• Tx bandwidth: MID

• Tx Tone (Bass): 0

• Tx Tone (Trebles): 0

• 2125 Hz/2295 Hz tone-pair in the LSB mode

6-1

SCOPE OPERATION Section 6

 Spectrum scope screen ……………………………………………… 6-2

D Operating the Spectrum scope …………………………………… 6-3

D Center mode ………………………………………………………… 6-4

D Fixed mode …………………………………………………………… 6-5

D Dual scope screen …………………………………………………… 6-6

D Mini scope screen …………………………………………………… 6-6

D Scope attenuator …………………………………………………… 6-7

D Adjusting the Reference level ……………………………………… 6-8

D Sweep speed ………………………………………………………… 6-9

D Scope set screen …………………………………………………… 6-10

D USB mouse operation ……………………………………………… 6-14

 Audio scope screen ……………………………………………………6-15

D Audio scope set mode ………………………………………………6-16

6-2

SCOPE OPERATION

• Center mode screen

• Fixed mode screen

 Spectrum scope screen

This DSP-based spectrum scope allows you to display

the activity on the selected band, as well as the relative

strengths of various signals.

This transceiver has two spectrum scope modes. One

is the Center mode, and another one is the Fixed

mode.

You can also select Dual scope, Single scope, and

Waterfall display ON or OFF for your convenience.

In addition, there is a Mini scope screen to save screen

space.

NOTE:

Spurious signal waveforms may be displayed.

They are generated in the internal scope circuit and

do not indicate a transceiver malfunction.

• Center mode screen (Dual scope: Side by Side) • Fixed mode screen (Waterfall OFF)

Main/Sub band icon

Grid (frequency/level)

Span (Display range)

Edge (Upper frequency)

Edge (Lower frequency)

Display frequency (moves)

Display frequency (stays on Center)

FFT scope zone

(FFT: Fast Fourier Transform)

Waterfall zone

Grid (frequency/level)

Center/Fixed mode icon

6-3

SCOPE OPERATION

D Operating the Spectrum scope

 The Multi-function screens are OFF:

q Push [SCOPE](F).

• The Spectrum scope screen is displayed.

Function Action

<MENU1>

<MENU2>

Selects the Function menu.

SPAN

When the Center mode is selected, selects

the scope span.

• Selectable spans: ±2.5, 5.0, 10, 25, 50,

100, 250 and 500 kHz

• Hold down for 1 sec ond to select the ±2.5

kHz span.

EDGE

When the Fixed mode is selected, selects

the Edge frequencies.

• Upper and lower edge frequencies can be

set in the Scope set screen.

ATT

Push

Selects the Scope attenuator.

• OFF, 10 dB, 20 dB, 30dB

Hold down

Turns OFF the attenuator.

HOLD

Push

Selects the Hold function ON or

OFF.

Hold down

Clears the Peak hold level.

CENT/FIX Selects the Center or Fixed mode.

M/S

DUAL

Push

Selects the Main or Sub band.

Hold down

Selects the Dual or Single

scope.

EXPD/

SET

Push

Selects the Expanded or Nor-

mal screen.

Hold down

Enters the Scope set screen.

REF

Displays the Reference level window.

(p. 6-8)

• Push again to close the window.

• Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to adjust the Refer-

ence level.

SPEED

Selects the sweep speed.

• “,” “,” or “” displays FAST, MID, or

SLOW.

MARKER Selects the Marker.

• The Spectrum scope with Sub band selection is

enabled only when the Dualwatch or Split frequen-

cy operation.

w To exit the Spectrum scope screen, push [EXIT/

SET].

• Spectrum scope screen

• Function menu (MENU2)

• Fixed mode screen (Dual scope)

(F) Function keys

[EXIT/SET]

NOTE: If a strong signal is received, a ghost wave-

form may appear. If it appears, push [ATT](F) several

times to enable the Scope attenuator.

6-4

SCOPE OPERATION

 Spectrum scope screen (Continued)

D Center mode

Displays signals around the operating frequency within

the selected span. The operating frequency is always

displayed in the center of the screen.

 The Multi-function screens are OFF:

q Push [SCOPE](F).

• The Spectrum scope screen is displayed.

w Push [CENT/FIX](F).

• “

CENTER

” is displayed when the Center mode is se-

lected.

• Push [CENT/FIX](F) to toggle between the Center and

Fixed modes.

e Push [SPAN](F) several times to select the scope

span.

• Selectable span

±2.5, 5.0, 10, 25, 50, 100, 250 and 500 kHz

• Hold down [SPAN](F) for 1second to select the ±2.5 kHz

span.

To exit the Spectrum scope screen, push [EXIT/SET].

The Marker display in the Center mode

The Marker displays the operating frequency of the

Main or Sub band in the Spectrum scope screen. How-

ever, the operating frequency stays on the Center of

the screen when the Center mode is selected. Thus,

the transceiver does not display the MAIN maker on the

Main scope, nor the SUB maker on the Sub scope.

• When the Hold function is ON, the Maker is displayed

to display the operating frequency’s position.

• Marker types

: Main marker displays the operating frequency

for Main band.

: Sub marker displays the operating frequency

for Sub band.

: TX marker displays the transmit frequency.

 Push [MARKER](F) to select the marker.

• When Main scope is selected:

SUB, TX/SUB, TX, Marker OFF

• When Sub scope is selected:

MAIN, TX/MAIN, TX, Marker OFF

• When the Maker is displayed and the frequency is

out of range, “<<” or “>>” appears at the upper side

corners of the Spectrum scope screen.

<<: The frequency is too low.

>>: The frequency is too high.

• TX marker is ON

[EXIT/SET] [MAIN DIAL](F) Function keys

• Center mode screen

• Center mode screen (Example: Span ±500 kHz )

6-5

SCOPE OPERATION

The Marker display in the Fixed mode

In the Fixed mode, the Marker displays the operat-

ing frequency. So, the transceiver always displays the

Main marker on the Main scope, or the Sub marker on

the Sub scope.

• Marker types

: Main marker displays the operating frequency

for Main band.

: Sub marker displays the operating frequency

for Sub band.

: TX marker displays the transmit frequency.

 Push [MARKER](F) to select the Marker.

• When the Main scope is selected:

MAIN/SUB, MAIN/TX, MAIN/SUB/TX, Only MAIN

• When the Sub scope is selected:

MAIN/SUB, SUB/TX, MAIN/SUB/TX, Only SUB

• When the Marker is displayed and the frequency is

out of range, “<<” or “>>” appears at the upper side

corners of the Spectrum scope screen.

<<: The frequency is too low.

>>: The frequency is too high.

D Fixed mode

Displays signals within a speciﬁed frequency range.

The selected frequency band activity can be observed

at a glance when using this mode.

 The Multi-function screens are OFF:

q Push [SCOPE](F).

• The Spectrum scope screen is displayed.

w Push [CENT/FIX](F).

• “

FIX

” is displayed when the Fixed mode is select-

• Push [CENT/FIX](F) to toggle between the Center and

Fixed modes.

e Push [EDGE](F) several times to select the Edge

frequency.

• The upper or lower Edge frequencies can be changed in

the Scope set screen. (p. 6-12)

• Hold down [SPAN](F) for 1second to select the ±2.5 kHz

span.

• When the operating frequency moves past the upper or

lower Edge frequency, “<<” or “>>” appears at the upper

side corners of the screen.

<<: The frequency is too low.

>>: The frequency is too high.

When the frequency goes further away, “Scope Out of

Range” is displayed.

r To exit the Spectrum scope screen, push [EXIT/SET].

[EXIT/SET] [MAIN DIAL](F) Function keys

• Fixed mode screen

• The SUB maker is out of range (“>>” appears)

6-6

SCOPE OPERATION

 Spectrum scope screen (Continued)

D Dual scope screen

This transceiver has a Dual scope mode that simul-

taneously displays the Main and Sub scopes during

Dualwatch operation.

You can select the “Over/Under” or “Side by Side” lay-

out in the Scope set screen.

 The Multi-function screens are OFF:

q Push [SCOPE](F).

• The Spectrum scope screen is displayed.

w Hold down [M/S DUAL](F) for 1 second.

• The Dual scope is displayed.

• Hold down [M/S DUAL](F) for 1 second to toggle be-

tween the Dual and Single scopes.

e Push [M/S DUAL](F).

• Push [M/S DUAL](F) toggles between the Main and Sub

scopes.

• An orange frame moves and displays the selected side.

To exit the Spectrum scope screen, push [EXIT/SET].

D Mini scope screen

The Mini scope screen can be simultaneously dis-

played with another Multi-function displays, such as

Set mode menu, RTTY/PSK decode screen, Memory

list screen.

 Push [M.SCOPE] to turn the Mini scope screen ON

or OFF.

• Hold down [M.SCOPE] for 1 second to display the Spec-

trum scope screen.

• When the Mini scope screen is displayed with the Scope

set screen, you can select the setting by verifying the

spectrum.

However, you cannot make changes using the Function

keys, such as the Scope attenuator setting, Center/Fixed

mode selection.

• Dual scope screen (OVER/Under: Fixed mode)

• Dual scope screen (Side by Side: Center mode)

• Mini scope screen with the Set mode menu screen

• Dual mini scope screen with the RTTY decode screen

6-7

SCOPE OPERATION

D Scope attenuator

While operating in the band with a high noise ﬂoor, set

the Scope attenuator to reduce the noise level.

• Even if the Scope attenuator is ON, it does not affect

the receiver sensitivity.

 The Multi-function screens are OFF:

q Push [SCOPE](F).

• The Spectrum scope screen is displayed.

w Push [ATT](F) several times to select the Scope at-

tenuator level.

• Selectable levels: 10 dB, 20 dB, 30 dB, and OFF.

• Hold down [ATT](F) for 1 second to turn the Scope at-

tenuator OFF.

To exit the Spectrum scope screen, push [EXIT/SET].

[EXIT/SET] [MAIN DIAL](F) Function keys

• Scope attenuator (OFF)

• Scope attenuator (10 dB)

• Scope attenuator (20 dB)

• Scope attenuator (30 dB)

6-8

SCOPE OPERATION

• Function menu (MENU2)

• Reference level (±0.0 dB)

• Difference spectrum (+20.0 dB, ±0.0 dB, –20.0 dB)

• Display example (+20.0 dB)

• Display example (–20.0 dB)

Reference level

(+20.0 dB)

±0.0 dB

–20.0 dB

+20.0 dB

All signal levels appear stronger.

All signal levels appear weaker.

Reference level

(–20.0 dB)

[EXIT/SET] [MAIN DIAL](F) Function keys

 Spectrum scope screen (Continued)

D Adjusting the Reference level

When monitoring a weak signal that is buried in the

noise ﬂoor, or monitoring a strong signal but some

stronger signals is nearby, adjust the Reference level

of the screen helps to see these signals.

• Even if this setting is changed, it does not affect the

scope input level.

If you want to change the scope input level, set the

Scope attenuator of 10 dB, 20 dB, or 30 dB.

• When you adjust the Reference level, the signal

strength for the waterfall also appears to change.

Display the Spectrum scope screen, then push

[<MENU1>](F).

SCOPE [F-1]  <MENU1> [F-1]  Displays <MENU2>

• The function menu changes to Menu 2.

w Push [REF](F).

• Displays the Reference level window.

• Push again to close the window.

e Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to adjust the level.

• Adjustable range: –20.0 dB ~ +20.0 dB.

• Hold down [REF](F) for 1 second to select ±0.0 dB.

r Push [REF](F).

To exit the Spectrum scope screen, push [EXIT/SET].

–5.0k

SPECTRUM SCOPE Grid

1k/10dB

+4+3+2+10–4 –3 –2 –1

+5.0k

ATT OFF HOLD

MAIN

CENTER

M S T

–5.0k

SPECTRUM SCOPE Grid

1k/10dB

+4+3+2+10–4 –3 –2 –1

ATT OFF HOLD

MAIN

CENTER

M S T

6-9

SCOPE OPERATION

D Sweep speed

Select the sweep speed to change the FFT (Fast Fou-

rier Transform) scope renew speed and the waterfall

speed.

• If you want to change only the waterfall speed, you

can select “SLOW,” “MID,” or “FAST” in the Scope set

screen.

Display the Spectrum scope screen, then push

[<MENU1>](F).

SCOPE [F-1]  <MENU1> [F-1]  Displays <MENU2>

• The function menu changes to Menu 2.

w Push [SPEED](F) several times.

• Selectable speeds: FAST, MID, or SLOW.

• “,” “,” or “” displays FAST, MID, or SLOW.

To exit the Spectrum scope screen, push [EXIT/SET].

• Function menu (MENU2)

• Sweep speed (FAST)

• Sweep speed (MID)

• Sweep speed (SLOW)

[EXIT/SET] [MAIN DIAL](F) Function keys

“”

“”

“”

6-10

SCOPE OPERATION

 Spectrum scope screen (Continued)

D Scope set screen

This Set screen is used to set the waveform color,

Scope range for the Fixed mode, and so on.

q Display the Spectrum scope screen, then hold down

[EXPD/SET](F) for 1 second.

SCOPE [F-1]  EXPD/SET [F-7]

• The Scope set screen is displayed.

w Push [p](F) or [q](F) to select the desired item.

• Push [t u] to select the contents for various items.

e Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the option or set the

level.

• Hold down [DEF](F) for 1 second to select the default

option or level.

r Push [EXIT/SET].

• Exits the Set screen.

[EXIT/SET] [MAIN DIAL](F) Function keys

• Scope set screen

Scope during TX (CENTER TYPE)

(Default: ON)

Select the TX signal display ON or OFF.

Max Hold (Default: 10s Hold)

Select the peak level holding function.

• OFF: Turns OFF the peak level holding func-

tion.

• 10s Hold: Holds the peak spectrum for 10 sec-

onds.

• ON: Holds the peak spectrum.

CENTER Type Display

(Default: Filter Center)

Select the center frequency of the Spectrum scope

display. (Only in the Center mode)

• Filter center: Displays the selected ﬁlter’s center

frequency at the center of the Spec-

trum scope screen.

• Carrier Point Center:

Displays the carrier point frequency

of the selected operating mode at the

center of the Spectrum scope screen.

• Carrier Point Center (Abs. Freq.):

In addition to the carrier point center

setting above, the actual frequency is

displayed at the bottom of the scope.

Marker Position (Fix Type)

(Default: Carrier Point)

Select the marker position of the Spectrum scope dis-

play. (Only in the Fixed mode)

• Filter center: Displays the Marker on the selected

ﬁlter’s center frequency.

• Carrier Point: Displays the Marker on the carrier

point frequency of the selected oper-

ating mode.

VBW (Default: Narrow)

Select the VBW (Video Band Width).

• Narrow: Sets the VBW to narrow.

• Wide: Sets the VBW to wide.

When “Wide” is selected, the line drawn on the re-

ceive spectrum becomes wide. However, the small

edge cannot be drawn.

Averaging (Default: OFF)

Set the FFT scope waveform averaging function to be-

tween 2 and 4, or OFF.

• OFF: The FFT scope screen renews at each

sweep time. This setting displays the crit-

ical spectrum view.

• 2, 3, 4: The FFT scope screen averages 2 to 4

sweeps to smoothly display the spec-

trum.

6-11

SCOPE OPERATION

Waterfall Speed (Default: MID)

Select the Waterfall speed.

• SLOW: Sets the waterfall speed to SLOW.

• MID: Sets the waterfall speed to MID.

• FAST: Sets the waterfall speed to FAST.

Waterfall Size (Expand Scope)

(Default: Mid)

Select the Waterfall height in the Expand scope

screen.

• Small: The same height with the Normal scope

screen, only the FFT scope expands.

• Mid: The Waterfall height expands same ratio

with the FFT scope.

• Large: Only the Waterfall height expands.

Waterfall Peak Color Level

(Default: Grid 10)

Select the signal level that the Waterfall displays a

peak color.

Higher signal levels are Red, Yellow, Green, Light-blue,

Blue and Black in order.

• Selection: Grid 1 ~ Grid 10

Waterfall Marker Auto-hide

(Default: ON)

Select the Waterfall Marker Auto-hide function ON or

OFF.

• OFF: The marker in the Waterfall zone stays

ON.

• ON: The marker in the Waterfall zone is hid-

den 2 seconds after you have stopped it

in place.

Dual Scope Type (Default: Over/Under)

When the Dual scope is selected, select the Main and

Sub scope layout.

• Over/Under: Displays the Main scope over the Sub

scope.

• Side by Side: Displays the Main and Sub scopes

side by side.

Waveform Type (Default: Fill)

Select the outline waveform display for the Spectrum

scope.

• Fill: The waveform is drawn only in color.

• Fill + Line: The waveform is drawn in color with an

outline.

Waveform Color (Current)

(Default: (R) 217 (G) 241 (B) 247)

Set the waveform outline color for the currently re-

ceived signals.

• The color is set in the RGB format.

• Push [t u](F) to select R (Red), G (Green) and B

(Blue). Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to adjust the ratio from

0 to 255.

• The color is displayed in the box beside the RGB

scale.

Waveform Color (Line)

(Default: (R) 70 (G) 30 (B) 0)

Set the waveform outline color for the currently re-

ceived signals.

• The color is set in the RGB format.

• Push [t u](F) to select R (Red), G (Green) and B

(Blue). Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to adjust the ratio from

0 to 255.

• The color is displayed in the box beside the RGB

scale.

Waveform Color (Max Hold)

(Default: (R) 58 (G) 110 (B) 147)

Set the waveform color for the received signals maxi-

mum level.

• The color is set in the RGB format.

• Push [t u](F) to select R (Red), G (Green) and B

(Blue). Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to adjust the ratio from

0 to 255.

• The color is displayed in the box beside the RGB

scale.

Waterfall Display (Default: ON)

Turn the Water fall display ON or OFF for the normal

scope or Mini scope screen. (In the Expanded scope

screen, the Waterfall is always displayed.)

• OFF: Turns OFF the Waterfall display.

• ON: Turns ON the Waterfall display.

6-12

SCOPE OPERATION

 Spectrum scope screen (Continued)

Dual Scope Auto Select (Default: ON)

When the Dual scope is selected, the band selection

keys, [MAIN] and [SUB] simultaneously select the

Main or Sub scope.

• OFF: Push [M/S DUAL](F) or click the mouse

button to select the Main or Sub scope.

• ON: Push [M/S DUAL](F) or click the mouse

button to select the Main or Sub scope.

In addition, push the [MAIN] or [SUB] key

to select the operating band, and auto-

matically select the Main or Sub scope.

Fixed Edges (0.03 – 1.60)

(Default: 0.500–1.500 MHz)

Set the Upper and Lower Edge frequencies for the

Fixed mode. Three edges are assigned to each band.

Push [EDGE](F) to select the edge.

• Selectable range: 0.030 ~ 1.600 MHz

• Push [t u](F) to select Upper or Lower frequency,

and rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the frequency.

Fixed Edges (1.60 – 2.00)

(Default: 1.800–2.000 MHz)

(Default: 1.800–1.830 MHz)

(Default: 1.900–1.930 MHz)

Set the Upper and Lower Edge frequencies for the

Fixed mode. Three edges are assigned to each band.

Push [EDGE](F) to select the edge.

• Selectable range: 1.600 ~ 2.000 MHz

• Push [t u](F) to select Upper or Lower frequency,

and rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the frequency.

Fixed Edges (2.00 – 6.00)

(Default: 3.500–4.000 MHz)

(Default: 3.500–3.575 MHz)

(Default: 3.750–3.850 MHz)

Set the Upper and Lower Edge frequencies for the

Fixed mode. Three edges are assigned to each band.

Push [EDGE](F) to select the edge.

• Selectable range: 2.000 ~ 6.000 MHz

• Push [t u](F) to select Upper or Lower frequency,

and rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the frequency.

Fixed Edges (6.00 – 8.00)

(Default: 7.000–7.300 MHz)

(Default: 7.000–7.030 MHz)

(Default: 7.030–7.200 MHz)

Set the Upper and Lower Edge frequencies for the

Fixed mode. Three edges are assigned to each band.

Push [EDGE](F) to select the edge.

• Selectable range: 6.000 ~ 8.000 MHz

• Push [t u](F) to select Upper or Lower frequency,

and rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the frequency.

Fixed Edges (8.00 – 11.00)

(Default: 10.100–10.150 MHz)

(Default: 10.100–10.130 MHz)

(Default: 10.130–10.150 MHz)

Set the Upper and Lower Edge frequencies for the

Fixed mode. Three edges are assigned to each band.

Push [EDGE](F) to select the edge.

• Selectable range: 8.000 ~ 11.000 MHz

• Push [t u](F) to select Upper or Lower frequency,

and rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the frequency.

Fixed Edges (11.00 – 15.00)

(Default: 14.000–14.350 MHz)

(Default: 14.000–14.100 MHz)

(Default: 14.100–14.350 MHz)

Set the Upper and Lower Edge frequencies for the

Fixed mode. Three edges are assigned to each band.

Push [EDGE](F) to select the edge.

• Selectable range: 11.000 ~ 15.000 MHz

• Push [t u](F) to select Upper or Lower frequency,

and rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the frequency.

Fixed Edges (15.00 – 20.00)

(Default: 18.068–18.168 MHz)

(Default: 18.068–18.110 MHz)

(Default: 18.110–18.168 MHz)

Set the Upper and Lower Edge frequencies for the

Fixed mode. Three edges are assigned to each band.

Push [EDGE](F) to select the edge.

• Selectable range: 15.000 ~ 20.000 MHz

• Push [t u](F) to select Upper or Lower frequency,

and rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the frequency.

6-13

SCOPE OPERATION

Fixed Edges (20.00 – 22.00)

(Default: 21.000–21.450 MHz)

(Default: 21.000–21.150 MHz)

(Default: 21.150–21.450 MHz)

Set the Upper and Lower Edge frequencies for the

Fixed mode. Three edges are assigned to each band.

Push [EDGE](F) to select the edge.

• Selectable range: 20.000 ~ 22.000 MHz

• Push [t u](F) to select Upper or Lower frequency,

and rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the frequency.

Fixed Edges (22.00 – 26.00)

(Default: 24.890–24.990 MHz)

(Default: 24.890–24.930 MHz)

(Default: 24.930–24.990 MHz)

Set the Upper and Lower Edge frequencies for the

Fixed mode. Three edges are assigned to each band.

Push [EDGE](F) to select the edge.

• Selectable range: 22.000 ~ 26.000 MHz

• Push [t u](F) to select Upper or Lower frequency,

and rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the frequency.

Fixed Edges (26.00 – 30.00)

(Default: 28.000–29.000 MHz)

(Default: 28.000–28.200 MHz)

(Default: 28.200–29.000 MHz)

Set the Upper and Lower Edge frequencies for the

Fixed mode. Three edges are assigned to each band.

Push [EDGE](F) to select the edge.

• Selectable range: 26.000 ~ 30.000 MHz

• Push [t u](F) to select Upper or Lower frequency,

and rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the frequency.

Fixed Edges (30.00 – 45.00)

(Default: 30.000–31.000 MHz)

Set the Upper and Lower Edge frequencies for the

Fixed mode. Three edges are assigned to each band.

Push [EDGE](F) to select the edge.

• Selectable range: 30.000 ~ 45.000 MHz

• Push [t u](F) to select Upper or Lower frequency,

and rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the frequency.

Fixed Edges (45.00 – 60.00)

(Default: 50.000–51.000 MHz)

(Default: 50.000–50.100 MHz)

(Default: 50.100–50.300 MHz)

Set the Upper and Lower Edge frequencies for the

Fixed mode. Three edges are assigned to each band.

Push [EDGE](F) to select the edge.

• Selectable range: 45.000 ~ 60.000 MHz

• Push [t u](F) to select Upper or Lower frequency,

and rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the frequency.

6-14

SCOPE OPERATION

 Spectrum scope screen (Continued)

D USB mouse operation

If you connect a USB mouse to the transceiver, a

mouse pointer appears on the Spectrum scope screen.

Now, you can change the frequency or settings by us-

ing the mouse.

• Clicking while holding down [XFC] changes the

transmit frequency.

• In the Dual scope mode, if you click the FFT scope

or Waterfall zone of the unselected side, the unse-

lected side ﬁrst changes to the selected side.

• Changing frequency on the Center mode screen

Button

Operation Description

Left

Click

The frequency changes to the

clicked point and the mouse

pointer moves to the center of

the screen.

Drag

The frequency changes to the

clicked point and the mouse

pointer moves to the center

of the screen, and then the

frequency increases or de-

creases.

Right Click/Drag

The Right button temporarily

changes the frequency.

While holding the button,

same action as the Left but-

ton, but release it to return to

the original frequency.

• Changing frequency on the Fixed mode screen

Button

Operation Description

Left

Click

The frequency and Marker

change to the clicking point.

Drag

The frequency and Marker

change to the clicking point,

and then the frequency in-

creases or decreases.

Right Click/Drag

The Right button temporarily

changes the frequency.

While holding the button,

same action as the Left but-

ton, but release it to return to

the original frequency.

• Center mode screen

• Mouse operation

• Mouse operation in the Dual scope screen

Clicking the FFT scope or Waterfall zone of the un-

selected side changes it to the selected side.

• The orange frame moves to the clicked side.

• You can change any other than the frequency set-

ting in the unselected side. In that case, the or-

ange frame does not move.

Hold function

ON or OFF

Scope attenuator

selection

Center mode: Span selection

Fixed mode: Edge selection

FFT scope or Waterfall zone: Frequency setting

Marker selection

Sweep speed

selection

Center/Fixed mode

selection

Main/Sub scope

selection

Mouse pointer

6-15

SCOPE OPERATION

• Audio scope screen

 Audio scope screen

This audio scope allows you to display the received

signal’s frequency component on the FFT scope, and

its waveform components on the Oscilloscope. The

FFT scope has an waterfall.

NOTE:

When the Monitor function is ON, you can see the TX

audio on the Audio scope.

 The Multi-function screens are OFF:

q Push [AUDIO](F).

• The Audio scope screen is displayed.

Function Action

MAIN/

SUB

Selects the Main or Sub band.

ATT

Push

Selects the Attenuator for the

FFT scope.

• 0 (OFF), 10, 20, or 30dB

Hold down

Turns OFF the attenuator. (0

dB)

HOLD

Sets the Hold function to ON or OFF.

• “

” is displayed and freezes the cur-

rent audio spectrum.

LEVEL

Selects the Oscilloscope level.

• 0, –10, –20, or –30 dB

TIME

Selects the Oscilloscope sweep time.

• 1, 3, 10, 30, 100, or 300 ms/Div

SET Enters the Scope set screen.

• The Audio scope with Sub band selection is enabled

only during Dualwatch or Split frequency operation.

w To exit the Audio scope screen, push [EXIT/SET].

(F) Function keys

[EXIT/SET]

OscilloscopeWaterfall

FFT Scope

6-16

SCOPE OPERATION

 Audio scope screen (Continued)

D Audio scope set mode

This set mode is used to set the FFT scope waveform

type, color, Waterfall display and oscilloscope wave-

form color.

q Display the Audio scope screen, then hold down

[SET](F) for 1 second.

AUDIO [F-6]  SET [F-7]

• The Audio scope set screen is displayed.

w Push [p](F) or [q](F) to select the desired item.

• Push [t u] to select the contents for various items.

e Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the option or set the

level.

• Hold down [DEF](F) for 1 second to select the default

option or level.

r Push [EXIT/SET].

• Exits the Set screen.

[EXIT/SET] [MAIN DIAL](F) Function keys

• Audio scope set screen

FFT Scope Waveform Type

(Default: Fill)

Select the type of waveform for the FFT scope.

• Fill: The waveform is drawn by only the color.

• Line: The waveform is drawn by only outline.

FFT Scope Waveform Color

(Default: (R) 51 (G) 153 (B) 255)

Set the waveform color for the FFT scope.

• The color is set in RGB format.

• Push [t u](F) to select R (Red), G (Green) and B

(Blue). Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to adjust the ratio from

0 to 255.

• The color is displayed in the box beside the RGB

scale.

FFT Scope Waterfall Display

(Default: ON)

Turn the Waterfall display ON or OFF.

• OFF: Turns OFF the Waterfall display.

• ON: Turns ON the Waterfall display.

Oscilloscope Waveform Color

(Default: (R) 0 (G) 255 (B) 0)

Set the waveform color for the Oscilloscope.

• The color is set in the RGB format.

• Push [t u](F) to select R (Red), G (Green) and B

(Blue). Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to adjust the ratio from

0 to 255.

• The color is displayed in the box beside the RGB

scale.

7-1

FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE Section 7

 Preampliﬁer ……………………………………………………………… 7-2

 Attenuator ……………………………………………………………… 7-2

 RIT function ……………………………………………………………… 7-3

ï RIT monitor function ………………………………………………… 7-3

 AGC function control …………………………………………………… 7-4

ï Selecting the preset value ………………………………………… 7-4

ï Adjusting the AGC time constant ………………………………… 7-4

ï Setting the AGC time constant preset value ……………………… 7-4

 Twin PBT operation …………………………………………………… 7-5

 IF ﬁlter selection ………………………………………………………… 7-6

ï IF ﬁlter selection ……………………………………………………… 7-6

ï DSP ﬁlter shape ……………………………………………………… 7-7

ï Rooﬁng ﬁlter selection ……………………………………………… 7-7

ï 1.2 kHz Filter calibration …………………………………………… 7-8

ï Filter shape set mode ……………………………………………… 7-9

 Dualwatch operation ……………………………………………………7-10

 Noise blanker ……………………………………………………………7-11

ï NB Set mode ………………………………………………………… 7-11

 Noise reduction ………………………………………………………… 7-12

 Digital selector ………………………………………………………… 7-12

 Notch function …………………………………………………………… 7-13

ï Auto notch function …………………………………………………7-13

ï Manual notch function ……………………………………………… 7-13

 Auto tuning function ……………………………………………………7-14

 Main/Sub band Tracking function ……………………………………… 7-14

ï Turning ON the Tracking function …………………………………7-14

7-2

FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE



Preampliﬁer

The preamp ampliﬁes received signals in the receiver

front end to improve the signal-to-noise ratio and sen-

sitivity. Set this to P.AMP 1 or P.AMP 2 when receiving

weak signals.

 Push the Multi-function [P.AMP]() key several times

to turn ON preamp 1 or preamp 2, or to turn OFF

the preamp.

 Hold down the Multi-function [P.AMP]() key for 1

second to turn OFF the preamp.

NOTE: The preamp (P.AMP 1 or P.AMP 2) cannot

be used while the Digital RF selector is in use.

Also the preamp is automatically disabled when the

Digital RF selector is turned ON.

 About P.AMP 2

P.AMP 2 is a high gain receive ampliﬁer. When it is

used during times of strong electric ﬁelds, distortion

sometimes results. In such cases, set the transceiver

to “P.AMP 1” or “P.AMP OFF.”

(≈) Multi-function keys

• When selecting Preamp 1

• When selecting Attenuator (6 dB)

Especially for maintaining IP3. Gain is

approximately 12 dB.

High-gain preamp for all bands. Gain

is approximately 20 dB.



Attenuator

The attenuator prevents a desired signal from becom-

ing distorted when very strong signals are near the

frequency or when very strong electric ﬁelds, such as

from broadcasting stations, are near your location.

 Push the Multi-function [ATT]() key several times to

set the attenuator to 6 dB, 12 dB, 18 dB or turn OFF

the attenuator.

 Hold down the Multi-function [ATT]() key for 1 sec-

ond several times to set the attenuator to 3 dB, 6 dB,

9 dB, 12 dB, 15 dB, 18 dB, 21 dB or to turn OFF the

attenuator.

7-3

FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE



RIT function

The RIT (Receive Increment Tuning) function compen-

sates for differences in frequencies of other stations.

The function shifts the receive frequency up to ±9.99 kHz

in 10 Hz steps, without moving the transmit frequency.

q Push [RIT] to turn ON the RIT function.

• “RIT” and the shift frequency are displayed.

w Rotate the [RIT/∂TX] control.

• Hold down [CLEAR] for 1 second to reset the RIT fre-

quency.

• Push [CLEAR] momentarily to reset the RIT fre-

quency when the quick RIT/∂TX clear function is ON.

(p. 15-15)

(SET [F-7] > OTHER [F-5] > Quick RIT/∂TX Clear)

• Hold down [RIT] for 1 second to add the frequency shift

to the operating frequency.

e After communicating, push [RIT] to turn OFF the

RIT function.

RIT monitor function

When the RIT function is ON, holding down [XFC] al-

lows you to directly monitor the operating frequency

(RIT is temporarily cancelled).

[XFC] [CLEAR]

[RIT/

∂TX] [RIT]

• When selecting RIT function

7-4

FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE

Mode Default Selectable AGC time constant

0.3 (FAST)

0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.5, 0.8, 1.2, 1.6, 2.0,

SSB 2.0 (MID)

2.5, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0

6.0 (SLOW)

0.1 (FAST)

0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.5, 0.8, 1.2, 1.6, 2.0,

CW 0.5 (MID)

2.5, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0

1.2 (SLOW)

RTTY

0.1 (FAST)

0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.5, 0.8, 1.2, 1.6, 2.0,

PSK

0.5 (MID)

2.5, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0

1.2 (SLOW)

3.0 (FAST)

0.3, 0.5, 0.8, 1.2, 1.6, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0,

AM 5.0 (MID)

4.0, 5.0, 6.0, 7.0, 8.0

7.0 (SLOW)

FM 0.1 (FAST) 0.1 (Fixed)

• Selectable AGC time constant (unit: seconds)



AGC function control

The AGC (Automatic Gain Control) controls receiver

gain to produce a constant audio output level, even

when the received signal strength varies greatly.

The transceiver has three preset AGC settings (time

constants: fast, mid, slow) for non-FM modes.

The FM mode AGC time constant is ﬁxed as ‘FAST’

(0.1 seconds) and the AGC time constant cannot be

selected.

Selecting the preset value

q Select a non-FM mode.

w Push the Multi-function [AGC]() key several times

to select AGC fast, mid or slow.

•

Hold down [AGC VR] for 1 second to turn OFF the AGC

function.

[EXIT/SET]

[AGC VR]

[AGC] control

(F) Function keys

AGC indicator

[MAIN DIAL]

(≈) Multi-function keys

• When selecting “AGC VR”

• The AGC screen

• When selecting “AGC-MID”

Setting the AGC time constant preset value

Adjusting the AGC time constant

q Select a non-FM mode.

w Push [AGC VR], then rotate the [AGC] control to ad-

just the time constant.

• The [AGC VR] indicator lights.

• “VR” is displayed to the right of the Multi-function [AGC]

() key.

• To set the time constant to fast, rotate to the right. And to

set the time constant to slow, rotate to the left.

q Select a non-FM mode.

w Push the Multi-function [AGC]() key several times

to select AGC fast, mid or slow.

e Hold down the Multi-function [AGC]() key for 1 sec-

ond.

• The AGC screen is displayed.

r Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to set the desired time con-

stant.

• The selectable time constant is shown to the right.

• Hold down [DEF](F) for 1 second to select the default

value.

• While in the AGC Set mode, you can select the AGC or

the operating mode.

t Push [EXIT/SET].

• Exits the AGC screen.

NOTE: When you are receiving a weak signal, and

a strong signal is momentarily received, the AGC

function quickly reduces the receiver gain. When

that signal disappears, the transceiver may not re-

ceive the weak signal because of the AGC action. In

that case, select AGC fast, or hold down [AGC-VR]

for 1 second to turn OFF the time constant.

7-5

FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE



Twin PBT operation

In general, the PBT (Passband Tuning) electronically

narrows the IF passband width by shifting the IF fre-

quency to slightly outside of the IF ﬁlter passband, to

reject interference. The transceiver uses DSP for the

PBT function.

You can watch the nearby intended signal using the

spectrum scope. (p. 6-2)

q Rotate [PBT1] (inner control) and [PBT2] (outer

control) to the opposite direction from each other to

narrow the IF passband width.

• Before rotating, the PBT settings of [PBT1] and [PBT2]

should be cleared.

• Rejects interference of both higher and lower pass-

bands. If you rotate the control too much, the received

audio may not be heard because the passband width is

too narrow.

• Displays the passband width and shift frequency.

• The [PBT CLEAR] indicator lights.

• Hold down [PBT CLEAR] for 1 second to clear the PBT

setting. In that case, the [PBT CLEAR] indicator goes

OFF.

•

The variable range depends on the passband width and

the operating mode. The edge of the variable range is half

of the passband width. The PBT is adjustable in 25 Hz

steps in the SSB/CW/RTTY/PSK modes, and 100 Hz in

the AM mode.

• Moving both [TWIN PBT] controls to the same position

shifts the IF left or right.

w Hold down [FILTER] for 1 second.

• The Filter screen is displayed. The current passband

width and shift frequency are displayed.

e Push [EXIT/SET].

• Exits the Filter screen.

NOTE: While rotating the [TWIN PBT] controls,

noise may be heard. This comes from the DSP unit

and does not indicate an equipment malfunction.

[EXIT/SET] [PBT CLEAR]

[TWIN PBT] control[FILTER][PBT CLEAR] indicator

• Filter screen when operating [TWIN PBT]

• About Passband width and Shift value on the

screen

PBT1

PBT2

IF center frequency

Passband’s center frequency

SFT: Shift value

BW: P

assband width

• When operating [TWIN PBT]

Filter width Shifting value

Passband width

(Duplicated with PBT1 and PBT2)

Selected

IF filter

Passband

IF center frequency

Desired signalInterference

Interference

Desired signal

PBT2

PBT1

PBT2

PBT1

PBT2

PBT1

PBT is OFF Cutting a lower

passband

Cutting both higher and

lower passbands

• PBT operation example

7-6

FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE

[EXIT/SET]

(F) Function keys

[MAIN DIAL]

[FILTER] MAIN, SUB

• When selecting “FIL1” (Wide)

• When selecting “FIL2” (Mid)

• When selecting “FIL3” (Narrow)

• While adjusting the passband width

• When selecting the passband width (500 Hz or less)

Blinks

Mode IF ﬁlter Adjustable range (steps)

SSB

FIL1 (3.0 kHz)

50 to 500 Hz (50 Hz)

600 Hz to 3.6 kHz (100 Hz)

FIL2 (2.4 kHz)

FIL3 (1.8 kHz)

SSB-D

PSK

FIL1 (1.2 kHz)

50 to 500 Hz (50 Hz)

600 Hz to 3.6 kHz (100 Hz)

FIL2 (500 Hz)

FIL3 (250 Hz)

RTTY

FIL1 (2.4 kHz)

50 to 500 Hz (50 Hz)

600 Hz to 2.7 kHz (100 Hz)

FIL2 (500 Hz)

FIL3 (250 Hz)

AM-D

FIL1 (9.0 kHz)

200 Hz to 10 kHz (200 Hz)

FIL2 (6.0 kHz)

FIL3 (3.0 kHz)

FM-D

FIL1 (15 kHz)

Fixed to the default value

FIL2 (10 kHz)

FIL3 (7.0 kHz)



IF ﬁlter selection

The transceiver has 3 IF ﬁlter passband widths for

each mode, and are selectable in the Filter screen.

You can toggle the IF ﬁlter between FIL1 (Wide), FIL2

(Mid) and FIL3 (Narrow) by pushing [FILTER].

The IF ﬁlter passband widths for each mode can be

changed in the Filter screen.

IF ﬁlter selection

q Hold down [FILTER] for 1 second.

• The Filter screen is displayed.

w Select any mode except FM.

• Passband widths for the FM modes are ﬁxed, and can-

not be changed.

e Push [FILTER] several times to set the desired IF

ﬁlter to FIL1 (Wide), FIL2 (Mid) or FIL3 (Narrow).

r Push [BW](F) to enter the passband width adjust-

ment mode.

• “ ” blinks.

t Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to adjust the desired passband

width.

• The PBT shift frequencies are cleared when the pass-

band width is changed.

• Hold down [DEF](F) for 1 second to select the default

value.

• When the passband width is set to 500 Hz or less in the

SSB or CW mode, the bandpass ﬁlter for receive is au-

tomatically selected, and “

” is displayed

y Push [BW](F).

• Exits the passband width adjustment mode.

u Repeat steps w to y to set another mode’s pass-

band width.

i Push [EXIT/SET].

• Exits the Filter screen.

The ﬁlter selection is automatically memorized in

each mode.

The PBT shift range is automatically memorized in

each ﬁlter.

For your reference:

• While holding down [BW](F), rotating [MAIN DIAL]

also adjusts the passband width.

• When you set the IF ﬁlter to FIL2 or FIL3 in the

FM mode, transmission is made in the FM narrow

mode.

7-7

FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE

DSP ﬁlter shape

The DSP ﬁlter shape for SSB, SSB data and CW can

be independently set to soft or sharp.

q Hold down [FILTER] for 1 second.

• The Filter screen is displayed.

w Select the SSB, SSB-D1 or CW mode.

e Push [FILTER] several times to set the desired IF

ﬁlter to FIL1 (Wide), FIL2 (Mid) or FIL3 (Narrow).

e Push [SHAPE](F) several times to set the desired

ﬁlter shape to soft or sharp.

• When selecting SSB-D2 or SSB-D3, and the 1.2 kHz

rooﬁng ﬁlter, you can select the ﬁlter shape.

r Push [EXIT•SET].

• Exits the Filter screen.

The ﬁlter shape can be independently set for the

Main and Sub bands, only when different modes are

set.

• When selecting “SHARP”

[EXIT/SET]Mode keys

(F) Function keys [FILTER] MAIN, SUB

• Rooﬁng ﬁlter screen

Rooﬁng ﬁlter selection

This transceiver has 1.2, 3, 6 and 15 kHz rooﬁng ﬁlters

for the 1st IF frequency. The rooﬁng ﬁlter provides in-

terference reduction from nearby strong signals.

 Push [ROOFING](F) to set the desired ﬁlter width to

1.2, 3, 6, or 15 kHz (default).

• Hold down [DEF](F) for 1 second to select the default

value.

Mode FIL1 FIL2 FIL3 Mode FIL1 FIL2 FIL3

SSB 15 15 6 RTTY 15 6 6

SSB-D 6 6 6 PSK 6 6 6

CW 6 6 6 AM 15 15 15

• Rooﬁng ﬁlter default value (kHz)

7-8

FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE

• When selecting “1.2 k” Rooﬁng ﬁlter

• In the Filter calibration mode

(Automatic adjustment)

Blinks

 IF ﬁlter selection (Continued)

1.2 kHz Filter calibration

This transceiver has the 1.2 kHz Optimum Rooﬁng

Filter operating at 64 MHz. The characteristic of this

Rooﬁng Filter may slightly vary, depending on the op-

erating environment or after long usage. You can ad-

just it in the Filter calibration mode.

You can automatically or manually adjust the ﬁlter.

Automatic adjustment

q Hold down [FILTER] for 1 second.

• The Filter screen is displayed.

w Select the desired mode.

e Push [ROOFING](F) several times to select ‘1.2k.’

• ‘15k,’ ‘6k,’ ‘3k,’ and ‘1.2k’ are selectable.

r Push [ADJ](F).

• Enters the Filter calibration mode.

t Hold down [CAL](F) for 1 second to start the auto-

matic adjustment.

• “CAL” blinks.

• When the adjustment is successful, two beeps sound.

• If the adjustment fails, an error beep sounds.

y Push [ADJ](F).

• Exits the Filter calibration mode.

Manual adjustment

q Hold down [FILTER] for 1 second.

• The Filter screen is displayed.

w Select the desired mode.

e Push [ROOFING](F) several times to select ‘1.2k.’

• ‘15k,’ ‘6k,’ ‘3k,’ and ‘1.2k’ are selectable.

r Push [ADJ](F).

• Enters the Filter calibration mode.

t Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to adjust.

• The adjustable values are between 0% and 100%.

(±1100 Hz of the set value in 5 Hz steps)

• Adjust the appropriate value so that you can easily hear

a desired signal and undesired signals are reduced.

y Push [ADJ](F).

• Exits the Filter calibration mode.

• In the Filter calibration mode

(Manual adjustment)

7-9

FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE

 IF ﬁlter selection (Continued)

HF SSB (600Hz – ) (Default: SHARP)

Select the ﬁlter shape for the SSB mode in the HF

bands.

Options: SHARP or SOFT

The set filter shape is automatically used only when

the IF filter is set to 600 Hz or wider.

HF SSB-D (600Hz – ) (Default: SHARP)

Select the filter shape for the SSB-D mode in the HF

bands.

Options: SHARP or SOFT

The set filter shape is automatically used only when

the IF filter is set to 600 Hz or wider.

HF CW ( – 500Hz) (Default: SHARP)

Select the filter shape for the CW mode in the HF

bands.

Options: SHARP or SOFT

The set filter shape is automatically used only when

the IF filter is set to 500 Hz or narrower.

HF CW (600Hz – ) (Default: SHARP)

Select the filter shape for the CW mode in the HF

bands.

Options: SHARP or SOFT

The set filter shape is automatically used only when

the IF filter is set to 600 Hz or wider.

50M SSB (600Hz – ) (Default: SOFT)

Select the filter shape for the SSB mode in the 50 MHz

band.

Options: SHARP or SOFT

The set filter shape is automatically used only when

the IF filter is set to 600 Hz or wider.

50M SSB-D (600Hz – ) (Default: SHARP)

Select the ﬁlter shape for the SSB data mode in the 50

MHz band.

Options: SHARP or SOFT

The set filter shape is automatically used only when

the IF filter is set to 600 Hz or wider.

50M CW ( – 500Hz) (Default: SHARP)

Select the filter shape for the CW mode in the 50 MHz

band.

Options: SHARP or SOFT

The set filter shape is automatically used only when

the IF filter is set to 500 Hz or narrower.

50M CW (600Hz – ) (Default: SHARP)

Select the filter shape for the CW mode in the 50 MHz

band.

Options: SHARP or SOFT

The set filter shape is automatically used only when

the IF filter is set to 600 Hz or wider.

Filter shape set mode

The DSP ﬁlter shape for SSB, SSB data and CW can

be independently set to soft or sharp.

q Hold down [SHAPE](F) for 1 second.

• The Filter shape set screen is displayed.

w Push [Y](F) or [Z](F) to select the desired item.

e Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to set the ﬁlter shape to soft or

sharp.

r Push [EXIT/SET].

• Exits the Filter shape set screen.

• Filter shape set screen

7-10

FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE



Dualwatch operation

Dualwatch simultaneously monitors two frequencies.

This transceiver has 2 independent receiver circuits,

the Main and Sub bands, so that you can use Dual-

watch with no compromises, even on different bands

and modes.

q Set the desired mode in the Main and Sub bands.

w Push [DUALWATCH] to select the Dualwatch opera-

tion.

• To equalize the SUB band frequency and mode to that

of the Main band, hold down [DUALWATCH] for 1 sec-

ond. This Quick Dualwatch function can be turned OFF

in the Others set screen. (p. 15-13)

(SET [F-7] > OTHERS [F-5] > Quick Dualwatch)

e Rotate [MAIN DIAL] or [SUB DIAL] to set the de-

sired frequency.

Normally, the transceiver transmits on the Main band.

During Dualwatch operation, you can transmit on the

Sub band by doing the following procedures:

• Push [SPLIT] to turn ON the Split function.

• Push [CHANGE] to switch the settings, such as the oper-

ating frequency, operating mode, and so on, between the

Main and Sub bands.

NOTE:

• A beat note may be heard, depending on the fre-

quency combination (3.5 MHz and 7 MHz, and so

on).

• Receiver sensitivity may be decreased when the

same frequency band and the same antenna are

selected during Dualwatch.

[MAIN DIAL] [SUB DIAL]

[CHANGE] [DUALWATCH]

[SPLIT]

• During the Dualwatch operation

• When switching the settings between the Main

and Sub bands

• When the Split function is ON

Appears on the SUB band

7-11

FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE



Noise blanker

The Noise blanker eliminates pulse-type noise such as

the noise from car ignitions.

The Noise blanker cannot be used in the FM mode.

q Push [NB] to turn ON the Noise blanker function.

• [NB] indicator lights.

• Pushing [NB] toggles the Noise blanker function ON or

OFF.

w Rotate the [NB] control to adjust the Noise blanker

threshold level.

• The desired signal may be distorted if you rotate the

[NB] control to the extreme right.

• Adjust to the appropriate position, according to the noise

level or operating environment.

NOTE: When using the Noise blanker, received sig-

nals may be distorted if they are excessively strong

or the noise type is other than pulse type. In that

case, turn the Noise blanker OFF, or rotate the [NB]

control to a shallow position.

• NB screen

[NB] control MAIN, SUB

[NB] MAIN, SUB

[NB] indicator

NB Set mode

To deal with various type of noise, the attenuation level

and noise width can be set in the NB screen.

q Hold down [NB] for 1 second.

• The NB screen is displayed.

w Push [Y](F) or [Z](F) to select the desired item.

Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to set the desired level or value.

• Hold down [DEF](F) for 1 second to select the default

value.

r Push [EXIT/SET].

• Exits the NB screen.

NB Depth (Default: 8)

Sets the noise attenuation level.

Level value is between 1 and 10

NB Width (Default: 50)

Sets the noise pulse width.

Width value is between 1 and 100

7-12

FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE



Noise reduction

The Noise reduction function reduces random noise

components and enhances desired signals that are

buried in noise. The Noise reduction function uses the

DSP circuit.

q Push [NR] to turn ON the Noise reduction.

• [NR] indicator lights.

• Pushing [NR] toggles the Noise reduction ON or OFF.

w Rotate the [NR] control to adjust the Noise reduc-

tion level.

• Rotating the [NR] control to the right increases the re-

duction level, and rotating to the left decreases it.

• Set for maximum readability.

Too much noise reduction can result in audio signal

masking or distortion. Set the [NR] control for maxi-

mum readability.



Digital selector

The Digital selector control manually adjusts the cen-

ter frequency of the automatic preselector.

The automatic preselector adds selectivity ahead of

the 1st mixer. This reduces intermodulation distortion

from nearby strong signals.

The automatic preselector tracks the frequency tuning,

changing it’s resonant frequency in discrete steps.

The Digital selector functions between 1.5 MHz and

29.999999 MHz.

q Push [DIGI-SEL] to turn ON the Digital selector.

• The [DIGI-SEL] indicator lights.

• Pushing [DIGI-SEL] toggles the Digital selector ON or

OFF.

w Rotate the [DIGI-SEL] control to adjust the center

frequency.

NOTE:

• When you rotate [MAIN DIAL] (or [SUB DIAL] dur-

ing Dualwatch or Split function) while the Digital

selector is activated, mechanical noise may be

heard due to the switching noise from internal re-

lays.

• The preamps (P.AMP 1 or P.AMP 2) cannot be

used while the Digital selector is activated.

[NR] control MAIN, SUB

[NR] MAIN, SUB [NR] indicator

[DIGI-SEL] control MAIN, SUB

[DIGI-SEL]MAIN, SUB[DIGI-SEL] indicator

7-13

FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE



Notch function

The transceiver has Auto and Manual notch functions.

• Auto notch: Used in the SSB, AM, or FM mode

• Manual notch: Used in the SSB, CW, RTTY, PSK, or

AM mode

Auto notch function

The Auto notch function uses DSP to automatically at-

tenuates beat tones, tuning signals, and so on, even if

they are moving.

 Push [NOTCH] several times to select “AN.”

• Pushing [NOTCH] toggles the Notch function “AN” (Auto

notch), “MN” (Manual notch), and OFF.

• “

” is displayed when Auto notch is in use.

Manual notch function

The Manual notch can be set to attenuate a frequency

by rotating the [NOTCH] control.

q Push [NOTCH] several times to select “MN.”

• Pushing [NOTCH] toggles the Notch function “AN” (Auto

notch), “MN” (Manual notch), and OFF.

• “

” is displayed when manual notch is in use.

• Hold down [NOTCH] for 1 second to toggle the manual

notch ﬁlter width between “WIDE,” “MID,” and “NAR.” Af-

ter selecting, the filter width value is displayed for about

1 second.

w Rotate the [NOTCH] control to manually attenuate

a frequency.

While tuning the manual notch, noise may be heard.

This comes from the DSP unit and does not indi-

cate an equipment malfunction.

[NOTCH] MAIN, SUB

[NOTCH] control MAIN, SUB[NOTCH] indicator

• The Auto notch indication

• The Manual notch indication

• When selecting the manual notch ﬁlter width

7-14

FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE



Auto tuning function

When an off-frequency signal is received, the Auto

tuning function tunes the desired signal within a ±500

Hz range in the CW mode, or a ±5 kHz range in the

AM mode. This function is usable only in the CW and

AM modes.

 Push [AUTO TUNE] to turn ON the Auto tuning func-

tion.

• “

AUTOTUNE

” blinks when the Auto tuning function is

activated.

• After 2 seconds has passed, the Auto tuning function

automatically stops tuning, even it’s still off frequency.

IMPORTANT!

When receiving a weak signal, or receiving a signal

with interference, the Auto tuning function may tune

the receiver to an undesired signal.

[AUTO TUNE] MAIN, SUB

Blinks

When you hold down [MAIN] for 1 second to turn ON the

Main/Sub band tracking function, the Sub band frequency

and mode are equalized to the Main band settings. If you

set the Main and Sub bands to the different antennas,

you can hear which antenna has better reception. Rotat-

ing [MAIN DIAL] changes the Main and Sub frequencies

in the same tuning steps at the same time. The direct

frequency entry in the Main band also changes the both

frequencies together. But rotating [SUB DIAL] changes

only the Sub frequency. So, you can change the tracking

separation between the Main and Sub band frequencies.

Rotating [MAIN DIAL] changes both frequencies, keep-

ing the amount of the frequency separation.

D Turning ON the Tracking function

q Select the “MAIN/SUB Tracking [MAIN] SW” item in

the Others set screen.

SET [F-7]  OTHERS [F-5]  MAIN/SUB Tracking [MAIN] SW

w Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select “ON.”

• The Tracking ON function is assigned to only the [MAIN]

key.

e Push [EXIT/SET] several times.

• Exits the Set screen.

r Select a desired operating frequency or mode.

t Hold down [MAIN] for 1 second to turn ON the Main/

Sub band tracking function.

• “MAIN” or “SUB” blinks blue.

• The Sub band frequency is equalized to the Main band

frequency.

• If you want to turn OFF the function, hold down [MAIN]

or [SUB] for 1 second.

• Others set screen

[MAIN]



Main/Sub band tracking function

The Tracking function will be canceled when:

• Starting a scan

• The Sub band frequency is changed by pushing a

band key, [V/M] key, direct frequency entry, and so

on.

8-1

FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT Section 8

 About the VOX function ………………………………………………… 8-2

D Turning ON the VOX function ……………………………………… 8-2

D Adjusting the VOX function ………………………………………… 8-2

D VOX set mode ……………………………………………………… 8-3

 About the Break-in function …………………………………………… 8-4

D Semi break-in operation …………………………………………… 8-4

D Full break-in operation ……………………………………………… 8-4

 About the ∂TX function ………………………………………………… 8-5

D ∂TX monitor function ……………………………………………… 8-5

 About the Monitor function …………………………………………… 8-5

 Setting the speech compressor (SSB only) ………………………… 8-6

 Setting the transmit ﬁlter width (SSB only)…………………………… 8-6

 Split frequency operation ……………………………………………… 8-7

 About the Quick split function ………………………………………… 8-8

D Split lock function …………………………………………………… 8-8

8-2

FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT



About the VOX function

The VOX (Voice-Operated Transmission) function

switches between transmit and receive with your voice.

This function provides hands-free operation.

Turning ON the VOX function

q Push the Mode key to select a phone mode (SSB,

AM, FM).

w Push [VOX/BK-IN].

• “VOX” is displayed and the VOX function is turned ON.

• The [VOX/BK-IN] indicator above this key lights white.

Adjusting the VOX function

q Push the Mode key to select a phone mode (SSB,

AM, FM).

w Push [VOX/BK-IN].

• “VOX” is displayed and the VOX function is turned ON.

• The [VOX/BK-IN] indicator above this key lights white.

e While speaking into the microphone at your normal

voice level, rotate [VOX GAIN] to the point where the

transceiver continuously transmits.

• Higher values make the VOX function more sensitive to

your voice.

r While receiving, rotate [ANTI VOX] to the point

where the transceiver does not switch to transmit

due to sound from the speaker or other sources.

• Higher values make the VOX function less sensitive to

sound from the speaker or other sources.

t Adjust the VOX delay and the VOX voice delay in the

VOX set screen, if necessary.

[VOX/BK-IN]

[VOX/BK-IN] indicator

Mode keys

[VOX/BK-IN]

[VOX/BK-IN] indicator

[VOX GAIN]Mode keys [ANTI VOX]

VOX icon

8-3

FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT

VOX set mode

q Hold down [VOX/BK-IN] for 1 second.

• The VOX set screen is displayed.

w Select the desired item using by pushing [p](F) or

[q](F).

e Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to the desired value or level.

• Hold down [DEF](F) for 1 second to select a default value.

r Push [EXIT/SET].

• Exits the Set screen.

VOX Delay (Default: 0.2s)

Set the VOX delay to between 0 and 2.0 seconds, for a

convenient interval before returning to receive.

VOX Voice Delay (Default: OFF)

Set the VOX voice delay to prevent interruption of your

voice when switching to transmit.

You can select Short, Mid, Long and OFF.

When using the VOX voice delay, turn the TX moni-

tor function OFF or the transmitted audio will echo.

• VOX delay

• VOX voice delay

[VOX/BK-IN]

[MAIN DIAL][EXIT/SET](F) Function keys

8-4

FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT



About the Break-in function

The break-in function is used in the CW mode to auto-

matically toggle the transceiver between transmit and

receive when keying. The transceiver is capable of full

break-in or semi break-in.

Semi break-in operation

In the semi break-in mode, the transceiver transmits

when keying, then automatically returns to receive af-

ter a preset time after you stop keying.

q Push the Mode key [CW] to select the CW or CW-R

mode.

w Push [VOX/BK-IN] several times to turn the semi

break-in function ON.

• “BK IN” is displayed.

e Rotate [DELAY] to set the break-in delay time (the

delay from transmit to receive).

When using a paddle, rotate [KEY SPEED] to ad-

just the keying speed.

Full break-in operation

In the full break-in mode, the transceiver automatically

transmits while keying down and returns to receive im-

mediately after you key up.

q Push the Mode key [CW] to select the CW or CW-R

mode.

w Push [VOX/BK-IN] several times to turn the full

break-in function ON.

• “F-BK IN” is displayed.

• When using a paddle, rotate [KEY SPEED] to ad-

just the keying speed.

• In the full break-in mode, the transceiver automat-

ically returns to receive without a preset break-in

delay time after you stop keying. And the trans-

ceiver receives while keying up.

[KEY SPEED]

[DELAY]

[VOX/BK-IN] Mode keys

[VOX/BK-IN] indicator

• Semi break-in ON

• Full break-in ON

8-5

FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT



About the ∂TX function

The ∂TX function shifts the transmit frequency up to

±9.999 kHz in 1 Hz steps (10 Hz steps when the 1 Hz

step readout is not visible) without shifting the receive

frequency.

q Push [∂TX].

• “

∂TX

” is displayed.

w Rotate [RIT/∂TX].

e To reset the ∂TX frequency, hold down [CLEAR] for

1 second.

• If the the Quick RIT/∂TX clear function is ON, push

[CLEAR] to reset the RIT frequency. (p. 15-15)

r To cancel the ∂TX function, push [∂TX] again.

• “

∂TX

” disappears.

∂TX monitor function

When the ∂TX function is ON, holding down [XFC] al-

lows you to directly monitor the transmit frequency.

 For your convenience — Calculate function

The shift frequency of the ∂TX function can be added

to or subtracted from the displayed frequency.

 While displaying the ∂TX shift frequency, hold down

[∂TX] for 1 second.



About the Monitor function

The Monitor function allows you to monitor your trans-

mit signals in any mode. Use this to check voice char-

acteristics while adjusting transmit audio parameters.

(p. 15-4) The CW sidetone functions regardless of the

[MONI] key setting.

q Push [MONI].

• The Monitor function is turned ON.

• [MONI] indicator above this key lights white.

w Rotate [MONI GAIN] for the clearest audio output

while holding down [PTT] and speaking into the mi-

crophone at your normal voice level.

NOTE: When using the VOX voice delay (p. 8-3),

turn the TX monitor function OFF or the transmitted

audio will echo.

[XFC]

[CLEAR]

[TX]

[∂TX/RIT]

[MONI] indicator

[MONI GAIN]

[MONI]

• ∂TX function ON

8-6

FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT



Setting the transmit ﬁlter width (SSB only)



Setting the speech compressor (SSB only)

The transmit ﬁlter width for SSB mode can be selected

from wide, mid and narrow.



Operating in the SSB mode, hold down [COMP]()

for 1 second several times to set the desired transmit

ﬁlter width to Wide, Mid, or Narrow.

• The ﬁlter functions regardless of the speech compres-

sor use.

•

The following ﬁlters are speciﬁed as the default. Each of the

ﬁlter width can be reset in the Level set mode. (p. 15-5)

WIDE: 100 Hz ~ 2.9 kHz

MID: 300 Hz ~ 2.7 kHz

NAR: 500 Hz ~ 2.5 kHz

The speech compressor increases average RF output

power, improving readability at the receiving station, in

only the SSB mode.

q Push the Mode key [SSB] to select the USB or LSB

mode.

w Push the Multi function [METER]() key several

times to select the ALC meter.

e Rotate [MIC] to adjust the microphone gain to a suit-

able level.

r Push the Multi function [COMP]() key.

The Speech compressor is turned ON.

e Push [METER]() several times to select the COMP

meter.

r While speaking into the microphone at your normal

voice level, rotate the [COMP] control, so that the

COMP meter reads within the COMP zone (10 to

20 dB range), as shown to the right.

When the COMP meter peaks exceed the COMP

zone, your transmitted voice may be distorted.

t Push [METER]() several times to select the ALC

meter.

While speaking into the microphone at your normal

voice level, rotate the [DRIVE] control, so that the

ALC meter reads within the 30 to 50% range of the

ALC zone

, as shown to the right

 For your convenience

Hold down [METER]() for 1 second to display the

multi-function meter to check the ALC and COMP level

at a glance.

• Level set screen

52V

50 100

150

200

250

1.5

SWR

COMP

ALC

60dB

COMP zone

() Multi function keys

[COMP]

[DRIVE]

[MIC]

Mode keys

() Multi function keys

Mode keys

52V

50 100

150

200

250

1.5

SWR

COMP

ALC

60dB

Drive gain range

8-7

FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT

Split frequency operation allows you to transmit and

receive in the same mode on two different frequencies.

Split frequency operation uses one frequency on the

Main band and another on the Sub band.

The following is an example of using 21.290 MHz for

receiving and 21.310 MHz for transmitting.

q Set 21.290 MHz (USB) in the Main band.

w Push [SPLIT] momentarily, then hold down [M=S]

for 1 second.

• The Quick split function is much more convenient for se-

lecting the transmit frequency. See page 8-8 for details.

• The equalized frequencies and “

SPLIT

” are dis-

played.

• The [SPLIT] indicator lights white.

• The “

” icon indicates the transmit frequency.

Set the transmit frequency to 21.310 MHz in one of

following ways.

 Rotate [MAIN DIAL] while holding down [XFC].

 Rotate the [SUB DIAL].

• The transmit frequency can be monitored while hold-

ing down [XFC] or using Dualwatch.

r Now you can receive on 21.290 MHz and transmit

on 21.310 MHz.

To reverse the transmit and receive frequencies, push

[CHANGE] to exchange the Main and Sub band fre-

quencies.

 CONVENIENT

• Direct shift frequency input

The shift frequency can be directly entered.

q Push [F-INP].

Enter the desired shift frequency by pushing [0] to

[9].

• 0.001 MHz (1 kHz) ~ 9.999 MHz can be set.

• To enter a minus shift direction, ﬁrst push [•].

e Push [SPLIT].

• The shift frequency is entered in the Sub band and the

Split function is turned ON.

[Example]

To transmit on a 1 kHz higher frequency:

- Push [F-INP], [1], and then push [SPLIT].

To transmit on a 3 kHz lower frequency:

- Push [F-INP], [•], [3], and then push [SPLIT].

• Split lock function

Accidentally releasing [XFC] while rotating [MAIN

DIAL] changes the receive frequency. To prevent this,

use both the Split lock and Dial lock functions to change

only the transmit frequency. The Split lock function dis-

ables the Dial lock function while holding down [XFC]

in the Split mode.

The Dial lock’s action in the Split mode can be select-

ed in the Others set screen for both the receive and

transmit frequencies, or only the receive frequency.

(p. 15-14)

• When the Split function ON

• When [XFC] is pushed

• You are ready for Split frequency operation

[XFC] 10-keys

[M=S]

[SUB DIAL]

[CHANGE]

[SPLIT]

[MAIN DIAL]

[SPLIT] indicator



Split frequency operation

8-8

FUNCTIONS FOR TRANSMIT

When you ﬁnd a DX station, an important consider-

ation is how to set the split frequency.

When you hold down [SPLIT] for 1 second, the Split

frequency function is turned ON, the Sub band fre-

quency is equalized to the Main band frequency, and it

becomes the initial transmit frequency.

This shortens the time needed to start the Split fre-

quency operation.

The Quick split function is ON by default. For your

convenience, it can be turned OFF in the Others set

screen (p. 15-13). In that case, [SPLIT] does not equal-

ize the Main and Sub band frequencies.

 Suppose you are operating at 21.290 MHz (USB) in

the VFO mode.

q Hold down [SPLIT] for 1 second.

• The Split frequency operation is turned ON.

• The Sub band frequency is equalized with the Main band

frequency.

• “

F-INP

” is displayed and the Sub band readout be-

comes the initial transmit frequency.

w Enter the desired offset frequency from the keypad

and then push [SPLIT], or set the transmit frequen-

cy by rotating [MAIN DIAL] while pushing [XFC], or

by rotating [SUB DIAL].

• “

F-INP

” disappears when [XFC] is pushed, or [MAIN

DIAL] or [SUB DIAL] is rotated.

• Set the offset frequency by pushing [0] to [9]

[Example]

To transmit on a 1 kHz higher frequency:

- Push [F-INP], [1] and then push [SPLIT].

To transmit on a 3 kHz lower frequency:

- Push [F-INP], [•], [3] and then push [SPLIT].

Split lock function

The Split lock function is convenient for changing only

the transmit frequency. When the Split lock function is

not used, accidentally releasing [XFC] while rotating

[MAIN DIAL] changes the receive frequency. The Split

lock function is ON by default, but can be turned OFF in

the Others set screen. (p. 15-14)

q In the Split mode, push [LOCK] for both the Main

and Sub bands to activate the Split lock function.

w While pushing [XFC], rotate [MAIN DIAL] to change

the transmit frequency.

• If you accidentally release [XFC] while rotating [MAIN

DIAL], the receive frequency does NOT change.

• When the Quick split function ON

• When [XFC] is pushed

[SPLIT] indicator

[SPLIT]

[SUB DIAL]

[MAIN DIAL]

[XFC]

[LOCK] indicator MAIN, SUB

[LOCK] MAIN, SUB

[MAIN DIAL] [SUB DIAL]

[XFC]



About the Quick split function

9-1

VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS Section 9

 Recording function ……………………………………………………… 9-2

 Recording a QSO ……………………………………………………… 9-3

 Quick recording ……………………………………………………… 9-3

 Basic recording ……………………………………………………… 9-3

 Playing back the recorded audio (QSO) ……………………………… 9-4

 Operating while playing back ………………………………………… 9-5

 Deleting a recorded audio ﬁle ………………………………………… 9-6

 Deleting a recorded audio folder ……………………………………… 9-6

 Instant replay function ………………………………………………… 9-7

 Recording the communication audio ………………………………… 9-8

 Playing back the recorded audio ……………………………………… 9-8

 Recording or playing back a TX message …………………………… 9-9

 Recording …………………………………………………………… 9-9

 Playing back ………………………………………………………… 9-9

 Programming a TX message name ………………………………9-10

 Transmitting a recorded message ……………………………………9-11

 Single TX ……………………………………………………………… 9-11

 Repeat TX …………………………………………………………… 9-11

 Setting the transmit level …………………………………………… 9-12

 Voice Set mode …………………………………………………………9-13

 Saving a voice memory onto an SD card or USB ﬂash drive ………9-14

9-2

VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS

15 seconds

(default)

Present

Past

Future

Push to record the audio contents

REC

Past

Future

Hold down to

start recording

REC

Hold down to

stop recording

REC

QSO REC function

Instant replay function

Starts recording when [REC] is

held down.

Stores the previous 15 seconds before

[REC] pushed.

The “QSO REC” and “Instant replay” recording contents

QSO REC Instant Replay

Reference

p. 9-3 p. 9-7

Recording

Records the QSO

audio while operating

the transceiver.

• Also records the

CW audio.

Records the audio

contents of the previ-

ous 15 seconds be-

fore [REC] is pushed.

• Also stores the CW

sound.

Purpose

To start recording To recheck the con-

tents

Recording

location

SD card/USB ﬂash

drive

Built-in memory

Starting

method

Hold down [REC], or

push [QSO REC]

Push [REC]

Stopping

method

Hold down [REC], or

push [QSO REC]

Push [REC]

Capacity

Differs, depending on

the external memory

1 content

(15 seconds: default)

Display

while re-

cording

“

” appears

None

playback

Push [QSO PLAY] Push or hold down

[PLAY]

Display

while play-

ing back

The Voice QSO

player screen

“

PLAY

” appears

 Recording function

This transceiver has two recording functions, QSO

REC and Instant Replay functions.

The difference between these two functions is de-

scribed in the table to the right.

Refer to the pages written in the table for details on

each functions.

For your reference:

To record the TX audio, use the TX voice memory.

(p. 9-9)

9-3

VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS

D Basic recording

You can record both received and transmitted audio.

 The Multi-function screens are OFF.

q Push [VOICE](F).

• The Voice memory screen is displayed.

w Hold down [QSO REC](F) for 1 second to start voice

recording.

• “ ” appears while recording.

• “

” appears while recording is paused.

• Recording is continuous until the memory device be-

comes full.

• If the recording ﬁle’s content reaches 2GB, the trans-

ceiver automatically creates a new ﬁle, and continues

recording.

e Hold down [QSO REC](F) for 1 second to stop re-

cording.

• “ ” disappears.

r Push [EXIT/SET].

• Exits the Voice memory screen.

 Convenient!

When the PTT Automatic Recording function is set to

ON in the Voice set mode, the recording automatically

starts when you push [PTT]. (p. 9-14)

D Quick recording

You can quickly record received audio.

 Hold down [REC] for 1 second to start audio record-

ing.

• “ ” appears while recording.

• Hold down [REC] for 1 second again to stop recording.

• Push [REC] to record last 15 seconds before pushing

[REC].

[REC]

[EXIT/SET](F) Function keys

• While recording

Appears

 Recording a QSO

This transceiver consists with a QSO recorder not only

for the received audio, but also for the transmitted au-

dio.

You can record a DX’pedition news, contests and so

on, or your communication contents. The recorded

contents can be saved onto an SD card or USB ﬂash

drive.

There are two ways to record the communication.

NOTE:

• To record a QSO, an SD card or USB ﬂash drive is

required. (pp. 3-5, 3-6)

• DO NOT insert the SD card or USB ﬂash drive

while recording a QSO. The recording may be in-

terrupted.

• After the recording starts, it continues, even if the

transceiver is turned OFF and ON again.

9-4

VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS

Total time

Shows the ﬁle’s total

playback time.

Playback mark

Appears while the audio is playing back.

• The mark disappears while pausing.

You can playback the recorded QSO audio.

 The Multi-function screens are OFF.

q Push [VOICE](F).

• The Voice memory screen is displayed.

w Push [QSO PLAY](F).

• The Voice QSO player screen is displayed.

• The folder list is displayed.

• The folder name is formatted yyyymmdd (yyyy: year,

mm: month, dd: day).

e Push [Y](F) or [Z](F) to select the folder that con-

tains the ﬁle you want to playback.

• Rotating [MAIN DIAL] also selects the folder.

r Push [FILE](F).

• The ﬁle list is displayed.

• The ﬁle name is formatted yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss (yyyy:

year, mm: month, dd: day, hh: hour, mm: minute, ss:

second).

t Push [Y](F) or [Z](F) to select the ﬁle that you want

to playback.

• Rotating [MAIN DIAL] also selects the ﬁle.

y Push [PLAY](F) to start playback.

• Playback continues to the next ﬁle, and it is stopped

when the last ﬁle in the folder is played back.

u Push [EXIT/SET] several times.

• Exits the Voice memory screen.

 Playing back the recorded audio (QSO)

[EXIT/SET](F) Function keys

Folder

File list

Progress bar

Displays the

playback

progress bar.

Played back time

Shows the played back time.

9-5

VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS

For your reference:

• Holding down a key repeats the action until it is re-

leased (other than the [

](F) key).

Example: Hold down [

](F) to repeat skipping 10

seconds until you release the [](F) key.

(Default: 10 seconds)

• You can fast forward or rewind the ﬁle that is play-

ing by rotating [MAIN DIAL]. The fast forward/re-

wind time is one twentieth of the total ﬁle time, re-

gardless of the skip time setting.

 Operating while playing back

You can fast forward or rewind while playing back.

• Fast forward while playing

Push [](F) to fast forward to the skip time point.

(Default: 10 seconds)

You can change the skip time in the Voice Set mode.

(p. 9-14)

VOICE [F-2]  SET [F-7]  QSO PLAY Skip Time

• Rewind while playing

Push [](F) to rewind to the skip time point.

(Default: 10 seconds)

You can change the skip time in the Voice Set mode.

(p. 9-14)

VOICE [F-2]  SET [F-7]  QSO PLAY Skip Time

• If you push [](F) within the ﬁrst one second of the ﬁle,

the skip time at the end of the previously recorded ﬁle will

play back.

• Pause while playing

Push [ ](F) to pause.

• Push [ ](F) again to resume.

• Playing the previous ﬁle

Push [](F) to play the previous ﬁle.

• In case there are other ﬁles in the folder, while the oldest

ﬁle is playing back, push [](F) to start playing the begin-

ning of the ﬁle.

• Playing the next ﬁle

Push [](F) to play the next ﬁle.

• In case there are other ﬁles in the folder, while the most

recent ﬁle is playing back, push [](F) to stop the play-

back.

• Moving to the beginning of the previous ﬁle

When the playback is paused anywhere within the

ﬁle, push [](F) one or more times to return to the

beginning of the ﬁle, and pause.

• Push [ ](F) to playback.

When the playback is paused at beginning of a ﬁle,

push [](F) to move to the beginning of the previous

ﬁle, and pause.

• Push [ ](F) to playback.

• Moving to the beginning of the next ﬁle

When the playback is paused, push [](F) to move

to the beginning of the next ﬁle, and pause.

• Push [ ](F) to playback.

(F) Function keys

Rewind

Play the

next ﬁle

Play the

previous ﬁle

Forward

Pause or play

Stop playing

9-6

VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS

You can delete the recorded audio ﬁle.

 The Multi-function screens are OFF.

q Push [VOICE](F).

• The Voice memory screen is displayed.

w Push [QSO PLAY](F).

• The Voice QSO player screen is displayed.

• The folder list is displayed.

• The folder name is formatted yyyymmdd (yyyy: year,

mm: month, dd: day).

e Push [Y](F) or [Z](F) to select the folder that con-

tains the ﬁle you want to delete.

• Rotating [MAIN DIAL] also selects the folder.

r Push [FILE](F).

• The ﬁle list is displayed.

• The ﬁle name is formatted yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss (yyyy:

year, mm: month, dd: day, hh: hour, mm: minute, ss:

second).

t Push [Y](F) or [Z](F) to select the ﬁle that you want

to delete.

• Rotating [MAIN DIAL] also selects the ﬁle.

y Hold down [DEL](F) for 1 second.

• Opens the conﬁrmation window “Are you sure?.”

u Push [OK](F).

• The selected ﬁle is deleted.

• Push [EXIT/SET] to cancel deleting.

i Push [EXIT/SET] several times.

• Exits the Voice memory screen.

[EXIT/SET](F) Function keys

• The conﬁrmation window

You can delete the recorded audio folder.

 The Multi-function screens are OFF.

q Push [VOICE](F).

• The Voice memory screen is displayed.

w Push [QSO PLAY](F).

• The Voice QSO player screen is displayed.

• The folder list is displayed.

• The folder name is formatted yyyymmdd (yyyy: year,

mm: month, dd: day).

e Push [Y](F) or [Z](F) to select the folder that you

want to delete.

• Rotating [MAIN DIAL] also selects the folder.

r Hold down [DEL](F) for 1 second.

• Opens the conﬁrmation window “Are you sure?.”

t Push [OK](F).

• The selected folder is deleted.

• Push [EXIT/SET] to cancel deleting.

y Push [EXIT/SET] several times.

• Exits the Voice memory screen.

 Deleting a recorded audio folder

 Deleting a recorded audio ﬁle

9-7

VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS

 Instant Replay function

The Instant Replay function records the previous 15

seconds. This function is convenient for checking mis-

heard audio.

The audio is recorded into the built-in memory when

[REC] is pushed. Only one record can be stored, and it

is overwritten when [REC] is pushed again.

You can change the recording time up to 30 seconds in

the Voice set screen.

Records the

previous 15 sec.

when [REC] is

pushed.

PLAY

Push

PLAY

Hold down

5 seconds (default)

15 seconds

(Default)

• Push [SET](F) and select “Play Time” in the

Voice set screen to change the play time.

3 seconds (Example)

Present

Past

Future

• The recording time can be changed by pushing [SET](F),

and selecting the “INSTANT REPLAY REC Time” item in the Voice set screen.

Push to store

the audio

REC REC

15 seconds (default)

• Pushing [REC]

• Playing all record• Playing last 5 seconds

Not played

If you push [REC] again within 15 seconds after first push,

the period between the first and the second will be recorded.

• The play time differs,

depending on the recorded time.

Future

Push to store

the audio

• You can record by pushing [REC] regardless of the selected operating mode.

Recording and playing the communication audio

9-8

VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS

You can playback the recorded audio.

 Hold down [PLAY] for 1 second.

• Starts to playback all of the recorded audio.

(default: 15 second)

 Push [PLAY].

• Starts to playback the recorded audio for preset time

period (default: 5 seconds). (p. 9-14)

VOICE [F-2]  SET [F-7]  Play Time

• “

PLAY

” appears while playing back.

 Playing back the recorded audio

[PLAY]

Appears

 Push [REC].

• Records the previous 15 seconds when [REC] is

pushed.

• You can change the recording time on the Voice set

screen as described on page 9-14.

(Default: 15 seconds)

VOICE [F-2]  SET [F-7]  INSTANT REPLAY REC Time

• The audio is recorded in the built-in memory.

 Recording the communication audio

[REC]

For your reference:

If you transmit while recording for the Instant replay

function, the TX voice is recorded.

9-9

VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS

To transmit a message using the Voice memory, ﬁrst

record the desired message as described below.

You can record up to 8 digital voice messages of up to

200 seconds each, for transmission.

D Recording

 The Multi-function screens are OFF.

q Push [VOICE](F).

• The Voice memory screen is displayed.

w Push [MIC REC](F).

• The Voice MIC-Record screen is displayed.

e Push [Y](F) or [Z](F) to select the desired Voice

memory channel “T1” to “T8.”

r Hold down [REC](F) for 1 second to start record-

ing.

• “

REC

” appears.

t Speak into the microphone without holding down

[PTT].

• While speaking into the microphone at your normal

voice level, adjust the [MIC] control so that the “MIC-

REC LEVEL” meter reads 100%.

• While recording, the timer counts up the remaining time

period. You can record up to 200 seconds that is total of

“T1” to “T8” voice memories.

• Previously recorded contents are overwritten.

y Push [REC](F) to stop recording.

u Push [EXIT/SET] several times.

• Exits the Voice memory screen.

 Recording or playing back a TX message

[MIC]

[EXIT/SET](F) Function keys

• While playing back

• While recording

Appears Adjust [MIC] control so that this

indicator reads 100%.

Appears

D Playing back

q Do the steps q and w as described above to dis-

play the Voice MIC-Record screen.

w Push [Y](F) or [Z](F) to select the desired Voice

memory channel “T1” to “T8” to playback.

e Push [PLAY](F) to start playback.

• “

PLAY

” appears and the timer counts down.

• Playback is automatically terminated when all of the re-

corded contents in the channel are played back.

•

To pause while playing back, push [Y](F), [Z](F), [PLAY](F),

[REC](F), [NAME](F), [CLR](F), or [EXIT/SET].

• To clear the recorded contents of the selected Voice

memory channel, hold down [CLR](F) for 1 second.

r Push [EXIT/SET] several times.

• Exits the Voice MIC-Record screen.

9-10

VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS

D Programming a TX message name

You can enter alphanumeric names of up to 30 char-

acters each for the recorded message.

Example: Entering a TX message name ‘CQ JA3YUA’

to the Voice memory channel T1.

 The Multi-function screens are OFF.

q Push [VOICE](F).

• The Voice memory screen is displayed.

w Push [MIC REC](F).

• The Voice MIC-Record screen is displayed.

e Push [NAME](F).

• Enters the name entry mode.

r Push [T1..T8](F) several times to select the Voice

memory channel “T1.”

• You cannot select a Voice memory channel that has no

recorded audio.

t Enter a desired TX message name.

q When [ABC]() is selected, rotate [MAIN DIAL]

to select “C.”

w Push [u](F) to move the cursor.

e Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select “Q.”

r Push [u](F) to move the cursor.

t Push [SPACE](F) to enter a space.

y Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select “J.”

u Push [u](F) to move the cursor.

i Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select “A.”

o Push [123](), and then rotate [MAIN DIAL] to

select “3.”

!0 Push [u](F) to move the cursor.

!1 Push [ABC](), and then rotate [MAIN DIAL] to

select “Y.”

!2 Push [u](F) to move the cursor.

!3 Push [ABC](), and then rotate [MAIN DIAL] to

select “U.”

!4 Push [u](F) to move the cursor.

!5 Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select “A.”

• When entering a record name to another channel,

push [T1..T8](F) several times to select a desired

channel.

y After entering, push [EXIT/SET] to save the name.

• Selectable characters and symbols

[MAIN DIAL]

[EXIT/SET]

(≈) Multi-function keys

(F) Function keys

• The Voice MIC-Record screen (Before entry)

• The Voice MIC-Record screen (After entry)

 Recording or playing back a TX message (Continued)

For your reference:

• Move the cursor: Push [t](F) or [u](F)

• Delete: Push [DEL](F)

• Continuously holding down [DEL]

(F) deletes the selected character

and all characters to the right of

the selected character.

• Enter a space: Push [SPACE](F)

• Select a character: Rotate [MAIN DIAL]

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T

U V W X Y Z

a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x

y z

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0

! # $ % & \ ? ” ’ ` ^ + –  / . , : ; = < > ( ) [ ] {

} | _

9-11

VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS

For your reference:

When an external keypad (pp. 3-6, 20-4) or PC keyboard is connected (p. 15-16), you can transmit the recorded

messages.

• When pushing one of [S1] to [S8] on the external keypad, the recorded message in T1 to T8 is transmitted

once.

When holding down a key, the recorded message is repeatedly transmitted.

• When pushing one of [F1] to [F8] on the PC keyboard, the recorded message in T1 to T8 is transmitted once.

When pushing a key while holding down [SHIFT], the recorded message is repeatedly transmitted.

D Single TX

 The Multi-function screens are OFF.

q Push [VOICE](F).

• The Voice memory screen is displayed.

w Push [SEND](F).

• The Voice TX screen is displayed.

e Push a desired Voice memory channel key, [T1](F)

to [T8](F), to transmit the recorded voice audio.

• Pushing [1−4/5−8](F) toggles the function key indication

between [T1](F) to [T4](F) and [T5](F) to [T8](F).

• The transceiver automatically transmits.

• “

SEND

” appears and the memory timer counts down.

• The transceiver automatically returns to receive when all

of the recorded contents in the memory are transmitted.

• To cancel transmission, push [T1](F) to [T8](F), [1−4/5−8]

(F), or [EXIT/SET].

r Push [EXIT/SET] several times.

• Exits the Voice memory screen.

[EXIT/SET](F) Function keys

• While transmitting (Single TX)

Appears

• While transmitting (Repeat TX)

Repeat indicator

D Repeat TX

q Do steps q and w as described above.

w Hold down a desired Voice memory channel key,

[T1](F) to [T8](F), for 1 second.

• Repeatedly transmits the recorded voice audio for up to

10 minutes, at the interval speciﬁed in “Repeat Time.”

(p. 9-13)

VOICE [F-2]  SET [F-7]  Repeat Time

• “

” appears while repeat transmission.

• To cancel transmission, push [T1](F) to [T8](F), [1−4/5−8]

(F), or [EXIT/SET].

 Transmitting a recorded message

9-12

VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS

 Transmitting a recorded message (Continued)

D Setting the transmit level

 The Multi-function screens are OFF.

q Push [VOICE](F).

• The Voice memory screen is displayed.

w Push [SEND](F).

• The VOICE TX screen is displayed.

e Push [TX LEV.](F).

• Opens the “TX LEVEL” window.

r Push the desired Voice memory channel key, [T1]

(F) to [T8](F).

• The transceiver automatically transmits.

• Pushing [1−4/5−8](F) toggles the function key indication

between [T1](F) to [T4](F) and [T5](F) to [T8](F).

• “

SEND

” appears and the memory timer counts down.

• The transceiver automatically returns to receive when

all of the recorded contents in the memory are transmit-

ted.

• To cancel transmission, push [1−4/5−8](F), [T1](F) to

[T8](F), or [EXIT/SET].

t While transmitting, rotate [MAIN DIAL] to adjust the

transmit voice level.

• Hold down [DEF](F) for 1 second to select the default

condition.

y Push [EXIT/SET] several times.

• Exits the Voice memory screen.

• TX level window

(F) Function keys [MAIN DIAL][EXIT/SET]

9-13

VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS

 Voice Set mode

Sets the automatic monitor function, short play and

normal recording times for the Voice Recorder.

 The Multi-function screens are OFF.

q Push [VOICE](F).

• The Voice memory screen is displayed.

w Push [SET](F).

• The VOICE SET screen is displayed.

e Push [Y](F) or [Z](F) to select the desired item.

r Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to set the desired level or val-

ue.

• Hold down [DEF](F) for 1 second to select the default

level or value.

t Push [EXIT/SET] several times.

• Exits the Voice memory screen.

• Voice set screen

Voice 1st Menu (Default: VOICE-Root)

Select VOICE-Root or VOICE-TX as the menu that ap-

pears ﬁrst after pushing [VOICE](F).

• VOICE-Root: Displays the Voice memory screen

ﬁrst.

• VOICE-TX: Displays the Voice TX screen ﬁrst.

VOICE TX Auto Monitor (Default: ON)

Turn the Automatic Monitor function for recorded audio

contents transmission, ON or OFF.

• ON: Automatically monitors transmit audio when

sending a recorded audio.

• OFF: Monitors transmitting audio only when the Mon-

itor function is in use.

Repeat Time (Default: 5s)

Set the repeat interval for the voice repeat transmis-

sion.

The transceiver repeatedly transmits the recorded

voice audio at this interval.

Value: Between 1 and 15 seconds (in 1 second steps)

QSO REC Storage Media

(Default: SD CARD)

Select the recorded audio save destination.

• SD CARD: Saves onto the SD card.

• USB-Memory: Saves onto the USB ﬂash drive.

Rec Mode (Default: TX&RX)

Select the recording mode to record a QSO audio.

• TX&RX: Records both the transmitted and re-

ceived audio.

• RX only: Records only the received audio.

TX Rec Audio (Default: Direct)

Select the recording audio to transmit.

• Direct: Records the microphone audio.

• Monitor: Records the TX monitor audio.

RX Rec Condition (Default: Squelch Auto)

Select the recording condition for receive.

• Always: Records even if no signal is received.

• Squelch Auto: Records only when the squelch opens.

(The recording will be paused when

the squelch closes while recording.)

File Split (Default: ON)

Turn the File Split function ON or OFF.

• OFF: The audio is continuously recorded into the

ﬁle, even if you switch between transmit and

receive or the squelch status changes be-

tween open and closed.

When the recording ﬁle’s content becomes 2 GB,

the transceiver continues to record, but to a new

ﬁle.

• ON: While recording, and if you switch between

transmit and receive, or the squelch status

changes between open and closed, a new ﬁle

is automatically created in the same folder,

and the audio is saved into the new one.

(F) Function keys [MAIN DIAL][EXIT/SET]

9-14

VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS

PTT Auto REC (Default: OFF)

Turn the PTT Automatic Recording function ON or

OFF.

• OFF: The recording does not start even if a signal is

transmitted.

• ON: The recording automatically starts when a sig-

nal is transmitted.

The recording will stop when:

• 10 seconds has passed without transmission

after the last transmission.

• 10 minutes has passed with no signal after the

last transmission.

- If you receive a signal within 10 seconds after

the last transmission, the received audio is

also recorded.

- If you receive another signal within 10 sec-

onds after the last reception, the received

audio is also recorded.

• 10 minutes has past while operating with the

squelch is open in the SSB, CW, RTTY, PSK,

or AM mode.

• The frequency or operating mode is changed.

• The operating method (V/M, M-CH, Band

Stacking Register, and so on) is changed.

PRE-REC for PTT Auto REC (Default: 10s)

Select whether or not record the audio that is received

before the PTT Automatic Recording function is acti-

vated.

• OFF: Does not record the audio that is received be-

fore the PTT Automatic Recording function is

activated.

• 5s/10s/15s:

Records the audio that is previously received

this set period before the PTT Automatic Re-

cording function is activated.

QSO PLAY Skip Time (Default: 10s)

Set the Skip time to forward or rewind while playing

back the QSO audio.

Options: 3s, 5s, 10s, or 30s.

INSTANT REPLAY REC Time (Default: 15s)

Set the record time for the Instant replay function when

[REC] is pushed.

Options: 5s to 30s (1 second steps)

Play Time (Default: 5s)

Set the playback time for the Instant replay function

when [PLAY] is pushed.

Options: 3s to 10s (1 second steps)

 Voice Set mode (Continued)

The TX voice memory and the RX voice memory are

saved onto an SD card or USB ﬂash drive along with

the memory channel contents and set mode settings.

See “Saving the setting data onto an SD card or USB

ﬂash drive” on page 10-5 for more details.

To save the RX voice memory, set the “Voice RX Mem-

ory” item to ON, on the Save set screen. (p. 10-4)

SET [F-7]  SD/USB [F-7]  SAVE [F-2] 

Voice RX Memory)

 Saving a voice memory onto an SD card or USB ﬂash drive

10-1

USING AN SD CARD OR USB FLASH DRIVE Section 10

 About the SD card ……………………………………………………… 10-2

ï Inserting the SD card ………………………………………………10-2

ï Removing the SD card ………………………………………………10-2

 SD/USB-Memory menu screen ……………………………………… 10-3

ï Save set screen ……………………………………………………… 10-4

ï Load set screen ……………………………………………………… 10-4

 Saving the setting data onto an SD card or USB ﬂash drive ………10-5

 Loading the saved data ﬁles onto an SD card or USB ﬂash drive …10-6

 Saving with a different ﬁle name ……………………………………… 10-7

 Deleting a data ﬁle ……………………………………………………… 10-8

 Formatting an SD card or USB ﬂash drive ……………………………10-8

 Unmounting an SD card or USB ﬂash drive …………………………10-9

 Screen Capture function …………………………………………… 10-10

ï Capturing the screen ……………………………………………… 10-10

ï Viewing the captured screen …………………………………… 10-10

10-2

USING AN SD CARD OR USB FLASH DRIVE

An SDHC card is supplied.

You can also use third party cards.

An SD card of up to 2 GB, or an SDHC of up to 32 GB,

can be used.

Icom has checked the compatibility with the following

SD and SDHC cards.

(As of January 2018)

Brand Type Memory size

SanDisk

SD 2 GB

SDHC

4 GB

8 GB

16 GB

32 GB

• The above list does not guarantee the card’s perfor-

mance.

• Throughout the rest of this document, the SD card

and an SDHC card are simply called SD cards or the

card.

• Icom recommends that you format all SD cards to be

used with the transceiver, even preformatted cards

for PCs or other uses. (p. 10-8)

Saving the transceiver’s factory default data is rec-

ommended. (p. 10-5)

NOTE:

• Before using the SD card, thoroughly read the card’s

instructions.

• If you do any of the following, the card data may be

corrupted or deleted.

- A power failure occurs or the AC power cable is

disconnected from an AC receptacle while access-

ing the card.

- You turn OFF the internal power supply while ac-

cessing the card.

- You remove the card from the transceiver while ac-

cessing the card.

- You drop, impact or vibrate the card.

• Do not touch the contacts of the card.

• The transceiver takes a longer time to recognize a

high capacity card.

• The card will get warm if used continuously for a

long period of time.

• The card has a certain lifetime, so data reading or

writing may not be possible after using it for a long

time period.

• When reading or writing data is impossible, the

card’s lifetime has ended. In this case, purchase a

new one. We recommend you make a backup ﬁle of

the important data onto your PC.

• Icom will not be responsible for any damage caused

by data corruption of an card.



About the SD card

D Inserting the SD card

 Insert the card into the [SD CARD] slot until it locks

in place, and makes a ‘click’ sound.

• The indicator to the left of the [SD CARD] slot blinks.

NOTE: Before inserting, be sure to check the card

direction.

If the card is forcibly or inversely inserted, it will

damage the card and/or the slot.

D Removing the SD card

 Push in the card until a click sounds, and then care-

fully pull it out.

• Before you remove the card while the transceiver’s pow-

er is ON, be sure to ﬁrst unmount it. (p. 10-9)

Indicator

10-3

USING AN SD CARD OR USB FLASH DRIVE



SD/USB-Memory menu screen

• Setting save screen (p. 10-5)

• Save set screen (p. 10-4)

• Load set screen (p. 10-4)

• Format screen (p. 10-8)

• Capture list screen (p. 10-10)

• SD/USB-Memory menu screen

• Unmount screen (p. 10-9)

• Firmware update screen (p. 17-4)

F-1 F-2 F-3 F-4 F-5 F-6 F-7

F-7

F-5

F-3

F-2

F-4

F-6

• Setting load screen (p. 10-6)

You can select the various screens from the SD/USB-

Memory menu screen to make detail settings.

Hold down

10-4

USING AN SD CARD OR USB FLASH DRIVE

Load Contents (Default: Select)

Select the contents to be loaded from the SD card or

USB ﬂash drive to the transceiver.

• All: All memories and settings of the ﬁle are load-

ed into the transceiver.

• Select: The speciﬁed memories and settings of the

ﬁle are loaded into the transceiver, depending

on the following settings.

Antenna Memory (Default: NO)

Select whether or not to load the antenna memory.

• YES: Loads

• NO: Does not load

REF IN/OUT, REF Adjust, Filter CAL

(Default: NO)

Select whether or not to load the REF signal IN/OUT

settings, REF adjustment values, and rooﬁng ﬁlter cali-

bration adjustment values.

• YES: Loads

• NO: Does not load

Network Settings (Default: NO)

Select whether or not to load the network settings.

• YES: Loads

• NO: Does not load

CI-V Address (Default: NO)

Select whether or not to load the CI-V address set-

tings.

• YES: Loads

• NO: Does not load

Other Memory & Settings (Default: YES)

Select to load the Memory channel contents and the

settings.

• YES: Loads

Voice TX Memory (Default: YES)

Select whether or not to load the Voice TX memory

content.

• YES: Loads

• NO: Does not load

Voice RX Memory (Default: NO)

Select whether or not to load the Voice RX memory

content.

• YES: Loads

• NO: Does not load

D Load set screen

SAVE Contents (Default: All)

Select the content to be saved onto the SD card or

USB ﬂash drive.

• All: All memories and settings are saved onto the

card or ﬂash drive.

• Select: The memories and settings are saved onto

the card or ﬂash drive, depending on the fol-

lowing settings.

Memory & Settings (Default: YES)

Select to save the Memory channel contents and the

settings.

• YES: Saves

Voice TX Memory (Default: YES)

Select whether or not to save the Voice TX memory

content.

• YES: Saves

• NO: Does not save

Voice RX Memory (Default: NO)

Select whether or not to save the Voice RX memory

content.

• YES: Saves

• NO: Does not save

SAVE Form (Default: Now Ver)

Selects the ﬁle saving format between “Now Ver” and

“Old Ver.”

To save settings and memory contents for backup or

copying to another IC-7850/IC-7851, you must save the

data in the ﬁrmware version format that matches the tar-

get IC-7850/IC-7851.

Select “Now Ver” for the current version, or “Old Ver

(xxx - xxx)” for the previous versions.

• The previous versions are shown in brackets, and you can

select the desired version by rotating [MAIN DIAL]. The ﬁle

will be saved in the selected version.

See page 17-2 for conﬁrming the ﬁrmware version of the

transceiver.

• Now Ver: Saves the ﬁle in the current ﬁrmware ver-

sion format.

• Old Ver: Saves the ﬁle in the ﬁrmware version for-

mat shown in brackets.

NOTE:

• You cannot write setting ﬁle that is saved in the

current version format to an older ﬁrmware version

IC-7850/IC-7851.

• If the settings are saved in an older version format,

the items added in later version are not saved.

 SD/USB-Memory set screen (Continued)

D Save set screen

10-5

USING AN SD CARD OR USB FLASH DRIVE



Saving the setting data onto an SD card or USB ﬂash drive

Memory channels and transceiver’s settings can be

saved on a card or ﬂash drive.

Saving data settings on a card or ﬂash drive allows

you to easily restore the transceiver to its previous set-

tings, even if an All reset is performed.

q Displays the Setting save screen.

SET [F-7]  SD/USB [F-7]  SAVE [F-2]

w Push [SD/USB](F).

• Pushing [SD/USB](F) toggles the ﬁle save destination

between the card and ﬂash drive.

e Push [SAVE](F).

• Opens the conﬁrmation window.

• To cancel saving, push [CANCEL](F).

r Push [OK](F).

• Saves the data settings to the selected destination.

• While saving to the card, the indicator to the left of the

[SD CARD] slot blinks.

• While saving to the ﬂash drive, the indicator to the right

of the [SD CARD] slot blinks.

• You can change the content to be saved in the Save set

screen. (p. 10-4)

( SET [F-7] > SD/USB [F-7] > SAVE [F-2] >

SAVE Contents)

• After saving, returns to the SD/USB-Memory set

screen.

• SD/USB-Memory set screen

• Setting save screen

Destination is an SD card

• Conﬁrmation window

10-6

USING AN SD CARD OR USB FLASH DRIVE



Loading the saved data ﬁles onto an SD card or USB ﬂash drive

Memory channels and transceiver’s settings on the

card or ﬂash drive can be copied to the transceiver.

This function is convenient when:

• Copying the saved data to another IC-7850/IC-7851

to operate with the same data.

• Using one IC-7850/IC-7851 by two or more operators

with their own individual data.

Saving the current data is recommended before load-

ing other data into the transceiver.

• Setting load screen

• Conﬁrmation window

q Displays the Setting load screen.

SET [F-7]  SD/USB [F-7]  LOAD [F-1]

w Push [SD/USB](F).

• Push [SD/USB](F) toggles the ﬁle load source between

the card and the ﬂash drive.

e Push [∫](F) or [√](F) to select the desired ﬁle to be

loaded.

r Push [LOAD](F).

• Opens a conﬁrmation window.

• To cancel loading, push [CANCEL](F).

t Push [OK](F).

• Loads the data settings of the selected source.

• While loading from the card, the indicator to the left of

the [SD CARD] slot lights.

• While loading from the ﬂash drive, the indicator to the

right of the [SD CARD] slot lights.

• You can change the content to be loaded in the Load set

screen (p. 10-4).

( SET [F-7] > SD/USB [F-7] > LOAD [F-1] >

Load Contents)

y After loading ends, reboot the transceiver

NOTE: To complete the loading process, you must

reboot the transceiver.

10-7

USING AN SD CARD OR USB FLASH DRIVE



Saving with a different ﬁle name

• Setting save screen

• When entering “JA3YUA”

• When changing a ﬁle name to “JA3YUA”

• Conﬁrmation window

You can change the ﬁle name when saving onto a card

or ﬂash drive.

The ﬁle name can be up to 15 characters.

Example: Changing a ﬁle name to JA3YUA.

q Displays the Setting save screen.

SET [F-7]  SD/USB [F-7]  SAVE [F-2]

w Push [SD/USB](F).

• Pushing [SD/USB](F) toggles the ﬁle save destination

between the card and the ﬂash drive.

e Push [NAME](F).

• Enters the ﬁle name entry mode.

r Push [DEL](F).

• Deletes the pre-entered name.

t Edit the desired characters by rotating [MAIN DIAL]

or enter numbers by pushing keypad keys.

q When [ABC]() is selected, rotate [MAIN DIAL]

to select “J.”

w Push [u](F) to move the cursor.

e Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select “A.”

r Push [u](F) to move the cursor.

t Push [123](), and then rotate [MAIN DIAL] to

select “3.”

y Push [u](F) to move the cursor.

u Push [ABC](), and then rotate [MAIN DIAL] to

select “Y.”

i Push [u](F) to move the cursor.

o Push [ABC](), and then rotate [MAIN DIAL] to

select “U.”

!0 Push [u](F) to move the cursor.

!1 Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select “A.”

• You can use a keyboard connected to the transceiver to

enter text or numbers.

y Push [EXIT/SET].

• Returns to the Setting save screen.

u Push [SAVE](F).

• Opens the conﬁrmation window.

• To cancel loading, push [CANCEL](F).

i Push [OK](F).

• Saves the data settings to the selected destination.

• While saving to the card, the indicator to the left of the

[SD CARD] slot lights.

• While saving to the ﬂash drive, the indicator to the right

of the [SD CARD] slot lights.

• You can change the content to be saved in the Save set

screen (p. 10-4).

( SET [F-7] > SD/USB [F-7] > SAVE [F-2] >

SAVE Contents)

• After saving, returns to the SD/USB-Memory set

screen.

File name entry mode

Change the ﬁle name

10-8

USING AN SD CARD OR USB FLASH DRIVE



Deleting a data ﬁle

NOTE: Formatting a card or ﬂash drive erases all its

data. Before formatting any used card, back up its

data onto your PC.

If you use a brand new SD card, format it by doing the

following steps.

q Display the SD/USB-Memory set screen.

SET [F-7]  SD/USB [F-7]

w Hold down [FORMAT](F) for 1 second.

• Opens the “FORMAT” window.

e Push [SD](F) or [USB](F).

• Opens the conﬁrmation window.

• To cancel saving, push [CANCEL](F).

r Push [OK](F).

• After formatting, returns to the SD/USB-Memory set

screen.



Formatting an SD card or USB ﬂash drive

• When selecting a ﬁle to be deleted

• Conﬁrmation window

• Format screen

• Conﬁrmation window

• SD/USB-Memory set screen

NOTE: Deleted data from a card or ﬂash drive can-

not be restored. Before deleting any card or ﬂash

drive, back up its data onto your PC.

q Displays the Setting save screen.

SET [F-7]  SD/USB [F-7]  SAVE [F-2]

w Push [SD/USB](F).

• Pushing [SD/USB](F) toggles between the card and

ﬂash drive that the ﬁle to be deleted is stored.

e Push [∫](F) or [√](F) to select the desired ﬁle to be

deleted.

e Hold down [SORT/DEL](F) for 1 second.

• Opens the conﬁrmation window.

• To cancel saving, push [CANCEL](F).

r Push [OK](F).

• Deletes the selected ﬁle.

• While deleting the ﬁle in the card, the indicator to the left

of the [SD CARD] slot blinks.

• While deleting the ﬁle in the ﬂash drive, the indicator to

the right of the [SD CARD] slot blinks.

• After deleting, returns to the Setting save screen.

10-9

USING AN SD CARD OR USB FLASH DRIVE



Unmounting an SD card or USB ﬂash drive

• When unmounting the SD card

• Unmount screen

• When unmounting the USB ﬂash drive

• SD/USB-Memory set screen

Electrically unmounts the card or ﬂash drive when the

power is ON.

NOTE: If you remove a card or ﬂash drive from the

transceiver without unmounting, the data may be

corrupted or deleted.

q Displays the SD/USB-Memory set screen.

SET [F-7]  SD/USB [F-7]

w Hold down [UNMOUNT](F) for 1 second.

• Opens the “UNMOUNT” window.

e Push [SD](F) or [USB](F).

• Opens a conﬁrmation window.

• To cancel saving, push [CANCEL](F).

r Push [OK](F).

• After unmounting, returns to the SD/USB-Memory set

screen.

t Remove the card or ﬂash drive from the transceiv-

er.

10-10

USING AN SD CARD OR USB FLASH DRIVE

D Viewing the captured screen



Screen Capture function

You can capture the transceiver display onto the SD

card or USB ﬂash drive. Most of the screens described

in this manual were captured using this function.

NOTE: Some screens cannot be captured.

q Displays the SD/USB-Memory set screen.

SET [F-7]  SD/USB [F-7]

w Push [VIEW](F).

• The Capture list screen is displayed.

e Push [p](F) or [q](F) to select a desired ﬁle.

r Push [VIEW](F) to display the captured screen.

• The [MAIN] or [SUB] key blinks while displaying the ﬁle.

t After checking the ﬁle, push [EXIT/SET] twice.

• Exits the Capture list screen.

D Capturing the screen

q Select the “Screen Capture [POWER] SW” item in

the Others set screen.

SET [F-7]  OTHERS [F-5]  Screen Capture [POWER] SW

w Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select “ON.”

• The Screen capture function is assigned to the [POW-

ER] key.

You can also assign the function to the [Print Screen] key

on the USB keyboard.

If desired, select the storage media between the SD card

and USB ﬂash drive, or select the data format between

PNG and BMP.

e Push [EXIT/SET] several times.

• Exits the Set screen.

r Select a desired screen.

t Push [POWER] to capture the screen.

• The captured screen is saved onto the selected storage

media in the selected data format.

• Functions in the Capture list screen

Function Action

SD/USB

Toggles between an SD card and USB ﬂash

drive.

Selects a ﬁle.

VIEW

Displays the captured screen.

• The [MAIN] or [SUB] key blinks while dis-

playing the ﬁle.

• Push [EXIT/SET] to return to the Capture

list screen.

DEL

Hold down for 1 second to display the dialog

box for deleting.

EXPAND

Toggles between the Expanded and normal

screens.

[EXIT/SET](F) Function keys

• Capture list screen

• Others set screen

[EXIT/SET] [MAIN DIAL](F) Function keys

11-1

MEMORY OPERATION Section 11

 Memory channels ……………………………………………………… 11-2

 Memory channel selection …………………………………………… 11-2

D Using the M-CH [p] or [q] keys …………………………………… 11-2

D Using the keypad ……………………………………………………11-2

 Memory list screen ……………………………………………………… 11-3

D Selecting a memory channel using the Memory list screen ……11-3

D Conﬁrming programmed memory channels ……………………… 11-3

 Entering Memory channel contents ………………………………… 11-4

D Entering in the VFO mode ………………………………………… 11-4

D Entering in the Memory mode ……………………………………… 11-4

 Copying Memory contents …………………………………………… 11-5

D Copying in the VFO mode …………………………………………11-5

D Copying in the Memory mode ……………………………………… 11-5

 Memory names ………………………………………………………… 11-6

D Editing (programming) memory names …………………………… 11-6

 Memory clearing………………………………………………………… 11-6

 Memo pads ……………………………………………………………… 11-7

D Entering frequencies and operating modes into Memo pads …… 11-7

D Calling up a frequency and operating mode from Memo pads …11-8

D Using the Memo pad list screen …………………………………… 11-8

11-2

MEMORY OPERATION

MEMORY

TRANSFER

OVER-

CHANNEL

CHANNEL CAPABILITY

TO VFO

WRITING

CLEAR

NUMBER

Regular memory

1–99

One frequency and one mode

Yes Yes Yes

channels in each memory channel.

Scan Edge

One frequency and one mode in

memory P1, P2 each memory channel as scan Yes Yes No

channels edges for programmed scans.



Memory channels

The transceiver has 101 memory channels. The Mem-

ory mode is very useful for quickly selecting often-used

frequencies.

All 101 memory channels are tunable, which means

the entered frequency can be temporarily tuned by ro-

tating [MAIN DIAL].



Memory channel selection

Using the M-CH [

] or [

] keys

q Push [V/M] to select the Memory mode.

w Push M-CH [p] or [q] several times to select the

desired memory channel.

• Hold down M-CH [p] or [q] to continuously change the

memory channels.

• You can also push [UP] and [DN] on microphone keys.

e To return to the VFO mode, push [V/M] again.

Using the keypad

q Push [V/M] to select the Memory mode.

w Push [F-INP].

e Push the keypad keys to enter the desired memory

channel number.

• Enter 100 or 101 to select Scan Edge channels P1 or

P2.

r Push M-CH [p] or [q] to switch to the entered mem-

ory channel.

[EXAMPLE]

To select memory channel 3:

- Push [F-INP•ent], [3], then push M-CH [p] or [q].

To select memory channel 12:

- Push [F-INP•

ent], [1], [2], then push M-CH [p] or

[q]

To select Scan Edge channel P1:

- Push [F-INP•ent], [1], [0], [0], then push M-CH [p]

or [q]

To select Scan Edge channel P2:

- Push [F-INP•

ent], [1], [0], [1], then push M-CH [p]

or [q]

[SUB]

[V/M]

[MAIN]

M-CH [] or []

F-INP

ENT

PUSH

• Memory mode

M-CH number

VFO frequency

M-CH frequency

11-3

MEMORY OPERATION



Memory list screen

The Memory list screen simultaneously shows 9

memory channels and their programmed contents. 15

memory channels can be displayed in the expanded

Memory list screen.

You can select a desired memory channel from the

Memory list screen.

Selecting a memory channel using the Memory list screen

 The Multi-function screens are OFF:

Push [MEMORY](F).

• The

Memory list screen is displayed.

• Push [EXPAND](F) to toggle between the standard and

expanded screens.

w While holding down [ROLL](F), rotate [MAIN DIAL]

to select the desired memory channel.

• M-CH [Y] or M-CH [Z] can also be used.

e Push [EXIT/SET].

• Exits the Memory list screen.

Conﬁrming programmed memory channels

Push [MEMORY](F).

• The

Memory list screen is displayed.

• Push [EXPAND](F) to toggle between the standard and

expanded screens.

w While holding down [ROLL](F), rotate [MAIN DIAL]

to scroll the screen.

e Push [SET](F) to select the highlighted memory

channel.

• “u” appears beside the selected memory channel num-

ber in the Memory list screen and the selected memory

channel contents are displayed below the frequency

readout.

r Push [EXIT/SET]

• Exits the Memory list screen.

• Memory list screen

M-CH [] or []

[V/M]

[MAIN DIAL][EXIT/SET](F) Function keys

11-4

MEMORY OPERATION

Hold down for 1 second.

Beep

[EXAMPLE]: Programming 7.088 MHz/LSB into memory

channel 12.

or then

Hold down for 1 second.

Beep

[EXAMPLE]: Programming 21.288 MHz/USB into memory

channel 18.



Entering Memory channel contents

Entering in the Memory mode

q Push [V/M] to select the Memory mode.

w Select the desired memory channel by pushing

M-CH [Y] or [Z].

• Memory channel contents are displayed in the memory

channel readout (below the frequency readout).

• “--.---.--” appears if the selected memory channel is a

blank channel (does not have contents).

e Set the desired frequency, operating mode and ﬁl-

ter.

• To enter contents into a blank channel, use direct fre-

quency entry with the keypad or memo pads, and so

on.

r Hold down [MW] for 1 second to save the displayed

frequency, operating mode, ﬁlter, and so on into the

memory channel.

You can enter Memory channel in either the VFO or

Memory mode.

Entering in the VFO mode

q Push [V/M] to select the VFO mode.

w Set the desired frequency, operating mode and ﬁl-

ter.

e Push M-CH [p] or [q] several times to select the de-

sired preset memory channel.

• The Memory list screen is convenient for selecting the

desired channel.

• Memory channel contents are displayed in the memory

channel readout (below the frequency readout).

• “--.---.--” is displayed if the selected memory channel is a

blank channel (does not have contents). Blank channels

cannot be entered in the VFO mode.

r Hold down [MW] for 1 second to save the displayed

frequency, operating mode, ﬁlter and so on, into the

memory channel.

M-CH [] or []

[MW]

11-5

MEMORY OPERATION



Copying Memory contents

The frequency and operating mode in a memory chan-

nel can be copied to the VFO.

Copying can be performed in either the VFO or Mem-

ory mode.

Copying in the VFO mode

This is useful for copying Memory contents to the VFO

mode.

q Push [V/M] to select the VFO mode.

w Push M-CH [p] or M-CH [q] to select the memory

channel to be copied.

• The Memory list screen is convenient for selecting the

desired channel.

• Memory channel contents appear in the memory chan-

nel readout (below the frequency readout).

• “--.---.--” appears if the selected memory channel is a

blank channel. In this case, there is nothing to copy.

e Hold down [V/M] for 1 second to copy the frequency

and operating mode to the VFO.

• The displayed frequency and operating mode are cop-

ied to the VFO.

Copying in the Memory mode

This is useful for copying frequency and operating

mode while operating in the Memory mode.

When you have changed the frequency or operating

mode in the selected memory channel:

• Displayed frequency, mode and ﬁlter setting are

copied to the VFO mode.

• Memorized frequency and mode in the memory

channel are not changed, and they remain in the

memory channel.

q Select the memory channel to be copied by pushing

M-CH

[p] or M-CH [q] in the Memory mode.

• Enter the frequency or operating mode, if required.

w Hold down [V/M] for 1 second to copy the frequency

and operating mode.

• The displayed frequency and operating mode are cop-

ied to the VFO.

e To return to the VFO mode, push [V/M].

M-CH [] or []

[V/M]

[MAIN DIAL]

Hold down for 1 second.

Beep

Hold down for 1 second.

Beep

Programmed contents appear.

[EXAMPLE]: Copying in the VFO mode

Operating frequency: 21.320 MHz/USB (VFO)

Contents of M-ch 16: 14.108 MHz/CW

[EXAMPLE]: Copying in the Memory mode

VFO frequency: 21.320 MHz/USB

Contents of M-ch 16: 14.108 MHz/CW

11-6

MEMORY OPERATION



Memory names

All memory channels (including scan edges) can be

assigned alphanumeric names of up to 10 characters.

Upper case letters, lower case letters, numerals, some

symbols and spaces can be used.

Editing (programming) memory names

 The Multi-function screens are OFF:

q Push [MEMORY](F).

• The

Memory list screen is displayed.

w Select the desired memory channel.

e Push [NAME](F) to edit the memory channel name.

• A cursor appears and blinks.

• Memory channel names of blank channels cannot be

edited.

r Edit the desired character by rotating [MAIN DIAL]

or by pushing keypad for number input.

• Push [ABC]() or [abc]() to toggle between upper case

and lower case letters.

• Push [123]() or [Symbol]() to toggle between numbers

and symbols.

• Push [t](F) or [u](F) to move the cursor.

• Push [DEL](F) to delete the selected character.

• Push [SPACE](F) to enter a space.

• Pushing keypad, [0]–[9], can also enter numbers.

t Push [EXIT/SET] to save the name.

• The cursor disappears.

y Repeat steps w to t to program another memory

channel’s name, if desired.

u Push [EXIT/SET].

• Exits the Memory list screen.

• Memory clearing

[V/M]

[MAIN DIAL]

[EXIT/SET]

(F) Function keys

M-CH [] or []

[V/M]

[MAIN DIAL][EXIT/SET](F) Function keys

() Multi-function keys

• Enters the memory name



Memory clearing

Any unnecessary memory channels can be cleared. The

cleared memory channels become blank channels.

q Select the memory mode by pushing [V/M].

Push [MEMORY](F).

• The

Memory list screen is displayed.

e Select the desired memory channel by pushing

M-CH [Y] or [Z].

r Hold down [CLR](F) for 1 second to clear the con-

tents.

• The frequency and operating mode disappear.

t To clear other memory channels, repeat steps e

and r.

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T

U V W X Y Z

a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x

y z

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0

! # $ % & \ ? ” ’ ` ^ + –  / . , : ; = < > ( ) [ ] {

} | _

11-7

MEMORY OPERATION



Memo pads

The transceiver has a Memo Pad function to store fre-

quency and operating mode for easy write and recall.

The Memo pads are separate from memory channels.

The default quantity of Memo pads is 5. However, this

can be increased to 10 in the Others set mode, if de-

sired. (p. 15-15)

Memo pads are convenient when you want to tempo-

rarily memorize a frequency and operating mode, such

as when you ﬁnd a DX station in a pile-up, or when a

desired station is busy for a long time and you want to

temporarily search for other stations.

• The function can be used in both the VFO and memory

modes.

Use the transceiver’s Memo pads instead of relying on

hastily scribbled notes that are easily misplaced.

[MP-W]

Newest content

Erased

MP-W

Oldest content

Entering frequencies and operating modes into Memo pads

You can easily write the accessed readout frequency

and operating mode by pushing [MP-W].

When you enter a 6th memo pad, the oldest memo

pad is automatically erased to make room for the new

entry.

Each Memo pad must have its own unique combi-

nation of frequency and operating mode. Memo

pads having identical settings cannot be entered.

In this example, 21.276 MHz (USB) will be erased

when 7.067 MHz (LSB) is entered.

The function is commonly used for the Main and Sub

bands.

11-8

MEMORY OPERATION

• Memo pad list screen

Memo Pads

MP-R

Temporary pad

Oldest content

Newest content

MP-R

 Memo pads (Continued)

Calling up a frequency and operating mode from Memo pads

Using the Memo pad list screen

You can easily call up the desired frequency and oper-

ating mode of Memo pads by pushing [MP-R] several

times.

• The frequency and operating mode are called up, starting

from the most recently entered.

When you call up a frequency and an operating mode

from Memo pads by pushing [MP-R], the previously

displayed frequency and operating mode are automat-

ically stored in a temporary pad. The frequency and

operating mode in the temporary pad can be recalled

by pushing [MP-R] several times.

• You may think there are 6 Memo pads because 6 different

frequencies are called up by [MP-R] (5 are in Memo pads

and 1 is in the temporary pad).

q Hold down [MP-R] for 1 second.

• The Memo pad list screen is displayed.

w Push [p](F) or [q](F) to select the desired Memo

pad.

• Hold down [DEL](F) for 1 second to delete the selected

Memo pad.

• Hold down [DEL ALL](F) for 1 second to delete all Memo

pads.

e Push [EXIT/SET].

• Exits the Memo pad list screen.

If you change the frequency or operating mode

called up from Memo pads, the frequency and oper-

ating mode in the temporary pad are updated.

[MP-R]

[MAIN DIAL]

[EXIT/SET]

(F) Function keys

12-1

SCANS Section 12

 Scan types ……………………………………………………………… 12-2

 Preparing for a scan ……………………………………………………12-3

 Scan set mode ………………………………………………………… 12-4

 Programmed scan ……………………………………………………… 12-5

 Fine Programmed scan ………………………………………………… 12-6

 Memory scan …………………………………………………………… 12-7

 Select memory scan …………………………………………………… 12-7

 Setting Select memory channels ……………………………………… 12-8

D Setting in the Scan screen ………………………………………… 12-8

D Setting in the Memory list screen ………………………………… 12-8

D Erasing the Select scan setting …………………………………… 12-8

 ∂F scan ………………………………………………………………… 12-9

 Fine ∂F scan …………………………………………………………… 12-9

 Tone scan …………………………………………………………… 12-10

 Voice Squelch Control function …………………………………… 12-10

12-2

SCANS



Scan types

• The scan functions can be used on the Main band

only.

• You can scan while operating on a frequency using

the Dualwatch or Split functions.

PROGRAMMED SCAN

Repeatedly scans between two Scan Edge frequencies

(Scan Edge memory channels P1 and P2).

This scan works in the VFO mode.

SELECT MEMORY SCAN

Repeatedly scans all or one of 3 select memory channels.

∂F SCAN

Repeatedly scans within the

∂

F span area.

This scan works in the Memory mode.This scan works in the Memory mode.

This scan works in both the VFO and Memory modes.

Scan

Scan edge

P1 or P2

Scan edge

P2 or P1

Jump

MEMORY SCAN

Repeatedly scans all programmed memory channels.

Ch 1

★

Ch 5

★1

Ch 2

★

Ch 3

★1

Ch 4

Ch 6

★

Ch 7

★1

Ch 99

★1

Ch 1

★

Ch 5

★1

Ch 2

★

Ch 3

★1

Ch 4

Ch 6

★

Ch 7

★1

Ch 99

★1

Blank channel Blank channel

ScanScan

–∂

F frequency +

∂

F frequency

Start frequency

Jump

*“★1,” “★2” and “★3” show that the channel

is specified as a select memory.

*“★1,” “★2” and “★3” show that the channel

is specified as a select memory.

12-3

SCANS



Preparing for a scan

For a Programmed scan:

Enter Scan Edge frequencies into the Scan Edge

memory channels P1 and P2.

For a ∂F scan:

Set the ∂F span (∂F scan range) in the Scan screen.

For a Memory scan:

Enter frequencies in two or more memory channels,

except Scan Edge memory channels.

For a Select memory scan:

Assign two or more memory channels as Select mem-

ory channels. To designate the channel as a select

memory channel, choose a memory channel, then

push [SELECT](F) in the Scan screen (Memory mode)

or in the Memory list screen.

• Scan Resume function

You can set the scan to resume or cancel when detect-

ing a signal in the Scan set mode. The Scan Resume

function must be set before starting a scan. (p. 12-4)

• Scan speed

The scan speed can be set to high or low in the Scan

set mode. (p. 12-4)

• Squelch status

 The scan starts with the squelch open

For a Programmed scan:

When the tuning step is 1 kHz or less:

The scan continues until it is manually stopped— it

does not pause* even if signals are detected.

* The scan pauses when the squelch is closed and

then opened. The scan resumes after 10 seconds has

passed when the Scan Resume function is ON. It is

cancelled when the function is OFF.

When the tuning step is more than 5 kHz:

The scan pauses on each step when the Scan Resume

function is ON. It does not pause when the function is

OFF.

For a memory scan:

If Scan pauses on each channel when the Scan Re-

sume function is ON. The scan does not pause when

the function is OFF.

 Scan starts with the squelch closed

The scan stops when a signal is detected.

• If the Scan Resume function is set to ON, the scan

pauses for 10 seconds when detecting a signal, then

resumes. If the scan is paused, it resumes 2 seconds

after the signal disappears.

12-4

SCANS



Scan set mode

When the squelch is open, the scan continues until it is

manually stopped — it does not pause on detected sig-

nals. When the squelch is closed, the scan stops when

a signal is detected, then resumes according to the

Scan Resume setting. The scan speed and the Scan

Resume setting can be set in the Scan set mode.

 The Multi-function screens are OFF.

q Push [SCAN](F).

• The Scan screen is displayed.

w Push [SET](F).

• The Scan set screen is displayed.

e Push [p](F) or [q](F) to select the desired item.

r Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the desired setting.

• Hold down [DEF](F) for 1 second to select the default

setting.

t Push [EXIT/SET].

Exits the Set screen.

SCAN Speed (Default: HIGH)

Set the desired scan speed to high or low.

• HIGH: Scan is faster

• LOW: Scan is slower.

SCAN Resume (Default: ON)

Set the scan resume function to ON or OFF.

• ON: When a signal is detected, scan pauses for

10 seconds, then resumes. Two seconds after

the signal disappears, the scan resumes.

• OFF: When detecting a signal, cancels scanning.

[MAIN DIAL]

[EXIT/SET]

(F) Function keys

12-5

SCANS



Programmed scan

A Programmed scan searches for signals between

Scan Edge memory channels “P1” and “P2.”

Before starting the programmed scan, you must enter

Scan Edge frequencies into these channels.

If the same frequencies are entered into Scan Edge

memory channels P1 and P2, the Programmed

scan does not start.

 The Multi-function screens are OFF.

q Push [V/M].

• Selects the VFO mode.

• Push [V/M] toggles between the VFO and Memory

modes.

w Push a Mode key to select the desired operating

mode.

• The operating mode can be changed while scanning.

Push [TS] to select the desired tuning steps. (p. 4-7)

• The tuning steps can be changed while scanning.

r Push [SCAN](F).

• The Scan screen is displayed.

t Push [PROG](F).

• The Programmed scan starts.

• “

PROGRAM SCAN

” and decimal points blink while scan-

ning.

• Push [PROG](F) to cancel the scan.

• Rotating [MAIN DIAL] also cancels the scan.

• Hold down [RECALL](F) for 1 second to recall the fre-

quencies that are set before starting the scan (P1 and

P2), if desired.

y When the scan detects a signal, the scan stops,

pauses or ignores it, depending on the Scan Re-

sume setting and the squelch status.

[MAIN DIAL]

[TS][V/M]

[EXIT/SET]

Mode keys

(F) Function keys

• While scanning

BlinksBlinks

12-6

SCANS

• While scanning

BlinksBlinks



Fine Programmed scan

In the Fine Programmed scan, the scan speed de-

creases when the squelch opens, but the transceiver

keeps scanning. The scanning tuning step changes to

10 Hz when the squelch opens.

 The Multi-function screens are OFF.

q Push [SCAN](F).

• The Scan screen is displayed.

w Set for a Programmed scan as described on page

12-5.

e Push [PROG](F).

• The Programmed scan starts.

• “

PROGRAM SCAN

” and decimal points blink while scan-

ning.

r Push [FINE](F).

• The Fine programmed scan starts.

• “

FINE PROGRAM SCAN

” blinks.

• Push [FINE](F) to release the Fine Programmed scan.

• Push [PROG](F) to cancel the scan

• Rotating [MAIN DIAL] also cancels the scan.

• Hold down [RECALL](F) for 1 second to recall the fre-

quencies that are set before starting the scan (P1 and

P2), if desired.

When the scan detects a signal, the scan speed de-

creases but the scan does not stop.

[MAIN DIAL]

[TS][V/M]

[EXIT/SET]

Mode keys

(F) Function keys

12-7

SCANS



Memory scan

 The Multi-function screens are OFF.

q Push [V/M].

• Selects the Memory mode.

• Pushing [V/M] toggles between the VFO and Memory

modes.

w Push [SCAN](F).

• The Scan screen is displayed.

e Push [MEMO](F).

• The Memory scan starts.

• “

MEMORY SCAN

” and decimal points blink while scan-

ning.

• Push [MEMO](F) to cancel the scan.

• Rotating [MAIN DIAL] also cancels the scan.

r When the scan detects a signal, the scan stops,

pauses or ignores it, depending on the Scan Re-

sume setting and the squelch status.

Two or more memory channels must be programmed

for the Memory scan to start.

[MAIN DIAL]

[V/M]

[EXIT/SET]

(F) Function keys

• While scanning

BlinksBlinks

 The Multi-function screens are OFF.

q Push [V/M].

• Selects the Memory mode.

• Pushing [V/M] toggles between the VFO and Memory

modes.

w Push [SCAN](F).

• The Scan screen is displayed.

e Push [SEL No.](F) several times to select the Select

scan number from “1,” “2,” “3,” or “1,2,3.”

r Push [MEMO](F).

• The Memory scan starts.

• “

MEMORY SCAN

” and decimal points blink while scan-

ning.

t Push [SELECT](F).

• The Select memory scan starts.

• “

SELECT MEMORY SCAN

” blinks.

• Push [SELECT](F) again to return to the Memory scan.

• Push [MEMO](F) to cancel the scan.

• Rotating [MAIN DIAL] also cancels the scan.

y When the scan detects a signal, the scan stops,

pauses or ignores it depending on the Scan Re-

sume setting and the squelch status.

Two or more memory channels must be designated

as select memory channels, as well as the same

Select scan number, for the Select memory scan to

start.



Select memory scan

12-8

SCANS

Setting in the Scan screen

 The Multi-function screens are OFF.

q Push [V/M].

• Selects the Memory mode.

• Pushing [V/M] toggles between the VFO and Memory

modes.

e Push [SCAN](F).

• The Scan screen is displayed.

r Select the desired memory channel to set as a Se-

lect memory channel.

• The [p] or [q] keys and direct keypad selections can be

used.

t Push [SELECT](F) several times to set the memory

channel as a Select memory 1, 2, 3 or not.

y Repeat steps r to t to program another memory

channel as a Select memory channel, if desired.

u Push [EXIT/SET]

• Exits the Scan screen.

Erasing the Select scan setting

 The Multi-function screens are OFF.

q Push [MEMORY](F) to enter the Memory list screen,

or push [SCAN](F) to enter the Scan screen.

w Hold down [SELECT](F) for 1 second to display the

Memory select all clear window.

e Push one of the following keys to clear all Select

channel settings.

[1](F): Clears all 1 settings.

[2](F): Clears all 2 settings.

[3](F): Clears all 3 settings.

[1,2,3](F): Clears all Select settings.

r Push [EXIT/SET].

• Exits the Memory list screen.

Setting in the Memory list screen

 The Multi-function screens are OFF.

q Push [MEMORY](F)

• The Memory list screen is displayed.

w Rotate [MAIN DIAL] while pushing [ROLL](F) or

[SET](F) to select the desired memory channel.

• The [p] or [q] keys and direct keypad selections can

also be used.

r Push [SELECT](F) several times to set the memory

channel as a select memory 1, 2, 3 or not.

t Repeat steps e to r to program another memory

channel as a Select memory channel, if desired.

y Push [EXIT/SET].

• Exits the Memory list screen.

• Setting the Select memory channels

•

Erasing the Select memory channel scan settings



Setting Select memory channels

12-9

SCANS



∂F scan

 The Multi-function screens are OFF.

q Select the VFO mode or a Memory channel.

w Select the desired operating mode.

• The operating mode can also be changed while scan-

ning.

e Push [SCAN](F) .

• The Scan screen is displayed.

r Push [∂F SPAN](F) to set the ∂F span.

• Selectable spans: ±5 kHz, ±10 kHz, ±20 kHz, ±50 kHz,

±100 kHz, ±500 kHz and ±1000 kHz

t Set the center frequency of the ∂F span.

y Push [∂F](F).

• The ∂F scan starts.

• “

:F SCAN

” and decimal points blink while scanning.

• Push [∂F](F) to cancel the scan.

• Rotate [MAIN DIAL] also cancels the scan.

• Hold down [RECALL](F) for 1 second to recall the fre-

quency that is set before starting the scan, if desired.

u When the scan detects a signal, the scan stops,

pauses or ignores it, depending on the Scan Re-

sume setting and the squelch status.



Fine ∂F scan

In ﬁne scan (programmed or ∂F), the scan speed de-

creases when the squelch opens, but the transceiver

keeps scanning. The scanning tuning step changes to

10 Hz when the squelch opens.

 The Multi-function screens are OFF.

q Push [SCAN](F).

• The Scan screen is displayed.

w Set for ∂F scan as described above.

e Push [∂F](F).

• The ∂F scan starts.

• “

:F SCAN

” and decimal points blink while scanning.

r Push [F-3•FINE].

• The Fine ∂F scan starts.

• “

FINE :F SCAN

” blinks.

• Push [FINE](F) to cancel the Fine ∂F scan.

• Push [∂F](F) to cancel the scan

• Rotating [MAIN DIAL] also cancels the scan.

• Hold down [RECALL](F) for 1 second to recall the fre-

quency that is set before starting the scan, if desired.

t When the scan detects a signal, the scan speed de-

creases but scan does not stop.

[MAIN DIAL]

M-CH [] or [] [V/M]

[EXIT/SET]

(F) Function keys

• While scanning

BlinksBlinks

12-10

SCANS



Tone scan

By monitoring a signal on an HF/6 m repeater input

frequency, the transceiver can determine the tone fre-

quency required to access the repeater.

q Set the frequency or memory channel to be checked

for a tone frequency.

w Push the Mode key [AM/FM] several times to select

the FM mode.

e Hold down [TONE]() for 1 second.

• The Tone frequency screen is displayed.

r Push [p](F) or [q](F) to check the repeater tone

frequency or tone squelch frequency.

t Push [T-SCAN](F).

• The Tone scan starts.

• “SCAN” blinks while scanning.

y When the tone frequency is detected, the tone scan

pauses.

• The tone frequency is set temporarily in the Tone mem-

ory. If desired, hold down [MW] for 1 second to overwrite

the memory to permanently store the tone frequency.

• The decoded tone frequency is used for the repeater

tone frequency or tone squelch frequency.

u To stop the scan, push [T-SCAN](F).

• Hold down [DEF](F) for 1 second to select the default

frequency.

i Push [EXIT/SET].

• Exits the Tone frequency screen.

This function is useful when you don’t want unmodu-

lated signals pausing or cancelling a scan. When the

Voice Squelch Control function is activated, the scan

pauses while the receiver checks the received signals

for voice components. (The squelch does not open

during this check.)

If a received signal includes voice components, and

the tone of the voice components changes within 1

second, the scan is stopped and the squelch opens.

If the received signal has no voice components, or the

tone of the voice components does not change within

1 second, the scan resumes.

 While in a phone mode (SSB, AM or FM), push

[VSC]() to turn the VSC (Voice Squelch Control)

function ON or OFF.

• “VSC” is displayed when the function is ON.

• The VSC function can be used in any scan.

• The VSC function resumes the scan on unmodu-

lated signals, regardless of whether the Scan Re-

sume function is set to ON or OFF.

[MAIN DIAL]

[EXIT/SET]

Mode keys

(F) Function keys

(≈) Multi-function keys

• While scanning

Blinks

Mode keys

(≈) Multi-function keys

Appears



Voice Squelch Control function

13-1

ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION Section 13

 Antenna connection and selection …………………………………… 13-2

 Receive Antenna-I/O selection ………………………………………13-2

 Antenna memory settings ……………………………………………… 13-3

D Selecting the antenna type ………………………………………… 13-4

D Antenna selection mode …………………………………………… 13-5

D Temporary memory ………………………………………………… 13-5

D Receive antenna I/O setting …………………………………………13-6

 About the Antenna tuner ……………………………………………… 13-7

 Using the Antenna tuner operation …………………………………… 13-7

D If the tuner cannot tune the antenna ……………………………… 13-8

13-2

ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION



Antenna connection and selection

3.5/7 MHz

bands

21/28 MHz

bands

only

50 MHz

bands

ANT4 ANT3 ANT2 ANT1

() Multi-function keys

[RX-ANT B]

OUT OUTIN IN

[RX-ANT A]

• Antenna connection example

The transceiver has four antenna connectors for the

HF/50 MHz bands, [ANT1], [ANT2], [ANT3], and

[ANT4].

You can automatically select an antenna to your op-

erating band if you assign an antenna to an operating

band in advance.

NOTE: [ANT4] can be set as receive only.

• Antenna selection mode: “Auto”

You can assign combinations of antenna connected

to [ANT1] to [ANT4] and an operating band. After an

antenna has been selected for use, the antenna is au-

tomatically selected whenever that band is used.

Antenna selection mode (p. 13-5)

Antenna memory settings (p. 13-3)

• Antenna selection mode: “Manual”

You can push [ANT]() to manually select a antenna

connected to [ANT1] to [ANT4].

Antenna selection mode (p. 13-5)

Temporary memory (p. 13-5)



Receive Antenna-I/O selection

The transceiver has two independent receive antenna

connectors, [RX-ANT A] and [RX-ANT B] on the rear

panel.

You can connect a receive only antenna to IN, other

receivers to OUT, and an external pre-amplifier/Filter

between IN and OUT.

Receive antenna I/O setting (p. 13-6)

13-3

ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION



Antenna memory settings

This function stores the antenna connector number for

each frequency band.

You can assign an antenna connected to [ANT1] to

[ANT4] and the two [RX-I/O] and an operating band.

NOTE: [ANT1] is set as the default for all operating

bands and no [RX-I/O] is used.

Example: Assigning [ANT3] when you select the 14 MHz

band.

q Hold down the Multi-function [ANT]() key for 1 sec-

ond.

• The ANT screen is displayed.

w Push the [14] band key.

• The 14 MHz band is selected.

e Push the Multi-function [ANT]() key several times

to select the “ANT3”.

• “” appears.

r Hold down [ANT MW](F) for 1 second to store the

antenna selection into the antenna memory.

• “” disappears.

t Push [EXIT/SET].

• Exits the ANT screen.

NOTE: Push [RX-I/O] to change the settings without

going to item step r above. The change can be

stored in the antenna memory. (p. 13-6)

() Multi-function keys

Band keys

(F) Function keys

• ANT screen

‘ANT1’ is set. Displays [RX-I/O]

connection status

13-4

ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION

 Antenna memory settings (Continued)

Selecting the antenna type

When no antenna is connected to [ANT2], [ANT3],

and/or [ANT4], these antenna connectors can be de-

activated— by deleting the antenna number from se-

lection. This prevent the transceiver from accidentally

transmitting into an empty antenna connector.

In addition, a receive-only antenna can be speciﬁed

for [ANT4].

q Hold down the Multi-function [ANT]() key for 1 sec-

ond.

• The ANT screen is displayed.

w Push [ANT TYPE](F).

• The ANT type screen is displayed.

e Push [Y](F) or [Z](F) to select the desired anten-

na.

r Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to set the desired antenna to

TX/RX, RX (ANT4 only) or OFF.

• OFF: Select when no antenna is connected.

• TX/RX: Select when an antenna is connected.

(Default)

• RX: Select when a receive only antenna is con-

nected. (available for the [ANT4] only)

t Push [EXIT/SET].

• Exits the ANT type screen.

 For your information

• The “OFF” antennas cannot be selected with the

Multi-function [ANT]() key operation, or with the an-

tenna memory setting.

• When “RX” is set to for [ANT4], “1/R,” “2/R” and “3/R”

selections will be added to the selection for both

Multi-function [ANT]() key operation and the an-

tenna memory setting. In these selections, use the

antenna connected to [ANT1], [ANT2] and/or [ANT3]

for transmission and using the antenna connected to

[ANT4] for reception.

() Multi-function keys

(F) Function keys

• ANT type screen

• Antenna type selection on the ANT screen

All antennas, connected to [ANT1]~[ANT4], are set as

for ‘TX/RX.’

13-5

ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION

Push [[ANT] SW](F) to select the

antenna selection mode.

• Antenna selection mode

• Options of the Antenna selection mode

Temporary memory

The antenna temporary memory memorizes the man-

ually selected antenna. The selected antenna will be

recalled even if frequency band has been changed.

q Hold down the Multi-function [ANT]() key for 1 sec-

ond.

• The ANT screen is displayed.

w Push [TEMP-M](F).

• “Temporary memory : ON” appears.

•

Push [TEMP-M](F) again to turn OFF.

e Select the desired frequency band with a band key.

r Push the Multi-function [ANT]() key to select the

desired antenna.

• “” appears when a different antenna from the original

is selected.

•

Push [ANT MR](F) to recall the original antenna.

“” disappears.

t Push [EXIT/SET].

• Exits the ANT screen.

CAUTION: Before transmitting with a manually se-

lected antenna, make sure the selected antenna

suits the operating frequency. Otherwise the trans-

ceiver may be damaged.

() Multi-function keys

(F) Function keys

Appears when a different

antenna from the original

is selected.

The temporary

memory is ON.

• When the temporary memory is ON.

 Antenna memory settings (Continued)

Antenna selection mode

The automatic antenna selection (antenna memory)

and the Multi-function [ANT]() key can be deactivated

or you must manually select the desired antenna.

You can set the desired selection in this mode.

q Hold down the Multi-function [ANT]() key for 1 sec-

ond.

• The ANT screen is displayed.

w Push [[ANT] SW](F) to set the antenna selection to

“Auto Auto”, “Auto Manual” or “Manual Manual”.

• Auto Auto: Uses the antenna memory. Se-

lecting an antenna with the Multi-

function [ANT]() key can also be

made.

• Auto Manual: Each antenna connector is se-

lected according to the stored

settings. A [RX-I/O] connector

is selected with each pushing of

[RX-I/O (F)] and is selected ac-

cording regardless of stored set-

tings.

• Manual Manual: Deactivate the antenna memory

function. Antenna can be selected

only with the Multi-function [ANT]

() key operation. [RX-I/O] can be

selected with [RX-I/O](F).

e Push [EXIT/SET].

• Exits the ANT screen.

13-6

ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION

[RX-ANT B]

OUT OUTIN IN

[RX-ANT A]

• When the RX-I/O is selected.

OFF RX-I/O A RX-I/O B

• When the RX-I/O is selected (1)

The setting is Displayed

Set to RX-I/O A Set to [RX-I/O] OFF

• When the RX-I/O is selected (2)

When a common antenna is selected on the Main and Sub bands,

different RX-I/O settings cannot be set.

Thus, the transceiver automatically sets the RX-I/O setting of the

inoperating band to the correct setting, the same as the operating

band.

• When the RX-I/O A is selected in the 10 MHz band

Pushing [RX-I/O](F) changes setting

 Antenna memory settings (Continued)

Receive antenna I/O setting

A [RX-I/O] connector is automatically selected when

you store the settings in the antenna memory.

When you set the settings to [Auto manual] or [Manual

Manual], an [RX-I/O] connector is commonly selected

regardless of the selected band.

q Hold down the Multi-function [ANT]() key for 1 sec-

ond.

• The ANT screen is displayed.

w Push [RX-I/O](F) to activate the receive antenna

connectors.

• “ RX-I/O” indicators appear when [RX-I/O A] and/or [RX-

I/O B] is active.

• Either “RX-I/O A” or “RX-I/O B” indicator appears under

the “ANT” indicator.

NOTE:

• When an external device is connected, and when a

common antenna is set to the Main and Sus bands,

different RX-I/O settings cannot be set.

• When different antennas are set to the Main and

Sub bands, common RX-I/O settings cannot be

set.

• When the SUB band is selected in the Dualwatch

function OFF, you cannot change the RX-I/O set-

ting.

However, if you additionally turn ON the SPLIT

function and holding down [XFC], you can change

the RX-I/O setting.

13-7

ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION



About the Antenna tuner

The internal automatic antenna tuner automatically

matches the transceiver to the connected antenna.

After the tuner matches an antenna, the variable ca-

pacitor angles are memorized as a preset point for

each frequency range (100 kHz steps). Therefore,

when you change the frequency range, the variable

capacitors are automatically preset to the memorized

point.

CAUTION: NEVER transmit with the tuner ON when

no antenna is connected. This will damage the

transceiver. Be careful of the antenna selection.

 Push [TUNER] to turn on the internal antenna tuner.

The antenna is automatically tuned when the an-

tenna SWR is higher than 1.5:1.

• When the tuner is ON, the [TUNER] switch indicator

lights white.

• While tuning, the [TUNER] switch indicator blinks red.

NOTE:

• NEVER transmit without an antenna properly

connected to the selected antenna port.

• When 2 or more antennas are connected, select

the antenna to be used with [ANT].

• If the SWR is higher than about 1.5:1 when tun-

ing above 100 kHz on an antenna’s preset point,

hold down [TUNER] for 1 second to start manual

tuning.

• The internal tuner may not be able to tune in the

AM mode. In such cases, hold down [TUNER] for

1 second to manually tune.

• MANUAL TUNING

During SSB operation at low voice levels, the internal

tuner may not tune correctly. In such cases, manual

tune the antenna.

 Hold down [TUNER] for 1 second, to start manual

tuning.

• A side tone is heard and the [TUNER] switch indicator

blinks red while tuning.

• If the tuner cannot reduce the SWR to less than 1.5:1

after 20 seconds of tuning, the [TUNER] switch indicator

goes out.

• AUTOMATIC TUNER START (HF bands only)

If you want to deactivate the tuner under conditions

of VSWR 1.5:1 or less, use the auto tuner start func-

tion and turn the tuner OFF. This function activates the

tuner automatically when the SWR exceeds 1.5:1.

This function is turned ON in the set mode. (p. 15-14).

[TUNER] [TUNER] indicator



Using the Antenna tuner operation

13-8

ANTENNA TUNER OPERATION

 Antenna tuner operation (Continued)

• PTT TUNER START

The tuner is always activated when PTT is pushed

after the frequency is changed (more than 1% from

last-tuned frequency). This function removes the “hold

down [TUNER],” and activates the tuner for the ﬁrst

transmission on a new frequency.

This function is turned ON in Set mode (p. 15-14).

• Antenna tuner in the IC-PW1

When using an external antenna tuner such as the IC-

PW1’s tuner, tune with the external antenna tuner, and

turn OFF the transceiver’s tuner. Otherwise, both tun-

ers tune simultaneously and correct tuning may not be

obtained.

See the instruction manual included with each antenna

tuner for their respective operation.

If the tuner cannot tune the antenna

Check the following and try again:

• the [ANT] connector selection

• the antenna connection and feedline

• the untuned antenna SWR

(Less than 3:1 for the HF bands,

Less than 2.5:1 for the 50 MHz band)

• the transmit power (8 W for the HF bands, 15 W for the 50 MHz

band)

• the power source voltage/capacity

If the tuner cannot reduce the SWR to less than 1.5:1

after checking the above, perform the following:

• Repeat manual tuning several times.

• Tune with a 50 Ω dummy load and then retune the anten-

na.

• Turn power OFF and ON.

• Adjust the antenna feedline length (This is effective for

higher frequencies in some cases.)

• Some antennas, especially for low bands, have a narrow

bandwidth. These antennas may not tune at the edge of

their bandwidth, therefore, tune such an antenna as fol-

lows:

[Example]: Suppose you have an antenna which has an

SWR of 1.5:1 at 3.55 MHz and an SWR of 3:1

at 3.8 MHz.

q Set 3.55 MHz and hold down [TUNER] for 1 second to

start manual tuning.

w Set 3.80 MHz and hold down [TUNER] for 1 second to

start manual tuning.

14-1

CLOCK AND TIMERS Section 14

 Time set mode ………………………………………………………… 14-2

D Setting the Date ……………………………………………………… 14-2

D Setting the Current time …………………………………………… 14-2

D Setting the UTC Offset ……………………………………………… 14-2

D Selecting the CLOCK2 Function …………………………………… 14-3

D Setting the CLOCK2 UTC Offset …………………………………… 14-3

D Entering the CLOCK2 Name ……………………………………… 14-3

D Setting the NTP Function …………………………………………… 14-4

D Setting the NTP Server address ……………………………………14-4

 Setting the Daily timer ………………………………………………… 14-5

 Setting the Sleep timer ………………………………………………… 14-6

 Timer operation ………………………………………………………… 14-6

14-2

CLOCK AND TIMERS



Time set mode

This transceiver has a built-in calendar and 24-hour

clock (accuracy of ±75 seconds per month) with daily

power ON/OFF timer functions. Before operating these

timers, set the current date and time.

 The Multi-function screens are OFF:

q Push SET [F-7] then Time [F-5] to enter the Time

set screen.

w Push [p]

(F)

or [q]

(F)

to select the item.

e Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to set or select the desired val-

ue or setting.

r Push [EXIT/SET] several times.

• Exits the Time set screen.

Setting the Date

Sets the Date.

 In the Time set screen:

q Push [p]

(F)

or [q]

(F)

to select the “Date” item.

Push [t u](F) to select between the Year and Month/

Day.

e Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to enter the Year or Month/Day.

• The Date setting and “DATE-set Push [SET]” blink.

r Push [SET]

(F)

to set the Date.

• “DATE-set Push [SET]” disappears.

Setting the Current time

Sets the local time.

 In the Time set screen:

q Push [p]

(F)

or [q]

(F)

to select the “Time (Now)”

item.

w Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to enter the local time.

• The Time setting and “TIME-set Push [SET]” blink.

e Push [SET](F) to set the Time.

• “TIME-set Push [SET]” disappears.

Setting the UTC Offset

Set your local time offset from UTC between –14:00

and +14:00 in 5 minute steps.

 In the Time set screen:

q Push [p]

(F)

or [q]

(F)

to select the “UTC Offset”

item.

w Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to set the offset time.

• Hold down [DEF](F) for 1 second to select the default

setting.

[MAIN DIAL][EXIT/SET](F) Function keys

• When the “Date” item is selected

• When the “Time (Now)” item is selected

• When the “UTC Offset” item is selected

14-3

CLOCK AND TIMERS

• When the “CLOCK2 Function” item is selected

Selecting the CLOCK2 Function

Turn the clock 2 display ON or OFF. (Default: ON)

Clock 2 is convenient to display the UTC or other coun-

try’s local time.

 In the Time set screen:

q Push [p]

(F)

or [q]

(F)

to select the “CLOCK2 Func-

tion” item.

w Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the option.

• ON: The Clock 2 time is displayed below the local time

display. (Default)

• OFF: The Clock 2 time is not displayed.

Setting the CLOCK2 UTC Offset

Set the desired time offset for Clock 2’s display from

UTC between –14:00 and +14:00 in 5 minute steps.

 In the Time set screen:

q Push [p]

(F)

or [q]

(F)

to select the “CLOCK2 UTC

Offset” item.

w Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the offset time.

• Hold down [DEF](F) for 1 second to select the default

setting.

Entering the CLOCK2 Name

Set a three character name for Clock 2. Upper case

letters, lower case letters, numbers, some symbols,

and spaces can be used.

 In the Time set screen:

q Push [p]

(F)

or [q]

(F)

to select the “CLOCK2 Name”

item.

w Push [EDIT](F) to edit the Clock 2 name.

• The cursor under the 1st character blinks.

e Edit the desired character by rotating [MAIN DIAL]

or by pushing a keypad key for a number entry.

• Push [ABC]() or [abc]() to toggle between upper case

letters and lower case letters.

• Push [123]() or [Symbol]() to toggle between numbers

and symbols.

• Push [t](F) or [u](F) to move the cursor.

• Push [DEL](F) to delete the selected character.

• Push [SPACE](F) to input a space.

• Pushing keypad, [0]–[9], can also enter numerals.

r Push [EXIT/SET] to save the name.

• When the “CLOCK2 UTC Offset” item is selected

• When the “CLOCK2 Name” item is selected

• When editing the “CLOCK2 Name” item

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T

U V W X Y Z

a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x

y z

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0

! # $ % & \ ? ” ’ ` ^ + –  / . , : ; = < > ( ) [ ] {

} | _

14-4

CLOCK AND TIMERS

[MAIN DIAL][EXIT/SET](F) Function keys

• When the “NTP Function” item is selected

• When the “NTP Server Address” item is selected

• When editing the “NTP Server Address” item

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T

U V W X Y Z

a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x

y z

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0

– .

 Time set mode (Continued)

Setting the NTP Function

Turn the NTP (Network Time Protocol) function ON or

OFF. (Default: ON)

The NTP function automatically synchronizes the in-

ternal clock with the time management server.

• To use this function, an internet connection and default

gateway settings are necessary.

 In the Time set screen:

q Push [p]

(F)

or [q]

(F)

to select the “NTP Function”

item.

w Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select “ON.”

• The transceiver access the NTP server address that is

set in the “NTP Server Address” item.

Setting the NTP Server address

Set the NTP server address. (Default: time.nist.gov)

 In the Time set screen:

q Push [p]

(F)

or [q]

(F)

to select the “NTP Server Ad-

dress” item.

w Push [EDIT](F) to edit the address or its IP ad-

dress.

• The cursor under the 1st character blinks.

e Edit the desired character by rotating [MAIN DIAL]

or by pushing keypad for a number entry.

• Push [ABC]() or [abc]() to toggle between upper case

letters and lower case letters.

• Push [123]() or [Symbol]() to toggle between numbers

and symbols.

• Push [t](F) or [u](F) to move the cursor.

• Push [DEL](F) to delete the selected character.

• Push [SPACE](F) to enter a space.

• Pushing keypad, [0]–[9], can also enter numbers.

r Push [EXIT/SET] to save the name.

NOTE:

The transceiver’s DHCP function is ON as the de-

fault to be easily assigned an IP address. Change

the setting according to your network environment.

SET [F-7] > OTHERS [F-5] > DHCP (Valid after Re-

boot) (p. 15-19)

14-5

CLOCK AND TIMERS



Setting the Daily timer

The transceiver automatically turns power ON and/or

OFF on the speciﬁed day and time, with the speciﬁed

frequency settings in both the Main and Sub bands.

 The Multi-function screen is OFF:

q Hold down [TIMER] for 1 second.

• The Timer set screen is displayed.

w Push one of [TIMER1](F) to [TIMER5](F) to select

the desired timer.

e Set the timer.

• Push [t](F) or [u](F) to select the item.

• Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the option.

Item Option

ACT Select the Daily timer action of ON or OFF.

• ON: The timer is enabled.

• OFF: The timer is disabled.

DAY Select the desired day of the week.

• Select “– – –” to not specify the day of the

week. In that case, the timer functions at

next the time that is speciﬁed in the “ON”

or “OFF” item.

• To clear the day, push [CLR](F).

REPEAT Select the repeat setting ON or OFF.

• ON: The timer functions every selected

day of the week or every day.

• OFF: The timer functions only once.

After the timer is activated, the transceiver

automatically changes the “ACT” item to

OFF.

ON Set the time that the transceiver powers ON.

• When using only the Power OFF timer,

push [CLR](F) to select “– – –.”

OFF Set the time that the transceiver powers

OFF.

• When using only the Power ON timer, push

[CLR](F) to select “– – –.”

MAIN Select the Memory channel on the Main

band when the Power ON timer is activated.

• To call up the last used Main band frequen-

cy, push [CLR](F) to select “– – –.”

SUB Select the Memory channel on the Sub band

when the Power ON timer is activated.

• To call up the last used Sub band frequen-

cy, push [CLR](F) to select “– – –.”

• “TIMER-set Push [SET]” blinks.

r Push [SET](F) to save and set the timer.

• “TIMER-set Push [SET]” disappears.

• The timer indicator above the [TIMER] key lights white.

t Repeat steps w to r to set other timers, if desired.

y Push [EXIT/SET].

• Exits the Set screen.

• Timer screen

[MAIN DIAL]

[TIMER]

[EXIT/SET](F) Function keys

• When the “TIMER1, ACT” item is selected

• When the “TIMER1, SUB” item is selected

Blinks Memory information

14-6

CLOCK AND TIMERS



Setting the Sleep timer

The Sleep timer automatically turns OFF the transceiv-

er power after the set period ends. The timer can be

set to between 5 and 120 minutes, in 5 minute steps.

 The Multi-function screens are OFF:

q Hold down [TIMER] for 1 second.

• The Timer set screen is displayed.

w Push [SLEEP](F) to enter the Sleep timer setting

mode.

• “– – –” blinks.

e Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to set the desired time period.

• “TIMER–set Push [SET]” blinks.

• If desired, push [CLR](F) to clear the time.

• If desired, push [EXIT/SET] to cancel the setting and to

exit the Setting mode.

r Push [SET](F) to save and set the timer.

• The timer indicator above [TIMER] key lights white.

t Push [EXIT/SET].

• Exits the Set screen.

• If desired, push [TIMER] to turn OFF the Timer func-

tion.

y After the sleep timer period ends, the transceiver

sounds 10 beeps and turns OFF .

• The timer indicator blinks while beeping.



Timer operation

 Preset the Daily timer as described above.

q Push [TIMER] to turn ON the Timer function.

• The timer indicator above this key lights white when the

function is ON.

• Push [TIMER] turns the Timer function ON or OFF.

w Hold down [POWER] for 1 second to turn OFF the

power.

• The timer indicator continuously lights.

e When the set time arrives, the power is automati-

cally turned ON.

r After the power-off period ends, the transceiver

sounds 10 beeps and turns OFF

• The timer indicator blinks while beeping.

The Daily timer action in the Timer set screen must

be set to ON to enable the timer operation, described

in page 14-5 steps e.

[POWER]

[TIMER] TIMER indicator

POWER indicator

[MAIN DIAL]

[TIMER]

(F) Function keys

• Timer screen

• When setting the Sleeping timer

15-1

SET MODE Section 15

 Set mode description …………………………………………………… 15-2

D Set mode operation ………………………………………………… 15-2

D Screen arrangement ………………………………………………… 15-3

 Level set screen ………………………………………………………… 15-4

 ACC set screen …………………………………………………………15-6

 Display set screen …………………………………………………… 15-10

 Time set screen ……………………………………………………… 15-12

 Others set screen …………………………………………………… 15-13

15-2

SET MODE



Set mode description

The Set mode is used to make the infrequently changed

settings.

The transceiver has the Level set mode, ACC set

mode, Display set mode, Time set mode, Others set

mode and SD/USB set mode (See section 10 for de-

tails).

Set mode operation

 The Multi-function screens are OFF:

q Push [SET](F) to select the Set mode menu

screen.

• Holding down [EXIT/SET] for 1 second also selects the

Set mode menu screen.

w Push [LEVEL](F), [ACC](F), [DISP](F), [TIME](F),

[OTHERS](F) or [SD/USB](F) to enter a desired Set

screen.

e For Level, ACC, Display and Others set screens,

push [EXPAND](F) to toggle the screen between

expanded and normal.

r Push [p](F) or [q](F) to select a desired item, and

then rotate [MAIN DIAL] to adjust/select a desired

value or option.

• Pushing [t u](F) may be necessary for some items.

t Push [EXIT/SET] twice.

• Exits the Set screen.

[MAIN DIAL][EXIT/SET](F) Function keys

15-3

SET MODE

F-7

The following screens can be selected from the Start

up screen. Choose the desired screen using the fol-

lowing guide.

Pushing [EXIT/SET] several times returns to the Start

up screen.

• Start up screen

• Display set screen (p. 15-10)

• Time set screen (p. 15-12)

• Others set screen (p. 15-13)

• SD/USB set screen (See section 10 for details)

F-2F-1 F-3 F-4 F-5 F-7

F-3

F-4

F-5

F-2 F-7

• Set mode menu screen

• Level set screen (p. 15-4)

• ACC set screen (p. 15-6)

Screen arrangement

15-4



Level set screen

SET MODE

SSB RX HPF/LPF (Default: – – – – – – –)

Sets the receive audio high-pass ﬁlter and low-pass

ﬁlter cut-off frequency in 100 Hz steps.

Selectable ranges:

• HPF: Between 100 Hz and 2000 Hz

• LPF: Between 500 Hz and 2400 Hz

If this item is set, the [SSB RX Tone (Bass)] and

[SSB RX Tone (Treble)] items cannot be set.

SSB RX Tone (Bass) (Default: 0)

Sets the bass level of the receive audio tone in the

SSB mode from –5 to +5.

SSB RX Tone (Treble) (Default: 0)

Sets the treble level of the receive audio tone in the

SSB mode from –5 to +5.

AM RX HPF/LPF (Default: – – – – – – –)

Sets the receive audio high-pass ﬁlter or low-pass ﬁlter

cut-off frequency in 100 Hz steps.

Selectable ranges:

• HPF: Between 100 Hz and 2000 Hz

• LPF: Between 500 Hz and 2400 Hz

If this item is set, the [AM RX Tone (Bass)] and [AM

RX Tone (Treble)] items cannot be set.

AM RX Tone (Bass) (Default: 0)

Sets the bass level of the receive audio tone in the AM

mode from –5 to +5.

AM RX Tone (Treble) (Default: 0)

Sets the treble level of the receive audio tone in the

AM mode from –5 to +5.

FM RX HPF/LPF (Default: – – – – – – –)

Sets the receive audio high-pass ﬁlter or low-pass ﬁlter

cut-off frequency in 100 Hz steps.

Selectable ranges:

• HPF: Between 100 Hz and 2000 Hz

• LPF: Between 500 Hz and 2400 Hz

If this item is set, the [FM RX Tone (Bass)] and [FM

RX Tone (Treble)] items cannot be set.

FM RX Tone (Bass) (Default: 0)

Sets the bass level of the receive audio tone in the FM

mode from –5 to +5.

FM RX Tone (Treble) (Default: 0)

Sets the treble level of the receive audio tone in the

FM mode from –5 to +5.

CW RX HPF/LPF (Default: – – – – – – –)

Sets the receive audio high-pass ﬁlter or low-pass ﬁlter

cut-off frequency in 100 Hz steps.

Selectable ranges:

• HPF: Between 100 Hz and 2000 Hz

• LPF: Between 500 Hz and 2400 Hz

RTTY RX HPF/LPF (Default: – – – – – – –)

Sets the receive audio high-pass ﬁlter or low-pass ﬁlter

cut-off frequency in 100 Hz steps.

Selectable ranges:

• HPF: Between 100 Hz and 2000 Hz

• LPF: Between 500 Hz and 2400 Hz

PSK RX HPF/LPF (Default: – – – – – – –)

Sets the receive audio high-pass ﬁlter or low-pass ﬁlter

cut-off frequency in 100 Hz steps.

Selectable ranges:

• HPF: Between 100 Hz and 2000 Hz

• LPF: Between 500 Hz and 2400 Hz

SSB TX Tone (Bass) (Default: 0)

Sets the bass level of the transmit audio tone in the

SSB mode from –5 to +5.

SSB TX Tone (Treble) (Default: 0)

Sets the treble level of the transmit audio tone in the

SSB mode from –5 to +5.

AM TX Tone (Bass) (Default: 0)

Sets the bass level of the transmit audio tone in the

AM mode from –5 to +5.

AM TX Tone (Treble) (Default: 0)

Sets the treble level of the transmit audio tone in the

AM mode from –5 to +5.

15-5

 Level set screen (continued)

SET MODE

FM TX Tone (Bass) (Default: 0)

Sets the bass level of the transmit audio tone in the FM

mode from –5 to +5.

FM TX Tone (Treble) (Default: 0)

Sets the treble level of the transmit audio tone in the

FM mode from –5 to +5.

SSB TBW (WIDE) (Default: 100 – 2900)

Sets the transmission pass bandwidth to wide, by

changing the lower and higher cut-off frequencies.

• Lower frequency: 100, 200, 300 and 500 Hz

• Higher frequency:

2500, 2700, 2800 and 2900 Hz

SSB TBW (MID) (Default: 300 – 2700)

Sets the transmission pass bandwidth to mid, by

changing the lower and higher cut-off frequencies.

• Lower frequency: 100, 200, 300 and 500 Hz

• Higher frequency:

2500, 2700, 2800 and 2900 Hz

SSB TBW (NAR) (Default: 500 – 2500)

Sets the transmission pass bandwidth to narrow, by

changing the lower and higher cut-off frequencies.

• Lower frequency: 100, 200, 300 and 500 Hz

• Higher frequency:

2500, 2700, 2800 and 2900 Hz

Speech Level (Default: 50%)

Sets the voice synthesizer audio output level.

• Range: 0 to 100% (in 1% steps)

Side Tone Level (Default: 50%)

Sets the CW side tone output level.

• Range: 0 to 100% (in 1% steps)

Side Tone Level Limit (Default: ON)

Turns the CW side tone level limiting ON or OFF.

APF AF Level (Default: 0 dB)

Sets the audio level for the audio peak ﬁlter in the CW

mode.

• Range: 0 to +6 dB (in 1 dB steps)

Beep Level (Default: 50%)

Sets the beep output level.

• Range: 0 to 100% (in 1% steps)

Beep Level Limit (Default: ON)

Turns the beep output level limiting ON or OFF.

Phones Level (Default: 0)

Sets the audio output level ratio of the headphone

and internal speaker between 0.60 and 1.40, in 0.01

steps.

Phone L/R Mix (Default: OFF)

Selects the headphone audio output.

• OFF: Outputs the Main band’s audio from the left

side, and Sub band’s audio from the right

side.

• ON: Outputs the mixed audio.

15-6

SET MODE

ACC-A AF/SQL Output Select

(Default: MAIN)

Selects the audio and squelch signals to output from

[A ACC1] (Audio: pin 5, Squelch: pin 6) between the

Main and Sub bands.

• MAIN: Main band’s AF and squelch signals are out-

put from [A ACC1].

• SUB: Sub band’s AF and squelch signals are output

from [A ACC1].

ACC-B AF/SQL Output Select (Default: SUB)

Selects the audio and squelch signals to output from

[B ACC1] (Audio: pin 5, Squelch: pin 6) between the

Main and Sub bands.

• MAIN: Main band’s audio and squelch signals are

output from [B ACC1].

• SUB: Sub band’s audio and squelch signals are

output from [B ACC1].

ACC-A Output Select (Default: AF)

Selects the signal output from [A ACC1].

• AF: AF signal is output from [A ACC1].

• IF: A 12 kHz IF signal is output from [A ACC1].

ACC-A AF/IF XFC Output (SPLIT ON)

(Default: SUB)

Selects the signal output from [A ACC1] while [XFC] is

held down in the split operation.

• MAIN: Main band’s AF/IF signal.

• SUB: Sub band’s AF/IF signal.

• When "MAIN" is selected, the Sub band audio is muted.

• When "SUB" is selected, the Main band audio is muted.

• Setting the [ACC-A AF SQL Output Select] item is neces-

sary.

ACC-A AF Output Level (Default: 50%)

Sets the AF output level of [A ACC1].

• Range: 0%–100% (in 1% steps)

• Approximately 200 mV at the 50% (default) setting.

ACC-A AF SQL (Default: OFF(OPEN))

Select the squelch behavior of [A ACC1].

• OFF(OPEN): The squelch is always opened regard-

less of the transceiver's squelch con-

dition.

• ON: The squelch opens and closes, ac-

cording to the transceiver's squelch

condition.

ACC-A AF Beep/Speech... Output

(Default: OFF)

Sets the Beep and Speech audio output condition. ([A

ACC1])

• OFF: Beep and Speech audio are not output from [A

ACC1].

• ON: Beep and Speech audio are output from [A

ACC1].

• Setting the [ACC-A AF SQL Output Select] item is neces-

sary.

• The beep level is limited when the [Beep Level Limit] is

ON.

• The side tone level is limited when the [Side Tone Level

Limit] is ON.

ACC-A IF Output Level (Default: 50%)

Sets the IF output level of [A ACC1].

• Range: 0%–100% (in 1% steps)

ACC-B Output Select (Default: AF)

Selects the signal output from [B ACC1].

• AF: AF signal is output from [B ACC1].

• IF: IF signal is output from [B ACC1].

ACC-B AF/IF XFC Output (SPLIT ON)

(Default: SUB)

Selects the signal output from [B ACC1] while [XFC] is

held down in the split operation.

• MAIN: Main band’s AF/IF signal.

• SUB: Sub band’s AF/IF signal.

• When "MAIN" is selected, the Sub band audio is muted.

• When "SUB" is selected, the Main band audio is muted.

• Setting the [ACC-B AF SQL Output Select] item is neces-

sary.

ACC-B AF Output Level (Default: 50%)

Sets the AF output level of [B ACC1], within 0 to 100%

in 1% steps.

• At 50%, the output level is approximately 200 mV.

ACC-B AF SQL (Default: OFF(OPEN))

Select the squelch behavior of [B ACC1].

• OFF(OPEN): The squelch is always opened regard-

less of the transceiver's squelch con-

dition.

•ON: The squelch opens and closes, ac-

cording to the transceiver's squelch

condition.



ACC set screen

15-7

SET MODE

ACC-B AF Beep/Speech... Output

(Default: OFF)

Select "ON" to output the Beep and Speech audio

from [B ACC1].

• OFF: Beep and Speech audio are not output from [B

ACC1].

• ON: Beep and Speech audio are output from [B

ACC1].

• Setting the [ACC-B AF SQL Output Select] item is neces-

sary.

• The beep level is limited when the [Beep Level Limit] is

ON.

• The side tone level is limited when the [Side Tone Level

Limit] is ON.

ACC-B IF Output Level (Default: 50%)

Sets the IF output level of [B ACC1].

• Range: 0%–100% (in 1% steps)

S/PDIF Output Select (Default: AF)

Selects the signal output from [S/P DIF].

• AF: AF signal is output from [S/P DIF].

• IF: IF signal is output from [S/P DIF].

S/PDIF AF/IF XFC Output (SPLIT ON)

(Default: SUB)

Selects the signal output from [S/P DIF] while [XFC] is

held down in the split operation.

• MAIN: Main band’s AF/IF signal.

• SUB: Sub band’s AF/IF signal.

• When "MAIN" is selected, the Sub band audio is muted.

• When "SUB" is selected, the Main band audio is muted.

S/PDIF AF Output Level (Default: 50%)

Sets the [S/P DIF] output level.

• Range: 0 to 100% (in 1% steps)

S/PDIF AF SQL (Default: OFF(OPEN))

Select the squelch behavior of [S/P DIF].

• OFF(OPEN): The squelch is always opened regard-

less of the transceiver's squelch con-

dition.

• ON: The squelch opens and closes, ac-

cording to the transceiver's squelch

condition.

S/PDIF AF Beep/Speech... Output

(Default: OFF)

Select "ON" to output the Beep and Speech audio

from [S/P DIF].

• OFF: Beep and Speech audio are not output from

[S/P DIF].

• ON: Beep and Speech audio are output from [S/P

DIF].

S/PDIF IF Output Level (Default: 50%)

Sets the IF output level of [S/P DIF].

• Range: 0 to 100% (in 1% steps)

USB Output Select (Default: AF)

Selects the [USB B] output signal.

• AF: AF signal is output from [USB B].

• IF: IF signal is output from [USB B].

USB AF/IF XFC Output (SPLIT ON)

(Default: SUB)

Selects the signal output from [USB B] while [XFC] is

held down in the split operation.

• MAIN: Main band’s AF/IF signal.

• SUB: Sub band’s AF/IF signal.

• When "MAIN" is selected, the Sub band audio is muted.

• When "SUB" is selected, the Main band audio is muted.

USB AF Output Level (Default: 50%)

Sets the [USB B] output level.

• Range: 0 to 100% (in 1% steps)

USB AF SQL (Default: OFF(OPEN))

Select the squelch behavior of [USB B].

• OFF(OPEN): The squelch is always opened regard-

less of the transceiver's squelch con-

dition.

•ON: The squelch opens and closes, ac-

cording to the transceiver's squelch

condition.

USB AF Beep/Speech... Output

(Default: OFF)

Select "ON" to output the Beep and Speech audio

from [USB B].

• OFF: Beep and Speech audio are not output from

[USB B].

• ON: Beep and Speech audio are output from [USB B].

• The beep level is limited when the [Beep Level Limit] is ON.

• The side tone level is limited when the [Side Tone Level

Limit] is ON.

 ACC set screen (continued)

15-8

SET MODE

USB IF Output Level (Default: 50%)

Sets the [USB B] output level.

• Range: 0%–100% (in 1% steps)

LAN Output Select (Default: AF)

Selects the signal output from [LAN].

• AF: AF signal is output from [LAN].

• IF: IF signal is output from [LAN].

LAN AF SQL (Default: ON)

Select the squelch behavior of [LAN].

• OFF(OPEN): The squelch is always opened regard-

less of the transceiver's squelch con-

dition.

• ON: The squelch opens and closes, ac-

cording to the transceiver's squelch

condition.

ACC-A MOD Level (Default: 50%)

Sets the modulation input level of [A ACC1].

• Range: 0%–100% (in 1% steps)

• Approximately 200 mV at the 50% (default) setting.

ACC-B MOD Level (Default: 50%)

Sets the modulation input level of [B ACC1].

• Range: 0%–100% (in 1% steps)

• Approximately 200 mV at the 50% (default) setting.

S/PDIF MOD Level (Default: 50%)

Sets the modulation input level of [S/P DIF].

• Range: 0%–100% (in 1% steps)

USB MOD Level (Default: 50%)

Sets the modulation input level of [USB].

• Range: 0%–100% (in 1% steps)

LAN MOD Level (Default: 50%)

Sets the modulation input level of [LAN].

• Range: 0%–100% (in 1% steps)

DATA OFF MOD (Default: MIC,ACC-A,ACC-B)

Selects the connector(s) to input the modulation signal

when the data mode is OFF.

• MIC: Use the signal from [MIC].

• ACC-A: Use the signal from [A ACC1]

(pin 4).

• ACC-B: Use the signal from [B ACC1]

(pin 4).

• MIC,ACC-A: Use the signal from [MIC] and

[A ACC1] (pin 4).

• MIC,ACC-B: Use the signal from [MIC] and

[B ACC1] (pin 4).

• ACC-A,ACC–B: Use the signal from [A ACC1]

and [B ACC1] (pin 4).

• MIC,ACC-A,ACC–B: Use the signal from [MIC], [A

ACC1] and [B ACC1] (pin 4).

• USB: Use the signal from [USB].

• S/P DIF: Use the signal from [S/P DIF].

• LAN: Use the signal from [LAN].

• MIC,USB : Use the signal from [MIC] and

[USB].

DATA1 MOD (Default: ACC-A)

Selects the connector(s) to input the modulation signal

when the data 1 mode (D1) is ON.

• MIC: Use the signal from [MIC].

• ACC-A: Use the signal from [A ACC1]

(pin 4).

• ACC-B: Use the signal from [B ACC1]

(pin 4).

• MIC,ACC-A: Use the signal from [MIC] and

[A ACC1] (pin 4).

• MIC,ACC-B: Use the signal from [MIC] and

[B ACC1] (pin 4).

• ACC-A,ACC–B:

Use the signal from [A ACC1]

and [B ACC1] (pin 4).

• MIC,ACC-A,ACC–B:

Use the signal from [MIC], [A

ACC1] and [B ACC1] (pin 4).

• USB: Use the signal from [USB].

• S/P DIF:

Use the signal from [S/P DIF].

• LAN: Use the signal from [LAN].

• MIC,USB : Use the signal from [MIC] and

[USB].

DATA2 MOD (Default: ACC-B)

Selects the connector(s) to input the modulation signal

when data 2 mode (D2) is ON.

• MIC: Use the signal from [MIC].

• ACC-A: Use the signal from [A ACC1]

(pin 4).

• ACC-B: Use the signal from [B ACC1]

(pin 4).

• MIC,ACC-A: Use the signal from [MIC] and

[A ACC1] (pin 4).

 ACC set screen (continued)

15-9

SET MODE

• MIC,ACC-B: Use the signal from [MIC] and

[B ACC1] (pin 4).

• ACC-A,ACC–B:

Use the signal from [A ACC1]

and [B ACC1] (pin 4).

• MIC,ACC-A,ACC–B:

Use the signal from [MIC], [A

ACC1] and [B ACC1] (pin 4).

• USB: Use the signal from [USB].

• S/P DIF:

Use the signal from [S/P DIF].

• LAN: Use the signal from [LAN].

• MIC,USB : Use the signal from [MIC] and

[USB].

DATA3 MOD (Default: ACC-A,ACC-B)

Selects the connector(s) to input the modulation signal

when the data 3 mode (D3) is ON.

• MIC: Use the signals from [MIC].

• ACC-A: Use the signal from [A ACC1]

(pin 4).

• ACC-B: Use the signal from [B ACC1]

(pin 4).

• MIC,ACC-A: Use the signal from [MIC] and

[A ACC1] (pin 4).

• MIC,ACC-B: Use the signal from [MIC] and

[B ACC1] (pin 4).

• ACC-A,ACC–B: Use the signal from [A ACC1]

and [B ACC1] (pin 4).

• MIC,ACC-A,ACC–B:

Use the signal from [MIC], [A

ACC1] and [B ACC1] (pin 4).

• USB: Use the signal from [USB].

• S/P DIF:

Use the signal from [S/P DIF].

• LAN: Use the signal from [LAN].

• MIC,USB : Use the signal from [MIC] and

[USB].

ACC-A BAND Voltage Output (Default: TX)

Selects the operating band voltage output from [A

ACC2] (pin 4).

• MAIN: Outputs the band signal displayed on the Main

band.

• SUB: Outputs the band signal displayed on the Sub

band.

• TX: Outputs the band signal, that can be transmit-

ted.

ACC-B BAND Voltage Output (Default: TX)

Selects the operating band voltage output from [B

ACC2] (pin 4).

• MAIN: Outputs the band signal displayed on the Main

band.

• SUB: Outputs the band signal displayed on the Sub

band.

• TX: Outputs the band signal, that can be transmit-

ted.

SEND Relay Type (Default: MOS-FET)

Selects the switching relay type for [RELAY].

Be careful to select the suitable relay type, especially

when connecting a non-Icom linear ampliﬁer.

• Reed: Use a mechanical relay.

(16 V DC/0.5 A maximum)

• MOS-FET: Use a semiconductor relay.

(200 mA/250 V maximum)

External Meter Output (M) (Default: Auto)

Selects the parameter (Main readout) to output to an

external meter.

• Auto: Outputs the receiving signal strength lev-

el during receive, and outputs the select-

ed level (selected with [METER]), during

transmit.

• S(MAIN): Outputs the receiving signal strength lev-

el during receive.

• Po: Outputs the transmitting power level dur-

ing transmit.

• SWR: Outputs the VSWR level during transmit.

• ALC: Outputs the ALC level during transmit.

• COMP: Outputs the compression level during

transmit.

• V

d: Outputs the drain voltage of the ﬁnal am-

pliﬁer MOS-FETs.

• Id: Outputs the drain current of the ﬁnal am-

pliﬁer MOS-FETs.

External Meter Output (S) (Default: Auto)

Selects the parameter (Sub readout) to output an ex-

ternal meter.

• Auto: Outputs the receiving signal strength lev-

el during receive, and outputs the select-

ed level (selected with [METER]), during

transmit.

• S(SUB): Outputs the receiving signal strength lev-

el during receive.

• Po: Outputs the transmitting power level dur-

ing transmit.

• SWR: Outputs the VSWR level during transmit.

• ALC: Outputs the ALC level during transmit.

• COMP: Outputs the compression level during

transmit.

• V

d: Outputs the drain voltage of the ﬁnal am-

pliﬁer MOS-FETs.

• Id: Outputs the drain current of the ﬁnal am-

pliﬁer MOS-FETs.

 ACC set screen (continued)

15-10

SET MODE

LCD Unit Bright (Default: 50%)

Adjusts the LCD brightness.

• Range: 0 (dark) to 100% (bright) (in 1% steps)

Backlight (Switches) (Default: 80)

Adjusts the key backlight brightness.

• Range: 1 (dark) to 100 (bright) (in 1 steps)

Display Type

(Default for IC-7850: 50th Anniversary)

(Default for IC-7851: A)

Sets the display type to A or B.

• The IC-7850 can be selected the 50th Anniversary

type.

Display Font (Default: Basic (1))

Selects the font for the frequency readout.

• Options: Basic (1), Basic (2), Basic (3), Italic (1), Italic

(2), Italic (3), Round (1), Round (2), Round (3)

Meter Response (Default: MID)

Sets the meter needle response speed to SLOW, MID

or FAST.

Meter Type (Normal Screen)

(Default: Standard)

Sets the S/RF meter type for the normal display to

Standard, Edgewise or Bar.

Meter Type (Expand Screen) (Default: Bar)

Sets the S/RF meter type for the expanded display to

Standard, Edgewise or Bar.

Meter Peak Hold (Bar) (Default: ON)

Turns the meter peak hold function ON or OFF.

Memory Name (Default: ON)

Turns the memory name indication in the memory

mode ON or OFF.

• ON: The programmed memory name is displayed



Display set screen

External Meter Level (M) (Default: 50%)

Sets the output level to the external meter (Main band).

• Range: 0%–100% (in 1% steps)

• Approximately 1.2 V (full-scale) at the 50% (default) setting.

(impedance: 4.7 kΩ)

External Meter Level (S) (Default: 50%)

Sets the output level to the external meter (Sub

band).

• Range: 0%–100% (in 1% steps)

• Approximately 1.2 V (full-scale) at the 50% (default) setting.

(impedance: 4.7 kΩ)

REF IN/OUT (Default: OFF)

Selects the transceiver’s reference frequency signal source.

• IN: Uses an external reference signal.

Turn OFF the power, and then turn ON to make

the setting effective.

NOTE: If the applied reference signal is off

frequency, or no signal is applied, the trans-

ceiver will not properly operate. In that case,

select “OFF” or “OUT,” and then reboot the

transceiver.

• OFF: Does not input/output the reference signal.

• OUT: Outputs the internal reference signal to the

connected equipment(s).

REF Adjust

Adjusts the internal reference frequency.

• Range: 0%–100% (in 1% steps)

NOTE: The default setting differs slightly, depending

on the transceiver.

 ACC set screen (continued)

15-11

SET MODE

above the frequency display.

• OFF: Memory name is not displayed, even if en-

tered.

APF-Width Popup (APF OFFON)

(Default: ON)

Turns the APF ﬁlter width display ON or OFF.

MN-Q Popup (MN OFFON) (Default: ON)

Turns the notch ﬁlter bandwidth display ON or OFF.

Screen Saver Function (Default: 60 min)

Turns the screen saver function ON (Timer: 15, 30 or

60 minutes) or OFF.

Screen Saver Type (Default: Bounce)

Sets the screen saver type to Bounce, Rotation, Twist

or Sleep.

External Display (Default: OFF)

Select “ON” when using an external display.

External Display Resolution

(Default: 800x480)

Select the screen resolution of the external display.

• Options: 800×480, 800×600

External Display Frame Rate Shift

(Default: OFF)

Sets the frame rate of the external display.

• Do not change this setting, unless it is necessary.

External Display Sync Pulse (Default: H)

Sets the suitable sync pulse level for an external dis-

play to H (high) or L (low).

 Display set screen (continued)

Opening Message (Default: ON)

Turns the opening message ON or OFF.

My Call

Sets an introductory text displayed as the opening

message, up to 10 characters. (example: your call

sign)

• Usable characters:

Characters (a–z, A–Z, 0–9) and symbols (+ – , @)

• Push [EDIT](F) to enter the edit mode.

• Push [ABC] or [abc] to toggle the character type between

upper case and lower case letters.

• Push [123] or [Symbol] to toggle the character type be-

tween numbers and symbols.

• Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select a character.

• Push [t](F) to move the cursor to the left, push [u](F) to

move the cursor right.

• Push [DEL](F) to delete the selected character.

• Push [EXIT/SET] to cancel and exit the edit mode.

• Push [SET](F) to save.

15-12

SET MODE

Date (Default: 2000)

Set the date (Year/Month/Day).

(The day of the week is automatically set.)

• Range: Year 2000–2099,

Month/Day 1-1 to 12-31

Time (Now) (Default: 0:00)

Set the current time.

(The time is displayed in the 24 hours format.)

• Sets the current time.

NTP Function (Default: ON)

Automatically obtains the current time from the NTP

server.

• OFF: Turn OFF the function.

• ON: Use the function.

(The internet access is neces-

sary.)

NTP Server Address (Default: time.nist.gov)

Sets the NTP server address.

Do not change this setting, unless it is necessary.

UTC Offset (Default: ±0:00)

Sets the UTC offset time.

• Range: –14:00 to +14:00 (in ﬁve minute steps)

CLOCK 2 Function (Default: ON)

Turns Clock 2 ON or OFF.

• OFF: Disable Clock 2.

• ON: Enable Clock 2.

CLOCK 2 UTC Offset (Default: ±0:00)

Sets the UTC offset time for Clock 2.

• Range: –14:00 to ±0.00 to +14:00

• To set the UTC time, select "±0:00."

CLOCK 2 Name (Default: UTC)

Assign the name to the CLOCK 2.

• Enter name of up to three characters.



Time set screen

15-13

SET MODE

Calibration Marker (Default: OFF)

Turns the reference frequency calibration marker ON

or OFF.

• OFF: Turns OFF the marker.

• ON: Turns ON the marker.

Beep (Conﬁrmation) (Default: ON)

Turns the conﬁrmation beep ON or OFF.

• OFF: Turns OFF the beep.

• ON: Sounds the beep when a key is pushed.

If the Beep Level is set to "0%" on the Level

set screen, no beep sounds.

Beep (Band Edge) (Default: ON (Default))

Turns the band edge beep ON or OFF.

If the Beep Level is set to "0%" on the Level set

screen, no beep sounds.

• OFF:

Turn OFF the band edge beep.

• ON(Default):

Beep sounds on the band edge.

• ON(User):

The beep, which is selected in the Band edge

screen, sounds. (p. 4-15, P4-16)

• ON(User) & TX Limit:

The beep, which is selected in the Band edge

screen, sounds. The transmitting frequency is lim-

ited in the range between upper and lower band

edge. (p. 4-15, p. 4-16)

Beep Sound (MAIN) (Default: 1000Hz)

Sets the key-touch beep frequency on the Main band.

• Range: 500 Hz–2000 Hz (in 10 Hz steps)

If the Beep Level is set to "0%" on the Level set

screen no beep sounds.

Beep Sound (SUB) (Default: 1000Hz)

Sets the key-touch beep frequency on the Sub band.

• Range: 500Hz–2000Hz (in 10 Hz steps)

If the Beep Level is set to "0%" on the Level set

screen no beep sounds.



Others set screen

TX Power Limit (Default: ON)

Turns the TX power limit function ON or OFF.

• OFF: Turn OFF the function.

• ON: Limits the TX power for each mode and

band.

The TX power limit screen is displayed when

[LIMIT] is pushed. Adjust the power limit to

between <5 W and 200 W for each selected

band.

TX Delay (HF) (Default: OFF)

Sets the TX delay time on the HF bands.

• Options:

OFF, 10ms, 15ms, 20ms, 25ms, 30ms

• If the connected equipment's rise time is slower

than that of the transceiver, a reﬂected wave is

produced and it may damage the transceiver. To

prevent this, set the appropriate delay time so that

no reﬂected wave is produced.

• Select "OFF" for no rise speed.

TX Delay (50M) (Default: OFF)

Sets the TX delay time on the 50 MHz band.

• Options: OFF, 10ms, 15ms, 20ms, 25ms, 30ms

• If the connected equipment's rise time is slower

than that of the transceiver, a reﬂected wave is

produced and it may damage the transceiver. To

prevent this, set the appropriate delay time so that

no reﬂected wave is produced.

• Select "OFF" for no rise speed.

Time-Out Timer (CI-V) (Default: OFF)

Sets the Time-out Timer for CI-V operation.

This setting is valid only transmitting initiated by a CI-V

command and pushing [TRANSMIT].

• Options: OFF, 3, 5, 10, 20 or 30 minutes

Select "OFF" for no time limit.

Quick Dualwatch (Default: ON)

Turns the Quick Dualwatch function ON or OFF.

• OFF: Turn OFF the function.

• ON: Turn ON the function.

Quick SPLIT (Default: ON)

Turns the Quick Split function ON or OFF.

• OFF: Turn OFF the function.

• ON: Turn ON the function.

15-14

SET MODE

 Others set screen (continued)

FM SPLIT Offset (HF) (Default: –0.100MHz)

Sets the offset frequency for the Split function in the

FM mode on the HF bands.

• Range: –9.999MHz to +9.999MHz (in 1 kHz steps)

FM SPLIT Offset (50MHz) (Default: –0.500MHz)

Sets the offset frequency for the Split function in the

FM mode on the 50 MHz band.

• Range: –9.999MHz to +9.999MHz (in 1 kHz steps)

SPLIT LOCK (Default: OFF)

Turns the Split Lock function ON or OFF.

• OFF: Turn OFF the function.

• ON: Turn ON the function.

Tuner (Auto Start) (Default: OFF)

Turns the Automatic Tuning Start function ON or

OFF.

( The automatic tuning function doesn't function on the

50 MHz band)

• OFF: Starts to tune only when [TUNER] is ON.

• ON: Automatically starts to tune when the SWR is

higher than approximately 1.5, even if [TUN-

ER] is OFF. (Only on the HF bands)

Tuner (PTT Start) (Default: OFF)

Turns the PTT Start Tuning function ON or OFF.

• OFF: Starts to tune only when [TUNER] is ON

• ON: When [TUNER] is ON and the operating fre-

quency is shifted more than 1%, starts to tune

when you push PTT.

Tuner Preset Memory Clear

Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the antenna, and then

push [CLR](F) to clear the tuning preset.

• Options: ANT1, ANT2, ANT3, ANT4, ALL

Select "ALL" to clear the ALL presets.

Transverter Function (Default: Auto)

Selects the transverter operating mode.

• ON: Turn ON the function.

• Auto: The transceiver switches to the transverter op-

erating mode when 2 V to 13.8 V DC is applied

to pin 6 of [A/B ACC2].

Transverter Offset (Default: 16.000MHz)

Sets the offset frequency for transverter operation.

• Range: 0.000 MHz–99.999 MHz (in 1 kHz steps)

RTTY Mark Frequency (Default: 2125)

Selects the RTTY mark frequency.

• Options: 1275, 1615, 2125 (Hz)

When the internal RTTY decoder is used, 2125 Hz

is automatically selected.

RTTY Shift Width (Default: 170)

Selects the RTTY shift width.

• Options: 170, 200, 425 (Hz)

When the internal RTTY decoder is used, 170 Hz is

automatically selected.

RTTY Keying Polarity (Default: Normal)

Selects the RTTY keying polarity.

• Normal: Key open/close = Mark/Space

• Reverse: Key open/close = Space/Mark

PSK Tone Frequency (Default: 1500)

Selects the PSK tone frequency for PSK reception.

• Options: 1000, 1500, 2000 (Hz)

SPEECH Language (Default: English)

Selects the speech language.

• English: English.

• Japanese: Japanese.

SPEECH Speed (Default: HIGH)

Selects the speech speed.

• LOW: Slow.

• HIGH: Fast.

SPEECH S-Level (Default: ON)

Turns the S-meter level announcement ON or OFF.

• OFF: The S-meter level is not announced.

• ON: The S-meter level and frequency is an-

nounced.

15-15

SET MODE

 Others set screen (continued)

SPEECH [MODE] Switch (Default: OFF)

Turns the operating mode announcement ON or OFF.

• OFF: The operating mode is announced.

• ON: The operating mode is announcer when the

mode is changed.

Memo Pad Quantity (Default: 5)

Sets the number of memo pad channels.

• 5: 5 channels.

• 10: 10 channels.

MAIN DIAL Operation (Default: MAIN/SUB)

Selects [MAIN DIAL] operating mode.

• MAIN: The only Main band frequency can be

set by rotating [MAIN DIAL].

• MAIN/SUB: The Sub band frequency can be also

set by rotating [MAIN DIAL] when the

Sub band is selected.

MAIN DIAL Auto TS (Default: HIGH)

Sets the Automatic Tuning Step function for [MAIN

DIAL].

When rapidly rotating [MAIN DIAL], the tuning step

is automatically changed according to the rotation

speed.

• OFF: Turn OFF the function.

• LOW: Tuning step is automatically changed in the

low step.

• HIGH: Tuning step is automatically changed in the

high step.

SUB DIAL Auto TS (Default: HIGH)

Sets the Automatic Tuning Step function for [SUB

DIAL].

When rapidly rotating [SUB DIAL], the tuning step

is automatically changed according to the rotation

speed.

• OFF: Turn OFF the function.

• LOW: Tuning step is automatically changed in the

low step.

• HIGH: Tuning step is automatically changed in the

high step.

MAIN/SUB Tracking [MAIN] SW

(Default: OFF)

Assigns the Main/Sub band tracking function to the

[MAIN] key.

• OFF: The [MAIN] key does not act as the Tracking

function key.

• ON: Hold down the [MAIN] key for 1 second to turn

the function ON or OFF.

• Hold down the [SUB] key for 1 second also turns

the function OFF.

• In the tracking mode, rotate [MAIN DIAL] changes

the MAIN and SUB bands’ frequencies.

Rotate [SUB DIAL] to change only the SUB band

frequency.

MIC Up/Down Speed (Default: HIGH)

Sets the response speed of [UP]/[DN] on the optional

microphone.

• LOW: Slow.

• HIGH: Fast.

Quick RIT/∂TX Clear (Default: OFF)

Selects the operation of [CLEAR] for the RIT/∂TX

function.

• OFF: Hold down [CLEAR] for 1 second to clear.

• ON: Push [CLEAR] to clear.

[NOTCH] Switch (SSB) (Default: Auto/Manual)

Selects the notch function for the SSB mode.

• Auto: Auto notch.

• Manual: Manual notch.

• Auto/Manual: Auto notch and manual notch can be

toggled.

[NOTCH] Switch (AM) (Default: Auto/Manual)

Selects the notch function for the AM mode.

• Auto: Auto notch.

• Manual: Manual notch.

• Auto/Manual: Auto notch and manual notch can be

toggled.

DIGI-SEL VR Operation (Default: DIGI-SEL)

Selects the function assigned to [DIGI-SEL].

• DIGI-SEL: Used for the digital selector adjustment.

• APF: Used for the audio peak ﬁlter adjust-

ment.

15-16

SET MODE

 Others set screen (continued)

FILTER Screen MAIN/SUB Select

(Default: Auto (by FILTER,PBT Operation))

Selects the ﬁlter setting display.

• Fix: (always)

The selected band's ﬁlter setting is always dis-

played.

• AUTO (By FILTER,PBT Operation): (relative)

The displayed ﬁlter setting is automatically changed

when [FILTER]/[PBT] is pushed/rotated.

SSB/CW Synchronous Tuning (Default: OFF)

Turns the Displayed Frequency Shift function ON or

OFF.

This function automatically shifts the frequency to

match the CW pitch when the operating mode is tog-

gled between SSB and CW.

• OFF: Stays on the frequency even when the operat-

ing mode is changed between SSB and CW.

• ON: Shifts the frequency when the operating mode

is toggled between SSB and CW, to keep re-

ceiving the signal.

CW Normal Side (Default: LSB)

Selects the carrier point in the CW normal mode.

• LSB: The LSB side.

• USB: The USB side.

APF Type (Default: SOFT)

Selects the audio ﬁlter type for APF.

• SOFT: Soft sound.

The ﬁlter bandwidth is automatically

changed according to the CW pitch, to

make it easier to distinguish between

noise and a signal.

• SHARP: Sharp sound.

The ﬁlter bandwidth is ﬁxed regardless of

the CW pitch, to make it easier to reject

interfering signals.

MIC AF Out (Default: MAIN+SUB)

Selects the band(s) audio to output from [MIC].

• MAIN+SUB: Outputs both Main and Sub bands au-

dio.

• SUB: Outputs only Sub band audio.

MIC Input DC Bias (Default: ON)

Outputs the 8 V bias voltage (approximately) from the

microphone connector (pin 1 of [MIC]).

• OFF: When using a microphone that doesn't

need bias voltage (example: dynamic mi-

crophones).

• ON: When using an Icom's microphone or

microphone that needs a bias voltage.

External Keypad (VOICE) OFF (Default: OFF)

Enables voice memory transmission using an external

keypad.

• OFF: Turn OFF the function.

• ON: Pushing one of the external keypad switches,

transmits the programmed voice memory (T1–

T8). (SSB/AM/FM mode)

Holding down the switch for 1 second to re-

peatedly transmit.

External Keypad (KEYER) (Default: OFF)

Enables keyer memory transmission using an external

keypad.

• OFF: Turn OFF the function.

• ON: Pushing one of the external keypad switches,

transmits the programmed keyer memory

(M1–M8). (CW mode)

Holding down the switch for 1 second to re-

peatedly transmit.

External Keypad (RTTY) (Default: OFF)

Enables the RTTY memory transmission using an ex-

ternal keypad.

• OFF: Turn OFF the function.

• ON: Pushing one of the external keypad switches,

transmits the programmed RTTY memory

(RT1–RT8). (When the RTTY decode screen

is opened in the RTTY mode)

When the external keypad is connected to [MIC],

only RTTY memory channels RT1–RT4 can be

transmitted using the external keypad.

External Keypad (PSK) (Default: OFF)

Enables the PSK memory transmission using an ex-

ternal keypad.

• OFF: Turn OFF the function.

• ON: Pushing one of the external keypad switch-

es, transmits the programmed PSK memory

(PT1–PT8). (When the PSK decode screen is

opened in the PSK mode)

When the external keypad is connected to [MIC],

only PSK memory channels PT1–PT4 can be trans-

mitted using the external keypad.

15-17

SET MODE

 Others set screen (continued)

Keyboard [F1]–[F8] (VOICE) (Default: OFF)

Enables the voice memory transmission using a key-

board connected to [USB A].

• OFF: Turn OFF the function.

• ON: Pushing one of [F1] to [F8] on the keyboard,

transmits the programmed voice memory (T1–

T8).

Holding down [SHIFT] and pushing one of [F1]

to [F8] on the keyboard repeatedly transmits

memory.

Keyboard [F1]–[F8] (KEYER) (Default: OFF)

Enables keyer memory transmission using a keyboard

connected to [USB A].

• OFF: Turn OFF the function.

• ON: Pushing one of [F1] to [F8] on the keyboard,

transmits the programmed keyer memory.

Holding down [SHIFT] and pushing one of [F1]

to [F8] on the keyboard repeatedly transmits

memory.

Screen Capture [POWER] SW (Default: OFF)

Assigns the Screen capture function to the [POWER]

key.

• OFF: The [POWER] key does not act as the Screen

capture key.

• ON: Push the [POWER] key to capture the screen.

The captured screen is saved onto the select-

ed storage media in the selected data format.

Screen Capture Keyboard [Print Screen]

(Default: OFF)

Assigns the Screen capture function to the [Print

Screen] key on the USB keyboard.

• OFF: The [Print Screen] key does not act as the

Screen capture key.

• ON: Push the [Print Screen] key to capture the

screen. The captured screen is saved onto the

selected storage media in the selected data

format.

Screen Capture Storage Media

(Default: SD CARD)

Select the storage media for the Screen capture func-

tion.

• Options: SD CARD or USB ﬂash drive.

Screen Capture Data Format (Default: PNG)

Select the data format for the Screen capture func-

tion.

• Options: PNG or BMP

When the Screen capture function is assigned to ei-

ther the [POWER] key or [Print Screen] on the USB

keyboard:

q Set a desired screen.

w Push [POWER] or [Print screen] to capture the

screen.

• The captured screen is saved onto the selected stor-

age media in the selected data format.

You can display the captured screen on the transceiver dis-

play. See page 10-10 for details.

Shutdown Function (Default: Shutdown)

Selects the shutdown option.

• Shutdown: Shuts down right after [POW-

ER] has been held down for

1 second.

• Standby/Shutdown: Enters the remote standby

mode.

If the remote standby mode is

selected, the transceiver can

be remotely turned ON later us-

ing the optional RS-BA1.

 When "Standby/Shutdown" is selected

q Hold down [POWER] for approximately for 1 second

to turn OFF the power.

• The shutdown option dialogue appears.

w Select the shutdown option using [p](F) or [q](F).

• If you want to turn OFF the power immediately, select

"Shutdown."

• If you want to remotely turn ON the power later, select

"Standby (for Remote Control)."

* The power indicator, which is located on the right

above [POWER], slowly blinks Orange.

The cooling fan still rotates.

e Push [POWER].

CI-V Baud Rate (Default: Auto)

Selects the CI-V data transfer rate.

• Options: 4800, 9600, 19200 (bps) and Auto

When “Auto” is selected, the baud rate is automati-

cally set, according to the data rate of the connect-

ed controller.

15-18

SET MODE

 Others set screen (continued)

CI-V Address (Default: 8Eh)

Selects the CI-V address.

• Range: 02h–8Eh–DFh

"8Eh" is the default address of IC-7850/IC-7851.

CI-V Transceive (Default: ON)

Turns the Transceive function ON or OFF.

• OFF: Turn the function OFF.

• ON: Turn the function ON.

CI-V USB/LANREMOTE Transceive Address

(Default: 00h)

Sets the address used to remotely control the trans-

ceiver/receiver, through [USB B] or [LAN]. The control

signal is output from [REMOTE].

• Range: 00h–DFh

When multiple equipment are connected:

The default transceive address is "00h."

To control dedicated equipment (example IC-PW1)

when several equipment are connected, match the

same CI-V address.

CI-V Output (for ANT) (Default: OFF)

Enables to output the antenna controller status (fre-

quency and so on) from [REMOTE].

• OFF: Turns OFF the function.

• ON: Outputs the status.

Address "01h" is reserved. The usable addresses

are limited to 02h–DFh.

CI-V USB Port (Default: Link to [REMOTE])

Selects the internal connection type of [USB B] and

[REMOTE].

• Link to [REMOTE]:

The CI-V port of the USB port and [REMOTE] are

internally connected.

• Unlink from [REMOTE]:

The CI-V port of USB port and [REMOTE] are not

internally connected. Each port functions indepen-

dently. (duplex communication can be made.)

CI-V USB Baud Rate (Default: Auto)

Selects the CI-V data transfer rate when remotely con-

trolling the transceiver, through the CI-V port of the

[USB B] port.

• Options:

4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200

(bps),

Auto

When “Auto” is selected, the baud rate is automati-

cally set according to the data rate of connected

controller.

This setting is valid only when "REMOTE" is select-

ed in the [CI-V USB Port] item.

CI-V USB Echo Back (Default: OFF)

Turns the Data Echo Back function ON or OFF, when

remotely controlling the transceiver through the CI-V

port of the [USB B] port.

• OFF: Turn OFF the function.

• ON: Turn ON the function.

This setting is valid when "REMOTE" is selected in

the [CI-V USB Port] item.

Decode Baud Rate (Default: 9600)

Selects the data transfer rate (Baud rate) of decoded

RTTY/PSK signal.

• Options: 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 (bps)

USB SEND (Default: OFF)

You can control transmit and receive from the PC

through the USB port.

Select the control port to be used for communication

between the transceiver and PC, according to the op-

erating condition.

• OFF: Turn OFF the function.

• USB1 DTR: Use the DTR terminal on the CI-V

(PC) side.

• USB1 RTS: Use the RTS terminal on the CI-V

(PC) side.

• USB2 DTR:

Use the DTR terminal on the DECODE

(transceiver) side.

• USB2 RTS: Use the RTS terminal on the DECODE

(transceiver) side.

You cannot select the terminal which is already se-

lected in the [USB Keying (CW)] item or [USB Key-

ing (RTTY)].

15-19

SET MODE

 Others set screen (continued)

USB Keying (CW) (Default: OFF)

You can control to transmit, receive and keying from

the PC, through the USB port.

Select the control port to be used for communication

between the transceiver and PC, according to the op-

erating condition.

• OFF: Turn OFF the function.

• USB1 DTR: Use the DTR terminal on the CI-V

(PC) side.

• USB1 RTS: Use the RTS terminal on the CI-V

(PC) side.

• USB2 DTR:

Use the DTR terminal on the DECODE

(transceiver) side.

• USB2 RTS: Use the RTS terminal on the DECODE

(transceiver) side.

You cannot select the terminal which is already se-

lected in the [USB SEND] item or [USB Keying

(RTTY)].

USB Keying (RTTY) (Default: OFF)

You can control to transmit, receive and RTTY (FSK)

from the PC, through the USB port.

Select the control port to be used for communication

between the transceiver and PC, according to the op-

erating condition.

• OFF: Turn OFF the function.

• USB1 DTR: Use the DTR terminal on the CI-V

side.

• USB1 RTS: Use the RTS terminal on the CI-V

side.

• USB2 DTR: Use the DTR terminal on the DECODE

side.

• USB2 RTS: Use the RTS terminal on the DECODE

side.

You cannot select the terminal which is already se-

lected in the [USB SEND] item or [USB Keying

(CW)].

Keyboard Type (Default: Japanese)

Selects the connected keyboard type.

• Options: English, Japanese, United Kingdom, French,

French(Canadian), German, Portuguese,

Portuguese (Brazilian), Spanish, Spanish

(Latin American), Italian

Keyboard Repeat Delay (Default: 250ms)

Sets the repeat delay time of the keyboard.

• Options: 100 ms–1000 ms (in 50 ms steps)

Keyboard Repeat Rate (Default: 10.9cps)

Sets the repeat rate of the keyboard.

• Range: 2.0cps–30.0cps

Mouse Pointer Speed (Default: MID)

Selects the mouse pointer speed.

• Options: SLOW, MID, FAST

Mouse Pointer Acceleration (Default: ON)

Turns the mouse pointer acceleration ON or OFF.

• OFF: Turn OFF the function.

• ON: Turn ON the function.

USB DIAL Select (Default: SUB Only)

Selects the Sub band or Main and Sub band to oper-

ate on the RC-28’s main dial.

USB DIAL Auto TS (Default: High)

Selects the Automatic Tuning Step for the RC-28’s

main dial.

When rapidly rotating the RC-28’s main dial, the tuning

step is automatically changed according to the rotation

speed.

USB DIAL [TRANSMIT] Switch

(Default: Push to toggle)

Selects whether to toggle between transmit and re-

ceive by pushing, or to transmit only while holding the

[TRANSMIT] key on the RC-28.

DHCP (Valid after Reboot) (Default: ON)

Turns the DHCP function ON or OFF.

• OFF: Uses the static IP address.

• ON: Uses the DHCP function.

If a DHCP server is in your network envi-

ronment, the IP address is automatically

obtained.

This setting takes effect after reboot.

IP Address (Valid after Reboot)

(Default: 192.168. 0. 10)

Sets the static IP address.

Push [t u](F) to select the item, and then turn

[MAIN DIAL] to set the address.

This setting is valid when "OFF" is selected the

[DHCP (Valid after Reboot)] item.

This setting takes effect after reboot.

15-20

SET MODE

Subnet Mask (Valid after Reboot)

(Default: 255.255.255.0 (24bit))

Sets the subnet mask to connect to your PC or LAN

(Local Area Network), through the Ethernet.

Push [t u](F) to select the item, and then turn

[MAIN DIAL] to set the address.

This setting is valid when "OFF" is selected the

[DHCP (Valid after Reboot)] item.

This setting takes effect after reboot.

Default Gateway (Valid after Reboot)

(Default: . . . )

When you remotely control the transceiver using the

optional RS-BA1, a default gateway setting is required.

Push [t u](F) to select the item, and then turn

[MAIN DIAL] to set the address.

This setting is valid when "OFF" is selected in the

[DHCP (Valid after Reboot)] item.

This setting takes effect after reboot.

Primary DNS Server (Valid after Reboot)

(Default: . . . )

If there are two DNS server addresses, enter the pri-

mary DNS server address.

Push [t u](F) to select the item, and then turn

[MAIN DIAL] to set the address.

This setting is valid when "OFF" is selected the

[DHCP (Valid after Reboot)] item.

This setting takes effect after reboot.

2nd DNS Server (Valid after Reboot)

(Default: . . . )

If there are two DNS server addresses, enter the sec-

ondary DNS server address.

Push [t u](F) to select the item, and then turn

[MAIN DIAL] to set the address.

This setting is valid when "OFF" is selected the

[DHCP (Valid after Reboot)] item.

This setting takes effect after reboot.

 Others set screen (continued)

Network Name

When you remotely control the transceiver using the

optional RS-BA1, enter a network name of up to 15

characters.

Usable characters:

Characters (a–z, A–Z, 0–9) and symbols (! # $ %& " `

^ + – . , ; = ( ) [ ] { } _ ~ @)

• Push [EDIT](F) to enter the edit mode.

• Push [ABC] or [abc] to toggle the character type be-

tween upper case and lower case letters.

• Push [123] or [Symbol] to toggle the character type

between numbers and symbols.

• Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select a character.

• Push [t](F) to move the cursor to the left, push [u]

(F) to move the cursor right.

• Push [DEL](F) to delete the selected character.

• Push [EXIT/SET] to cancel and exit the edit mode.

• Push [SET](F) to save.

Network Control (Valid after Reboot)

(Default: OFF)

When you remotely control the transceiver using the

optional RS-BA1, select "ON."

• OFF: Turn OFF the function.

• ON: Turn ON the function.

Control Port (UDP) (Valid after Reboot)

(Default: 50001)

When you remotely control the transceiver using the

optional RS-BA1 software, set a port number for the

control signal transfers between the transceiver and

the remote station.

• Set the same port number to the remote station.

• This setting takes effect after reboot.

Serial Port (UDP) (Valid after Reboot)

(Default: 50002)

When you remotely control the transceiver using the

optional RS-BA1 software, set a port number for the

serial data transfers between the transceiver and the

remote station.

• Set the same port number to the remote station.

• This setting takes effect after reboot.

15-21

SET MODE

Audio Port (UDP) (Valid after Reboot)

(Default: 50003)

When you remotely control the transceiver using the

optional RS-BA1 software, set a port number for the

audio signal transfers between the transceiver and the

remote station.

• Set the same port number to the remote station.

• This setting takes effect after reboot.

Internet Access Line (Valid after Reboot)

(Default: FTTH)

When you remotely control the transceiver using the

optional RS-BA1 software, set the internet access line

setting between the transceiver and the remote sta-

tion.

• Select FTTH (Fiber To The Home) or ADSL/CATV.

• This setting takes effect after reboot.

Network User1/2/3 ID

When you remotely control the transceiver using the

optional RS-BA1, enter a user name of up to 16 char-

acters.

Usable characters:

Characters (a–z, A–Z, 0–9) and symbols (! # $ %& ? "

' ` ^ + –  / . , : ; = < > ( ) [ ] { } | _ ~@)

• Push [EDIT](F) to enter the edit mode.

• Push [ABC] or [abc] to toggle the character type be-

tween upper case and lower case letters.

• Push [123] or [Symbol] to toggle the character type

between numbers and symbols.

• Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select a character.

• Push [t](F) to move the cursor to the left, push [u]

(F) to move the cursor right.

• Push [DEL](F) to delete the selected character.

• Push [EXIT/SET] to cancel and exit the edit mode.

• Push [SET](F) to save.

Network User1/2/3 Password

Enter a password for each user.

Usable characters:

Characters (a–z, A–Z, 0–9) and symbols (! # $ %& ? "

' ` ^ + –  / . , : ; = < > ( ) [ ] { } | _ ~@)

• Push [EDIT](F) to enter the edit mode.

• Push [ABC] or [abc] to toggle the character type be-

tween upper case and lower case letters.

• Push [123] or [Symbol] to toggle the character type

between numbers and symbols.

• Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select a character.

• Push [t](F) to move the cursor to the left, push [u]

(F) to move the cursor right.

• Push [DEL](F) to delete the selected character.

• Push [EXIT/SET] to cancel and exit the edit mode.

• Push [SET](F) to save.

The entered password is masked by "

*."

Network User1/2/3 Administrator

(Default: NO)

Sets the user as the administrator.

Only the authorized user can disconnect the communi-

cation between the transceiver and the remote station.

• NO: Not authorized.

• YES: Authorized.

Network Radio Name

(Default for IC-7850: IC-7850)

(Default for IC-7851: IC-7851)

When you remotely control the transceiver using the

optional RS-BA1 software, enter a name of up to 15

characters.

Usable characters:

Characters (a–z, A–Z, 0–9) and symbols (! # $ %& ? "

' ` ^ + –  / . , : ; = < > ( ) [ ] { } | _ ~@)

• Push [EDIT](F) to enter the edit mode.

• Push [ABC] or [abc] to toggle the character type be-

tween upper case and lower case letters.

• Push [123] or [Symbol] to toggle the character type

between numbers and symbols.

• Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select a character.

• Push [t](F) to move the cursor to the left, push [u]

(F) to move the cursor right.

• Push [DEL](F) to delete the selected character.

• Push [EXIT/SET] to cancel and exit the edit mode.

• Push [SET](F) to save.

 Others set screen (continued)

16-1

MAINTENANCE Section 16

 Adjusting the Main dial brake ………………………………………… 16-2

 Using the Voice synthesizer operation ……………………………… 16-2

 SWR reading …………………………………………………………… 16-3

 Calibration the Frequency (approximate) ……………………………16-4

 Setting My call sign ……………………………………………………16-5

 Cleaning ………………………………………………………………… 16-7

 Resetting the CPU ……………………………………………………… 16-7

D Resetting ……………………………………………………………… 16-7

 About protection indications …………………………………………… 16-8

 Opening the transceiver’s case ………………………………………16-8

 Fuse replacement ……………………………………………………… 16-9

 Clock backup battery replacement ……………………………………16-9

 Troubleshooting ……………………………………………………… 16-10

D Transceiver power ………………………………………………… 16-10

D Transmit and receive ……………………………………………… 16-10

D Scanning …………………………………………………………… 16-11

D Display ……………………………………………………………… 16-11

16-2

MAINTENANCE

 Adjusting the Main dial brake

The tension of [MAIN DIAL] may be adjusted to suit

your preference.

The brake adjustment is located on the bottom side of

the front panel. See the figure to the right.

Slide the brake adjustment for a comfortable tension

level while turning the dial continuously and evenly in

one direction.

The transceiver has built-in Voice synthesizer to

announce the operating frequency, mode, as well as

the S-meter level in clear electronically-generated

voice in English (or Japanese).

The announcement can be independently made for

both the Main and Sub bands.

First, set the announcement language, speed, and

mode in the Others set mode (p. 15-14).

 Push [SPEECH] to announce the currently selected

frequency (or frequency and S-meter level).

• Hold down [SPEECH] for 1 second to additionally an-

nounce the selected operating mode.

 Pushing a Mode key also announces the appropri-

ate mode. (p. 15-15)

The output level of the voice synthesizer can be ad-

justed in Level set mode. (p. 15-5)

(SET [F-7] > LEVEL [F-1] > Speech Level)

Brake adjustment

Heavy

[MAIN DIAL]

Light

 Using the Voice synthesizer operation

[SPEECH] MAIN, SUBMode keys

16-3

MAINTENANCE

• Screen image example— type B

 SWR reading

The transceiver has a high-performance SWR meter.

The meter displays a stable measurement in real time,

even if the transmit output power varies frequently,

such as during SSB mode operation.

You can measure the SWR of an antenna itself,

through the internal antenna tuner.

q Push [TUNER] to turn the antenna tuner OFF.

w Hold down the Multi-function [METER]() key for 1

second to display the Multi-function meter.

e Push the Mode key [RTTY/PSK] once or twice to

select the RTTY mode.

r Push [TRANSMIT].

t Rotate [RF PWR] clockwise past the 9 o’clock posi-

tion for more than 30 W of output power.

y Read the SWR on the SWR meter gage.

u Push [EXIT/SET] to close multi-function meter.

3 types of screen images and 9 types of frequency

readout fonts are selectable.

q Select the “Display Type” or “Display Font” item in

the Display set screen.

SET [F-7]  DISPLAY [F-3]  Display Type

SET [F-7]  DISPLAY [F-3]  Display Font

w Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select the desired screen

image or font.

• Hold down [DEF](F) for 1 second to return the de-

fault setting.

e Push [EXIT/SET] twice.

• Exits the Set screen.

• SWR Meter

Better than 1.5:1

 Screen type and font selections

16-4

MAINTENANCE

A very accurate frequency counter is required to cal-

ibrate the frequency of the transceiver. However, a

rough check may be performed by receiving radio sta-

tion WWV, WWVH, or other standard frequency sig-

nals.

CAUTION: The transceiver has been thoroughly

adjusted and tested at the factory before being

shipped. You should not have to re-calibrate it.

q Push the Mode key [SSB] to select USB mode.

w Hold down [PBT CLEAR] for 1 second to clear the

PBT setting and make sure that the RIT/∂TX func-

tion is not activated.

e Set the frequency to the standard frequency station

minus 1 kHz.

• When receiving WWV or WWVH (at 15.00000 MHz) as

a standard frequency, set the operating frequency for

14.99900 MHz.

• Other standard frequencies can be used.

r Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a Multi-

function screen, if necessary.

t Select the “Calibration Marker” item in the Display

set screen.

SET [F-7]  OTHERS [F-5]  Calibration Marker

y Rotate [MAIN DIAL] clockwise to turn the calibra-

tion marker ON.

u Push [EXIT/SET] once to return to the Set mode

menu screen.

i Select the “REF Adjust” item in the ACC set

screen.

SET [F-7]  ACC [F-2]  REF Adjust

o Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to adjust for a zero beat with

the received standard signal as shown at left.

• Zero beat means that two signals are exactly the same

frequency, resulting in a single tone being emitted.

!0 Turn the calibration marker OFF in the Others set

mode.

!1 Push [EXIT/SET] twice.

• Exits the Set screen.

 Calibration the Frequency (approximate)

• Calibration Marker item

• REF Adjust item

(F) Function keys [EXIT/SET] [MAIN DIAL]

16-5

MAINTENANCE

 Setting My call sign

Your own call sign can be displayed at power ON.

[Example] Set the call sign JA3YUA.

q Select the “My Call” item in the Display set screen.

SET [F-7]  DISPLAY [F-3]  My Call

w Push [EDIT](F).

• A cursor blinks.

e Push [ABC]() or [123]().

• Pushing [123]() again to toggle between numbers and

symbols.

r Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select "J."

t Push [t](F) or [u](F) to select a desired digit.

y Repeat the steps e to t to enter the call sign.

• Push [SPACE](F) to enter a space.

• Push [DEL](F) to delete the selected character.

• Holding down [DEL](F) to delete the characters to the

right of the cursor.

• Pushing 10-key, [0]~[9], can also enter numbers.

• See the table below to the right for usable characters.

The call sign can be entered from an external keyboard.

u Push [EXIT/SET].

• The call sign is saved.

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S

T U V W X Y Z

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0

– / . @

• My Call setting screen

(F) Function keys [EXIT/SET] [MAIN DIAL]

16-6

MAINTENANCE

 Screen saver function

The transceiver has a screen saver function to protect

the LCD from the “burn-in” effect.

The screen saver functions when no operation is per-

formed for the set time period.

q Select the “Screen Saver Function” item in the Dis-

play set screen.

SET [F-7]  DISPLAY [F-3]  Screen Saver Function

w Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select a desired option.

• Selectable options: OFF (deactivate the function),

15min., 30min., 60min. (default: 60min.)

e Push [Z](F) to select the “Screen Saver Type”

item.

r Rotate [MAIN DIAL] to select a desired screen

saver type.

• Selectable type: Bounce, Rotation, Twist, Sleep (default:

Bounce)

• The selected screen saver is displayed while holding

down [PREVIEW](F).

• While the screen saver is activated, the [MAIN] or [SUB]

key indicator blinks, whichever one was selected at the

time.

t Push [EXIT/SET] twice.

• Exits the Set screen.

NOTE: When the screen saver function is activated,

the LCD backlight brightness level is set to mini-

mum.

• Screen Saver Type: Twist

(F) Function keys [EXIT/SET] [MAIN DIAL]

16-7

MAINTENANCE

 Resetting the CPU

NOTE: Resetting CLEARS all programmed con-

tents in memory channels and returns programmed

values in the Set mode to default values.

Recommendation: Save memory channel content,

setting status, and so on, onto an SD card or a USB

flash drive before resetting the CPU.

NOTE: If “Standby/Shutdown” is selected in “Shut-

down Function” item in the OTHERS Set menu (p.

15-17), the CPU cannot be reset. In that case, hold

down [POWER] for 1 second, then select “Shut-

down” to turn OFF the transceiver. After that, reset

the CPU as shown below.

D Resetting

q Turn ON the main power switch on the rear panel.

• Make sure the transceiver power is still OFF.

w While holding down [F-INP] and [MW], push

[POWER] to turn ON power.

• The internal CPU is reset.

• The CPU start-up takes approximately 5 seconds.

• "ALL CLEAR" is displayed when the reset is successful.

• The transceiver displays its initial VFO frequencies after

resetting.

[POWER]

[F-INP]

[MW]

 Cleaning

If the transceiver becomes dusty or dirty, wipe

it clean with a dry, soft cloth.

DO NOT use harsh solvents such as benzine

or alcohol when cleaning, as they will dam-

age the transceiver surfaces.

16-8

MAINTENANCE

 About protection indications

The transceiver has a 2 step protection function to pro-

tect the ﬁnal power ampliﬁers.

The function detects the power ampliﬁer temperature

and activates when the temperature becomes ex-

tremely high.

• Power down transmission

Reduces the transmit output power to 100 W.

“LMT” appears beside the transmit indicator

during transmit.

• Transmission inhibit

Disables the transmitter.

The transmit indicator is displayed in gray during

transmit.

When the function is activated, wait until the power

amplifier cools down using the transceiver in the stand-

by or receive mode.

NOTE: DO NOT turn the transceiver power OFF.

The internal cooling fan does not function, so it will

take longer to cool the transceiver.

The power amplifier temperature can be monitored in

the multi-function meter, TEMP gauge.

Check the temperature

Follow the case opening procedures shown here when

you want to replace the clock backup battery or inter-

nal fuse.

RWARNING! DISCONNECT the AC power cable

from the transceiver before performing any work on

the transceiver. Otherwise, there is danger of elec-

tric shock and/or equipment damage.

CAUTION: The transceiver weighs approximately

23.5 kg (52 lb). Always have two people available to

lift or invert over the transceiver.

q Remove the 8 screws from the top of the trans-

ceiver and the 6 screws from the sides, then lift up

the top cover.

w Turn the transceiver upside-down.

CAUTION: NEVER HOLD THE MAIN DIAL OR

ANY OTHER KNOBS when the transceiver is up-

side down. This may damage the transceiver.

e Remove 6 screws from the bottom, and the 6

screws from the sides, then lift up the bottom

cover.

 Opening the transceiver’s case

16-9

MAINTENANCE

 Fuse replacement

When no external DC output is available from [EXT

DC] and ACC connectors, the internal fuse may be

open. Replace the fuse in this case.

RWARNING! DISCONNECT the AC power cable

from the AC outlet before removing the transceiv-

er’s cover.

CAUTION: The transceiver weighs approximately

23.5 kg (52 lb). Always have two people available to

lift or invert over the transceiver.

q Remove the bottom cover.

w Replace the open fuse with a new, properly rated

one (TYPE 1202 FUSE 2 A) as shown at right.

e Replace the bottom cover.

 Clock backup battery replacement

The transceiver has a lithium backup battery (CR2032)

inside for clock and timer functions.

When the backup battery exhausted, the transceiver

transmits and receives normally but cannot retain the

current time.

RWARNING! DISCONNECT the AC power cable

from the AC outlet before removing the transceiv-

er’s cover.

q Remove the top cover.

w Replace the clock backup battery, located near the

front panel as illustrated at left.

• Make sure the battery polarity is correct.

e Return the top cover to the original position.

r Set the date and time in Time set screen. (p. 14-2)

For Users in California (U.S.A.)

This CR2032 Lithium Battery contains Perchlorate

Material—special handling may apply.

See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate

16-10

MAINTENANCE

 Troubleshooting

The following chart is designed to help you correct

problems which are not equipment malfunctions.

If you are unable to locate the cause of a problem

or solve it through the use of this chart, contact your

nearest Icom Dealer or Service Center.

D Transceiver power

D Transmit and receive

PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION REF.

No sound is heard from

the speaker.

Sensitivity is too low, and

only strong signals are au-

dible.

Received audio is unclear

or distorted.

The [ANT]() key does not

function.

Transmitting is impossible.

Output power is too low.

No contact possible with

another station.

Transmit signal is unclear

or distorted.

Repeater cannot be ac-

cessed.

• Volume level is too low.

• The squelch is closed.

• The transceiver is transmitting.

• The antenna is not properly connected.

• An antenna for another band is selected.

• The antenna is not properly tuned.

• The attenuator is activated.

• The operating mode is selected.

• The PBT function is activated.

• The Noise blanker is turned ON when receiv-

ing a strong signal.

• A preamp is activated.

• The noise reduction is activated and the [NR]

control is set too far clockwise.

• The antenna key has not been activated.

• The operating frequency is not inside a ham

band.

• [RF PWR] is set too far counterclockwise

• [DRIVE] is set too far counterclockwise

• [MIC] is set too far counterclockwise

• An antenna for another band is selected.

• The antenna is not properly tuned.

• RIT or ∂TX function is activated.

• The Split frequency function and/or Dualwatch

are activated.

• [MIC] is set too far clockwise

• The Split frequency function is not activated.

• The selected subaudible tone frequency is in-

correct.

• Rotate [AF] clockwise to obtain a suitable lis-

tening level.

• Turn [SQL] to 10 o’clock position to open the

squelch.

• Push [TRANSMIT] to receive or check the

SEND line of an external unit, if connected.

• Reconnect to the antenna connector.

• Select an antenna suitable for the operating fre-

quency.

• Hold down [TUNER] for 1 second to manually

tune the antenna.

• Push [ATT] several times to select “ATT OFF.”

• Select a suitable operating mode.

• Hold down [PBT CLR] for 1 second to reset the

function.

• Push [NB] to turn the noise blanker OFF.

• Push [P.AMP] once or twice to turn the func-

tion OFF.

• Set the [NR] control for maximum readability.

• Set the antenna selection mode.

• Set the frequency to a ham band.

• Rotate [RF PWR] clockwise.

• Set [DRIVE] to a suitable position.

• Set [MIC] to a suitable position.

• Select an antenna suitable for the operating fre-

quency.

• Hold down [TUNER] for 1 second to manually

tune the antenna.

• Push [RIT] or [∂TX] to turn the function OFF.

• Push [SPLIT] and/or [DUALWATCH] to turn the

function OFF.

• Set [MIC] to a suitable position.

• Push [SPLIT] to turn the function ON

• Reset the frequency in the Set mode.

p. 4-4

p. 4-13

—

p. 13-2

p. 13-7

p. 7-2

p. 4-10

p. 7-5

p. 7-11

p. 7-2

p. 7-12

p. 13-5

p. 4-6

p. 4-4

p. 4-14

p. 4-13

p. 13-2

p. 13-7

pp. 7-3,

8-5

pp. 7-10,

8-7

p. 4-13

p. 8-7

p. 5-38

PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION REF.

Power does not come on

when the [POWER] key is

pushed.

• Power cable is improperly connected.

• The internal power supply is turned OFF.

• Circuit breaker is tripped.

• Re-connect the AC power cable correctly.

• Turn the internal power supply ON.

• Check for the cause, then re-set the circuit

breaker.

p. 3-4

p. 1-12

16-11

MAINTENANCE

PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION REF.

Programmed scan does

not stop.

Programmed scan does

not start.

Memory scan does not

start

Select memory scan does

not start

• Squelch is open.

•

The same frequencies have been programmed

in scan edge memory channels P1 and P2.

• 2 or more memory channels have not been

programmed.

• 2 or more memory channels have not been

designated as Select channels.

• Set [SQL] to the threshold point.

• Program different frequencies in scan edge

memory channels P1 and P2.

• Program more than 2 memory channels.

• Designate more than 2 memory channels as

Select channels for the scan.

p. 4-4

p. 12-5

p. 12-7

PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION REF.

The displayed frequency

does not properly change.

• The dial lock function is activated.

• A Set mode screen is selected.

• The internal CPU has malfunctioned.

•

Push [LOCK] to turn the function OFF.

• Push [EXIT/SET] several times to exit the Set

mode screen.

• Reset the CPU.

p. 4-12

p. 15-2

p. 16-7

 Troubleshooting (Continued)

D Scanning

D Display

17-1

UPDATING THE FIRMWARE Section 17

 General ………………………………………………………………… 17-2

D Checking the firmware version ……………………………………17-2

 Preparation ……………………………………………………………… 17-3

D File downloading …………………………………………………… 17-3

 Firmware update— using an SD card/USB flash drive …………… 17-4

17-2

UPDATING THE FIRMWARE

 General

The IC-7850/IC-7851’s ﬁ rmware can be updated, if de-

sired. By updating the ﬁ rmware, new function(s) can

be added and the improvement of performance pa-

rameters can be made.

Ask your dealer or distributor about how to update the

firmware if you have no PC.

The firmware version.

1.00

D Checking the ﬁ rmware version

While holding down [POWER], turn ON the power to

display the Opening screen. On the right bottom of the

screen, the ﬁ rmware version is displayed.

17-3

UPDATING THE FIRMWARE

 Preparation

D File downloading

Access the following URL.

http://www.icom.co.jp/world/index.html

w Click the [Support] button.

e Click the “Firmware Updates/Software Downloads”

link.

r Click the desired firmware file link in the IC-7850/

IC-7851 group.

t Read “Regarding this Download Service” carefully,

and then click [Agree].

y Click [Save as] in the displayed File Download dia-

log.

u Select the desired location where you want to save

the firmware, and then click [Save] in the displayed

File Download dialog.

• File download starts.

i After the download is completed, extract the file.

• The firmware and the firm utility are compressed in “zip”

format.

• When updating the transceiver using with the memory

device, copy the extracted ﬁrmware to the IC-7850_7851

folder of the memory device.

7850_7851_XXXX.zip?

Click

17-4

UPDATING THE FIRMWARE

 Firmware update— using an SD card/USB flash drive

When updating the firmware using a memory device,

no IP address as well as subnet mask settings are

necessary.

q Copy the downloaded firmware data onto an SD

card or a USB flash drive (“IC-7850_7851” folder).

• The memory device must be formatted by the trans-

ceiver.

w Insert the SD card into the [SD CARD] slot or insert

the flash drive to [USB A].

e On the Set mode menu screen, display the SD/

USB-Memory menu screen.

SET [F-7]  SD/USB [F-7]

r Hold down [FIRMUP] for 1 second.

• The Firmware update agreement screen is displayed.

Carefully read the displayed precaution.

t After you read and agree with all the precautions,

push [OK].

• The [OK] button appears only when you scroll down to

the end of the precaution.

y Push [SD/USB] to select between a USB flash drive

and an SD card.

u Push [∫](F) or [√](F) to select the firmware

updating data. (Example: 7850_7851_300.DAT)

i Push [FIRM UP](F).

• The Firmware update confirmation screen is displayed.

Carefully read the displayed precaution on the screen.

o After you read all the precautions, hold down [OK]

for 1 second to start the firmware update.

• The firmware update starts.

• To cancel the update, push [CANCEL](F).

(Continued on the next page)

CAUTION: NEVER turn the transceiver power OFF

while updating the firmware.

If you turn the transceiver power OFF, or if a power

failure occurs while updating, the transceiver firm-

ware will be damaged and you will have to send the

transceiver back to the nearest Icom distributor for

repair. This type of repair is out of warranty even if

the warranty period is still valid.

• Set mode menu screen

• SD/USB-Memory menu screen

• File selecting screen

Select the firmware updating data.

• Firmware update agreement screen

• Firmware update confirmation screen

17-5

UPDATING THE FIRMWARE

 Firmware update— using an SD card/USB flash drive (Continued)

• Downloads the firmware update data from the SD card

or the flash drive, and then automatically loads the data

onto the main CPU.

• Downloading and loading status is displayed in the

“FILE LOADING” dialog.

• “Firmware updating for the main CPU is completed” is

displayed in the dialog.

!0 Hold down [POWER] on the transceiver for 1 sec-

ond to turn OFF the power.

!1 Push [POWER] to turn ON the power again.

• Depending on the updating data, the sub CPU and DSP

firmware may be updated at the same time.

• While updating the firmware, one of the dialogs or all di-

alogs shown to the right are displayed. This will take 2

minutes at maximum.

• When the normal operation screen appears, the firm-

ware updating is completed.

• Firmware update completed screen

• Firmware updating screen

18-1

 Remote control (CI-V) information …………………………………… 18-2

D CI-V connection …………………………………………………… 18-2

D Preparing …………………………………………………………… 18-2

D Data format …………………………………………………………… 18-2

D Data content description ………………………………………… 18-11

CONTROL COMMAND Section 18

18-2

 Remote control (CI-V) information

CONTROL COMMAND

D CI-V connection

The transceiver's operating frequency, mode, VFO

and memory selection, can be remotely controlled

when connecting to a PC.

Choose the connection method from the following:

• A USB cable (A-B type, user supplied)

The required USB driver and driver install guide can be

downloaded from Icom web site.

Access to "http://www.icom.co.jp/world," then click

"Support," "Firmware Updates / Software downloads" in

sequence.

* The download procedure on the web page may be

changed without notice.

• The optional CT-17 (CI-V level converter)

*Connects to a PC with an RS-232C port.

CT-17 accepts only an RS-232C cable. The use of an

RS-232C-USB converter is not guaranteed.

D Preparing

The Icom Communications Interface V (CI-V) is used

for remote control.

To control the transceiver, first set its address, data

communication speed, and transceive function.

These settings are set in the Set mode.

(pp. 15-17, 15-18)

D Data format

The CI-V system can be operated using the following

data formats. Data formats differ according to

command numbers. A data area or sub command is

added for some commands.

FE FE 8E E0 Cn Sc Data area FD

Preamble

code

(fixed)

Transceiver’s

default address

Controller’s

default address

Command number

(see the command table)

Sub command number

(see command table)

BCD code data for

frequency or memory

number entry

End of message

code

(fixed)

FE FE E0 8E FB FD

FE FE E0 8E FA FD

Preamble

code (fixed)

Controller’s

default address

Transceiver’s

default address

OK code

(fixed)

End of message

code (fixed)

NG code

(fixed)

q w e r t y u

FE FE E0 8E Cn Sc Data area FD

q w e r t y u

ct- 17

9–15 V DC

mini plug cable

• Connection example— using CT-17

Controller to IC-7850/IC-7851

IC-7850/IC-7851 to controller

OK message to ontroller

NG message to controller

18-3

D Command table

CONTROL COMMAND

Cmd. Sub Cmd. Data Description

00 see p. 18-11 Send frequency data (transceive)

01 see p. 18-11 Send mode data (transceive)

02 see p. 18-13 Read band edge frequencies

03 see p. 18-11 Read operating frequency

04 see p. 18-11 Read operating mode

05 see p. 18-11 Set operating frequency

06 see p. 18-11 Operating mode selection for transceive

07 Select VFO mode

B0 Exchange the Main and Sub bands

B1 Equalize the Main and Sub bands

C2 00 or 01 Send/read the dualwatch setting

(00=OFF, 01=ON)

* Sub commands, C0 (dualwatch ON) and C1

(dualwatch OFF), are also usable for only

setting.

D2 00 Send/read Main band selection

* Sub command, D0, is also usable for only

setting.

01 Send/read Sub band selection

* Sub command, D1, is also usable for only

setting.

08 Select memory mode

0001 to

0099

Select memory channel

(0001=M-CH01, 0099=M-CH99)

0100 Select program scan edge channel P1

0101 Select program scan edge channel P2

09 Memory write

0A Memory to VFO

0B Memory clear

0E 00 Scan stop

01 Programmed/memory scan start

02 Programmed scan start

03 ∂F scan start

12 Fine programmed scan start

13 Fine ∂F scan start

22 Memory scan start

23 Select memory scan start

A1 Select ∂F scan span ±5 kHz

A2 Select ∂F scan span ±10 kHz

A3 Select ∂F scan span ±20 kHz

A4 Select ∂F scan span ±50 kHz

A5 Select ∂F scan span ±100 kHz

A6 Select ∂F scan span ±500 kHz

A7 Select ∂F scan span ±1 MHz

B0 Set as non-select channel

B1 Set as select channel

( The previously set number by CI-V is set

after turning power ON, or “1” is selected if

no selection is performed.)

Set as select channel “1”

Set as select channel “2”

Set as select channel “3”

B2 00 Set “ALL” for select memory scan

Set “1” for select memory scan

Set “2” for select memory scan

Set “3” for select memory scan

D0 Set scan resume OFF

D3 Set scan resume ON

0F 00 or 01 Read split setting (00=OFF, 01=ON)

00 Turn the split function OFF

01 Turn the split function ON

10 00 Send/read tuning step OFF

01 Send/read 100 Hz tuning step

02 Send/read 1 kHz tuning step

03 Send/read 5 kHz tuning step

04 Send/read 9 kHz tuning step

05 Send/read 10 kHz tuning step

06 Send/read 12.5 kHz tuning step

07 Send/read 20 kHz tuning step

08 Send/read 25 kHz tuning step

Cmd. Sub Cmd. Data Description

11 00 Send/read attenuator OFF

03 Send/read 3 dB attenuator

06 Send/read 6 dB attenuator

09 Send/read 9 dB attenuator

12 Send/read 12 dB attenuator

15 Send/read 15 dB attenuator

18 Send/read 18 dB attenuator

21 Send/read 21 dB attenuator

†

00 00 or 01 Select/read ANT1 selection

(00=RX ANT OFF; 01=RX ANT ON)

01 00 or 01 Select/read ANT2 selection

(00=RX ANT OFF; 01=RX ANT ON)

02 00 or 01 Select/read ANT3 selection

(00=RX ANT OFF; 01=RX ANT ON)

03 00 Select/read ANT4 selection

(00=RX ANT OFF; fix)

13 00 Announce all data with voice synthesizer

01 Announce frequency and S-meter level with

voice synthesizer

02 Announce receive mode with voice

synthesizer

†

01 0000 to

0255

Send/read [AF] level

(0000=max. CCW, 0255=max. CW)

02 0000 to

0255

Send/read [RF] level

(0000=max. CCW, 0255=max. CW)

03 0000 to

0255

Send/read [SQL] level

(0000=max. CCW, 0255=max. CW)

05 0000 to

0255

Send/read [APF] level

(0000=Pitch–550 Hz, 0128=Pitch,

0255=Pitch+550 Hz; 10 Hz steps)

06 0000 to

0255

Send/read [NR] level

(0000=0%, 0255=100%)

07 0000 to

0255

Send/read inner [TWIN PBT] position

( 0000=max. CCW, 0128=center,

0255=max. CW)

08 0000 to

0255

Send/read outer [TWIN PBT] position

( 0000=max. CCW, 0128=center,

0255=max. CW)

09 0000 to

0255

Send/read CW pitch

( 0000=300 Hz, 0128=600 Hz, 0255=900 Hz;

5 Hz steps)

0A 0000 to

0255

Send/read [RF PWR] position

(0000=max. CCW, 0255=max. CW)

0B 0000 to

0255

Send/read [MIC] position

(0000=max. CCW, 0255=max. CW)

0C 0000 to

0255

Send/read [KEY SPEED] level

(0000=6 wpm, 0255=48 wpm)

0D 0000 to

0255

Send/read [NOTCH] position

( 0000=max. CCW, 0128=center,

0255=max. CW)

0E 0000 to

0255

Send/read COMP level (0000=0, 0255=10)

0F 0000 to

0255

Send/read [DELAY] position

(0000=2.0d, 0255=13.0d)

11 0000 to

0255

Send/read [AGC] level

(0000=max. CCW to 0255=max. CW)

12 0000 to

0255

Send/read NB level

(0000=0%, 0255=100%)

13 0000 to

0255

Send/read [DIGI-SEL] position

(0000=max. CCW to 0255=max. CW)

14 0000 to

0255

Send/read DRIVE gain

(0000=0%, 0255=100%)

15 0000 to

0255

Send/read Monitor gain

(0000=0%, 0255=100%)

16 0000 to

0255

Send/read VOX gain

(0000=0%, 0255=100%)

17 0000 to

0255

Send/read Anti VOX gain

(0000=0%, 0255=100%)

18 0000 to

0255

Send/read [CONTRAST] position

(0000=max. CCW to 0255=max. CW)

19 0000 to

0255

Send/read BRIGHT level

(0000=0%, 0255=100%)

†

Send/read data

18-4

D Command table (continued)

CONTROL COMMAND

Cmd. Sub Cmd. Data Description

15 01 00 Read noise or S-meter squelch status

(squelch close)

01 Read noise or S-meter squelch status

(squelch open)

02 0000 to

0255

Read S-meter level

(0000=S0, 0120=S9, 0241=S9+60 dB)

05 00 Read various squelch (tone squelch, and so

on) status (squelch close)

01 Read various squelch (tone squelch, and so

on) status (squelch open)

11 0000 to

0255

Read RF power meter

(0000=0 W, 0143=100 W, 0213=200 W)

12 0000 to

0255

Read SWR meter

( 0000=SWR1.0, 0048=SWR1.5,

0080=SWR2.0, 0120=SWR3.0)

13 0000 to

0255

Read ALC meter (0000=0, 0120=Max.)

14 0000 to

0255

Read COMP meter

(0000=0 dB, 0130=15 dB, 0241=30 dB)

15 0000 to

0255

Read VD meter

(0151=44 V, 0180=48 V, 0211=52 V)

16 0000 to

0255

Read ID meter

( 0000=0 A, 0097=10 A, 0146=15 A,

0241=25 A)

†

02 00 Preamp OFF

01 Preamp 1 ON

02 Preamp 2 ON

12 00 AGC OFF selection

01 AGC FAST selection

02 AGC MID selection

03 AGC SLOW selection

22 00 Noise blanker OFF

01 Noise blanker ON

32 00 Audio peak filter OFF

01 Audio peak filter WIDE ON

(320 Hz is selected when SHARP APF is set)

02 Audio peak filter MID ON

(160 Hz is selected when SHARP APF is set)

03 Audio peak filter NAR ON

(80 Hz is selected when SHARP APF is set)

40 00 Noise reduction OFF

01 Noise reduction ON

41 00 Auto notch function OFF

01 Auto notch function ON

42 00 Repeater tone OFF

01 Repeater tone ON

43 00 Tone squelch OFF

01 Tone squelch ON

44 00 Speech compressor OFF

01 Speech compressor ON

45 00 Monitor function OFF

01 Monitor function ON

46 00 VOX function OFF

01 VOX function ON

47 00 BK-IN function OFF

01 Semi BK-IN function ON

02 Full BK-IN function ON

48 00 Manual notch function OFF

01 Manual notch function ON

4C 00 VSC function OFF

01 VSC function ON

4D 00 AGC VR function OFF

01 AGC VR function ON

4E 00 DIGI-SEL function OFF

01 DIGI-SEL function ON

4F 00 Twin peak filter OFF

01 Twin peak filter ON

( Can be turned ON only when Mark and Shift

are set to 2125 Hz and 170 Hz, respectively)

50 00 Dial lock function OFF

01 Dial lock function ON

In the CW mode, if the [TRANSMIT] or an external TX switch is ON, or

the Break-in function is ON, a message will be transmitted as CW code

when you send it from your PC.

The power ON command (18 01) is usable only when the transceiver is in

the standby mode.

Cmd. Sub Cmd. Data Description

†

53 00 ANT-RX I/O setting OFF

01 ANT-RX I/O setting “A”

02 ANT-RX I/O setting “B”

55 00 15 kHz roofing filter selection

01 6 kHz roofing filter selection

02 3 kHz roofing filter selection

03 1.2 kHz roofing filter selection

56 00 SHARP selection for DSP filter type

01 SOFT selection for DSP filter type

57 00 WIDE selection for manual notch width

01 MID selection for manual notch width

02 NAR selection for manual notch width

58 00 WIDE selection for SSB transmit bandwidth

01 MID selection for SSB transmit bandwidth

02 NAR selection for SSB transmit bandwidth

5E 00 Main/Sub band tracking function OFF

01 Main/Sub band tracking function ON

17 see p. 18-13 Send CW messages*

18 00 Turn OFF the transceiver

01 Turn ON the transceiver*

19 00 Read the transceiver ID

†

00 see p. 18-12 Send/read memory contents

01 see p. 18-11 Send/read band stacking register contents

02 see p. 18-11 Send/read memory keyer contents

03 00 to 49 Send/read the selected filter width

( AM: 00=200 Hz to 49=10 kHz; Other than

AM: 00=50 Hz to 31=2700 Hz/40=3600 Hz)

04 00 to 13 Send/read the selected AGC time constant

( 00=OFF, AM: 01=0.1 sec. to 13=6.0 sec.,

SSB, CW, RTTY: 01=0.3 sec. to

13=6.0/8.0 sec.)

05 0001 see p. 18-12 Send/read SSB RX HPF/LPF settings

0002 00 to 10 Send/read SSB RX Tone (Bass) level

(00 =–5 to 10=+5)

0003 00 to 10 Send/read SSB RX Tone (Treble) level

(00=–5 to 10=+5)

0004 see p. 18-12 Send/read AM RX HPF/LPF settings

0005 00 to 10 Send/read AM RX Tone (Bass) level

(00 =–5 to 10=+5)

0006 00 to 10 Send/read AM RX Tone (Treble) level

(00=–5 to 10=+5)

0007 see p. 18-12 Send/read FM RX HPF/LPF settings

0008 00 to 10 Send/read FM RX Tone (Bass) level

(00 =–5 to 10=+5)

0009 00 to 10 Send/read FM RX Tone (Treble) level

(00=–5 to 10=+5)

0010 see p. 18-12 Send/read CW RX HPF/LPF settings

0011 see p. 18-12 Send/read RTTY RX HPF/LPF settings

0012 see p. 18-12 Send/read PSK RX HPF/LPF settings

0013 00 to 10 Send/read SSB TX Tone (Bass) level

(00 =–5 to 10=+5)

0014 00 to 10 Send/read SSB TX Tone (Treble) level

(00=–5 to 10=+5)

0015 00 to 10 Send/read AM TX Tone (Bass) level

(00 =–5 to 10=+5)

0016 00 to 10 Send/read AM TX Tone (Treble) level

(00=–5 to 10=+5)

0017 00 to 10 Send/read FM TX Tone (Bass) level

(00 =–5 to 10=+5)

0018 00 to 10 Send/read FM TX Tone (Treble) level

(00=–5 to 10=+5)

0019 see p. 18-13 Send/read SSB TX bandwidth for wide

0020 see p. 18-13 Send/read SSB TX bandwidth for mid.

0021 see p. 18-13 Send/read SSB TX bandwidth for narrow

0022 0000 to

0255

Send/read speech level

(0000=0% to 0255=100%)

†

Send/read data

18-5

D Command table (continued)

CONTROL COMMAND

Cmd. Sub Cmd. Data Description

†

05 0023 0000 to

0255

Send/read CW side tone gain

(0000=0% to 0255=100%)

0024 00 or 01 Send/read CW side tone gain limit

(00=OFF, 01=ON)

0025 00 to 06 Send/read audio output level at APF ON

(00=0 dB, 06=+6 dB)

0026 0000 to

0255

Send/read beep gain

(0000=min. to 0255=max.)

0027 00 or 01 Send/read beep gain limit (00=OFF, 01=ON)

0028 00 to 30 Send/read headphones output ratio for the

volume level (00=–15 dB to 30=+15 dB)

0029 00 or 01 Send/read headphone output selection

(00=separated, 01=mixed)

0030 00 or 01 Send/read AF/SQL signal output to ACC-A

(00=MAIN; 01=SUB)

0031 00 or 01 Send/read AF/SQL signal output to ACC-B

(00=MAIN; 01=SUB)

0032 00 or 01 Send/read AF/IF signal output to ACC-A

(00=AF; 01=IF)

0033 00 or 01 Send/read the band selection for AF/IF signal

output to ACC-A (While holding down [XFC]

during split frequency operation)

(00=Main band, 01=Sub band)

0034 0000 to

0255

Send/read AF output level to ACC-A

(0000=0% to 0255=100%)

0035 00 or 01 Send/read squelch function for the AF signal

output to ACC-A

(00=OFF (Open), 01=ON)

0036 00 or 01 Send/read voice synthesizer and beep output

setting to ACC-A (when audio output is set)

(00=OFF, 01=ON)

0037 0000 to

0255

Send/read IF signal output level to ACC-A

(0000=0%, 0255=100%)

0038 00 or 01 Send/read AF/IF signal output to ACC-B

(00=AF; 01=IF)

0039 00 or 01 Send/read the band selection for AF/IF signal

output to ACC-B (While holding down [XFC]

during split frequency operation)

(00=Main band, 01=Sub band)

0040 0000 to

0255

Send/read AF output level to ACC-B

(0000=0% to 0255=100%)

0041 00 or 01 Send/read squelch function for the AF signal

output to ACC-B

(00=OFF (Open), 01=ON)

0042 00 or 01 Send/read voice synthesizer and beep output

setting to ACC-B (when audio output is set)

(00=OFF, 01=ON)

0043 0000 to

0255

Send/read IF signal output level to ACC-B

(0000=0%, 0255=100%)

0044 00 or 01 Send/read AF/IF signal output to S/P DIF

(00=AF, 01=IF)

0045 00 or 01 Send/read the band selection for AF/IF signal

output to S/P DIF (While holding down [XFC]

during split frequency operation)

(00=Main band, 01=Sub band)

0046 0000 to

0255

Send/read AF output level to S/P DIF

(0000=0% to 0255=100%)

0047 00 or 01 Send/read squelch function for the AF signal

output to S/P DIF

(00=OFF (Open), 01=ON)

0048 00 or 01 Send/read voice synthesizer and beep output

setting to S/P DIF (when audio output is set)

(00=OFF, 01=ON)

0049 0000 to

0255

Send/read IF signal output level to S/P DIF

(0000=0%, 0255=100%)

0050 00 or 01 Send/read AF/IF signal output to USB B

(00=AF, 01=IF)

0051 00 or 01 Send/read the band selection for AF/IF signal

output to USB B (While holding down [XFC]

during split frequency operation)

(00=Main band, 01=Sub band)

0052 0000 to

0255

Send/read AF output level to USB B

(0000=0% to 0255=100%)

Cmd. Sub Cmd. Data Description

†

05 0053 00 or 01 Send/read squelch function for the AF signal

output to USB B

(00=OFF (Open), 01=ON)

0054 00 or 01 Send/read voice synthesizer and beep output

setting to USB B (when audio output is set)

(00=OFF, 01=ON)

0055 0000 to

0255

Send/read IF signal output level to USB B

(0000=0%, 0255=100%)

0056 00 or 01 Send/read AF/IF signal output to LAN

(00=AF, 01=IF)

0057 00 or 01 Send/read the band selection for AF/IF signal

output to LAN (While holding down [XFC]

during split frequency operation)

(00=Main band, 01=Sub band)

0058 0000 to

0255

Send/read MOD input level from ACC-A

(0000=0% to 0255=100%)

0059 0000 to

0255

Send/read MOD input level from ACC-B

(0000=0% to 0255=100%)

0060 0000 to

0255

Send/read MOD input level from S/P DIF

(0000=0% to 0255=100%)

0061 0000 to

0255

Send/read MOD input level from USB B

(0000=0% to 0255=100%)

0062 0000 to

0255

Send/read MOD input level from LAN

(0000=0% to 0255=100%)

0063 00 to 10 Send/read MOD input connector during

DATA OFF

( 00=MIC, 01=ACC-A, 02=ACC-B, 03=MIC/

ACC-A, 04=MIC/ACC-B, 05=ACC-A/ACC-

B, 06=MIC/ACCA/ACC-B, 07=S/P DIF,

08=USB, 09=LAN, 10=MIC/USB)

0064 00 to 10 Send/read MOD input connector during

DATA1

( 00=MIC, 01=ACC-A, 02=ACC-B, 03=MIC/

ACC-A, 04=MIC/ACC-B, 05=ACC-A/ACC-

B, 06=MIC/ACCA/ACC-B, 07=S/P DIF,

08=USB, 09=LAN, 10=MIC/USB)

0065 00 to 10 Send/read MOD input connector during

DATA2

( 00=MIC, 01=ACC-A, 02=ACC-B, 03=MIC/

ACC-A, 04=MIC/ACC-B, 05=ACC-A/ACC-

B, 06=MIC/ACCA/ACC-B, 07=S/P DIF,

08=USB, 09=LAN, 10=MIC/USB)

0066 00 to 10 Send/read MOD input connector during

DATA3

( 00=MIC, 01=ACC-A, 02=ACC-B, 03=MIC/

ACC-A, 04=MIC/ACC-B, 05=ACC-A/ACC-

B, 06=MIC/ACCA/ACC-B, 07=S/P DIF,

08=USB, 09=LAN, 10=MIC/USB)

0067 00 to 02 Send/read the band selection for operating

frequency band signal output to ACC-A

(00=MAIN, 01=SUB, 02=TX)

0068 00 to 02 Send/read the band selection for operating

frequency band signal output to ACC-B

(00=MAIN, 01=SUB, 02=TX)

0069 00 or 01 Send/read relay type selection

(00=Reed, 01=MOS-FET)

0070 00 to 07 Send/read the Main band’s external meter

output selection

( 00=Auto, 01=S (Main), 02=Po, 03=SWR,

04=ALC, 05=COMP, 06=VD, 07=ID)

0071 00 to 07 Send/read the Sub band’s external meter

output selection

( 00=Auto, 01=S (Sub), 02=Po, 03=SWR,

04=ALC, 05=COMP, 06=VD, 07=ID)

0072 0000 to

0255

Send/read the Main band’s external meter

output level (0000=0% to 0255=100%)

0073 0000 to

0255

Send/read the Sub band’s external meter

output level (0000=0% to 0255=100%)

0074 00 to 02 Send/read reference signal in/out setting

(00=IN, 01=OFF, 02=OUT)

0075 0000 to

0255

Send/read reference signal frequency setting

(0000=0% to 0255=100%)

0076 0000 to

0255

Send/read LCD unit backlight brightness

(0000=0% to 0255=100%)

0077 0000 to

0255

Send/read switch indicator brightness

(0000=1 to 0255=100)

†

Send/read data

18-6

D Command table (continued)

CONTROL COMMAND

Cmd. Sub Cmd. Data Description

†

05 0078 00 to 02 Send/read screen image type

( 00=A, 01=B,

02=50th Anniversary for only IC-7850)

0079 00 to 08 Send/read frequency readout font

( 00=Basic (1), 01=Basic (2), 02=Basic (3),

03=Italic (1), 04=Italic (2), 05=Italic (3),

06=Round (1), 07=Round (2),

08=Round (3))

0080 00 to 02 Send/Read response speed for Standard

and Edgewise meter needle

(00=Slow, 01=Mid, 02=Fast)

0081 00 to 02 Send/read meter type

(00=Standard, 01=Edgewise, 02=Bar)

0082 00 or 01 Send/read meter type during expanded

screen (00=Edgewise, 01=Bar)

0083 00 or 01 Send/read peak hold set for Bar meter

(00=OFF, 01=ON)

0084 00 or 01 Send/read memory name indication setting

(00=OFF, 01=ON)

0085 00 or 01 Send/read audio peak filter width popup

indication setting (00=OFF, 01=ON)

0086 00 or 01 Send/read manual notch width pop-up

indication setting (00=OFF, 01=ON)

0087 00 to 03 Send/read screen saver function

( 00=OFF, 01=15 minutes, 02=30 minutes,

03=60 minutes)

0088 00 to 03 Send/read screen saver type

( 00=Bounce, 01=Rotation, 02=Twist,

03=Sleep)

0089 00 or 01 Send/read output signal setting for external

display (00=OFF, 01=ON)

0090 00 or 01 Send/read flame rate shift setting for external

display (00=OFF, 01=ON)

0091 00 or 01 Send/read image resolution for external

display (00=800x480, 01=800x600)

0092 00 or 01 Send/read synchronous pulse level setting

(00=L, 01=H)

0093 00 or 01 Send/read opening message indication

(00=OFF, 01=ON)

0094 see p. 18-12 Send/read opening message contents

(up to 10-character)

0095 20000101 to

20991231

Send/read date

( 20000101=1st Jan. 2000 to

20991231=31st Dec. 2099)

0096 0000 to

2359

Send/read time (0000=00:00 to 2359=23:59)

0097 00 or 01 Send/read NTP (Network Time Protocol)

function setting (00=OFF, 01=ON)

0098 see p. 18-12 Send/read NTP server address setting

0099 see p. 18-11 Send/read UTC offset time

0100 00 or 01 Send/read CLOCK2 function

(00=OFF, 01=ON)

0101 see p. 18-11 Send/read UTC offset time for CLOCK2

0102 see p. 18-12 Send/read CLOCK2 name

(up to 3-character)

0103 00 or 01 Send/read calibration marker

(00=OFF, 01=ON)

0104 00 or 01 Send/read confirmation beep

(00=OFF, 01=ON)

0105 00 Send/read the band edge beep OFF

01 Send/read the band edge beep ON (Beep

sounds with a default amateur band)

02 Send/read the band edge beep with user

setting ON

03 Send/read the band edge beep with user

setting/TX limit ON

0106 0050 to

0200

Send/read the Main band’s beep audio

frequency (0050=500 Hz to 0200=2000 Hz)

0107 0050 to

0200

Send/read the Sub band’s beep audio

frequency

(0050=500 Hz to 0200=2000 Hz)

0108 00 or 01 Send/read TX output power limit function

(00=OFF, 01=ON)

Cmd. Sub Cmd. Data Description

†

05 0109 00 to 05 Send/read the TX Delay setting (HF)

( 00=OFF, 01=10 ms, 02=15 ms, 03=20 ms,

04=25 ms, 05=30 ms)

0110 00 to 05 Send/read the TX Delay setting (50 MHz)

( 00=OFF, 01=10 ms, 02=15 ms, 03=20 ms,

04=25 ms, 05=30 ms)

0111 00 to 05 Send/read TOT setting for remote or the

[TRANSMIT] key operation

( 00=OFF, 01=3 minutes, 02=5 minutes,

03=10 minutes, 04=20 minutes,

05=30 minutes)

0112 00 or 01 Send/read quick dualwatch function

(00=OFF, 01=ON)

0113 00 or 01 Send/read quick split set (00=OFF, 01=ON)

0114 see p. 18-12 Send/read FM split offset –9.999 to

+9.999 MHz for HF

0115 see p. 18-12 Send/read FM split offset –9.999 to

+9.999 MHz for 50 MHz

0116 00 or 01 Send/read split lock set (00=OFF, 01=ON)

0117 00 or 01 Send/read tuner auto start set

(00=OFF, 01=ON)

0118 00 or 01 Send/read PTT tune set (00=OFF, 01=ON)

0119 00 or 01 Send/read transverter set (00=OFF, 01=ON)

0120 see p. 18-12 Send/read transverter offset

0121 00 to 02 Send/read RTTY mark frequency

(00=1275 Hz, 01=1615 Hz, 02=2125 Hz)

0122 00 to 02 Send/read RTTY shift width

(00=170 Hz, 01=200 Hz, 02=425 Hz)

0123 00 or 01 Send/read RTTY keying polarity

(00=Normal, 01=Reverse)

0124 00 to 02 Send/read PSK tone frequency

(00=1000 Hz, 01=1500 Hz, 02=2000 Hz)

0125 00 or 01 Send/read speech language

(00=English, 01=Japanese)

0126 00 or 01 Send/read speech speed (00=Low, 01=High)

0127 00 or 01 Send/read S-level speech (00=OFF, 01=ON)

0128 00 or 01 Send/read speech with a mode switch

operation (00=OFF, 01=ON)

0129 00 or 01 Send/read memo pad numbers

(00=5 ch, 01=10 ch)

0130 00 or 01 Send/read [MAIN DIAL] function

(00=MAIN, 01=MAIN+SUB)

0131 00 to 02 Send/read [MAIN DIAL] auto TS

(00=OFF, 01=Low, 02=High)

0132 00 to 02 Send/read [SUB DIAL] auto TS

(00=OFF, 01=Low, 02=High)

0133 00 or 01 Send/read mic. up/down speed

(00=Low, 01=High)

0134 00 or 01 Send/read quick RIT/∂TX clear function

(00=OFF, 01=ON)

0135 00 to 02 Send/read SSB notch operation

(00=Auto, 01=Manual, 02=Auto/Manual)

0136 00 to 02 Send/read AM notch operation

(00=Auto, 01=Manual, 02=Auto/Manual)

0137 00 or 01 Send/read DIGI-SEL control function

(00=DIGI-SEL, 01=APF)

0138 00 or 01 Send/read band indication for Filter screen

(00=Fix, 01=Auto)

0139 00 or 01 Send/read SSB/CW synchronous tuning

function (00=OFF, 01=ON)

0140 00 or 01 Send/read CW normal side set

(00=LSB, 01=USB)

0141 00 or 01 Set/read APF type (00=SHARP, 01=SOFT)

0142 00 or 01 Send/read band setting for audio output from

mic. connector (00=MAIN+SUB, 01=SUB)

0143 00 or 01 Send/read bias voltage output for mic. audio

input ([MIC]; pin 1) (00=OFF, 01=ON)

0144 00 or 01 Send/read external keypad set for RTTY

memory (00=OFF, 01=ON)

0145 00 or 01 Send/read external keypad set for PSK

memory (00=OFF, 01=ON)

0146 00 or 01 Send/read the voice memory transmission

set for [F1] to [F8] on the keyboard

(00=OFF, 01=ON)

†

Send/read data

18-7

D Command table (continued)

CONTROL COMMAND

Cmd. Sub Cmd. Data Description

†

05 0147 00 or 01 Send/read the memory keyer transmission

set for [F1] to [F8] on the keyboard

(00=OFF, 01=ON)

0148 00 or 01 Send/read external keypad set for voice

memory (00=OFF, 01=ON)

0149 00 or 01 Send/read external keypad set for memory

keyer (00=OFF, 01=ON)

0150 00 or 01 Send/read screen capture by the [POWER]

switch (00=OFF, 01=ON)

0151 00 or 01 Send/read screen capture by the [Print

Screen] key on the keyboard

(00=OFF, 01=ON)

0152 00 or 01 Send/read captured screen image data

saving memory device

(00=SD card, 01=USB flash drive)

0153 00 or 01 Send/read screen capture image data saving

format (00=PNG format, 01=BMP format)

0154 00 or 01 Send/read the Shutdown function

(00=Shutdown, 01=Standby/Shutdown)

0155 00 or 01 Send/read CI-V transceive set

(00=OFF, 01=ON)

0156 0000 to

0223

Send/read the transceive CI-V Address for

LAN to REMOTE in hexadecimal code

(0000=00h to 0223=DFh)

0157 00 or 01 Send/read antenna controller status

(frequency, and so on) data output from

[REMOTE] (00=OFF, 01=ON)

0158 00 or 01 Send/read echo back setting for CI-V

operation (00=ON, 01=OFF)

0159 00 to 03 Send/read data transfer speed for RTTY or

PSK decode output from USB B

( 00=4800 bps, 01=9600 bps, 02=19200 bps,

03=38400 bps)

0160 00 to 04 Send/read transmission control line setting

for USB B

( 00=OFF, 01=USB1 DTR, 02=USB1 RTS,

03=USB2 DTR, 04=USB2 RTS)

* Different line must be set from both CW

keying and RTTY (FSK)

0161 00 to 04 Send/read CW keying line setting for USB B

( 00=OFF, 01=USB1 DTR, 02=USB1 RTS,

03=USB2 DTR, 04=USB2 RTS)

* Different line must be set from both

transmission control and RTTY (FSK)

0162 00 to 04

Send/read RTTY (FSK) line setting for USB B

( 00=OFF, 01=USB1 DTR, 02=USB1 RTS,

03=USB2 DTR, 04=USB2 RTS)

* Different line must be set from both CW

keying and transmission control

0163 00 to 10 Send/read keyboard type

( 00=English, 01=Japanese,

02=United Kingdom, 03=French, 04=French

(Canadian), 05=German, 06=Portuguese,

07=Portuguese (Brazilian), 08=Spanish,

09=Spanish (Latin American), 10=Italian)

0164 0010 to

0100

Send/read keyboard repeat delay

( 0010=100 msec., 0100=1000 msec.

; 50 msec. steps)

0165 00 to 31 Send/read keyboard repeat rate

(00=2.0 cps to 31=30.0 cps)

0166 00 to 02 Send/read mouse pointer speed

(00=Slow, 01=Mid, 02=Fast)

0167 00 or 01 Send/read mouse pointer speed acceleration

(00=OFF, 01=ON)

0168 00 or 01 Send/read DHCP client setting (auto IP

address setting using DHCP server)

(00=OFF, 01=ON)

0169 Send/read IP address setting (fixed setting)

( 0000000000000001 (0.0.0.1) to

0255025502550254 (255.255.255.254))

*Usable when the DHCP client setting is OFF

Cmd. Sub Cmd. Data Description

†

05 0170 Read the IP address set by the DHCP server

( 0000000000000001 (0.0.0.1) to

0255025502550254 (255.255.255.254))

* If the DHCP client setting is OFF, sends

back the manually set IP address (fixed IP

address)

0171 01 to 30 Send/read subnet mask

(01=128.0.0.0 to 30=255.255.255.252)

0172 Send/read default gateway

( 0000000000000001 (0.0.0.1) to

0255025502550254 (255.255.255.254),

FF=Blank)

*Usable when the DHCP client setting is OFF

0173 Send/read primary DNS (Domain Name

System) server address

( 0000000000000001 (0.0.0.1) to

0255025502550254 (255.255.255.254),

FF=Blank)

*Usable when the DHCP client setting is OFF

0174 Send/read secondly DNS (Domain Name

System) server address

( 0000000000000001 (0.0.0.1) to

0255025502550254 (255.255.255.254),

FF=Blank)

*Usable when the DHCP client setting is OFF

0175 see p. 18-12 Send/read network name when remotely

operating using the optional RS-BA1

(up to 15-character)

0176 00 or 01 Send/read the remote control setting

(00=OFF, 01=ON)

0177 000001 to

065535

Send/read the control port setting by

accessing from internet

(000001=1 to 065535=65535)

0178 000001 to

065535

Send/read the serial port setting by

accessing from internet

(000001=1 to 065535=65535)

0179 000001 to

065535

Send/read the audio port setting by

accessing from internet

(000001=1 to 065535=65535)

0180 00 or 01 Send/read the internet access line setting

( 00=FTTH (Fiber To The Home),

01=ADSL/CATV)

0181 see p. 18-12 Send/read Network radio name

(up to 16-character)

0182 00 or 01 Send/read scope indication during TX

(00=OFF, 01=ON)

0183 00 to 02 Send/read scope max. hold

(00=OFF, 01=ON)

0184 00 to 02 Send/read scope center frequency set

( 00=Filter center, 01=Carrier point center,

02=Carrier point center (Abs. Freq.))

0185 00 or 01 Send/read scope marker position setting

during fix type scope

(00=Filter center, 01 Carrier point)

0186 00 or 01 Send/read external monitor signal width

(00=Narrow, 01=Wide)

0187 00 to 03 Send/read averaging function for spectrum

scope

( 00=OFF,

01=Averaging the two observations,

02=Averaging the three observations,

03=Averaging the four observations)

0188 00 or 01 Send/read spectrum display type

(00=Fill, 01=Fill+Line)

0189 see p. 18-12 Send/read spectrum fill color

0190 see p. 18-12 Send/read spectrum line color

0191 see p. 18-12 Send/read spectrum color for peak hold

0192 00 or 01 Send/read waterfall set for spectrum scope

(00=OFF, 01=ON)

0193 00 to 02 Send/read waterfall speed

(00=Slow, 01=Mid, 02=Fast)

0194 00 to 02 Send/read waterfall height when expanded

scope is selected

(00=Small, 01=Mid, 02=Larger)

†

Send/read data

D Command table (continued)

18-8

CONTROL COMMAND

Cmd. Sub Cmd. Data Description

†

05 0195 00 to 09 Send/read peak color level set for waterfall of

the spectrum scope

( 00=Grid 1, 01=Grid 2, 02=Grid 3, 03=Grid 4,

04=Grid 5, 05=Grid 6, 06=Grid 7, 07=Grid 8,

08=Grid 9, 09=Grid 10)

0196 00 or 01 Send/read the Main and Sub scope screen

arrangement during dual scope

(00=Up and down, 01=Left and right)

0197 00 or 01 Send/read the Main/Sub scope access

setting linked to the [MAIN]/[SUB] key

operation

(00=OFF, 01=ON)

0198 see p. 18-12 Send/read scope edge 1 frequencies for 0.03

to 1.60 MHz band

0199 see p. 18-12 Send/read scope edge 2 frequencies for 0.03

to 1.60 MHz band

0200 see p. 18-12 Send/read scope edge 3 frequencies for 0.03

to 1.60 MHz band

0201 see p. 18-12 Send/read scope edge 1 frequencies for 1.60

to 2.00 MHz band

0202 see p. 18-12 Send/read scope edge 2 frequencies for 1.60

to 2.00 MHz band

0203 see p. 18-12 Send/read scope edge 3 frequencies for 1.60

to 2.00 MHz band

0204 see p. 18-12 Send/read scope edge 1 frequencies for 2.00

to 6.00 MHz band

0205 see p. 18-12 Send/read scope edge 2 frequencies for 2.00

to 6.00 MHz band

0206 see p. 18-12 Send/read scope edge 3 frequencies for 2.00

to 6.00 MHz band

0207 see p. 18-12 Send/read scope edge 1 frequencies for 6.00

to 8.00 MHz band

0208 see p. 18-12 Send/read scope edge 2 frequencies for 6.00

to 8.00 MHz band

0209 see p. 18-12 Send/read scope edge 3 frequencies for 6.00

to 8.00 MHz band

0210 see p. 18-12 Send/read scope edge 1 frequencies for 8.00

to 11.00 MHz band

0211 see p. 18-12 Send/read scope edge 2 frequencies for 8.00

to 11.00 MHz band

0212 see p. 18-12 Send/read scope edge 3 frequencies for 8.00

to 11.00 MHz band

0213 see p. 18-12 Send/read scope edge 1 frequencies for

11.00 to 15.00 MHz band

0214 see p. 18-12 Send/read scope edge 2 frequencies for

11.00 to 15.00 MHz band

0215 see p. 18-12 Send/read scope edge 3 frequencies for

11.00 to 15.00 MHz band

0216 see p. 18-12 Send/read scope edge 1 frequencies for

15.00 to 20.00 MHz band

0217 see p. 18-12 Send/read scope edge 2 frequencies for

15.00 to 20.00 MHz band

0218 see p. 18-12 Send/read scope edge 3 frequencies for

15.00 to 20.00 MHz band

0219 see p. 18-12 Send/read scope edge 1 frequencies for

20.00 to 22.00 MHz band

0220 see p. 18-12 Send/read scope edge 2 frequencies for

20.00 to 22.00 MHz band

0221 see p. 18-12 Send/read scope edge 3 frequencies for

20.00 to 22.00 MHz band

0222 see p. 18-12 Send/read scope edge 1 frequencies for

22.00 to 26.00 MHz band

0223 see p. 18-12 Send/read scope edge 2 frequencies for

22.00 to 26.00 MHz band

0224 see p. 18-12 Send/read scope edge 3 frequencies for

22.00 to 26.00 MHz band

0225 see p. 18-12 Send/read scope edge 1 frequencies for

26.00 to 30.00 MHz band

0226 see p. 18-12 Send/read scope edge 2 frequencies for

26.00 to 30.00 MHz band

0227 see p. 18-12 Send/read scope edge 3 frequencies for

26.00 to 30.00 MHz band

0228 see p. 18-12 Send/read scope edge 1 frequencies for

30.00 to 45.00 MHz band

Cmd. Sub Cmd. Data Description

†

05 0229 see p. 18-12 Send/read scope edge 2 frequencies for

30.00 to 45.00 MHz band

0230 see p. 18-12 Send/read scope edge 2 frequencies for

30.00 to 45.00 MHz band

0231 see p. 18-12 Send/read scope edge 1 frequencies for

45.00 to 60.00 MHz band

0232 see p. 18-12 Send/read scope edge 2 frequencies for

45.00 to 60.00 MHz band

0233 see p. 18-12 Send/read scope edge 3 frequencies for

45.00 to 60.00 MHz band

0234 00 or 01 Send/read the voice 1st menu.

(00=VOICE-Root, 01=VOICE-PLAY)

0235 00 or 01 Send/read the auto monitor function setting

when transmitting a recorded voice memory

(00=OFF, 01=ON)

0236 01 to 15 Send/read the repeat interval to transmit the

recorded voice audio

(01=1 sec. to 15=15 sec.)

0237 00 or 01 Send/read the QSO recording device setting

(00=SD card, 01=USB flash drive)

0238 00 or 01 Send/read the recording mode.

(00=TX&RX, 01=RX Only)

0239 00 or 01 Send/read recording TX audio for the QSO

recorder

(00=Microphone audio, 01=TX monitor audio)

0240 00 or 01 Send/read the squelch relation to recording

RX audio for the QSO recorder

(00=Always, 01=Squelch Auto)

0241 00 or 01 Send/read the QSO record file split function

setting (00=OFF, 01=ON)

0242 00 or 01 Send/read the PTT Automatic Recording

function setting (00=OFF, 01=ON)

0243 00 to 03 Send/read the RX audio recording status for

the PTT Automatic Recording function

( 00=OFF (records no RX audio),

01=Records the RX audio just before 5 sec.,

02=Records the RX audio just before 10 sec.,

03=Records the RX audio just before 15 sec.

)

0244 00 to 03 Send/read QSO PLAY Skip time

(00=3 sec., 01=5 sec., 02=10 sec., 03=30 sec.)

0245 05 to 30 Send/read the instant record time when

[REC] is pushed

(05=5 sec. to 30=30 sec.)

0246 03 to 10 Send/read the instant playback time when

[PLAY] is pushed

(03=3 sec. to 10=10 sec.)

0247 00 Normal selection for contest number style

01 “190→ANO” selection for contest number

style

02 “190→ANT” selection for contest number

style

03 “90→NO” selection for contest number style

04 “90→NT” selection for contest number style

0248 01 to 08 Send/read count up trigger channel

( 01=M1, 02=M2, 03=M3, 04=M4, 05=M5,

06=M6, 07=M7, 08=M8)

0249 0001 to

9999

Send/read present number

(0001=1 to 9999=9999)

0250 01 to 60 Send/read CW keyer repeat time

(01=1 sec. to 60=60 sec.)

0251 28 to 45 Send/read CW keyer dot/dash ratio

(28=1:1:2.8 to 45=1:1:4.5)

0252 00 to 03 Send/read rise time

( 00=2 msec., 01=4 msec., 02=6 msec.,

03=8 msec.)

0253 00 or 01 Send/read paddle polarity

(00=Normal, 01=Reverse)

0254 00 to 02 Send/read keyer type

(00=Straight, 01=Bug-key, 02=ELEC-Key)

0255 00 or 01 Send/read mic. up/down keyer set

(00=OFF, 01=ON)

†

Send/read data

D Command table (continued)

18-9

CONTROL COMMAND

Cmd. Sub Cmd. Data Description

†

05 0256 00 to 03 Send/read averaging function for RTTY FFT

scope

( 00=OFF,

01=Averaging the two observations,

02=Averaging the three observations,

03=Averaging the four observations)

0257 see p. 18-12 Send/read RTTY FFT scope waveform color

0258 00 or 01 Send/read RTTY decode USOS

(00=OFF, 01=ON)

0259 00 or 01 Send/read RTTY decode new line code

(00=CR,LF,CR+LF, 01=CR+LF)

0260 00 to 02 Send/read RTTY diddle

(00=OFF, 01=Blank, 02=LTRS (Letter code))

0261 00 or 01 Send/read RTTY TX USOS

(00=OFF, 01=ON)

0262 00 or 01 Send/read RTTY auto CR+LF by TX using

the [F12] key on the keyboard

(00=OFF, 01=ON)

0263 00 or 01 Send/read RTTY time stamp set

(00=OFF, 01=ON)

0264 00 or 01 Send/read clock selection for RTTY time

stamp (0=Local time, 1=CLOCK2)

0265 00 or 01 Send/read RTTY frequency stamp

(00=OFF, 01=ON)

0266 see p. 18-12 Send/read received RTTY text font color

0267 see p. 18-12 Send/read transmitted RTTY text font color

0268 see p. 18-12 Send/read RTTY time stamp text font color

0269 see p. 18-12 Send/read text font color in RTTY TX buffer

0270 00 or 01 Send/read the RTTY log function

(00=OFF, 01=ON)

0271 00 or 01 Send/read the file saving format for the

RTTY log (00=Text, 01=HTML)

0272 00 or 01 Send/read the file saving memory device for

the RTTY log

(00=SD card, 01=USB flash drive)

0273 00 to 03 Send/read averaging function for PSK FFT

scope

( 00=OFF,

01=Averaging the two observations,

02=Averaging the three observations,

03=Averaging the four observations)

0274 see p. 18-12 Send/read PSK FFT scope waveform color

0275 00 or 01 Set/read PSK AFC function tuning range

(00=±8 Hz, 01=±15 Hz)

0276 00 or 01 Send/read PSK time stamp set

(00=OFF, 01=ON)

0277 00 or 01 Send/read clock selection for PSK time

stamp (0=Local time, 1=CLOCK2)

0278 00 or 01 Send/read PSK frequency stamp

(00=OFF, 01=ON)

0279 see p. 18-12 Send/read received PSK text font color

0280 see p. 18-12 Send/read transmitted PSK text font color

0281 see p. 18-12 Send/read PSK time stamp text font color

0282 see p. 18-12 Send/read text font color in PSK TX buffer

0283 00 or 01 Send/read the PSK log function

(00=OFF, 01=ON)

0284 00 or 01 Send/read the file saving format for the PSK

log (00=Text, 01=HTML)

0285 00 or 01 Send/read the file saving memory device for

the PSK log

(00=SD card, 01=USB flash drive)

0286 00 or 01 Send/read scan speed (00=Low, 01=High)

0287 00 or 01 Send/read scan resume (00=OFF, 01=ON)

0288 00 or 01 Send/read audio FFT scope display type

(00=Fill, 01=Fill+Line)

0289 see p. 18-12 Send/read the Audio FFT scope waveform

color

0290 00 or 01 Send/read the Audio FFT scope waterfall

display (00=OFF, 01=ON)

0291 see p. 18-12 Send/read the Audio Oscilloscope scope

waveform color

0292 see p. 18-13 Send/read antenna selection for 0.03 to

1.60 MHz band

Cmd. Sub Cmd. Data Description

†

05 0293 see p. 18-13 Send/read antenna selection for 1.60 to

2.00 MHz band

0294 see p. 18-13 Send/read antenna selection for 2.00 to

6.00 MHz band

0295 see p. 18-13 Send/read antenna selection for 6.00 to

8.00 MHz band

0296 see p. 18-13 Send/read antenna selection for 8.00 to

11.00 MHz band

0297 see p. 18-13 Send/read antenna selection for 11.00 to

15.00 MHz band

0298 see p. 18-13 Send/read antenna selection for 15.00 to

20.00 MHz band

0299 see p. 18-13 Send/read antenna selection for 20.00 to

22.00 MHz band

0300 see p. 18-13 Send/read antenna selection for 22.00 to

26.00 MHz band

0301 see p. 18-13 Send/read antenna selection for 26.00 to

30.00 MHz band

0302 see p. 18-13 Send/read antenna selection for 30.00 to

45.00 MHz band

0303 see p. 18-13 Send/read antenna selection for 45.00 to

60.00 MHz band

0304 00 or 01 Send/read antenna temporary memory set

(00=OFF, 01=ON)

0305 00 to 02 Send/read antenna selection

( 00=[ANT]: Auto/[RX-I/O]: Auto,

01=[ANT]: Auto/[RX-I/O]: Manual,

02=[ANT]: Manual/[RX-I/O]: Manual)

0306 00 or 01 Send/read usage for ANT2

(00=OFF, 01=TX/RX)

0307 00 or 01 Send/read usage for ANT3

(00=OFF, 01=TX/RX)

0308 00 to 02 Send/read usage for ANT4

(00=OFF, 01=TX/RX, 02= RX)

0309 00 to 20 Send/read VOX delay

(00=0.0 sec. to 20=2.0 sec.)

0310 00 to 03 Send/read VOX voice delay

( 00=OFF, 01=Short, 02=Mid., 03=Long)

0311 00 to 09 Send/read NB depth (00=1 to 09=10)

0312 0000 to

0255

Send/read NB width (0000=1 to 0255=100)

0313 00 or 01 Read the CI-V command link setting with

[REMOTE] for USB port

00=Link to [REMOTE],

01=Unlink from [REMOTE]

0314 00 or 01 MAIN/SUB band Tracking function is enable

or disabled.

00=MAIN/SUB Tracking function is disabled.

01=Assigns the function to the [MAIN] key

0315 00 or 01 Send/read the Waterfall Marker Auto-hide set

(00=OFF, 01=ON)

0316 00 or 01 Send/read the RC-28’s main dial function.

(00=Sub only, 01=Main/Sub)

0317 00 to 02 Send/read the Auto TS setting on the RC-

28’s main dial. (00=OFF, 01=Low, 02=High)

0318 00 or 01 Send/read the [TRANSMIT] key action on

the RC-28.

(00=Push to toggle, 01=Hold down to transmit)

0319 0000 to

0255

Send/read the Transmit voice level for the

VOICE TX function.

(0000=0% to 0255=100%)

06 see p. 18-12 Send/read DATA mode with filter set

07 00 or 01 Send/read 1.2 kHz filter calibration

(00=Stop, 01=Start)

08 00 to 02 Read 1.2 kHz filter calibration result

(00=Calibrating, 01=Succeeded, 01=Failed)

09 0000 to

0440

Send/read 1.2 kHz filter calibration adjusted

value (0000=0% to 0440=100%)

0A see p. 18-13 Send/read limited TX output power level for

the TX power limit function

0B 00 or 01 Send/read NTP server access

(00=Stop, 01=Start)

0C 00 to 02 Read NTP server access result

(00=Accessing, 01=Succeeded, 02=Failed)

†

Send/read data

18-10

CONTROL COMMAND

D Command table (continued)

Cmd. Sub Cmd. Data Description

†

00 see p. 18-13 Send/read repeater tone frequency

01 see p. 18-13 Set/read TSQL tone frequency

†

00 00 Send/read transceiver’s status (RX)

* When “CI-V Output (for ANT)” (Command:

1C 04) is set to “ON,” automatically outputs

when changed.

01 Send/read transceiver’s status (TX)

* When “CI-V Output (for ANT)” (Command:

1C 04) is set to “ON,” automatically outputs

when changed.

01 00 Send/read the antenna tuner OFF (through)

01 Send/read the antenna tuner ON

02 Send/read to tuning

02 00 Send/read transmit frequency monitor setting

OFF

01 Send/read transmit frequency monitor setting

03 see p. 18-11 Read transmit frequency

* When “CI-V Output (for ANT)” (Command:

1C 04) is set to “ON,” automatically outputs

when changed.

04 00 Send/read command to disable to output the

antenna controller status (frequency and so

on) from [REMOTE]

01 Send/read command to enable to output the

antenna controller status (frequency and so

on) from [REMOTE]

1E 00 Read number of available TX frequency

band

01 see p. 18-13 Read TX band edge frequencies

02 Read number of user-set TX frequency band

03 see p. 18-13

Send/read user-set TX band edge frequencies

21 00 see p. 18-13 Send/read RIT frequency

01 00 or 01 Send/read RIT setting (00=OFF, 01=ON)

02 00 or 01 Send/read ∂TX setting (00=OFF, 01=ON)

25 see p. 18-14 Send/read the Main or Sub band frequency

26 see p. 18-14 Send/read the selected operating mode and

filter

Cmd. Sub Cmd. Data Description

27 00 see p. 18-15 Read the Scope waveform data

* Only when “Scope ON/OFF status”

(Command: 27 10) and “Scope data output”

(Command: 27 20) are set to “ON,” outputs

the waveform data to the controller.

10 00 or 01 Send/read the Scope ON/OFF status

(00=Scope OFF, 01=Scope ON)

11 00 or 01

Send/read the Scope data output

(00=Output OFF, 01=Output ON)

* Only when “CI-V USB Port” is set to “Unlink

from [REMOTE]” and “CI-V USB Baud

Rate” is set to 115200 (bps), “Output ON” is

selectable.

12 00 or 01 Send/read the Main or Sub scope setting

(00=Main scope, 01=Sub scope)

13 00 or 01 Send/read the Single/Dual scope setting

(00=Single scope, 01=Dual scope)

14 see p. 18-15 Send/read the Scope Center mode or Fixed

mode setting

15 see p. 18-15 Send/read the span setting in the Center

mode Scope

16 see p. 18-15 Send/read the Edge number setting in the

Fixed mode Scope

17 see p. 18-15 Send/read the Scope hold function ON or

OFF

18 see p. 18-16 Send/read the Scope Attenuator setting

19 see p. 18-16 Send/read the Scope Reference level setting

1A see p. 18-16 Send/read the Sweep speed setting

1B 00 or 01 Send/read the Scope indication during TX in

the Center mode

(00=OFF, 01=ON)

1C 00 to 02 Send/read scope center frequency setting in

the Center mode

( 00=Filter center, 01=Carrier point center,

02=Carrier point center (Abs. Freq.))

1D see p. 18-16 Send/read the Scope VBW setting

1E see p. 18-16 Send/read the Scope Fixed edge frequencies

28 00 00 to 08 Transmits the Voice TX memory content

(00=T1 to 08=T8, 0x00=Cancel TX)

18-11

CONTROL COMMAND

D Data content description

• Operating frequency

Command: 00, 03, 05, 1C 03

XXXXX

10 Hz digit:

0–9

1 Hz digit:

0–9

1 kHz digit:

0–9

100 Hz digit:

0–9

100 kHz digit:

0–9

10 kHz digit:

0–9

10 MHz digit:

0–6

1 MHz digit:

0–9

1000 MHz digit:

(Fix

ed)

100 MHz digit:

(Fix

ed)

• Operating mode

Command: 01, 04, 06

Filter setting (w) can be skipped with command 01

and 06. In that case, “FIL1” is selected with command

01 and the default filter setting of the operating mode

is selected with command 06, automatically.

XXXX

q Operating mode w Filter setting

00: LSB 05: FM 01: FIL1

01: USB 07: CW-R 02: FIL2

02: AM 08: RTTY-R 03: FIL3

03: CW 12: PSK

04: RTTY 13: PSK-R

• Memory keyer content

Command: 1A 02

q: Channel data

01： M1 05：

02： M2 06：

03: M3 07: M7

04: M4 08: M8

w–&1: Text data

X X X

……

X X

- Character codes

Character ASCII code Description

0–9 30–39 Numbers

A–Z 41–5A Letters

space 20 Word space

/ 2F Symbol

? 3F Symbol

, 2C Symbol

. 2E Symbol

@ 40 Symbol

^ 5E e.g., to send

BT, enter ^4254



2A Inserts contest number (can be

used for 1 channel only)

• Band stacking register

Command: 1A 01

XXXX

q Frequency band codes

Code Freq. band Frequency range (unit: MHz)

01 1.8 1.800000–1.999999

02 3.5 3.400000–4.099999

03 7 6.900000–7.499999

04 10 9.900000–10.499999

05 14 13.900000–14.499999

06 18 17.900000–18.499999

07 21 20.900000–21.499999

08 24 24.400000–25.099999

09 28 28.000000–29.999999

10 50 50.000000–54.000000

11 GENE Other than above

w Register codes

Code Registered number

01 1 (latest)

02 2

03 3 (oldest)

For example, when sending/reading the oldest

contents in the 21 MHz band, the code “0703” is

used.

When sending the contents, the following code should

be added after code w.

e−ui, o!0!1−!3 !4−!6

XX... XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX

q, w

e–u Operating frequency setting

See “• Operating frequency.”

i, o Operating mode setting

See “• Operating mode.”

!0 Data mode and tone setting

1 byte data (XX)

0: OFF, 1: TONE, 2: TSQL

0: OFF, 1: DATA 1, 2: DATA 2, 3: DATA 3

!1–!3 Repeater tone frequency setting

!4–!6 Tone squelch frequency setting

See “• Repeater tone/tone squelch setting.”

• Clock offset time settings

Command: 1A 050099, 050101

Shift direction

00: + (plus)

01: − (minus)

Offset time

0000−1400

XXX XX

18-12

CONTROL COMMAND

D Data content description (continued)

• Offset frequency settings

Command: 1A 050114, 050115, 050120

1 kHz digit: 0–9

100 Hz digit: 0 (fixed)

100 kHz digit: 0–9

10 kHz digit: 0–9

10 MHz digit: 0–9

†

1 MHz digit: 0–9

Direction:

00=+ direction

01=– direction

0XXXXXX

*No need to enter for transverter offset frequency setting.

†

Transverter offset only, fix to ‘0’ for split offset setting.

• Color settings

Command: 1A 050189, 050190, 050191, 050257,

050266, 050267, 050268, 050269,

050274, 050279, 050280, 050281,

050282, 050289, 050291

0 XXX0XXX0 XXX

werty

R (Red)

0000–0255

G (Green)

0000–0255

B (Blue)

0000–0255

• Bandscope edge frequency settings

Command: 1A 050198~050233

1 kHz: 0–9

100 Hz: 0 (fixed)

100 kHz: 0–9

10 kHz: 0–9

10 MHz: 0–6

1 MHz: 0–9

1 kHz: 0–9

100 Hz: 0 (fixed)

100 kHz: 0–9

10 kHz: 0–9

10 MHz: 0–6

1 MHz: 0–9

X0XXXXX0XXXX

werty

Lower edge Higher edge

• Data mode with filter width settings

Command: 1A 06

X XXX

00=Data mode OFF

01=FIL1

02=FIL2

03=FIL3

00=Data mode OFF*

01=Data mode 1 (D1)

02=Data mode 2 (D2)

03=Data mode 3 (D3)

* When “00” is set, set “00” in w

• Codes for the memory name, opening message,

NTP server address, CLOCK2 name, network

name, and network radio name contents

- Character codes— Letters

Character ASCII code Character ASCII code

A–Z 41–5A a-z 61–7A

- Character codes— Symbols

Character ASCII code Character ASCII code

! 21 # 23

$ 24 % 25

& 26 \ 5C

? 3F ” 22

’ 27 ` 60

^ 5E + 2B

− 2D



/ 2F . 2E

, 2C : 3A

; 3B = 3D

< 3C > 3E

( 28 ) 29

[ 5B ] 5D

{ 7B } 7D

| 7C _ 5F

¯ 7E @ 40

Command Set item/usable characters

1A 00 Memory name

All characters are usable.

1A 050094 Opening message

Upper case letters, numbers, some symbols (−

/ . @) and space are usable.

1A 050098 NTP server address

Upper and lower case letters, numbers, and

some symbols ( . _ ) are usable.

1A 050102 CLOCK2 name

All characters are usable.

1A 05 0175 Network name

Upper case letters, numbers, and some

symbols (! # $ % & " ` ^ + – . , ; = ( ) [ ] { } _ ¯

@) are usable.

1A 05 0181 Network radio name

Upper and lower case letters, numbers, some

symbols (! # $ % & ? " ' ` ^ + –  / . , : ; = < > (

) [ ] { } ¦ _ ¯ @) and space are usable.

• RX HPF/LPF setting for each operating mode

Command: 1A 050001, 050004, 050007, 050010,

050011, 050012

X X X X

LPF (Upper edge)

HPF (Lower edge)

*The value of the HPF should be smaller than the LPF.

HPF

00: Through

01~20: 100~2000 Hz

LPF

05~24: 500~2400 Hz

25: Through

18-13

CONTROL COMMAND

• Repeater tone/tone squelch frequency settings

Command: 1B 00, 1B 01

100Hz digit: 0–2

10 Hz digit: 0–9

1 Hz digit: 0–9

0.1 Hz digit: 0–9

Fixed digit: 0*

00X

*Not necessary when setting a frequency.

• SSB transmission passband width settings

Command: 1A 050019, 050020, 050021

Higher edge: 0=2500 Hz

1=2700 Hz

2=2800 Hz

3=2900 Hz

Lower edge: 0=100 Hz

1=200 Hz

2=300 Hz

3=500 Hz

• Antenna memory settings

Command: 1A 050292~050303

Data

Antenna selection

for TX for RX

00 ANT1

01 ANT2

02 ANT3

03 ANT4

04* ANT1 ANT4

05* ANT2 ANT4

06* ANT3 ANT4

*“RX” should be selected for ANT4.

• RIT frequency settings

Command: 21 00

10 Hz: 0–9

100 Hz: 0–9

1 Hz: 0–9

1 kHz: 0–9

XXXX XX

00: + (plus)

01: – (minus)

• Band edge frequency settings

Command: 02*, 1E 01, 1E 03

XXX

w ertyuio!0!1!2

XXXXXXX002DXXXXXXXX00

10 Hz digit: 0–9

1 Hz digit: 0–9

1 kHz digit: 0–9

100 Hz digit: 0–9

100 kHz digit: 0–9

10 kHz digit: 0–9

10 MHz digit: 0–6

1 MHz digit: 0–9

1000 MHz digit: 0 (fixed)

100 MHz digit: 0 (fixed)

10 Hz digit: 0–9

1 Hz digit: 0–9

1 kHz digit: 0–9

100 Hz digit: 0–9

100 kHz digit: 0–9

10 kHz digit: 0–9

10 MHz digit: 0–6

1 MHz digit: 0–9

1000 MHz digit: 0 (fixed)

100 MHz digit: 0 (fixed)

Separator (fixed)

Lower edge Higher edge

Edge number*: 01–30

*Edge number setting is not necessary with command 02.

• Codes for CW message contents

Command: 17 Up to 30 characters

To send CW messages, the following character codes

are used.

• “FF” stops sending CW messages.

• “^” is used to transmit a string of characters with

no inter-character space.

• Transmit output power settings for transmit

output power limiting

Command: 1A 0A

X X X X X X X X

Frequency band code

01: 1.8 MHz 07: 18 MHz

02: 3.5 MHz 08: 21 MHz

03: 5 MHz 09: 24 MHz

04: 7 MHz 10: 28 MHz

05: 10 MHz 11: 50 MHz

06: 14 MHz

Output power limit

0005: 5 W~0200: 200 W

01: DATA OFF

02: DATA ON

Character ASCII code

0–9 30–39

A–Z 41–5A

a–z 61–7A

/ 2F

? 3F

. 2E

− 2D

, 2C

: 3A

Character ASCII code

’ 27

( 28

) 29

= 3D

+ 2B

” 22

@ 40

Space 20

18-14

CONTROL COMMAND

D Data content description (continued)

• Memory content setting

Command: 1A 00

−

!0 !1 !2

−

!4 !5

−

XXX ... ...XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXX XX

, w!

−

q, w Memory channel numbers

0001–0099: Memory channel 1 to 99

0100: Programmed scan edge P1

0101: Programmed scan edge P2

To clear the memory channel contents, add the

code “FF” after the memory channel number.

(instead of the data e to @7)

This completes the memory clearing.

e Select memory setting

00 : OFF

01 : 1

02 : 2

03 : 3

r~i Operating frequency setting

See “• Operating frequency.”

o, !0 Operating mode setting

See “• Operating mode.”

!1 Data mode and tone type settings

0: OFF, 1: TONE, 2: TSQL

0: OFF, 1: DATA 1, 2: DATA 2, 3: DATA 3

!2~!4 Repeater tone frequency setting

!5~!7 Tone squelch frequency setting

See “• Repeater tone/tone squelch settings.”

!8~@7 Memory name settings

Up to 10 characters.

See “• Codes for the memory name, opening message,

NTP server address, CLOCK2 name, network name,

and network radio name contents.”

• Main or Sub band's frequency settings

Command : 25

X X X X X X X X X X 0 0

00: MAIN

01: SUB

Operating frequency data

(See p. 18-11)

• Main or Sub band's operating mode and filter

settings

Command : 26

Both data and filter settings can be skipped. In that

case, “DATA OFF” and the default filter setting of the

operating mode is automatically selected.

X X X X X XX X

q Operating mode setting

Filter setting

w Data mode setting

00: MAIN

01: SUB

q Operating mode w Data mode e Filter

00: LSB 05: FM 00: Data mode OFF 01: FIL1

01: USB 07: CW-R 01: Data mode 1 (D1) 02: FIL2

02: AM 08: RTTY-R 02: Data mode 2 (D2) 03: FIL3

03: CW 12: PSK 03: Data mode 3 (D3)

04: RTTY 13: PSK-R

18-15

CONTROL COMMAND

• Scope waveform data

Command: 27 00

Outputs the waveform data to the controller

X XX XX X X XX XX X X X ...... X X

q w e r t y u

q Main or Sub scope data

• 00=Main scope, 01=Sub scope

w Order of division data (Current)

e Division number (01 or 15)

When data is sent to the controller through the

LAN port, all data is sent together. However, when

the data is sent through the USB port, the data is

divided by 15 and sent in sequential order.

Division number Data length

LAN 1 704

USB 15

1st data 15

2nd or

later data

15th data 42

The 1st data sends only the wave information (q ~

y) without the waveform data (u).

The 2nd or later data sends the minimum wave

information (q ~ e) with waveform data (u).

r Center or Fixed mode data

• 00 = Center mode scope, 01 = Fixed mode scope

t Waveform information

The waveform information is different between

Center mode and fixed mode.

• In the Center mode: Center frequency and span are

sent

See page 18-11 for Frequency data, and the Scope

span settings to the right.

• In the Fixed mode: Lower edge and higher edge fre-

quencies are sent

See page 18-16 for Scope Fixed edge frequency set-

tings e ~ !2.

y Out of range information

• 00 = In range, 01 = Out of range

If the scope data is out of range, the waveform

data (u) is omitted.

u Waveform data

The transceiver outputs the drawn waveform data.

The data range or data length of the waveform data

is judged by the controller. (The data range is basi-

cally the same as the display size of the scope on

the controller.)

Data range 0 ~ 136

Data length 689

• Center/Fixed mode settings

Command: 27 14

X X X X

00=Center mode

01=Fixed mode

00=Main scope

01=Sub scope

• Scope span settings

Command: 27 15

X X 0 0 X X X X 0 0 0 0

00=Main scope

01=Sub scope

1 kHz digit: 0, 2, 5

100 Hz digit: 0, 5

100 kHz digit: 0, 1, 2, 5

10 kHz digit: 0, 1, 2, 5

q Selectable Span

Span (Hz)

2500 2.5 k

5000 5 k

10000 10 k

25000 25 k

50000 50 k

100000 100 k

250000 250 k

500000 500 k

• Scope Edge number settings

Command: 27 16

X X X X

01=Edge 1

02=Edge 2

03=Edge 3

00=Main scope

01=Sub scope

• Scope Hold settings

Command: 27 17

X X X X

00=Hold OFF

01=Hold ON

00=Main scope

01=Sub scope

18-16

PANEL DESCRIPTION

D Data content description (continued)

• Scope Attenuator settings

Command: 27 18

X X X X

00=ATT OFF

10=10 dB

20=20 dB

30=30 dB

00=Main scope

01=Sub scope

• Scope Reference level settings

Command: 27 19

Common settings for the Main and Sub scopes

X X X X X 0 X X

00= + (plus)

01= – (minus)

00=Main scope

01=Sub scope

10 dB digit: 0, 1, 2

1 dB digit: 0–9

0.1 dB digit: 0, 5

0.01 dB digit: 0

(Fixed)

• Adjustable range: –20.0 dB ~ +20.0 dB in 0.5 dB steps

• Scope Sweep speed settings

Command: 27 1A

X X X X

00=FAST

01=MID

02=SLOW

00=Main scope

01=Sub scope

• Scope VBW (Video Band Width) settings

Command: 27 1D

Common settings for the Main and Sub scopes

X X X X

00=Narrow

01=Wide

00=Main scope

01=Sub scope

• Scope Fixed edge frequency settings

Command: 27 1E

0 XX X X

w e r t y u i o !0 !1 !2

X X X X X X X 0 0 X X X X X X X X 0 0

10 Hz digit: 0–9

1 Hz digit: 0–9

1 kHz digit: 0–9

100 Hz digit: 0–9

100 kHz digit: 0–9

10 kHz digit: 0–9

10 MHz digit: 0–6

1 MHz digit: 0–9

1000 MHz digit: 0 (fixed)

100 MHz digit: 0 (fixed)

10 Hz digit: 0–9

1 Hz digit: 0–9

1 kHz digit: 0–9

100 Hz digit: 0–9

100 kHz digit: 0–9

10 kHz digit: 0–9

10 MHz digit: 0–6

1 MHz digit: 0–9

1000 MHz digit: 0 (fixed)

100 MHz digit: 0 (fixed)

Frequency range

Lower edge Higher edge

Edge number: 01–03

• Entry of 100 Hz or smaller digits are ignored.

q Selectable Frequency ranges

Data Frequency range Data Frequency range

01 0.03 – 1.60 MHz 07 15.00 – 20.00 MHz

02 1.60 – 2.00 MHz 08 20.00 – 22.00 MHz

03 2.00 – 6.00 MHz 09 22.00 – 26.00 MHz

04 6.00 – 8.00 MHz 10 26.00 – 30.00 MHz

05 8.00 – 11.00 MHz 11 30.00 – 45.00 MHz

06 11.00 – 15.00 MHz 12 45.00 – 60.00 MHz

w Selectable Edge number: 01 = 1, 02 = 2, 03 = 3

19-1

SPECIFICATIONS AND OPTIONS Section 19

 Specifications …………………………………………………………… 19-2

D General ……………………………………………………………… 19-2

D Transmitter …………………………………………………………… 19-2

D Receiver ……………………………………………………………… 19-3

D Antenna tuner ………………………………………………………… 19-3

 Options ………………………………………………………………… 19-4

19-2

SPECIFICATIONS AND OPTIONS

 Specifications

D General

• Frequency coverage (unit: MHz):

Receiver 0.030000–60.000000*

Transmitter 0.135700–0.137800*

, 1.800000–1.999999*

3.500000–3.999999*

, 5.255000 – 5.405000*

7.000000–7.300000*

, 10.100000–10.150000*

14.000000–14.350000*

, 18.068000–18.168000*

21.000000–21.450000*

, 24.890000–24.990000*

28.000000–29.700000*

, 50.000000–54.000000*

Some frequency ranges are not guaranteed.

Depending on versions.

• Operating mode: USB/LSB (J3E), CW (A1A), RTTY (F1B),

PSK31/63 (G1B), AM (A3E), FM (F3E)

• Number of memory channels: 101 (99 regular, 2 scan edges)

• Antenna connectors: SO-239×4 (antenna impedance: 50 Ω)

• Operating temperature range: 0˚C to +50˚C, +32˚F to +122˚F

• Frequency stability: Less than ±0.05 ppm (approximately 5 minutes after from turn

the main power, [I/O], ON, 0–50˚C; 32–122˚F, 54.000000 MHz)

• Frequency resolution: 1 Hz (minimum)

• Power supply requirement: 85–265 V AC (universal input)

• Power consumption:

Power OFF Standby 15 VA typical (at 100 V AC)

Remote Standby 20 VA typical (at 100 V AC)

Receive Standby 150 VA typical

Maximum audio 150 VA typical

Transmit at 200 W 800 VA

• Dimensions (projections not included): 425 (W)×149 (H)×435 (D) mm, 16.7 (W)×5.9 (H)×17.1 (D) in

• Weight: Approximately 23.5 kg; 52 lb

• ACC 1 connectors: 8-pin DIN connector×2

• ACC 2 connectors: 7-pin DIN connector×2

• EXT-DISPLAY connector: DVI-I

• CI-V connector: 2-conductor 3.5 (d) mm (

⁄8″)

• KEYBOARD connector: USB

D Transmitter

• Transmit output power:

SSB, CW, RTTY, PSK, FM Less than 5–200 W

AM Less than 5–50 W

137 kHz band More than –20 dBm (Europe version only)

• Modulation system:

SSB P.S.N. modulation

AM Low power modulation

FM Phase modulation

• Spurious emission:

Harmonics More than 60 dB (HF bands)

More than 70 dB (50 MHz band)

Spurious (except harmonics) More than 50 dB (HF bands)

More than 70 dB (50 MHz band)

Out of band emission More than 40 dB (HF bands)

More than 60 dB (50 MHz band)

• Carrier suppression: More than 63 dB

• Unwanted side-band suppression: More than 70 dB

• ∂TX variable range: ±9.999 kHz

• Microphone connector: 8-pin connector (600 Ω)

• ELEC-KEY connector: 3-conductor 6.35 (d) mm (

⁄4″)

• KEY connector: 3-conductor 6.35 (d) mm (

⁄4″)

• RELAY connector: Phono (RCA)

• ALC connector: Phono (RCA)

All stated specifications are typical and subject to change without notice or obligation.

19-3

SPECIFICATIONS AND OPTIONS

D Receiver

• Receive system: Double conversion superheterodyne system

• Intermediate frequencies:

1st 64.455 MHz (Main band)

64.555 MHz (Sub band)

2nd 36 kHz

• Sensitivity for all versions:

SSB, CW, RTTY, PSK (BW=2.4 kHz, 10 dB S/N, Typical)

0.100– 1.799999 MHz 0.5 µV (pre-amp 1 ON)

1.800– 29.999999 MHz 0.16 µV (pre-amp 1 ON)

50.000– 54.000000 MHz 0.13 µV (pre-amp 2 ON)

AM (BW=6 kHz, 10 dB S/N, Typical)

0.100– 1.799999 MHz 6.3 µV (pre-amp 1 ON)

1.800– 29.999999 MHz 2 µV (pre-amp 1 ON)

50.000– 54.000000 MHz 1 µV (pre-amp 2 ON)

FM (BW=15 kHz, 12 dB SINAD, Typical)

28.000– 29.700000 MHz 0.5 µV (pre-amp 1 ON)

50.000– 54.000000 MHz 0.32 µV (pre-amp 2 ON)

• Sensitivity for the IC-7851 European versions:

SSB (BW=2.4 kHz, 12 dB SINAD)

1.800– 2.999999 MHz Less than 10 dBµV emf (pre-amp 1 ON)

3.000– 29.999999 MHz Less than 0 dBµV emf (pre-amp 1 ON)

50 MHz band Less than –6 dBµV emf (pre-amp 2 ON)

AM (BW=4 kHz, 60% modulation, 12 dB SINAD)

1.800– 2.999999 MHz Less than 16 dBµV emf (pre-amp 1 ON)

3.000– 29.999999 MHz Less than 6 dBµV emf (pre-amp 1 ON)

50 MHz band Less than 0 dBµV emf (pre-amp 2 ON)

FM (BW=7 kHz, 60% modulation, 12 dB SINAD)

28.000– 29.700000 MHz Less than 0 dBµV emf (pre-amp 1 ON)

50.000– 54.000000 MHz Less than –6 dBµV emf (pre-amp 2 ON)

• Selectivity (with optimum roofing filter):

SSB, RTTY (BW=2.4 kHz) More than 2.4 kHz/–3 dB

Less than 3.6 kHz/–60 dB

CW/RTTY/PSK (BW=500 Hz) More than 500 Hz/–3 dB

Less than 700 Hz/–60 dB

AM (BW=6 kHz) More than 6.0 kHz/–3 dB

Less than 15.0 kHz/–60 dB

FM (BW=15 kHz) More than 12.0 kHz/–6 dB

Less than 20.0 kHz/–60 dB

• Spurious and image rejection ratio: More than 70 dB

• Squelch sensitivity (pre-amp OFF):

SSB, CW, RTTY, PSK31/63 Less than 5.6 µV

FM Less than 1 µV

• RIT variable range: ±9.999 kHz

• Audio output power: More than 2.6 W

at 10% distortion with an 8 Ω load

• PHONES connector: 3-conductor 6.35 (d) mm (

⁄4″)

• EXT-SP connectors: 2-conductor 3.5 (d) mm (

⁄8″)/8 Ω×2 (for Main and Sub)

D Antenna tuner

• Matching impedance range: 16.7 to 150 Ω unbalanced (HF bands; VSWR better than 3:1)

20 to 125 Ω unbalanced (50 MHz band; VSWR better than 2.5:1)

• Minimum operating input: 8 W (HF bands)

15 W (50 MHz band)

• Tuning accuracy: VSWR 1.5:1 or less

• Insertion loss (after tuning) : Less than 1.0 dB

 Specifications (Continued)

19-4

SPECIFICATIONS AND OPTIONS

 Options

IC-PW1/EURO

/50

all Band

w linear

amplifier

Full-duty-cycle 1 kW linear amplifier including an automatic

antenna tuner. Has automatic tuning and band selection ca-

pability when used with an Icom transceiver. Full break-in

(QSK) operation. The amplifier/power supply unit and the

remote control unit are separate.

SP-34

eXternal speaKer

4 audio filters, headphone jack, can be connected to 2 trans-

ceivers.

• Input impedance: 8 Ω

• Max. input power: 5 W

SM-50

desKtop micropHone

Unidirectional, dynamic micro-

phone for base station operation.

Includes [UP]/[DOWN] switches, a

low cut switch and mic gain con-

trol.

CT-17

ci-v level converter

For remote transceiver control

using a PC. You can change fre-

quencies, operating mode, mem-

ory channels, etc. (software is not

included)

HM-36

Hand micropHone

Hand microphone equipped with

[UP]/[DOWN] switches.

SP-33

eXternal speaKer

Designed for base station operation.

• Input impedance: 8 Ω

• Maximum input power: 5 W

RS-BA1

ip remote control software

To remotely control radios using the RS-BA1, BE SURE

that you comply with your local regulations.

SM-30

desKtop micropHone

Unidirectional, electret microphone

for base station operation. Includes

a low cut switch and mic gain con-

trol.

RC-28

remote encoder

For operating the RS-BA1

(version 1.3 or later) or using as a

remote control dial to operate the

transceiver.

* The LCD display may have cosmetic imperfections that appear as small or dark spots. This is not a malfunction or defect, but

a normal characteristic of LCD displays.

Spurious signals may be received near the following frequencies. These are made in the internal circuit and does not indicate

a transceiver malfunction.

• 0.150 MHz, 1.049 MHz, 19.660 MHz and 24.576 MHz

Spurious waveforms may be displayed on the Spectrum scope screen regardless of the transceiver’s condition (Tx or Rx). They

are made in the scope circuit. This does not indicate a transceiver malfunction.

20-1

CONNECTOR INFORMATION Section 20

 ACC socket ……………………………………………………………… 20-2

 Microphone connector ………………………………………………… 20-3

 [ELEC-KEY] jack ……………………………………………………… 20-3

 [KEY] jack ……………………………………………………………… 20-3

 [EXT KEYPAD] jack …………………………………………………… 20-4

 [REF I/O] connector …………………………………………………… 20-4

 [X-VERTER] connector ………………………………………………… 20-4

 [RELAY] jack ……………………………………………………………20-4

 [METER] jack …………………………………………………………… 20-5

 [REMOTE] jack ………………………………………………………… 20-5

 [DC OUT] jack …………………………………………………………… 20-5

 [EXT-SP] jack ……………………………………………………………20-5

 [S/P DIF] jack …………………………………………………………… 20-5

 [RX-I/O] connector ……………………………………………………… 20-5

20-2

CONNECTOR INFORMATION



ACC socket

ACC 1

PIN No.

NAME DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATIONS

RTTY

Controls RTTY keying

“High level”:

“Low level”:

Output current:

More than 2.4 V

Less than 0.6 V

Less than 2 mA

2 GND

Connects to ground.

Connected in parallel with ACC 2 pin 2.

3 SEND*

Input/output

pin.

Connected in

parallel with

ACC 2 pin 3.

An external equipment

controls the transceiver.

When this pin goes low,

the transceiver transmits.

Input voltage (TX):

Input voltage (RX):

Current ﬂow:

–0.5 V to 0.8 V

2.0 V to 20.0 V

Maximum 20 mA

The pin outputs a low lev-

el signal when the trans-

ceiver transmits.

Output voltage (TX):

Current ﬂow:

Less than 0.1 V

Maximum 200 mA

4 MOD

Modulator input.

Connects to the internal modulator

circuit.

Input impedance:

Output level:

10 k

Ω

Approximately 100 mV rms

AF/ IF

(IF=12 kHz)

Fixed AF detector or receive IF (12 kHz)

signal output.

Output impedance:

Output level:

4.7 k

Ω

100–300 mV rms

6 SQLS

Squelch output.

Grounded when the squelch opens.

SQL open:

SQL closed:

Less than 0.3 V/5 mA

More than 6.0 V/100 µA

7 15V

15V output when power is ON.

Connected in parallel with ACC 2 pin 7.

Output current: Max. 1 A

8 ALC

ALC voltage input.

Connected in parallel with ACC 2 pin 5.

Input impedance:

Input level:

More than 10 k

Ω

–4 V to 0 V

ACC 2

PIN No.

NAME DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATIONS

8 V

Regulated 8 V output.

Output voltage:

Output current:

8 V ±0.3 V

Less than 10 mA

2 GND Same as ACC 1 pin 2.

3 SEND* Same as ACC 1 pin 3.

4 BAND

Band voltage output.

(Varies with the selected amateur band)

Output voltage: 0 V to 8.0 V

5 ALC Same as ACC 1 pin 8.

6 TRV

Activates [X-VERTER] input/output

when “HIGH” voltage is applied

Input impedance:

Input voltage:

More than 10 k

Ω

2 V to 13.8 V

7 15V Same as ACC 1 pin 7.

(Rear panel view)

Connects to external equipment or a personal com-

puter to control the external unit or to control the trans-

ceiver.

Sockets [A ACC1] and [A ACC2] output AF signals of

the Main band, sockets [B ACC1] and [B ACC2] output

AF signals of the Sub band.

(Rear panel view)

20-3

CONNECTOR INFORMATION

8 V DC is applied to pin 1 for microphone operation.

You can turned OFF if it is not necessary in the “MIC

Input DC Bias” item of the Others set screen. (p. 15-

16)

The circuit is used to output memory information in

4-channel memories. You can output desired memory

information such as that from a CW Memory keyer,

Voice memory, RTTY/PSK Memory to be transmitted.

Push a switch to send the memory information. Hold

down the switch for one second to repeatedly send the

memory information.

When you connect the external keypad, turn ON the

following items in the Other set screen. (p. 15-16)

(SET [F-7] > OTHERS[F-5])

• External Keypad (Voice)

• External Keypad (Keyer)

• External Keypad (RTTY)

• External Keypad (PSK)

NOTE: You cannot transmit the CW memory keyer

and Voice memory from T5 to T8, the RTTY memory

from RT5 to RT8, or the PSK memory from PT5 to

PT8.



Microphone connector

PIN No. DESCRIPTION

Microphone input (Impedance: 600 Ω)

+8 V DC output （Max. 10 mA）

Up: Ground Down: Ground through 470 Ω

“Low” level when the squelch opens.

PTT

PTT ground

Microphone ground

AF output (varies with [AF])

q Microphone input

w +8 V DC output

e Frequency up/down

r Squelch switch (Main band)

t PTT

y GND (PTT ground)

u GND

　 (Microphone ground)

i AF output (Main band)



[ELEC-KEY] jack

Connect to a CW paddle.

You can change the paddle activation in the “Keyer

Type” item of the Keyer CW-Key screen.

([KEYER [F-3]) > [EXIT/SET] > CW KEY [F-4] > Keyer

Type)



[KEY] jack

Connect to a CW straight key or the output of an exter-

nal electronic keyer.

PINe

PINy

1.5kø

2.2kø

4.7kø

S1S2S3S4

External Keypad

MIC

(Front view)

[MIC]

connector

(dot)

(com)

(dash)

(Front panel view)

20-4

CONNECTOR INFORMATION



[EXT KEYPAD] jack

The circuit is used to output memory content in 8 chan-

nel memories. You can output desired memory content

such as CW Memory keyer, Voice memory, RTTY/PSK

Memory to be transmitted. Push a switch to send the

memory information. Hold down the switch for 1 sec-

ond to repeatedly send the memory information.

When you connect the external keypad, turn ON the

following items in the Others set screen. (p. 15-16)

(SET [F-7] > OTHERS[F-5])

• External Keypad (Voice)

• External Keypad (Keyer)

• External Keypad (RTTY)

• External Keypad (PSK)

Mute switch: Mutes both transmission and reception

when the switch is turned ON.



[REF I/O] connector

This connector outputs or inputs a 10 MHz reference

signal.

• Input/Output impedance: 50 Ω

• Output level: Approximately –10 dBm

• Required input level: Approximately –10 dBm

• Output signal stability: ±0.05 ppm (0 ~ +50°C)

If you use an external reference signal,

set to “IN” in the “REF IN/OUT” item of the

ACC set screen.

You can adjust the internal Reference Signal frequen-

cy in the “REF Adjust” item of the ACC set screen.

(SET [F-7] > ACC [F-2] > REF Adjust)



[RELAY] jack

Goes to ground when transmitting to con-

trol an external non-Icom linear ampliﬁer.

You can select either mechanical relay or

semi-conductor MOS-FET control.

Speciﬁcations

• Mechanical relay (Reed Relay):

16 V DC/Less than 0.5 A

• MOS-FET: Less than 250 V/ Less than 250 mA

You can change the control in the “SEND Relay Type”

item of the ACC set screen.

(SET [F-7] > ACC [F-2] > SEND Relay Type)

When the SEND terminal controls the inductive load

(such as a relay), a counter-electromotive force can

cause the transceiver’s malfunction or damage. To pre-

vent this, we recommend adding a switching diode,

such as an “1SS133,” on the load side of the circuit to

the counter-electromotive force.



[X-VERTER] connector

You can connect your transverter unit

through the connector.

• Input/output impedance:

50 Ω

• Output level: Approximately –20 dBm or more

You can change the transverter function in the “Trans-

verter Function” item of the Others set screen.

You can also adjust the offset frequency in the “Trans-

verter Offset” item of the Others set screen.

(SET [F-7] > OTHERS [F-5] > Transverter Offset)

1.5kø

2.2kø

4.7kø

1.5kø

2.2kø

4.7kø

USER BOX

External Keypad

Mute switch

e SEND

15 V

ACC 1/2

sockets

Relay

Switching diode

To a

non-Icom

linear amplifier

[Example]

20-5

CONNECTOR INFORMATION



[METER] jack

Connects to an external meter.

• Output impedance: 4.7 kΩ

• Output voltage can be adjusted to 5 V maximum

You can adjust the output voltage with the “External

Meter Level (M)” for the Main band and “External me-

ter Level (S)” item for the Sub band in the ACC set

mode.

(SET [F-7] > ACC [F-2])



[EXT-SP] jack

Connects an external speaker.

• Output impedance: 4 ~ 8 Ω

• Output level: More than 2.6 W at 10%

distortion with an 8 Ω load.



[S/P DIF] jack

Inputs/Outputs digital audio signal through an optic ﬁ-

ber cable for transmit modulation or AF output.

• Sampling rate: 48 kHz/24 bit (Stereo output)

• L side: Output of the Main band

• R side: Output of the Sub band



[RX-I/O] connector

Connects an external preamp or low pass ﬁlter etc. for

your operation needs. RX ANT IN/OUT must be acti-

vated in the ANT screen.



[REMOTE] jack

Used for computer control and transceive

operation. The optional CT-17 is required

when connecting a PC to [REMOTE].



[DC OUT] jack

Outputs regulated 15 V DC.

• Output voltage: Approximately 15 V with no load

Approximately 14 V with a load

• Current capacity: Maximum 1 A

+ _

ct- 17

9–15 V DC

mini plug cable

Receiver

Transmitter

[RX ANT]

OUT

Transmit/Receive

switching circuit

ANT

FILTER

[Example]

Sub band meter Main band meter

I-1

INDEX

Symbol

∂F scan ................................................................12-9

∂TX function ...........................................................8-5

Monitor function .................................................8-5

Number

1⁄4 tuning step function ...........................................4-9

1.2 kHz Filter calibration ......................................... 7-8

137 kHz band operation .........................................5-8

5 MHz frequency band operation .........................4-18

ABOUT THE SUPPLIED CD .....................................iv

About the VOX function ..........................................8-2

ACC set screen .............................................2-8, 15-6

ACC socket ...........................................................20-2

ACC1 ...............................................................20-2

ACC2 ...............................................................20-2

Advanced connections ...........................................3-5

AFC/NET function .................................................5-28

AGC

AGC function control .........................................7-4

AGC time constant ............................................7-4

Setting the AGC time constant preset value ......7-4

AM mode

Operating AM or FM ........................................ 5-36

Antenna connection and selection ........................13-2

Antenna Memory .................................................. 10-4

Antenna memory settings .....................................13-3

Antenna selection mode ....................................... 13-5

Antenna tuner ..............................................13-7, 19-3

Using the Antenna tuner operation ..................13-7

If the tuner cannot tune the antenna ...............13-8

Antenna type ...............................................2-16, 13-4

Selecting the antenna type ..............................13-4

APF (Audio Peak Filter) operation .......................... 5-6

Attenuator ............................................................... 7-2

Audio scope screen .............................................. 6-15

AUDIO SCOPE SET ..........................................2-6

Audio scope set mode ..................................... 6-16

FFT Scope

FFT Scope Waterfall Display ......................6-16

FFT Scope Waveform Color .......................6-16

FFT Scope Waveform Type ........................6-16

Oscilloscope

Oscilloscope Waveform Color .....................6-16

Audio level ..............................................................4-4

Automatic transmission/reception setting ....5-18, 5-30

Auto notch function ...............................................7-13

Auto tuning step function ........................................ 4-8

Averaging ..............................................................6-10

Band edge warning beep......................................4-15

Entering the user band edge ........................... 4-16

User band edge ...............................................4-15

Band stacking registers ..........................................4-6

Band selection

Selecting the Main and Sub bands ....................4-5

BPSK and QPSK modes ......................................5-27

BPSK31 and BPSK63 modes ...............................5-27

Break-in function .....................................................8-4

Full break-in operation .......................................8-4

Semi break-in operation ....................................8-4

Calibration the Frequency (approximate) .............16-4

Capture list screen ..............................................10-10

Checking the ﬁrmware version .............................17-2

Checking the repeater input signal .......................5-37

CI-V

CI-V Address ...................................................10-4

CI-V connection ...............................................18-2

Command table ............................................... 18-3

Data content description ................................18-10

Data format ......................................................18-2

Preparing .........................................................18-2

Cleaning ...............................................................16-7

Clock

Entering the CLOCK2 Name ........................... 14-3

Selecting the CLOCK2 Function .....................14-3

Setting the CLOCK2 UTC Offset ..................... 14-3

Setting the Current time ..................................14-2

Setting the Date ...............................................14-2

Clock backup battery replacement .......................16-9

Conﬁrming programmed memory channels .........11-3

Connecting a non-Icom linear ampliﬁer .................. 3-7

Connecting antenna ...............................................3-3

Connecting the IC-PW1/EURO ..............................3-7

Connections

Advanced connections ......................................3-5

Required connections ........................................3-4

Connector

Microphone connector .....................................20-3

[REF I/O] connector .........................................20-4

[RX-I/O] connector ...........................................20-5

[X-VERTER] connector ....................................20-4

Contest number set mode ....................................5-12

Convenient functions for Receive ...........................5-2

Convenient functions for Transmit ...........................5-3

I-2

INDEX

CW mode

Operating CW ....................................................5-5

CW pitch control .....................................................5-6

CW reverse mode ...................................................5-7

CW side tone function ............................................5-7

Data mode (AFSK) operation ...............................5-40

[DC OUT] jack ......................................................20-5

DESCRIPTION INFORMATION ................................vi

Dial lock function ..................................................4-12

Digital multi-function meter ................................... 4-11

Digital selector ...................................................... 7-12

Display ....................................................... 1-14, 16-11

Display set screen .....................................2-10, 15-10

Drive gain .............................................................4-14

DSP ﬁlter shape ......................................................7-7

Dual scope screen ..................................................6-6

Dual Scope Auto Select ...................................6-12

Dual Scope Type .............................................6-11

Dualwatch operation ............................................. 7-10

[ELEC-KEY] jack ..................................................20-3

Electronic keyer functions .......................................5-9

EXPLICIT DEFINITIONS ............................................ii

[EXT KEYPAD] jack .............................................. 20-4

[EXT-SP] jack ........................................................20-5

Fast forward while playing ......................................9-5

FCC INFORMATION .................................................iv

File downloading ...................................................17-3

Preparation ...................................................... 17-3

File Split ................................................................9-13

FILTER SHAPE SET ............................................2-17

Filter screen

Filter calibration mode .......................................7-8

Filter shape Set mode .......................................7-9

Passband width and Shift value ........................7-5

Fine scan

Fine ∂F scan ................................................... 12-9

Fine Programmed scan ................................... 12-6

Firmware update

Using an SD card ............................................17-4

Using a USB ﬂash drive ..................................17-4

Formatting an SD card .........................................10-8

Formatting a USB ﬂash drive ................................10-8

Frequency setting ...................................................4-7

Frequency entry with the keypad .......................4-9

Tuning with [DIAL] .............................................4-7

Front panel..............................................................1-2

Electronic keyer and microphone ......................3-4

Microphone, headphones and SD card .............3-5

FSK and AFSK (SSTV) connections ......................3-8

Full break-in operation ............................................8-4

FUNCTIONS AND FEATURES of Adobe

Reader

.... v

Functions for the PSK decoder display .................5-26

Functions for the RTTY decoder display ..............5-16

Fuse replacement .................................................16-9

General ........................................................ 17-2, 19-2

Grounding ...............................................................3-2

HM-36 ...................................................................3-10

IF ﬁlter selection .....................................................7-6

IMPORTANT ...............................................................ii

IInstant replay function .........................................9-14

INSTANT REPLAY REC Time .........................9-14

Jack

[DC OUT] jack .................................................20-5

[ELEC-KEY] jack .............................................20-3

[EXT KEYPAD] jack ......................................... 20-4

[EXT-SP] jack ...................................................20-5

[KEY] jack ........................................................20-3

[METER] jack...................................................20-5

[RELAY] jack ....................................................20-4

[REMOTE] jack ................................................ 20-5

[S/P DIF] jack...................................................20-5

KEYER 001 ............................................................2-4

KEYER CW-KEY .................................................... 2-5

Keyer memory

Editing a Keyer memory ..................................5-11

Keyer set mode .....................................................5-13

[KEY] jack .............................................................20-3

Key speed ...............................................................5-7

Keypad ..................................................................11-2

I-3

INDEX

Level set screen .............................................2-7, 15-4

Linear ampliﬁer connections ...................................3-7

Loading the saved data ﬁles

Onto an SD card ..............................................10-6

Onto a USB ﬂash drive .................................... 10-6

Load set screen ...........................................2-16, 10-4

Antenna Memory .............................................10-4

Load Contents .................................................10-4

Other Memory & Settings ................................10-4

REF IN/OUT, REF Adjust, Filter CAL ..............10-4

Location selecting ...................................................3-2

Main dial

Main dial attachment .........................................3-3

Main dial brake ................................................16-2

Main/Sub band tracking function ..........................7-14

Manual notch function ..........................................7-13

Marker Position (Fixed Type) ................................6-10

Max Hold ..............................................................6-10

Memo pads ...........................................................11-7

Calling up a frequency and operating mode ....11-8

Entering frequencies and operating modes .....11-7

Temporary memory .........................................13-5

Using the Memo pad list screen ......................11-8

Memory channels ................................................. 11-2

Copying Memory contents ...............................11-5

Copying in the Memory mode ....................11-5

Copying in the VFO mode ..........................11-5

Entering Memory channel contents .................11-4

Entering in the Memory mode ....................11-4

Entering in the VFO mode .......................... 11-4

Memory channel selection ...............................11-2

Memory clearing ..............................................11-6

Selecting a memory channel

Using the M-CH [

] or [

] keys ................11-2

Using the Memory list screen ..................... 11-3

Memory keyer screen ...........................................5-10

Memory list screen ...............................................11-3

Memory mode selection .........................................4-5

Memory name ......................................................11-6

Editing (programming) memory names ........... 11-6

Memory scan ........................................................12-7

Memory & Settings ............................................... 10-4

Meter

[METER] jack...................................................20-5

Selecting the Meter readout ............................4-11

Selecting the meter type ..................................4-12

Microphone connector .......................................... 20-3

Microphone gain ................................................... 4-13

Microphones (optional products) ............................3-9

Mini scope screen ...................................................6-6

Monitor function ...................................................... 8-5

My call sign ...........................................................16-5

NB Set mode ...............................................2-17, 7-11

NB Depth .........................................................7-11

NB Width .........................................................7-11

Network Settings ..................................................10-4

Noise blanker ........................................................7-11

Noise reduction .....................................................7-12

Noise squelch ......................................................... 4-4

Notch function .......................................................7-13

Auto notch function ..........................................7-13

Manual notch function .....................................7-13

NTP Function ........................................................14-4

Setting the NTP Server address ......................14-4

Opening the transceiver’s case ............................16-8

Operating band selection ........................................4-6

Operating mode selection .....................................4-10

Optimum Rooﬁng Filter ...........................................7-8

Options .................................................................19-4

Other Memory & Settings ..................................... 10-4

Others set screen ......................................2-11, 15-13

Pause while playing ................................................ 9-5

PBT (Passband Tuning) function ............................7-5

Playing back ...........................................................9-9

Playing back the recorded audio ............................9-8

Playing back the recorded audio (QSO) ................. 9-4

Playing the next ﬁle .................................................9-5

Playing the previous ﬁle ..........................................9-5

Play Time ..............................................................9-14

Power ON ...............................................................4-3

When ﬁrst applying power .................................4-2

Preampliﬁer ............................................................7-2

PRECAUTIONS ......................................................... iii

PRE-REC for PTT Auto REC ................................9-14

Programmed scan ................................................12-5

Programming a record name ................................ 9-10

Protection indications ...........................................16-8

PSK log

Conﬁrm the PSK log contents .........................5-33

Turning ON the PSK log ..................................5-32

PSK mode

I-4

INDEX

BPSK and QPSK modes .................................5-27

BPSK31 and BPSK63 modes .........................5-27

Operating .........................................................5-24

PSK DECODE SET ........................................... 2-6

PSK decode set mode .....................................5-34

PSK LOG SET ...................................................2-6

PSK memory transmission .............................. 5-29

PSK reverse mode ..........................................5-28

Setting the PSK decoder threshold level .........5-28

PSK memory

Editing the PSK memory .................................5-31

PTT Auto REC ......................................................9-14

QPSK mode ..........................................................5-27

QSO PLAY Skip Time ........................................... 9-14

QSO REC ............................................................... 9-2

Basic recording ..................................................9-3

Deleting a recorded audio ﬁle ............................9-6

Deleting a recorded audio folder .......................9-6

QSO REC Storage Media ...............................9-13

Quick recording .................................................9-3

Playing back

Fast forward while playing ............................9-5

Moving to the beginning of the next ﬁle ........ 9-5

Moving to the beginning of the previous ﬁle .9-5

Operating while playing back ........................9-5

Pause while playing ......................................9-5

Playing back the recorded audio (QSO) .......9-4

Playing the next ﬁle ......................................9-5

Playing the previous ﬁle ................................9-5

Rewind while playing ....................................9-5

Recording contents ...........................................9-2

Quick Dualwatch function ..................................... 7-10

Quick split function .................................................8-8

Quick tuning step ....................................................4-7

Rack mounting handle ............................................3-2

RC-28 ...................................................................3-10

Rear panel ............................................................ 1-12

Basic connection ...............................................3-4

External keypad and meter................................3-6

Optional products and external equipment ........3-5

Receive antenna I/O setting .................................13-6

Receiver ...............................................................19-3

Rec Mode .............................................................9-13

Recording function ..................................................9-2

REF IN/OUT, REF Adjust, Filter CAL ...................10-4

[REF I/O] connector ..............................................20-4

Reference level .......................................................6-8

[RELAY] jack .........................................................20-4

Remote control (CI-V) information ........................18-2

[REMOTE] jack ..................................................... 20-5

Removing the SD card .........................................10-2

Repeater operation ...............................................5-37

Repeater tone frequency setting .....................5-38

Repeat Time .........................................................9-13

Repeat TX.............................................................9-11

Required connections .............................................3-4

Resetting the CPU ................................................16-7

Resetting the CPU (initial setup) .......................4-3

Rewind while playing ..............................................9-5

RF gain ................................................................... 4-4

RIT function ............................................................7-3

Monitor function .................................................7-3

Rooﬁng ﬁlter selection ............................................7-7

Rreceive Antena-I/O selection .............................. 13-2

RTTY log

Conﬁrm the RTTY log contents .......................5-21

Turning ON the RTTY log ................................ 5-20

RTTY memory

Editing the RTTY memory ............................... 5-19

RTTY mode

Operating RTTY (FSK) .................................... 5-14

RTTY DECODE SET .........................................2-5

RTTY decode set mode ...................................5-22

RTTY LOG SET .................................................2-5

RTTY memory transmission ............................5-17

RTTY reverse mode ........................................5-15

Setting the RTTY decoder threshold level ....... 5-17

RX-ANT ................................................................13-2

RX-I/O ...................................................................13-6

[RX-I/O] connector ...........................................20-5

RX Rec Condition ................................................. 9-13

RX Voice Memory ...................................................9-7

SAVE Contents .....................................................10-4

SAVE Form (Save format) ....................................10-4

Save set screen ...........................................2-16, 10-4

Saving the setting data onto an SD card ..............10-5

Saving the setting data onto a USB ﬂash drive ....10-5

Saving with a different ﬁle name ...........................10-7

Scanning .............................................................16-11

SCAN

Preparing for a scan ........................................ 12-3

SCAN Resume ................................................12-4

Scan Resume function ....................................12-3

Scan set mode .........................................2-6, 12-4

Scan speed ............................................12-3

12-4

Scan types .......................................................12-2

Screen arrangement .............................................15-3

I-5

INDEX

Screen menu arrangement ...................................1-16

Screen saver function ...........................................16-6

Screen type and font selections ...........................16-3

SD card .................................................................10-2

Deleting a data ﬁle ...........................................10-8

Formatting .......................................................10-8

Inserting the SD card.......................................10-2

SD/USB-Memory menu screen ....................... 10-3

Unmounting ..................................................... 10-9

Select memory scan .............................................12-7

Erasing the Select scan setting .......................12-8

Setting Select memory channels .....................12-8

Setting in the Memory list screen ....................12-8

Setting in the Scan screen ..............................12-8

Semi break-in operation .........................................8-4

Set mode

Description ......................................................15-2

Operation .........................................................15-2

Setting screen conﬁguration ................................... 2-2

Setting the transmit level ......................................9-12

Single TX ..............................................................9-11

SM-30 ..................................................................... 3-9

SM-50 ..................................................................... 3-9

S-meter squelch .....................................................4-4

[S/P DIF] jack ........................................................20-5

Speciﬁcations .......................................................19-2

Spectrum scope screen ..........................................6-2

Center mode ......................................................6-4

CENTER Type Display ................................6-10

Scope during TX (CENTER TYPE) ............6-10

Dual scope screen .............................................6-6

Dual Scope Auto Select ..............................6-12

Dual Scope Type ........................................6-11

Fixed mode ........................................................6-5

Fixed Edges (0.03-1.60) ............................. 6-12

Fixed Edges (1.60-2.00) ............................. 6-12

Fixed Edges (2.00-6.00) ............................. 6-12

Fixed Edges (6.00-8.00) ............................. 6-12

Fixed Edges (8.00-11.00) ........................... 6-12

Fixed Edges (11.00-15.00) ......................... 6-12

Fixed Edges (15.00-20.00) ......................... 6-12

Fixed Edges (20.00-22.00) ......................... 6-13

Fixed Edges (22.00-26.00) ......................... 6-13

Fixed Edges (26.00-30.00) ......................... 6-13

Fixed Edges (30.00-45.00) ......................... 6-13

Fixed Edges (45.00-60.00) ......................... 6-13

Operating ...........................................................6-3

Scope attenuator ...............................................6-7

Scope set screen ......................................2-3, 6-10

Sweep speed .....................................................6-9

USB mouse operation .....................................6-14

Speech compressor (SSB only) .............................8-6

Split frequency operation ........................................8-7

Split lock function ....................................................8-8

Squelch level ..........................................................4-4

Squelch

Noise squelch ....................................................4-4

S-meter squelch ................................................4-4

Squelch status .................................................12-3

Tone squelch operation ...................................5-39

SSB mode

Operating SSB ..................................................5-4

SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES ..................................... vii

SWR reading ........................................................16-3

Timer operation ....................................................14-6

Setting the Daily timer .....................................14-5

Setting the Sleep timer ....................................14-6

Time set screen ................................2-11, 14-2, 15-12

Tone scan ...........................................................12-10

Tone squelch operation ........................................5-39

Tracking function ...................................................7-14

TRADEMARKS ...........................................................ii

Transceiver power ...............................................16-10

Transmit

Basic transmit operation ..................................4-13

Transmit and receive .....................................16-10

Transmitting .....................................................4-13

Transmit ﬁlter width (SSB only) ...............................8-6

Transmit power limit .............................................. 4-14

Transmitter ............................................................19-2

Troubleshooting ..................................................16-10

Tuning step

Selecting the desired “kHz” step ........................4-7

Selecting the Fine tuning function .....................4-8

Twin PBT operation ................................................7-5

Twin peak ﬁlter ......................................................5-15

TX message

Playing back ......................................................9-9

Programming a record name ...........................9-10

Recording .......................................................... 9-9

Repeat TX .......................................................9-11

Single TX ......................................................... 9-11

TX Rec Audio .......................................................9-13

Unpacking ...............................................................3-2

UPDATING THE FIRMWARE ...............................17-1

USB mouse operation ..........................................6-14

USB ﬂash drive

SD/USB-Memory menu screen ....................... 10-3

Formatting .......................................................10-8

Unmounting ..................................................... 10-9

I-6

INDEX

User band edge .................................................... 4-15

UTC Offset ............................................................14-2

VBW ...................................................................6-10

Vector tuning indicator .......................................... 5-25

VFO or Memory mode selection .............................4-5

Voice 1st Menu ..................................................... 9-13

Voice RX Memory ...................................................9-7

Load setting .....................................................10-4

Basic recording ..................................................9-3

Playing back the recorded audio .......................9-8

Quick playing back.............................................9-8

Recording a QSO ..............................................9-3

Recording contents ...........................................9-2

Recording the RX Voice Memory ......................9-8

Save setting .....................................................10-4

Voice Set mode .............................................2-4, 9-13

Voice Squelch Control function ...........................12-10

Voice synthesizer operation ..................................16-2

VOICE TX Auto Monitor ........................................9-13

Voice TX Memory

Load setting .....................................................10-4

Recording or playing back a TX message ......... 9-9

Save setting .....................................................10-4

Transmitting a recorded message ...................9-11

VOX ...................................................................2-17

Adjusting the VOX function ................................ 8-2

VOX Delay ......................................................... 8-3

VOX set mode ...................................................8-3

VOX Voice Delay ................................................8-3

Turning ON the VOX function.............................8-2

Waterfall Display ................................................... 6-11

Waterfall Marker Auto-hide ...................................6-11

Waterfall Peak Color Level ....................................6-11

Waterfall Size (Expand Scope) .............................6-11

Waterfall Speed ....................................................6-11

Waveform Color (Current) ....................................6-11

Waveform Color (Line) ..........................................6-11

Waveform Color (Max Hold) .................................6-11

Waveform Type .....................................................6-11

[X-VERTER] connector .........................................20-4

INSTALLATION NOTES

For amateur base station installations it is recom-

mended that the forwards clearance in front of the an-

tenna array is calculated relative to the EIRP (Effective

Isotropic Radiated Power). The clearance height below

the antenna array can be determined in most cases

from the RF power at the antenna input terminals.

Different exposure limits have been recommended for

different frequencies, a relative table shows a guide-

line for installation considerations.

Below 30 MHz, the recommended limits are specified

in terms of V/m or A/m fields as they are likely to fall

within the near-field region. Similarly, the antennas

may be physically short in terms of electrical length

and that the installation will require some antenna

matching device which can create local, high intensity

magnetic fields. Analysis of such installations is best

considered in association with published guidance

notes such as the FCC OET Bulletin 65 Edition 97-01

and its annexes relative to amateur transmitter instal-

lations. The EC recommended limits are almost identi-

cal to the FCC specified ‘uncontrolled’ limits and tables

exist that show pre-calculated safe distances for differ-

ent antenna types for different frequency bands. Fur-

ther information can be found at http://www.arrl.org/.

• Typical amateur radio installation

Exposure distance assumes that the predominant ra-

diation pattern is forward and that radiation vertically

downward is at unity gain (sidelobe suppression is

equal to main lobe gain). This is true of almost every

gain antenna today. Exposed persons are assumed

to be beneath the antenna array and have a typical

height of 1.8 m.

The figures assume the worst-case emission of con-

stant carrier.

For the bands 10 MHz and higher the following power

density limits have been recommended:

10–144 MHz 2 W/sq m

EIRP clearance heights by frequency band

1 Watts 2.1 m

10 Watts 2.8 m

25 Watts 3.4 m

100 Watts 5 m

1000 Watts 12 m

Forward clearance, EIRP by frequency band

100 Watts 2 m

1000 Watts 6.5 m

10,000 Watts 20 m

100,000 Watts 65 m

In all cases any possible risk depends on the trans-

mitter being activated for long periods. (actual recom-

mendation limits are specified as an average during 6

minutes) Normally the transmitter is not active for long

periods of time. Some radio licenses will require that a

timer circuit automatically cuts the transmitter after 1–

2 minutes etc.

Similarly some types of emission, i.e., SSB, CW, AM

etc. have a lower ‘average’ output power and the as-

sessed risk is even lower.

• List of Country codes (ISO 3166-1)

Country Codes Country Codes

1 Austria AT 18 Liechtenstein LI

2 Belgium BE 19 Lithuania LT

3 Bulgaria BG 20 Luxembourg LU

4 Croatia HR 21 Malta MT

5 Czech Republic CZ 22 Netherlands NL

6 Cyprus CY 23 Norway NO

7 Denmark DK 24 Poland PL

8 Estonia EE 25 Portugal PT

9 Finland FI 26 Romania RO

10 France FR 27 Slovakia SK

11 Germany DE 28 Slovenia SI

12 Greece GR 29 Spain ES

13 Hungary HU 30 Sweden SE

14 Iceland IS 31 Switzerland CH

15 Ireland IE 32 Turkey TR

16 Italy IT 33 United Kingdom GB

17 Latvia LV

ABOUT CE

Please record the serial number of your transceiver below for future servicing reference:

Serial Number :

Date of purchase :

Place where purchased :

1-1-32 Kamiminami, Hirano-ku, Osaka 547-0003, Japan

Icom IC7850 Handleiding

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Misbruik melden

Product:

Spelregels forum

Abonneren

Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Info